Owner's Manual

6F9012720BD

Owner’s manual

Arona Inglés (11.18) SEAT Arona

6F9012720BD (11.18)

Inglés SEAT Vehicle identification data Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys Model: The following items were delivered YES NO with the vehicle: Vehicle Registration: On-board documentation Vehicle identification number: First key

Date of vehicle registration Second key or vehicle delivery: Correct working order of all keys was checked SEAT Official Service: Location:

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no Date: right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook. All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print. Signature of owner: Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form. SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act. Service advisor: All rights on changes are reserved.

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose. Telephone: ❀ © SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.18 Introduction

Thank you for your trust choosing a SEAT ve- WARNING hicle. Read and always observe safety infor- With your new SEAT, you will be able to enjoy mation concerning the passenger's a vehicle with state-of-the-art technology front airbag ››› page 81, Important in- and top quality features. formation regarding the front passenger's airbag. We recommend reading this Instruction Man- ual carefully to learn more about your vehicle so you can enjoy all its benefits in your daily driving. Information about handling is complemented with instructions regarding the operation and maintenance of the vehicle in order to ensure its safety and maintain its value. Moreover, we want to give you valuable advice and tips to drive your vehicle efficiently and respecting the environment. We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring. SEAT, S.A. ® Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab- CAUTION About this manual sence of this symbol does not guarantee that the term is not a trademark. Texts after this symbol indicate possible This manual describes the features of the ve- damage to the vehicle. hicle at the time of drafting this text. Some of  It indicates that the section continues on the features described below will be intro- the next page. For the sake of the environment duced in the future or will only be available in  Important warnings on the page. certain markets. Texts after this symbol contain informa- More in-depth content on the page. tion about the protection of the environ- Some of the features described here are  ment. not included in all the types or variations  General information on page indicated. of the model and they can be varied or modified based on technical or marketing  Emergency information on the page. Note requirements without it being considered Texts after this symbol contain addition- You can access the information in this manual misleading advertising. al information. using: Some details on the drawings may vary from its vehicle and must be interpreted as a ● Thematic table of contents that follows the standard representation. manual’s general chapter structure. The direction indicators (left, right, forwards, ● Visual table of contents that uses graphics backwards) in this manual refer to the travel to indicate the pages containing “essential” direction of the vehicle unless otherwise sta- information, which is detailed in the corre- ted. sponding chapters. The audiovisual material is only meant to ● Alphabetical index with many terms and help the users better understand some fea- synonyms to help you find information. tures of the car. It is not a replacement for the instruction manual. Access the instruction WARNING manual to see the complete information and Texts after this symbol contain informa- warnings. tion about safety and warn you about possible accident or injury risks.  The features marked with an asterisk are included by default only in certain versions of the model, supplied as optional only for certain versions or only offered in certain countries. Printed Instruction Manual Digital Version of the Infotainment Related videos The printed instruction manual contains rele- System Manual vant information about the use of the vehicle and the Infotainment System. The digital version of the manuals contains more in-depth information.

Fig. 2 SEAT website

Fig. 1 SEAT website The operation of some of the vehicle's fea- The digital version is available on SEAT's offi- tures can be shown as an instruction video:

cial website. ● scan the QR code Fig. 2 ››› To view the digital version of the manual: ● OR enter the following address in the navi-

gator website: ● scan the QR code ››› Fig. 1

● OR enter the following address in the navi- http://www.seat.com/owners/your- gator website: seat/manuals-offline.html

http://www.seat.com/owners/your- choose your vehicle and then “Multimedia”. seat/manuals-offline.html Note choose your vehicle and then “Infotainment”. Video instructions are only available in certain languages.

Where is the vehicle tool kit located? How do you top up the windscreen washer fluid? Frequently Asked Ques- ››› page 53 ››› page 48 tions How do you repair a tyre with the anti-puncture How do you check and top up the brake fluid?

kit? ››› page 52 ››› page 48 Before driving How do you change a wheel? ››› page 53 How do you check and adjust tyre pressure val-

How do you adjust the seat? ››› page 19 ues? ››› page 326 How do you change a fuse? ››› page 50 How do you adjust the steering wheel? Vehicle washing tips ››› page 336

››› page 20 How do you change a light? ››› page 51 How do you adjust the exterior mirrors? How do you tow a vehicle? ››› page 58 Functions of interest

››› page 20 Easy Connect, CAR menu ››› page 34 Useful tips How do you turn on the exterior lights? How does the START-STOP system work?

››› page 31 How do you set the time? ››› page 111 ››› page 248 How does the automatic gearbox selector lever When should the vehicle inspection should be What parking assistants are available?

work? ››› page 40 performed? ››› page 115 ››› page 284 How do you refuel? ››› page 46 What functions do the buttons/thumbwheels on How does the rear assist work? ››› page 292 the steering wheel perform? ››› page 119 How do you activate the windscreen wipers and How does the adaptive cruise control work? windscreen washer system? ››› page 33 How do you remove the luggage compartment ››› page 259 cover? ››› page 158 Emergency situations How can the SEAT driving mode be adjusted? How do you drive in an economical and environ- ››› page 274 A warning lamp lights up or flashes. What does mentally-friendly way? ››› page 244

this mean? page 37 How does tyre pressure monitoring work? ››› How do you check and top up the engine oil? ››› page 329 Where are the first-aid kit and the warning trian- ››› page 46

gle in the vehicle? page 84 How do you open the vehicle without a key ››› How do you check and top up the engine cool- (Keyless Access)? ››› page 130 How do you open the bonnet? ››› page 17 ant? ››› page 47 Interior lighting and ambient light ››› page 144 How do you perform a jump start? ››› page 59 Table of Contents

Emergency towing of the vehicle ...... 58 Operation ...... 101 Table of Contents How to jump start ...... 59 Controls and displays ...... 101 Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . 61 The essentials ...... 7 General instrument panel ...... 100 Instruments and warning/control Exterior view ...... 7 Safety ...... 63 lamps ...... 102 Exterior view ...... 8 Safe driving ...... 63 Dashboard ...... 102 Driver-side general instrument panel Advice about driving ...... 63 Using the instrument panel ...... 116 (left-hand drive) ...... 9 Correct position of the vehicle occu- Control and warning lamps ...... 118 Driver-side general instrument panel pants ...... 64 Multifunction steering wheel* ...... 119 (right-hand drive) ...... 10 Pedal area ...... 68 Opening and closing ...... 125 Passenger-side general instrument pan- Seat belts ...... 69 Keys ...... 125 el (left-hand drive) ...... 11 Why wear a seat belt ...... 69 Central locking system ...... 127 Passenger-side general instrument pan- How to properly adjust your seat belt ...... 72 Anti-theft alarm* ...... 133 el (right-hand drive) ...... 12 Seat belt tensioners* ...... 73 Rear lid ...... 136 Centre console ...... 13 Airbag system ...... 74 Controls for the windows ...... 136 Interior view ...... 14 Brief introduction ...... 74 Lights and visibility ...... 139 How it works ...... 15 Safety instructions about airbags ...... 76 Lights ...... 139 Opening and closing ...... 15 Deactivating airbags ...... 78 Interior lights ...... 144 Before driving ...... 18 Transporting children safely ...... 80 Visibility ...... 145 Airbags ...... 21 Safety for children ...... 80 Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper Child seats ...... 23 Child seats ...... 82 Starting the vehicle ...... 31 systems ...... 145 Lights and visibility ...... 31 Emergencies ...... 84 Rear view mirrors ...... 146 Easy Connect ...... 34 Self-help ...... 84 Seats and head restraints ...... 148 Warning lamps ...... 37 Emergency equipment ...... 84 Adjusting the seat and head restraints ...... 148 Cruise control ...... 38 Tyre repair ...... 85 Seat functions ...... 149 Gearbox lever ...... 40 Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . 87 Transport and practical equipment ...... 153 Air conditioning ...... 41 Towing or tow-starting ...... 87 Practical equipment ...... 153 Fluid level control ...... 46 Fuses and bulbs ...... 91 Luggage compartment ...... 155 Emergencies ...... 50 Fuses ...... 91 Roof carrier* ...... 159 Fuses ...... 50 Changing bulbs ...... 93 Air conditioning ...... 161 Bulbs ...... 51 Change the front bulbs ...... 94 Heating, ventilation and cooling ...... 161 Action in the event of a puncture ...... 52 Change the rear bulbs ...... 96 Heating and fresh air ...... 164 Changing a wheel ...... 53 Changing the interior bulbs ...... 98 Manual air conditioning* ...... 166 Snow chains ...... 57 Climatronic* ...... 168

5 Table of Contents

Infotainment System ...... 170 Speed limiter ...... 252 Windscreen washer reservoir ...... 322 Introduction ...... 170 Emergency braking assistance system Vehicle battery ...... 323 Safety warnings ...... 170 (Front Assist)* ...... 255 Wheels ...... 325 Overview of the unit ...... 172 Adaptive Cruise Control ACC* ...... 259 Wheels and tyres ...... 325 General instructions for use ...... 174 Blind spot detector (BSD) with parking as- Spare wheel (temporary spare wheel)* . . . . 330 Connectivity ...... 179 sistance (RCTA)* ...... 269 Winter service ...... 331 Data transfer ...... 179 SEAT Drive Profile* ...... 274 Maintenance ...... 333 Full Link* ...... 179 Park Assist* ...... 276 Service ...... 333 SEAT Media Control* ...... 187 Parking aid parking and manoeuvring Service intervals ...... 333 WLAN access point* ...... 188 (ParkPilot) ...... 284 Additional service offers ...... 335 Operating modes ...... 190 Parking System Plus* ...... 286 Warranty ...... 336 Radio ...... 190 Rear parking aid* ...... 290 Vehicle maintenance ...... 336 Media ...... 191 Rear Assist “Rear View Camera”* ...... 292 Maintenance and cleaning ...... 336 Navigation ...... 198 Towing bracket device ...... 295 Vehicle Menu ...... 208 Towing bracket device* ...... 295 Information for the user ...... 342 Telephone ...... 209 Trailer towing ...... 300 Information for the user ...... 342 Multimedia ...... 214 Practical tips ...... 307 Event Data Recorder ...... 342 Other important information ...... 342 Driving ...... 217 Accessories and modifications to the vehicle ...... 307 Information about the EU Directive Start and driving ...... 217 Accessories and modifications to the vehi- 2014/53/EU ...... 343 Starting and stopping the engine ...... 217 cle ...... 307 Braking and parking ...... 223 Technical data ...... 346 Checking and refilling levels ...... 308 Braking and stability systems ...... 226 Technical specifications ...... 346 Refuelling ...... 308 Manual gearbox ...... 232 Important information ...... 346 Fuel ...... 310 Automatic gearbox/DSG automatic gear- Information on fuel consumption ...... 346 AdBlue® ...... 313 box* ...... 233 Trailer mode ...... 347 Working in the engine compartment ...... 315 Gear-change recommendation ...... 240 Wheels ...... 348 Engine oil ...... 318 Steering ...... 241 Engine data ...... 349 Cooling system ...... 320 Run-in and economical driving ...... 242 Vehicle data ...... 353 Brake fluid ...... 321 Engine management and emission control Index ...... 355 system ...... 245 Driving tips ...... 247 Driver assistance systems ...... 248 Start-Stop system* ...... 248 Cruise control system (CCS)* ...... 250

6 The essentials

Exterior view

1 ››› page 16 5 ››› page 58 2 ››› page 46 6 ››› page 17 3 ››› page 15 7 ››› page 52 4 ››› page 46 7 The essentials

Exterior view

1 ››› page 47 5 ››› page 46 9 ››› page 30 2 ››› page 46 6 ››› page 48 10 ››› page 53 3 ››› page 49 7 ››› page 48 11 ››› page 52 4 ››› page 50 8 ›››  page 157 8 The essentials

Driver-side general instrument panel (left-hand drive)

1 ››› page 32 5 ››› page 18 9 ›››  page 108 2 ››› page 38 6 ››› page 17 10 ››› page 31 3 ››› page 31 7 ››› page 37 11 ››› page 20 4 ››› page 20 8 ››› page 33 12 ››› page 50 9 The essentials

Driver-side general instrument panel (right-hand drive)

1 ››› page 33 5 ››› page 18 9 ››› page 38 2 ›››  page 108 6 ››› page 31 10 ››› page 20 3 ››› page 31 7 ››› page 37 11 ››› page 50 4 ››› page 20 8 ››› page 32 10 The essentials

Passenger-side general instrument panel (left-hand drive)

1 ››› page 21 2 ››› page 18 3 ›››  page 153

11 The essentials

Passenger-side general instrument panel (right-hand drive)

1 ››› page 21 2 ››› page 18 3 ››› page 17 4 ›››  page 153 12 The essentials

Centre console

1 ››› page 32 3 ›››  page 220 5 ››› page 34, ›››  page 170 2 ››› page 40 4 ››› page 15 6 ››› page 41

The layout in right-hand drive vehicles is symmetrical.

13 The essentials

Interior view

1 ››› page 19 5 ››› page 19 2 ››› page 19 6 ››› page 22 3 ›››  page 146 4 ››› page 27 14 The essentials

How it works  ››› in Description on page 127 Opening and closing  ››› page 127 Related video

Unlocking or locking of driver door

Fig. 5 Centre console: central locking buttons.

Fig. 3 Opening and clos- Locking and unlocking the vehicle using ing the key ● Lock: press the  ››› Fig. 4 button. Doors ● Unlock: press the  ››› Fig. 4 button. ● Unlock rear lid: press the  button ››› Fig. 4 until all the turn signals on the vehicle briefly light up. Fig. 6 Driver door lever: hidden lock cylinder.

Locking and unlocking with the central If the central locking system should fail to op- locking switch erate, the driver door can still be locked and ● Lock: press the  ››› Fig. 5 button. The  unlocked by turning the key in the lock. symbol lights up yellow to indicate that it is As a general rule, when the driver door is activated. None of the doors can be opened locked manually all other doors are locked. from the outside. The doors can be opened When it is unlocked manually, only the driver from the inside by pulling the inside door han- door opens. Please observe the instructions Fig. 4 Remote control key: keys. dle. relating to the anti-theft alarm system ● Unlock: Press the  button again ››› Fig. 5. ›››  page 133. The symbol reverts to its initial colour. ● Unfold the vehicle key blade ›››  page 125. »

15 The essentials

● Insert the key shaft into the lower opening in Emergency locking of doors with- Rear lid the cover on the driver door handle ››› Fig. 6 out door cylinder (arrow) then remove the cover upwards. ● Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder to unlock or lock the vehicle.

Special characteristics ● The anti-theft alarm will remain active when vehicles are unlocked. However, the alarm will not be triggered ›››  page 133. ● After the driver door is opened, you have 15 seconds to switch on the ignition. Once this Fig. 8 Rear lid: handle time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered. Fig. 7 Locking the door manually. ● Switch the ignition on. The electronic immo- The rear lid opening system operates electri- bilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and de- If the central locking system should fail to cally*. It is activated by exerting slight pres- activates the anti-theft alarm system. work at any time, doors with no lock cylinder sure on the handle ››› Fig. 8. will have to be locked separately. This system may or may not be operative, de- Note A mechanical locking device (only visible pending on the situation of the vehicle. The anti-theft alarm is not activated when when the door is open) is provided on the the vehicle is locked manually using the If the rear lid is locked then it cannot be front passenger door. key shaft ›››  page 133. opened, however if it is unlocked then the opening system is operative and the rear lid ● Pull the cap out of the opening. may be opened. ● Insert the key in the inside slot and turn it to   the right as far as it will go (if the door is on To lock/unlock, press the button or the the right side) or to the left (if the door is on button ››› Fig. 4 on the remote control key. the left side). A warning appears on the instrument panel display if the rear lid is open or not properly Once the door has been closed it can no lon- closed.* An audible warning is also given if ger be opened from the outside. Pull the inte- the boot lid is opened while the vehicle is rior door handle once to unlock and open the moving faster than 6 km/h (4 mph)*. door.

16 The essentials

● Open the rear lid: exert slight pressure on There is a groove in the luggage compart- Bonnet the handle ››› Fig. 8. The rear lid opens auto- ment allowing access to the emergency matically. opening mechanism. ● Close the rear lid: hold it by one of the handles on the interior lining and close it by push- Opening the rear lid from inside the lug- ing gently. gage compartment ● Insert the key in the groove and unlock the ››› in Opening and closing on locking system, turning the key from right to  page 136 left, as shown by the arrow ››› Fig. 9.  ››› page 17 Related video Fig. 11 Release lever in the driver's footwell area. Unlocking the rear lid manually

Fig. 10 Bonnet

Fig. 12 Lever under the bonnet. Fig. 9 Unlocking the rear lid manually. Opening the bonnet This allows the vehicle to be opened if the central locking does not work (for example, if The bonnet is released from inside the vehi- the battery is flat). cle. Before opening the bonnet, make sure that the windscreen wiper arms are in place against the windscreen. » 17 The essentials

● Open the door and pull the lever under the Controls for the windows ››› in Opening and closing the dashboard ››› Fig. 11 1 .  electric windows on page 137 ● To lift the bonnet, press towards the left on the lever located under the bonnet, in the  ››› page 136 centre ››› Fig. 12 2 . The arrester hooks are released. ● Release the bonnet stay and secure it in the fixture designed for this in the bonnet. Before driving

Close the bonnet Related video ● Slightly lift the bonnet. ● Release the bonnet stay and replace it in its support.

● At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fall Fig. 13 Detail of the driver door: controls for so it locks. the windows.

If the bonnet does not close, do not press ● Open the window: press the button . Fig. 14 Vehicle interior downwards. Open it again and let it fall as ● Close the window: pull on the button . mentioned above.

Buttons on the driver door ››› in Safety notes for work in the  engine compartment on page 316 1 Window on the front left door 2 Window on the front right door ››› page 315  3 Window on the rear left door 4 Window on the rear right door 5 Safety switch for deactivating the electric window buttons in the rear doors.

18 The essentials

Manually adjusting the front seats Adjusting the head restraints Adjustment of the seat belt

Fig. 16 Front seat: adjusting the head restraint.

Fig. 15 Front seats: manual seat adjustment. ● To raise or lower the head restraint, press the side button 1 and move it upwards or 1 Forwards/backwards: pull the lever and downwards until it engages in the desired po- move the seat. sition. 2 Raising/lowering: pull/push the lever. 3 Tilting the backrest: turn the hand wheel. ››› in Adjusting the front head re-  straints on page 148 ››› in Adjusting the front seats on Fig. 17 Positioning and removing the seat belt ››› page 67, ››› page 148  page 148  buckle. »

19 The essentials

Seat belt tensioners left) and the passenger side (R, right) to the direction desired. During a collision, the seat belts on the front  Folding in mirrors. seats are retracted automatically. The tensioner can be triggered only once. ››› in Electric exterior mirrors* on  page 147 ››› in Maintenance and disposal of  belt tensioners on page 74  ››› page 147  ››› page 73 Fig. 18 Correct seat belt and head restraint positions, viewed from front and the side. Adjusting the steering wheel

To adjust the seat belt around your shoulders, Adjusting the exterior mirrors adjust the height of the seats. The shoulder part of the seat belt should be well centred over it, never over the neck. The seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the upper part of the body. The lap part of the seat belt lies across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pelvis. Fig. 20 Lever in the lower left side of the steering column.  ››› page 70 Fig. 19 Detail of the driver door: control for the exterior mirror. ● Adjusting the position of the steering wheel: pull the ››› Fig. 20 1 lever down, move the ››› page 72  Adjusting the exterior mirrors: Turn the knob to steering wheel to the desired position and lift the corresponding position: the lever back up until it locks.

L/R Turning the knob to the desired position, ››› in Adjusting the steering wheel adjust the mirrors on the driver side (L,  position on page 65

20 The essentials

Airbags Front airbags

Related video

Fig. 21 Vehicle interior

Fig. 23 Front passenger airbag located in dash panel. Fig. 22 Driver airbag located in steering wheel. The front airbag for the driver is located in the steering wheel ››› Fig. 22 and the airbag for the front passenger is located in the dash panel ››› Fig. 23. Airbags are identified by the word “AIRBAG”. When the driver and front passenger airbags are deployed, the covers remain attached to the steering wheel and dashboard, respectively ››› Fig. 22 ››› Fig. 23. In conjunction with the seat belts, the front airbag system gives the driver and the front passenger additional protection for the head » 21 The essentials

and chest in the event of a severe frontal col- ››› in Activation and deactivation lision. of front passenger airbag* on  page 79 The special design of the airbag allows the controlled escape of the propellant gas ››› page 78 when an occupant puts pressure on the bag.  Thus, the head and chest are surrounded and protected by the airbag. After the collision, the airbag deflates sufficiently to allow visibil- Side airbags* ity.

Fig. 25 Centre of the instrument panel: control  ››› page 76 lamp for deactivated front passenger airbag in centre console.

To deactivate the front passenger front Deactivating the front passenger airbag: front airbag* ● Switch the ignition off. ● Open the door on the front passenger side. ● Insert the key into the slot of the switch for deactivating the front passenger airbag Fig. 26 Side airbag in driver's seat. ››› Fig. 24. About 3/4 of the key should enter; this is as far as it will go. ● Turn the key gently to the  position. If you have difficulty, ensure that you have inserted the key as far as it will go. ● Close the front passenger door. ● Check, with the ignition switched on, that Fig. 24 Front passenger front airbag switch. the   control lamp remains lit where it says      in the centre of the dash panel ››› Fig. 25.

Fig. 27 Illustration of completely inflated side airbag on left side of vehicle. 22 The essentials

The side airbags are located in the driver's Head-protection airbags* ››› in Head-protection airbags* on seat and front passenger seat backrests  page 78 ››› Fig. 26. The locations are identified by the text “AIRBAG” in the upper region of the backrests. In conjunction with the seat belts, the side air- Child seats bag system provides additional protection for the upper body in the event of a severe side Related video collision. In a side collision, the side airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers to the areas of the body facing the impact. In addition to their Fig. 28 Location and deployment area of the normal function of protecting the occupants head-protection airbag. in a collision, the front and rear outer seat belts also hold the passengers in the event of There is a head airbag on each side of the in- Fig. 29 Vehicle interior a side collision; this is how these airbags pro- terior above the doors ››› Fig. 28. Airbags are vide maximum protection. identified by the word “AIRBAG”. The area framed in red is covered by the  ››› in Side airbags* on page 77 head-protection airbag when it is deployed ››› Fig. 28 (deployment area). Therefore, objects should never be placed or mounted in this area ››› in Head-protection airbags* on page 78. In the event of a side collision the curtain airbag is triggered on the impact side of the vehicle. The head-protection airbags reduce the risk of injury to passengers in the front and rear side seats facing the impact.

23 The essentials

Important information regarding er's sun visor and/or on the passenger side the front passenger's airbag door frame.

››› in Important information regarding the front passenger's airbag  on page 81  ››› page 80

Fig. 31 Airbag adhesives - version 2: on the passenger-side sun blind  and on the rear frame of the front passenger's door .

Fig. 30 Airbag adhesives - version 1: on the A sticker with important information about the passenger-side sun blind  and on the rear passenger airbag is located on the passeng- frame of the front passenger's door .

24 The essentials

Securing child seats

Fig. 32 On rear seats: possible assemblies of children seats.

Figure ››› Fig. 32 A shows the basic child re- To correctly use a child seat in the back, the car is through the seat belt and support straint system mounting using lower retaining front backrest must be adjusted so that there bracket, it should never be installed in the rings and the upper retaining strap. Figure is no contact with the child seat in the back in central rear seat as the ground clearance is ››› Fig. 32 B shows the child restraint system the case that it goes opposite to the direction lower than in other places and the support mounting using the vehicle seat belt. of the car. In the case of front facing restraint bracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi- systems, the front backrest must be adjusted ciently stable. The seat belt may be used to secure univer- so that there is no contact with the child's sal type child seats to the vehicle seats The systems include the child restraint feet. marked with a U in the table below. system mounting with an upper retaining To adjust the passenger seat to accommo- strap (Top Tether) and lower anchoring ● In the passenger seat without height regu- date a child's seat and get the seat belt in a points on the seat. » lation: the passenger seat must be in its rear- perfect position, adjust the passenger back- 1) most position . rest as far forward as possible1). ● In the passenger seat with height regula- If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal- tion: the passenger seat must be in its rear- led, in which the method of attachment to the most and highest position1).

1) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats. 25 The essentials

Seating position

Weight group Front passenger seata) Rear side seat Rear central seatb)

airbag on airbag off

Group 0 to 10 kg X Uc) U U

Group 0+ to 13 kg X Uc) U U

Group I 9 to 18 kg X Uc) U U

Group II 15 to 25 kg X UFc) UF UF

Group III 22 to 36 kg X UFc) UF UF

X: It is not compatible to install chairs in this configuration. U: Suitable for universal restraint systems for use in this weight group. UF: Acceptable for front-facing universal-category child restraint systems approved for this mass group.

a) Compliance with current national legislation and the manufacturer's instructions is required when using or installing child seats. b) For semi-universal chairs where the securing system is the car safety belt and the support bracket, do not use them in the centre rear seat. c) Seats without height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost position. Seats with height adjustment should be placed in their rearmost and highest position.

››› in Safety instructions on  page 82

26 The essentials

Securing child seats with the ISOFIX/iSize and Top Tether system*

Fig. 33 ISOFIX/iSize securing rings. Fig. 34 Position of the Top Tether rings on the back of the rear seat.

Child seats can be secured quickly, easily rings are located between the rear side seat To understand the compatibility of the "ISO- and safely on the rear outer seats with the backrest and the seat cushioning ››› Fig. 33. FIX" systems in the vehicle, consult the table “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system. The Top Tether* rings are located on the rear below. part of the backrests of the rear seats (be- Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on each The body weight permitted and information hind the seat backrest or in the boot) rear side seat. In some vehicles, the rings are regarding sizes A to F is indicated on the label ››› Fig. 34. secured to the seat frame and, in others, they on child seats with “universal” or “semi-uni- are secured to the rear floor. The “ISOFIX” versal” certification.

Vehicle Isofix positions Electrical Weight group Size class Front passenger seat equipment Rear side seat Rear central seat airbag on airbag off

F ISO/L1 X X X X Baby carrier G ISO/L2 X X X X

Group 0 to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X X IL X »

27 The essentials

Vehicle Isofix positions Electrical Weight group Size class Front passenger seat equipment Rear side seat Rear central seat airbag on airbag off

E ISO/R1 X X IL X

Group 0+ to 13 kg D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

D ISO/R2 X X IL X

C ISO/R3 X X IL X

Group I 9 to 18 kg B ISO/F2 X X IUF/IL X

B1 ISO/F2X X X IUF/IL X

A ISO/F3 X X IUF/IL X

Group II 15 to 25 kg ------

Group III 22 to 36 kg ------

IUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX universal child restraint systems approved for use in this mass group. IL: It is suitable for certain ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) that can be for the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. Take the child seat manufacturer's vehicle list into account. X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems for this weight group or size class.

››› in Safety instructions on  page 82

28 The essentials

Securing child seats with the “ISOFIX/i-Size”

Fig. 35 ISOFIX/iSize securing rings. Fig. 36 Rear seat: cut-out grooves.

You are obliged to follow the seat manufac- ● Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX/iSize” ● Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure turer's instructions. retaining rings until the child seat is heard to that it is properly anchored. engage securely. If the child seat is equipped ● Open the cut-out section behind the with Top Tether* anchor points, secure it to Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* marked grooves to access the retaining rings the correspondent ring ››› Fig. 38. Observe attachment system are available from Tech- ››› Fig. 36. the manufacturer's instructions. nical Services.

Vehicle i-Size positions

Front passenger seat Rear side seat Rear central seat airbag on airbag off

Child restraint system approved under ECE R129 X X i-U X

i-U: Valid position for front-facing and rear-facing child restraint systems approved under ECE R129. X: Invalid position for child restraint systems approved under ECE R129.

29 The essentials

Securing child seats with the Top Securing the retainer strap Tether* retaining straps ● Follow the manufacturer's instructions to deploy the child seat Top Tether retaining strap. ● Place the belt under the head restraint of the back seat ››› Fig. 37 (depending on the instructions of the chair itself, lift or remove the head restraint if necessary). ● Slide the strap and secure it properly with the anchorage of the backrest Fig. 38. Fig. 38 Rear part of the rear seats: securing ››› rings for the Top Tether strap. ● Firmly tighten the strap following the manufacturer's instructions. Child seats with the Top Tether system come with a strap for securing the seat to the vehi- Releasing the retaining strap cle anchor point, located at the back of the ● Loosen the strap following the manufactur- rear seat backrest and provide greater re- er's instructions. straint. ● Push the lock and release it from the an- The objective of this strap is to reduce for- choring support. ward movements of the child seat in a crash, to reduce the risk of injuries to the head from ››› in Safety instructions on hitting the inside of the vehicle.  page 82

Fig. 37 Retainer strap: adjustment and assem- Using the Top Tether in rear-facing moun- bly according to the Top Tether belt. ted seats Currently, there are very few rear-facing child safety seats that have Top Tether. Please carefully read and follow the seat manufacturer instructions to learn the proper way to install the Top Tether strap.

30 The essentials

Starting the vehicle Turning on/switching off the ignition, glow Lights and visibility plugs reheating Ignition lock ● Turn on the ignition: turn the key to the 2 Related video position. ● Turn off the ignition: turn the key to the 1 position. ● Diesel vehicles : the glow plugs reheat when the ignition is switched on. Fig. 40 Lights and visi- Starting the engine bility ● Manual transmission: press the clutch pedal all the way down and move the gearbox lever into neutral. Light switch Fig. 39 Ignition key positions. ● Automatic transmission: press the brake pedal and move the selector lever to the P Turn on the ignition: place the key in the igni- position or into N. tion and start the engine. ● Turn the key to the 3 position. The key automatically returns to the 2 position. Do not Locking and unlocking the steering wheel press the accelerator. ● Lock the steering wheel: remove the key from the ignition and turn the wheel until it Start-Stop system* locks. In vehicles with automatic transmission, When you stop and release the clutch pedal, in order to remove the key, move the gear the Start-Stop system* turns off the engine. shift to the P position. If necessary, press the The ignition remains switched on. gear shift blocking key and release it. Fig. 41 Instrument console: light panel.

● Unlock the steering wheel: put the key into ››› in Ignition key positions on ● Turn the switch to the required position  page 217 the ignition and turn it at the same time as the ››› Fig. 41. » steering wheel in the direction indicated by the arrow. If it is not possible to turn the steer-  ››› page 217 ing wheel, it may be because it is locked.

31 The essentials

Sym- Ignition Ignition is Turn signal and main beam lever Hazard warning lights bol switched off switched on

Fog lights, dipped Light off or daytime beam and side  driving light on. lights off.

The “Coming Automatic control of home” and “Leav- dipped beam and ing home” guide  daytime running lights may be light. switched on.

Daylight running Side light on.  lights switched on. Fig. 42 Turn signal and main beam lever. Fig. 43 Dashboard: switch for hazard warning Dipped beam Dipped beam lights.  headlight off switched on. More the lever to the required position: Switched on, for example:  Fog lights: pull the switch to the first posi- 1 Right turn light: right-hand parking light ● When approaching a traffic jam tion, from positions ,  or . (ignition switched off). 2 Left turn light: left-hand parking light (ig- ● In an emergency  Rear fog light: pull the switch completely nition switched off). ● from positions ,  or . The vehicle has broken down 3 Main beam on: control lamp  lit up on ● When towing or being towed Turn on fog lights: push the switch or turn it to the instrument panel. the  position. 4 Light flash: on with the lever pushed. Con- ››› in Hazard warning lights  on trol lamp  lit up.  page 143  ››› page 139 Lever all the way down to switch it off.  ››› page 143

››› in Turn signal and main beam  lever on page 141  ››› page 140

32 The essentials

Interior lights The light controls may vary depending on the More the lever to the required position: vehicle version. Windscreen wipers interval wipe. Using the control ››› Fig. 45 A adjust 1   ››› page 144 the interval (vehicles without rain sensor), or the sensitivity of the rain sensor.

2  Slow wipe.

Windscreen wipers and window 3  Continuous wipe. wiper blade 4  Short wipe. Brief press, short clean.

Automatic wipe. The windscreen washer function is activated by pushing the Fig. 44 Detail of headliner: front interior light- 5  lever forwards, and simultaneously the ing. windscreen wipers start.

Knob Function Interval wipe for rear window. The wiper 6  will wipe the window approximately ev-  Turning the interior lights on or off. ery six seconds.

Activating or deactivating the auto- The rear window wash function is acti- matic door contact lights. 7  vated by pressing the lever, and the The interior lights come on automati- rear wiper starts simultaneously. cally when the vehicle is unlocked, a Fig. 45 Operating the windscreen wiper and rear wiper.  door is opened or the key is removed ››› in Windscreen wiper and win- from the ignition.  dow wiper on page 145 The light goes off a few seconds after More the lever to the required position: all the doors are closed, the vehicle is ››› page 145 locked or the ignition is switched on. 0  Windscreen wipers off.   /  Turning the reading light on and off  ››› page 61

33 The essentials

Easy Connect

Vehicle menu settings

Fig. 46 Easy Connect: Main menu. Fig. 47 Easy Connect: CAR menu.

The actual number of menus available and or, press the Infotainment button  /  to When the function button check box is activa- the name of the various options will depend go to the Vehicle menu ››› Fig. 47. ted , the function is active. on the vehicle’s electronics and equipment. ● Press the SETTINGS function button to open Pressing the menu button  will always take the Vehicle settings menu. ● Switch the ignition on. you to the last menu used. ● To select a function in the menu, press the ● If the Infotainment System is off, switch it on. Any changes made using the settings menus desired button. ● Press the Infotainment button  /  and are automatically saved on closing those menus. then the Vehicle function button ››› Fig. 46,

34 The essentials

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

ESC system – Activation of the Electronic Stability Programme (ESC) ››› page 226

Tyre monitor system Tyre pressure storing (Calibration) ››› page 329

Tyres Activation and deactivation of the speed warning. Setting the speed warning Winter tyres ››› page 331 value

Motorway function, turning-on time, automatic lights when raining, one-touch Light assist ››› page 139 signalling.

Lights Vehicle interior lighting Brightness of instrument panel and controls ››› page 144

“Coming home/Leaving home” Switch-on time of the “Coming home” and “Leaving home” functions ››› page 141 function

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Activation/deactivation: default distance level, driving profiles. ››› page 259

Front Assist (emergency brak- Activation/deactivation: Front Assist, advance warning, distance warning dis- Driver assistance ››› page 255 ing assistance system) play

Fatigue detection Activation/deactivation ››› page 110

Parking and ma- Parking and manoeuvring set- Automatically activate front volume, front sound treble, rear volume, rear ››› page 291 noeuvring tings sound treble

Ambient lighting – Background lighting, switch-off, colour ››› page 144

Rear view mirrors Activate/deactivate folding after parking page 147 Mirrors and wind- ››› screen wipers Windscreen wipers Activate and deactivate automatic wipe in case of rain, wipe when reversing ››› page 33

Electric windows control Convenience open function, all, only driver page 138 Opening and clos- ››› ing Central locking Unlocking doors, automatic lock when driving, interior monitoring ››› page 127

Current consumption, average consumption, convenience consumers, ECO Advice, travelling time, distance travelled, average speed, digital speed dis- Instrument panel – ››› page 108 » play, speed warning, oil temperature, reset data “when setting off”, reset data for “total calculation”

35 The essentials

Menu Submenu Possible setting Description

Date and time – Time source, time, time zone, time format, date, date format –

Units – Distance, speed, temperature, volume, fuel consumption, pressure –

Chassis number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil change Service – ››› page 115 service

All Restore all settings Factory settings – Individual Restore factory settings for lights, driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring

WARNING Any distraction may lead to an accident, with the risk of injury. Operating the Easy Connect system while driving could distract you from traffic.

36 The essentials

Warning lamps Fault in ASR or disconnection caused by  Fault in the lighting of the vehicle  the system; OR ASR in operation ››› page 139. ››› page 226. Control and warning lamps  Low engine oil level ››› page 318. ASR manually deactivated; OR ESC in  Sport mode ››› page 226.  Fault in the gearbox ››› page 240.

 Fault in the ABS ››› page 226. Other warning lamps  Rear fog light switched on ››› page 139.  Turn lights or emergency lights on Fig. 48 Related video: Fault in the emission control system ››› page 139. Dash panel  ››› page 245.  Trailer turn signals ››› page 139. Red warning lamps Pre-heating of the diesel engine; OR fault Press the foot brake ››› page 233.  in the management of the diesel engine  Notification central lamp: additional infor- ››› page 245.  mation on the instrument panel display Speed regulator (GRA) ››› page 250; OR speed limiter ››› page 252; OR adaptive Fault in the petrol engine management  cruise control (ACC) ››› page 259.  Parking brake on ››› page 224.  ››› page 245.  Natural gas operating mode ››› page 114.  Fault in the brake system ››› page 224.  Particulate filter blocked ››› page 245.  Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 139.  Fault in the steering system ››› page 242.  Fault in the steering system ››› page 242. Driver or passenger has not fastened seat Door(s), rear lid or bonnet open or not Tyre monitor system ››› page 329.   belt ››› page 69.  properly closed ››› page 106.  Press the foot brake ››› page 260.  Fuel tank almost empty ››› page 113.  Engine cooling fluid ››› page 114.  Fault in airbag system and seat belt ten-  Engine oil pressure ››› page 318. Yellow warning lamps sioners ››› page 79.  Fault in the battery ››› page 324. Notification central lamp: additional infor- Front passenger front airbag is disa-   mation on the instrument panel display  bled ››› page 79. Electronic immobiliser active  ››› page 219.  Front brake pads worn ››› page 224. The front passenger front airbag is activa-   ted ››› page 79.  Service interval display ››› page 115. Fault in ESC or disconnection caused by the system; OR ESC or ASR in operation Mobile telephone is connected via Blue-   ® ››› page 226. tooth ››› page 209. » 37 The essentials

 Mobile telephone battery charge status . Start-Stop system unavailable ››› in Warning symbols on ››› page 209. ››› page 248.  page 118  Risk of freezing ››› page 106. Low consumption driving status  page 118 ››› page 107.  ›››  Start-Stop system activated ››› page 248.

Cruise control

Operating the cruise control system (CCS)*

Fig. 49 Related video: Dash panel

Fig. 50 On the left of the steering column:  controller and buttons to operate the cruise control system;  third lever to operate the cruise control system.

38 The essentials

Position of the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 50  Function Effect or the third lever ››› Fig. 50 

Switching on the cruise control Move controller 1 to the  position on the turn signal lever or move the third The system switches on. The last set speed of the system lever forward. cruise control is stored. It does not take effect yet.

Switching on the cruise control The current speed is stored and the cruise control is Press the button 2 on the turn signal lever or button  3 on the third lever. system activated.

Temporarily switching off the cruise Move controller 1 of the turn signal lever to the  position or move the third The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed control lever into pressure point . will be stored.

Switching on the cruise control Press the button 2 on the turn signal lever or move the third lever into the pres- The set speed control is activated. system again sure point .

Briefly press the button 2 on the turn signal lever in the area  or press  3 on the third lever to increase the speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph) and set it. Increasing the set speed of the Press  on the third lever to increase the speed in increments of 10 km/h The speed is changed to the set value. cruise control (5 mph) and set it.

Hold down the button 2 on the turn signal lever in the  area or hold down  to increase continuously in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Briefly press the button 2 on the turn signal lever in the  area or move the third lever into position  to reduce the speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph) and set it.

Reducing the set speed of the Press  on the third lever to reduce the speed in increments of 10 km/h The speed is changed to the set value. cruise control (5 mph) and set it.

Hold down the button 2 on the turn signal lever in the  area or hold down  to continuously decrease the speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph), then set it.

Switching off the cruise control Move controller 1 of the turn signal lever into position  or the third lever into The system switches off. » system position .

39 The essentials

Selecting reverse gear N Neutral (idling) ››› in Cruise control operation on  page 251 ● Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot D/S Drive (forward) right down. +/– Tiptronic mode: pull the lever forwards ››› page 250  ● With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it (+) to go up a gear or backwards (–) to downwards, move it to the left as far as it will go down a gear. go and then forwards to select reverse ››› Fig. 51 R . ››› in Selector lever positions on page 234 Gearbox lever ● Release the clutch. 

››› page 233 Manual gearbox ››› in Driving with a manual gear-   box on page 232  ››› page 40  ››› page 232

Manual release of the selector lev- Automatic gearbox* er

Fig. 51 Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speed manual gearbox.

The position of the gears is indicated on the gearbox lever ››› Fig. 51.

● Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot right down. Fig. 52 Automatic transmission: selector lever Fig. 53 Selector lever: manual release from ● Move the gearbox lever to the required po- positions. position P. sition. P Parking lock ● Release the clutch. Should the power supply be interrupted, R Reverse gear there is a manual unlocking device located 40 The essentials under the console of the selector lever, on the ● Press the interlock button on the selector the vehicle could otherwise start to move right. Releasing the selector lever requires a lever and move the selector lever to posi- inadvertently after shifting the selector lev- certain degree of practical skill. tion N. er out of position P - accident risk! ● After carrying out the manual release, at- ● Unlock: use the flat part of a screwdriver tach the selector lever boot on the gearbox blade. console again. Air conditioning Removing the cover from the selector lev- If the power supply should ever fail (e.g. dis- er charged battery) and the vehicle has to be Related video ● Apply the handbrake  ››› to ensure that pushed or towed, the selector lever must first the car does not move. be moved to position N, after operating the manual release mechanism. ● Carefully pull the corners of the selector lever boot and twist it upwards above the lev- WARNING er handle. The selector lever may be moved out of po- Releasing the selector lever sition P only when the handbrake is firmly Fig. 54 applied. If this does not work, secure the Air conditioning ● Using a screwdriver, press and hold the yel- vehicle with the brake pedal. On a slope low unlocking tab sideways ››› Fig. 53.

41 The essentials

How does Climatronic* work?

Fig. 55 In the centre console: Climatronic control panel.

To switch a specific function on, press the ap- The LED on each control lights up to indicate propriate button. Press the button again to that the respective function of a control has switch off the function. been switched on.

1 The left and right sides can be adjusted separately: turn the control to adjust the temperature. Temperature

2 The power of the fan is automatically adjusted. Press the buttons to manually adjust the fan. Fan

3 The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort. You can also switch it on manually using the buttons 3 . Air distribution

4 Indications on the display screen of the fan speed and the temperature selected for the right and left sides.

 The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is directed at the windscreen and air recirculation is automatically switched off. To defrost the Defrost function windscreen more quickly, the air is dehumidified at temperatures over approximately +3°C (+38°F) and the fan runs at maximum output.

 The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents.

42 The essentials

 Air distribution towards the footwell.  Upward air distribution.  Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.  Air recirculation   Seat heating buttons  Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.  Press the  button to apply the driver-side settings to the passenger side. Use the temperature regulator for the passenger side in order to set a different temperature.

 Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan, and air distribution.

Switching off Press the  button or manually set the fan to .

 ››› in General notes on page 161  ››› page 168

43 The essentials

How does the manual air conditioning* and the heating and fresh air system work?

Fig. 56 In the centre console:  controls for the manual air conditioning;  heating and fresh air system controls.

1 Turn the control to adjust the temperature. Temperature

2 Level 0: blower and manual air conditioning/heating off Fan Level 4: maximum fan level.

: Defrost function. The airflow is directed at the windscreen. Manual air conditioning: Air recirculation is automatically switched off or is not switched on. Increase the fan power to clear the windscreen of condensation as soon as possible. To dehumidify the air, the cooling system will automatically switch on.

3 : The air is directed at the chest of driver and passengers by the dash panel air vents. Air distribution : Air distribution towards the footwell.

: Air distribution towards the windscreen and the footwell.

44 The essentials

 Heated rear window: this only works when the engine is running and switches off automatically after a maximum of 10 minutes.  Manual air conditioning: Air recirculation  Manual air conditioning: Press the button to switch on or off the cooling system.   Manual air conditioning: Seat heating buttons

 ››› in General notes on page 161  ››› page 164, ››› page 166

45 The essentials

Fluid level control Fuel  ››› in Refuelling on page 309 Filling capacities  ››› page 308 Tank level

Petrol and diesel 40 l, 7 l reserve engines Oil Natural gas en- approx. 11.6 kg ginea)

a) The capacity depends on the efficacy and characteristics of the natural gas pumps. The capacity indicated is based on a minimum loading pressure of 200 Fig. 57 Fuel tank flap with tank cap attached. bar. The tank flap is released electronically by Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid con- means of the central locking and is located tainer at the rear of the vehicle, on the right. The Windscreen washer tank holds approximately 40 litres. approx. 3 litres fluid container Opening the fuel tank cap Fig. 58 Engine oil dipstick. ● Open the fuel tank flap by pressing on the left side. ● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the left. ● Place it in the space on the hinge of the open flap ››› Fig. 57.

Closing the fuel tank cap ● Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as far as it will go. ● Close the lid. Fig. 59 In the engine compartment: Engine oil filler cap.

46 The essentials

The level is measured using the dipstick loca- Engine oil specifications could increase consumption and the vehicle’s ted in the engine compartment CO2 emissions. ›››  page 317. Diesel engines Type of Specifica-  The oil indicator must be between zones A Engine type and C . It can never go above zone A . Service tion Recommended by SEAT Set Service ● Zone A : do not add oil. With particulate and Flexible SEAT recommends using original SEAT oil to VW 507 00 ● Zone B : you can add oil but keep the level filter (DPF)a) Service Inter- guarantee high SEAT engine performance. in that zone. vals

● Zone C : add oil until zone B . a) Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may ››› in Changing engine oil on damage the engine.  page 320 Topping up engine oil If the engine oil level is too low ● Unscrew cap from oil filler opening.  ››› page 318 ● Add oil slowly. You can get information about the correct engine oil for your vehicle in your specialised ● At the same time, check the level to ensure shop. If you have to change your engine oil, you do not add too much. use this oil. Coolant ● When the oil level reaches at least zone B , If the recommended engine oil is not availa- unscrew the engine oil filler cap carefully. ble, in the event of an emergency you can change the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 L Engine oil additives of the next oil until the next oil change: No type of additive should be mixed with the engine oil. The deterioration caused by these – Petrol engines: standard VW 504 00, additives is not covered by the warranty. VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA C3 or API SN. – Diesel engines: standard VW 507 00, VW 505 01, ACEA C3 or API CK-4.

Have the oil changed by a specialised work- Fig. 60 Engine compartment: coolant expan- shop. sion tank cap. Using engine oil that is compliant with the VW The coolant tank is located in the engine 504 00 standard instead of VW 508 00 compartment ›››  page 317. » 47 The essentials

When the engine is cold, replace the coolant therefore be avoided in Topping up ››› ››› in Changing the brake fluid on when the level is below . coolant on page 321.  page 322

Coolant specifications ››› in Topping up coolant on ››› page 321  page 321  The engine cooling system is supplied from the factory with a specially treated mixture of ››› page 320 water and at least 40 % of the additive G13  (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives the Windscreen washer necessary frost protection down to -25°C (-13°F) and protects the light alloy parts of Brake fluid the engine cooling system against corrosion. It also prevents scaling and considerably raises the boiling point of the coolant. To protect the cooling system, the percentage of additive must always be at least 40 %, even in warm climates where anti-freeze protection is not required. If for weather reasons further protection is necessary, the proportion of additive may be Fig. 62 In the engine compartment: cap of the increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an- windscreen washer tank. tifreeze protection will diminish and this will worsen cooling. Fig. 61 Engine compartment: brake fluid reser- The windscreen washer reservoir is located in voir cap. the engine compartment ›››  page 317. When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture of distilled water and at least 40 % of the The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en- To top up, mix water with a product recom- G13 or G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive gine compartment ›››  page 317. mended by SEAT. (both are purple) to obtain an optimum anti- The level should be between the  and  In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze for win- corrosion protection ››› in Topping up marks. If it is below , please visit a Technical dows. coolant on page 321. The mixture of G13 Service. with G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11 (green-blue) engine coolants will significantly reduce anti-corrosion protection and should

48 The essentials

››› in Checking and topping up the windscreen washer reservoir water  on page 322  ››› page 322

Battery

The battery is located in the engine compartment ›››  page 317. It does not require maintenance. It is checked as part of the In- spection Service.

››› in Symbols and warnings on  handling the battery on page 323  ››› page 323

49 The essentials

Emergencies Opening and closing the fuse box situated Colour Amp rating below the dash panel Green 30 ● Open: remove the fuse box cover in the di- Fuses rection indicated ››› Fig. 63. Orange 40 ● Close: click the cover back into place. Fuse location ››› in Introduction on page 91 To open the engine compartment fuse box  ● Raise the bonnet. ››› page 91 ● Press the locking tabs to release the fuse  box cover ››› Fig. 64 ● Then lift the cover out. ● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box. Replacing a blown fuse Push the locking tabs down until they click audibly into place.

Identifying fuses situated below the dash Fig. 63 On the dashboard on the driver side: panel by colours lid of the fuse box. Colour Amp rating

Black 1

Purple 3

Light brown 5 Fig. 65 Image of a blown fuse. Brown 7.5 Preparation Red 10 ● Switch off the ignition, lights and all electri- Blue 15 cal equipment.

Fig. 64 In the engine compartment: lid of the Yellow 20 ● Open the corresponding fuse box fuse box. ›››  page 91. White or transparent 25

50 The essentials

Identifying a blown fuse Halogen headlights. Type Bulb lighta) Left Right A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured Main beam headlights H7 Brake lights ››› Fig. 65. 2 x P21WLL 2 x P21WLL Side light/DRL (daytime running Side lights W21W ● Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has light) blown. Retro fog light P21 WLL – Turn signal PY 21W Reverse light – P21 WLL To replace a fuse ● Remove the fuse. Halogen headlight with Type Turn signal PY 21W NA LL PY 21W NA LL LED DRL ● Replace the blown fuse by one with an a) The table corresponds to a right-hand traffic vehi- identical amperage rating (same colour and Dipped beam headlights H7 Long Life cle. The position of lights may vary according to the markings) and identical size. country. Main beam headlights H7 ● Replace the cover again or close the fuse Turn signal PY 21W Light with Left Right box lid. LEDsa) Side light/DRL (daytime running LEDa) light) Brake lights LED LED

Bulbs a) In case of a LED failure, go to an authorised work- Side lights LED LED shop to have it replaced. Retro fog light LED – Bulbs (12 V) Full-LED main headlights Type Reverse light – P21 WLL

Note: Depending on the level of equipment No bulbs may be replaced. All functions are with Turn signal PY 21W NA LL PY 21W NA LL fitted in the vehicle, LEDs may be used for LEDs. In case of a LED failure, go to an authorised a) part or all of the interior and/or exterior light- workshop to have it replaced. The table corresponds to a right-hand traffic vehi- ing. LEDs have an estimated life that exceeds cle. The position of lights may vary according to the country. that of the vehicle. If an LED light fails, go to an authorised workshop for its replacement. ››› page 93 Light source used for each function  Halogen headlights. Type

Dipped beam headlights H7 Long Life

51 The essentials

Action in the event of a punc- ● All occupants should leave the vehicle and Sealing the tyre wait in a safe place (for instance behind the ● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use ture roadside crash barrier). the ››› Fig. 67 1 tool to remove the insert. Place it on a clean surface. Related video WARNING ● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously ● Always observe the above steps and pro- ››› Fig. 67 10 . tect yourself and other road users. ● Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 67 3 into the ● If you change the wheel on a slope, block sealant bottle. The bottle's seal will break au- the wheel on the opposite side of the car tomatically. with a stone or similar to prevent the vehicle from moving. ● Remove the lid from the filling tube ››› Fig. 67 3 and screw the open end of the Fig. 66 Wheels tube into the tyre valve. Repairing a tyre with the anti-punc- ● With the tyre sealant bottle upside down, fill ture kit the tyre with the contents of the sealant bot- What to do first tle. ● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface and ● Remove the bottle from the valve. in a safe place as far away from traffic as ● Place the insert back into the tyre valve us- possible. ing the tool ››› Fig. 67 1 . ● Apply the handbrake. Inflating the tyre ● Switch on the hazard warning lights. ● Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube ● Manual transmission: select the 1st gear. ››› Fig. 67 8 into the tyre valve. ● Automatic transmission: Move the selector ● Check that the air bleed screw is closed lever to position P. ››› Fig. 67 6 . ● If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from ● Start the engine and leave it running. your vehicle. ● Insert the connector Fig. 67 9 into the ● Have the vehicle tool kit* ››› page 53 and ››› vehicle's 12-volt socket  page 154. the spare wheel ›››  page 330 ready. Fig. 67 Standard display: contents of the anti- ››› puncture kit. ● Turn the air compressor on with the ● Observe the applicable legislation for each ON/OFF switch ››› Fig. 67 5 . country (reflective vest, warning triangles, The anti-puncture kit is located under the etc.). floor panel in the luggage compartment. 52 The essentials

● Keep the air compressor running until it rea- Changing a wheel 5 Jack* ches 2.0 to 2.5 bar (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa). 6 Hook for extracting the central wheel A maximum of 8 minutes. Related video trims* ● Disconnect the air compressor. 7 Clip for removing the wheel bolt caps. ● If it does not reach the pressure indicated, unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve. ››› in Vehicle tools on page 84 ● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is  distributed throughout the tyre. ››› page 84 ● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the  valve. Fig. 68 Wheels ● Repeat the inflation process. ● If the indicated pressure still cannot be Central trim for steel rims* reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop Vehicle tool kit and request assistance from an authorised technician. ● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve. ● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and 2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). ● Attach the sticker ››› Fig. 67 2 to the instrument cluster, within the driver's visual field. ● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes Fig. 70 Correct positioning of the central ›››  page 86. Fig. 69 Underneath the floor panel of the lug- wheel trim for steel rims. gage compartment: on-board tools. The central trims must be removed for access ››› in TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* to the wheel bolts. »  on page 85 1 Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts* 2 Towline anchorage ››› page 85  3 Box spanner for wheel bolts* 4 Crank handle for jack

53 The essentials

Removing Wheel bolt caps* Wheel bolts ● Attach the wire hook (vehicle tools ››› Fig. 69 6 ) to one of the chambers of the central wheel trim. ● Insert the box spanner through the hook, supporting it on the tyre and remove the wheel trim.

Fitting ● Fit the central wheel trim onto the rim. The bottom of the “S” of the SEAT badge should align with the inflation valve ››› Fig. 70 1 . Fig. 71 Wheel: wheel bolts with caps. Fig. 72 Tyre change: slacken the wheel bolts. ● Press the central trim firmly until it locks in with an audible click. Removal ● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools) over the Note cap until it clicks into place ››› Fig. 71. There is also a valve mark on the back of ● Remove the cap with the plastic clip. the central wheel trim that indicates the correct alignment.

Fig. 73 Tyre change: tyre valve 1 and the correct position for the anti-theft wheel locking bolt 2 or 3 .

Use only the wheel wrench belonging to the car to loosen the wheel bolts. Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turn before raising the vehicle with the jack.

54 The essentials

If the wheel bolt is very tight, carefully push Important information about wheel bolts on the end of the wheel wrench with your Factory-fitted rims and wheel bolts are spe- foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and cially matched during construction. There- take care not to slip during this operation. fore, if different rims are fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and heads Loosening wheel bolts must be used. This ensures that wheels are ● Fit the wheel wrench on as far as it will go fitted securely and that the brake system ››› Fig. 72. functions correctly. ● Hold the wrench at the end and rotate the In certain circumstances, you should not even bolt approximately one turn anticlock- use wheel bolts from vehicles of the same Fig. 75 Fitting the jack. wise ››› in Removing and fitting the model. wheel on page 56. In wheels with full hubcaps, the anti-theft ● Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firm The caps protect the wheel bolts and should locking bolt must be threaded onto positions ground. If necessary use a large, strong be pushed fully on again after changing the ››› Fig. 73 2 or 3 , taking the tyre valve’s po- board or similar support. If the surface is slip- tyre. sition as reference 1 . Otherwise it will not be pery (for example tiles) place the jack on a possible to mount the hubcap. rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip- Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt ping ››› . ● Take the adapter for the anti-theft wheel ● Find the support point on the strut (sunken bolts out of the vehicle tool kit. Raising the vehicle area) closest to the wheel to be changed ››› Fig. 74. ● Insert the adapter fully onto the anti-theft wheel bolt ››› Fig. 73. ● Turn the jack* crank handle, located below the strut support point, to raise it until the ● Fit the wheel wrench as far as it will go over tab 1 ››› Fig. 75 is below the housing provi- the adapter. ded. ● Hold the wrench at the end and rotate the ● Align the jack* so that tab 1 “grips” onto bolt approximately one turn anticlock- the housing provided on the strut and the mo- wise in Removing and fitting the ››› bile base 2 is resting on the ground. The wheel on page 56. base plate 2 should fall vertically with re- The anti-theft wheel bolt has a different spect to the support point 1 . cap. This cap only fits on anti-theft locking ● Continue turning the jack* until the wheel is Fig. 74 Jack position points. bolts and is not for use with standard wheel slightly lifted off the ground. » bolts. 55 The essentials

WARNING Taking off the wheel Never apply grease or oil to wheel bolts or to ● Unscrew the wheel bolts using the box the wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have ● Make sure that the jack* remains stable. been tightened to the prescribed torque, they If the surface is slippery or soft, the jack* spanner and place them on a clean surface. could come loose while driving. could slip or sink, respectively, with the re- ● Take off the wheel ››› . sultant risk of injury. WARNING ● Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup- Putting on the spare wheel plied by the manufacturer. Other jacks, If the wheel bolts are not properly tight- When fitting tyres with a compulsory rotation even those approved for other SEAT mod- ened, they could come loose while driving direction, observe the instructions in els could slip, with the consequent risk of and cause an accident, serious injury and page 57. injury. ››› loss of vehicle control. ● Only mount the jack* on the support ● Mount the wheel. ● Use only wheel bolts which correspond points designed for this purpose on the to the rim in question. ● Screw on the wheel bolts in position and strut, and always align the jack correctly. If ● Never use different wheel bolts. tighten them loosely with a box spanner. you do not, the jack* could slip as it does ● Wheel bolts and threads should be clean, ● Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*. not have an adequate grip on the vehicle: free of oil and grease, and it should be pos- risk of injury! ● Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonal pairs sible to screw them easily. ● The height of the parked vehicle can using the wheel brace. ● To loosen and tighten wheel bolts, only change as a result of variations in tempera- use the wheel wrench that came with the The wheel bolts should be clean and turn ture and loading. car from the factory. easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa- ● Loosen the wheel bolts only about one CAUTION ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit- turn before raising the vehicle with the jack. The vehicle must not be raised on the ting the wheel. ● Never apply grease or oil to wheel bolts crossbar. Only place the jack* on the or to the wheel hub threads. Even if the points designed for this purpose on the Wheel bolt tightening torque bolts have been tightened to the prescri- strut. Otherwise, the vehicle may be dam- bed torque, they could come loose while aged. The prescribed tightening torque for wheel driving. bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm. Af- ● Never loosen the screwed joints of wheel ter changing a wheel, have the tightening tor- rims with bolted ring trims. que checked immediately with a torque Removing and fitting the wheel wrench that is working perfectly. ● If wheel bolts are tightened below the prescribed torque, the bolts and rims could Change the wheel after loosening the wheel Before checking tightening torque, have any come loose while driving. If tightening tor- bolts and raising the vehicle with the jack. rusty wheel bolts that are difficult to screw re- que is too high, the wheel bolts or threads placed and clean the wheel hub threads. can be damaged. 56 The essentials

CAUTION ● Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap. ● If there is a danger of being trapped de- ● Return all tools to their proper storing loca- spite having mounted the chains, it is best to When removing/fitting the wheel, the rim disable the driving wheels (ASR) in the ESC may hit and damage the brake disc. For this tion. ›››  page 226. reason, please take care and get a second ● If the replaced wheel does not fit in the person to assist you. spare wheel housing, store it safely in the lug- Snow chains will improve braking ability as gage compartment ›››  page 155. well as traction in winter conditions. ● Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun- For technical reasons snow chains may only Tyres with compulsory direction of ted tyre as soon as possible. be used with the following wheel rim/tyre rotation ● In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indica- combination. tor, adjust the pressure and store it in memory A directional tread pattern can be identified ›››  page 329. 195/60 R16 Chains with links of maximum 13.5 by the arrows on the sidewall that point in the mm ● Have the tightening torque of the wheel direction of rotation. Always observe the di- bolts checked as soon as possible with a tor- 205/60 R16 rection of rotation indicated when fitting the que wrench (it should be 120 Nm). Meanwhile, wheel to guarantee optimum properties of 205/55 R17 Chains with links of maximum 9 mm drive carefully. this type of tyres with regard to grip, noises, 215/45 R18 wear and aquaplaning. ● Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as possible. If it is absolutely necessary to fit the spare Remove wheel covers and any integral trim tyre* against the direction of rotation, drive ring before fitting snow chains. with care as this means the tyre does not of- Remove the chains when roads are free of fer optimum driving properties. This is of par- Snow chains snow. Driving characteristics worsen, and the ticular importance when the road surface is wheels become damaged quickly and may wet. Use even be rendered unusable. To return to directional tread tires, replace the punctured tyre as soon as possible and re- Snow chains should only be used on the front WARNING wheels. store the obligatory direction of rotation of all Snow chains should be correctly tightened tyres. ● Check that they are correctly seated after in accordance with the manufacturer's in- driving for a few yards; correct the position if structions. This will prevent the chains necessary, in accordance with the manufac- coming into contact with the wheel hous- Subsequent work turer's fitting instructions. ing. ● Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph). ● Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps. 57 The essentials

Emergency towing of the ve- Towline anchorages Driving style Attach the bar or rope to the towline ancho- Towing requires some experience, especially hicle rages. when using a tow rope. Both drivers should realise how difficult it is to tow a vehicle. Inex- The towline anchorages are located under Towing perienced drivers should not attempt to tow. the floor panel in the luggage compartment, next to the vehicle tools ››› page 53. Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle and take care to avoid jerking the tow rope. Screw the towline anchorage into the screw When towing on an unpaved road, there is al- connection ››› Fig. 76 or ››› Fig. 77 and tight- ways a risk of overloading and damaging the en it with the wheel brace. anchorage points.

Tow rope or tow bar The ignition of the vehicle being towed must be switched on to prevent the steering wheel It is easier and safer for the vehicle to be tow- from locking and also to allow the use of the ed using a tow bar. You should only use a turn signals, horn, windscreen wipers and tow-rope if you do not have a tow-bar. washers. A tow rope should be slightly elastic to re- Fig. 76 Right side of the front bumper: towline Place the gear lever in neutral on vehicles anchorage. duce the loading on both vehicles. It is advis- with a manual gearbox. With an automatic able to use a tow rope made of synthetic fi- gearbox, place the lever in N. bre or similarly elastic material. The brake servo only works when the engine Attach the tow rope or the tow bar only to the is running. When not running, you must apply towline anchorages provided or a towing considerably more pressure to the brake bracket. pedal. Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle As the power assisted steering does not work ● The tow rope must be taut before you drive if the engine is not running, you will need off. more strength to steer than you normally would. ● Release the clutch very carefully when starting the vehicle (manual gearbox), or ac- Fig. 77 Right side of the rear bumper: towline ››› in General information on anchorage. celerate gently (automatic gearbox).  page 87  ››› page 87 58 The essentials

Tow-starting How to jump start How to jump start: description

If the engine will not start, first try starting it using the battery of another vehicle Jump leads ››› page 59. You should only attempt to The jump lead must have a sufficient wire tow-start a vehicle if charging the battery cross section. does not work. This is done by leveraging wheel movement. If the engine fails to start because of a discharged battery, the battery can be connec- When tow-starting a vehicle with a petrol en- ted to the battery of another vehicle to start gine, do not tow it more than a short dis- the engine. tance, otherwise unburned fuel can enter the catalytic converter. Jump leads Fig. 78 Diagram of connections for vehicles However, if your vehicle has to be tow- Jump leads must comply with standard DIN without Start-Stop system. started: 72553 (see cable manufacturer's instructions). The wire cross section must be at least ● Engage 2nd or 3rd gear. 25 mm2 for petrol engines and at least ● Keep the clutch pressed down. 35 mm2 for diesel engines. ● Switch the ignition on. Note ● Once both vehicles are moving, release the clutch. ● The vehicles must not touch each other, otherwise electricity could flow as soon as ● As soon as the engine starts, press the the positive terminals are connected. clutch and move the gear lever into neutral. This helps to prevent driving into the towing ● The discharged battery must be properly vehicle. connected to the on-board network. Fig. 79 Diagram of connections for vehicles with Start-Stop system. ››› in General information on  page 87 Jump lead terminal connections

››› page 87 1. Switch off the ignition of both vehicles  ››› . »

59 The essentials

2. Connect one end of the red jump lead to 8. Start the engine of the vehicle with the ty (see imprint on battery). Failure to com- the positive + terminal of the vehicle flat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes ply could result in an explosion. with the flat battery A ››› Fig. 78. until the engine is running. ● Never use jump leads when one of the 3. Connect the other end of the red jump batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion! lead to the positive terminal + in the ve- Removing the jump leads Even after the battery has thawed, battery hicle providing assistance B . 9. Before you remove the jump leads, acid could leak and cause chemical burns. 4a. In vehicles without a Start-Stop system: switch off the dipped beam headlights if If a battery freezes, it should be replaced. connect one end of the black jump lead they are switched on. ● Keep sparks, flames and lighted ciga- to the negative terminal – of the vehicle 10. Turn on the heater blower and heated rettes away from batteries, danger of ex- providing the current B ››› Fig. 78. rear window in the vehicle with the flat plosion. Failure to comply could result in an explosion. 4b. In vehicles with a Start-stop system: battery. This helps minimise voltage connect one end of the black jump lead peaks which are generated when the ● Observe the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the jump leads. X to a suitable ground terminal, to a sol- leads are disconnected. id piece of metal in the engine block, or 11. When the engine is running, disconnect ● Do not connect the negative cable from to the engine block itself ››› Fig. 79. the leads in reverse order to the details the other vehicle directly to the negative terminal of the flat battery. The gas emit- 5. Connect the other end of the black jump given above. ted from the battery could be ignited by lead X to a solid metal component bol- Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient sparks. Danger of explosion. ted to the engine block or to the engine metal-to-metal contact with the battery ter- ● Never attach the negative cable to fuel block itself of the vehicle with the flat minals. system components or the brake lines in battery. Do not connect it to a point near the other vehicle. the battery A . If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec- ● The non-insulated parts of the battery 6. Position the leads in such a way that onds, switch off the starter and try again after about 1 minute. clamps must not be allowed to touch. The they cannot come into contact with any jump lead attached to the positive battery moving parts in the engine compart- terminal must not touch metal parts of the WARNING ment. vehicle, this can cause a short circuit. ● Please note the safety warnings referring ● Position the leads in such a way that they to working in the engine compartment Starting cannot come into contact with any moving ›››  page 315, Working in the engine 7. Start the engine of the vehicle with the parts in the engine compartment. compartment. boosting battery and let it run at idling ● Do not lean on the batteries. This could ● The battery providing assistance must speed. result in chemical burns. have the same voltage as the flat battery (12 V) and approximately the same capaci-

60 The essentials

Note ● Extract the wiper blade from the wiper arm. The vehicles must not touch each other, Fitting the wiper blade otherwise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected. ● Insert the wiper blade onto the windscreen wiper arm until it clicks into place. ● Place the windscreen wiper arms to their Changing the windscreen initial position. ● Turn the ignition on, push the windscreen wiper blades wiper lever down (touch wipe) and then turn the ignition off. Fig. 81 Changing the windscreen wiper blade. Changing the wiper blades To change the blades it is necessary to move ››› in Changing the windscreen the wipers from the rest position into the serv- and rear window wiper blades on  page 87 ice position. Do not change the windscreen wipers when  ››› page 87 out of the service position, as it could cause paint to flake off the bonnet due to friction with the windscreen wiper arm.

Service position (for changing wiper blades) ● Fig. 80 Wipers in service position. Ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen. ● Turn the ignition on and off and then (within approximately 9 seconds) push the windscreen wiper lever down (short wipe). The windscreen wipers will move to the service position ››› Fig. 80.

Removing the wiper blade ● Lift the windscreen wiper arm. ● Press the securing tab down 1 ››› Fig. 81. 61 The essentials

Changing the rear window wiper blade

Fig. 82 Removing and fitting the rear window wiper blade.

Removing the wiper blade ● Lift the wiper arm away from the glass ● Slide the blade adapter in the direction of the arrow and remove the blade ››› Fig. 82 A.

Fitting the wiper blade ● With one hand, hold the top end of the wiper arm. ● Place the blade as shown in ››› Fig. 82 B and slide the adapter along until it engages.

››› in Changing the windscreen and rear window wiper blades on  page 87  ››› page 87

62 Safe driving

– Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn What affects driving safety? Safety signals are working properly. As a driver, you are responsible for yourself – Check tyre pressure. Safe driving and your passengers. When your concentra- – Ensure that all windows provide a clear and tion or driving safety is affected by any cir- good view of the surroundings. cumstance, you endanger yourself as well as Advice about driving – Ensure that all luggage is correctly secured others on the road ››› , for this reason: ››› page 155. – Always pay attention to traffic and do not Safety first! – Make sure that no objects can interfere with get distracted by passengers or telephone calls. This chapter contains important information, the pedals. – tips, suggestions and warnings that you – Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors Never drive when your driving ability is im- should read and consider for both your own properly according to your size. paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs). safety and for your passengers' safety. – – Ensure that the passenger in the central Observe traffic laws and speed limits. WARNING rear seat always has the head restraint in – Always reduce your speed as appropriate the correct position for use. for road, traffic and weather conditions. ● This manual contains important information about the operation of the vehicle, – Instruct passengers to adjust the head re- – When travelling long distances, take breaks both for the driver and the passengers. The straints according to their height. regularly - at least every two hours. other sections of the on-board documenta- – Protect children with appropriate child tion also contain further information that – If possible, avoid driving when you are tired seats and properly applied seat belts you should be aware of for your own safety or stressed. and for the safety of your passengers. ››› page 80. WARNING ● Ensure that the on-board documentation – Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es- your passengers also to assume a proper When driving safety is impaired during a pecially important when lending or selling sitting position ››› page 64. trip, the risk of injury and accidents increa- the vehicle to another person. ses. – Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your passengers also to fasten their seat belts properly ››› page 69. Before setting off Safety equipment

For your own safety and the safety of your Never put your safety or the safety of your passengers, always note the following points passengers in danger. In the event of an acci- before every trip: dent, the safety equipment may reduce the » 63 Safety

risk of injury. The following points cover part Correct position of the vehi- of the safety equipment in your SEAT1): cle occupants ● three-point seat belts, ● Belt tension limiter for the front and rear Correct sitting position for the driv- side seats er ● belt tensioners for the front and rear seats, ● front airbags, ● side airbags in the front seat backrests,

● “ISOFIX” anchor points for “ISOFIX” rear Fig. 84 Correct head restraint position for the child seat system driver. ● height-adjustable front head restraints, For your own safety and to reduce the risk of ● Rear-centre head restraints with in-use po- injury in the event of an accident, we recom- sition and non-use position mend the following adjustments for the driver: ● adjustable steering column. – Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a The safety equipment mentioned above Fig. 83 The proper distance between driver distance of at least 25 cm between the works together to provide you and your pas- and steering wheel. steering wheel and the centre of your chest sengers with the best possible protection in ››› Fig. 83. the event of an accident. However, these – Move the driver's seat forwards or back- safety systems can only be effective if you wards so that you are able to press the ac- and your passengers are sitting in a correct celerator, brake and clutch pedals to the position and use this equipment properly. floor with your knees still slightly angled Safety is everyone's business! ››› . – Ensure that you can reach the highest point of the steering wheel.

– Adjust the head restraint so that its upper edge is at the same level as the top of your

1) Depending on the version/market. 64 Safe driving

head, or as close as possible to the same ● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12 ● Make sure you are capable of reaching level as the top of your head ››› Fig. 84. o'clock position, or in any other manner and firmly holding the upper part of the – Move the seat backrest to an upright posi- (e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In steering wheel: risk of accident! tion so that your back rests completely such cases, if the airbag is triggered, you ● If you adjust the steering wheel so that it may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and against it. points towards your face, the driver airbag head. will not protect you properly in the event of – Fasten your seat belt securely ● To reduce the risk of injury to the driver an accident. Make sure that the steering ››› page 69. during sudden braking manoeuvres or an wheel points towards your chest. – Keep both feet in the footwell so that you accident, never drive with the backrest til- have the vehicle under control at all times. ted far back! The airbag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection Correct position for the front pas- Adjustment of the driver's seat ››› page 148. when the backrest is in an upright position and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt senger WARNING correctly. ● Adjust the head restraint properly to ach- For your own safety and to reduce the risk of ● An incorrect sitting position of the driver ieve optimal protection. injury in the event of an accident, we recom- can lead to severe injuries. mend the following adjustments for the front ● Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at passenger: least 25 cm distance between the centre of the chest and the centre of the steering Adjusting the steering wheel posi- – Move the front passenger seat back as far wheel ››› Fig. 83. If distance is less than 25 tion as possible ››› . cm, the airbag system may not protect you – Move the seat backrest to an upright posi- properly. Read the additional information carefully tion so that your back rests completely ● If your physical constitution prevents you ›››  page 20 against it. from maintaining the minimum distance of 25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. WARNING – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper The workshop will help you decide if spe- edge is at the same level as the top of your ● Never adjust the position of the steering cial specific modifications are necessary. head, or as close as possible to the same wheel when the vehicle is moving, as this level as the top of your head ››› page 67. ● When driving, always hold the steering could cause an accident. wheel with both hands on the outside of the – Always keep both feet in the footwell in ● Move the lever up firmly so the steering ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock posi- front of the front passenger seat. wheel position does not accidentally tions. This reduces the risk of injury when change during driving. risk of accident! the driver airbag is triggered. – Fasten your seat belt securely ››› page 69. »

65 Safety

It is possible to deactivate the front passen- is in an upright position and the front pas- WARNING ger airbag in exceptional circumstances senger is wearing his or her seat belt prop- ● If the passengers in the rear seats are not ››› page 78. erly. The further the seat backrests are til- sitting properly, they could sustain severe ted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury Adjusting the front passenger seat injuries. due to incorrect positioning of the belt web ›››  page 19. or to the incorrect sitting position! ● Adjust the head restraint correctly in order to achieve maximum protection. WARNING ● Adjust the head restraint correctly in order to achieve maximum protection. ● Seat belts can only provide optimal pro- ● An incorrect sitting position of the front tection when seat backrests are in an up- passenger can lead to severe injuries. right position and the vehicle occupants ● Adjust the front passenger seat so that are wearing their seat belts correctly. If there is at least 25 cm between your chest Correct sitting position for rear passengers In the rear seats are not sitting and the dash panel. If distance is less than seat passengers in an upright position, the risk of injury due 25 cm, the airbag system may not protect to incorrect positioning of the seat belt in- you properly. To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a creases. ● If your physical constitution prevents you sudden braking manoeuvre or an accident, from maintaining the minimum distance of passengers on the rear seat bench must con- 25 cm, contact a specialised workshop. sider the following: Examples of incorrect sitting posi- The workshop will help you decide if spe- – Sit up straight. tions cial specific modifications are necessary. – Adjust the head restraint to the correct po- ● Always keep your feet in the footwell Seat belts can provide optimal protection on- sition page 67. when the vehicle is moving; never rest them ››› ly when the belt webs are properly posi- on the dash panel, out the window or on the – Always keep both feet in the footwell in tioned. Incorrect sitting positions substantially seat. An incorrect sitting position exposes front of the rear seat. reduce the protective function of seat belts you to an increased risk of injury in case of and increase the risk of injury due to incorrect – Fasten your seat belt securely a sudden braking or an accident. If the air- seat belt position. As the driver, you are re- bag is triggered, you could sustain severe ››› page 69. sponsible for all passengers, especially chil- injuries due to an incorrect sitting position. – Use an appropriate child restraint system dren. ● To reduce the risk of injury to the front when you take children in the vehicle – Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect passenger in events such as sudden brak- ››› page 80. ing manoeuvres or an accident, never trav- sitting position in the vehicle while travelling el with the backrest tilted far back! The air- ››› . bag system and seat belts can only provide optimal protection when the backrest The following list contains examples of sitting positions that could be dangerous for all 66 Safe driving vehicle occupants. The list is not complete, airbags are triggered, by striking a vehicle – Adjust the head restraint so that its upper but we would like to make you aware of this occupant who has assumed an incorrect edge is, as far as possible, at the same level issue. sitting position. as the top of your head, or at the very least, at eye level Fig. 85. ● Before the vehicle moves, assume the ››› Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in mo- proper sitting position and maintain it tion: throughout the trip. Before every trip, in- WARNING ● Never stand in the vehicle. struct your passengers to sit properly and ● Travelling with the head restraints re- to stay in this position during the trip moved or improperly adjusted increases ● Never stand on the seats. ››› page 64, Correct position of the vehicle the risk of severe injuries. An improper ad- ● Never kneel on the seats. occupants. justment of the head restraints may cause ● Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear. death in an accident and increase the risk of suffering injuries during abrupt braking ● Never lean against the dash panel. actions or unexpected manoeuvres. ● Never lie on the rear bench. Correct adjustment of front head restraints ● The head restraints must always be ad- ● Never sit on the front edge of a seat. justed according to the height of the pas- ● Never sit sideways. senger. ● Never lean out of a window. ● Never put your feet out of a window. ● Never put your feet on the dash panel. ● Never put your feet on the surface of a seat. ● Do not allow anyone to travel in the footwell. ● Never travel without wearing the seat belt. ● Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug- Fig. 85 Correctly adjusted head restraint as gage compartment. viewed from the front and the side.

WARNING Properly adjusted head restraints are an im- ● Any incorrect sitting position increases portant part of passenger protection and can the risk of severe injuries. reduce the risk of injuries in most accident sit- ● Sitting in an incorrect position exposes uations. the vehicle occupants to severe injuries if

67 Safety

Correct adjustment of rear head Rear head restraints Pedal area restraints – The rear head restraints have 2 positions: use and non-use. Pedals – One position for use (head restraint raised) ››› Fig. 86. In this position, the head re- – Ensure that you can always press the ac- straints are used normally, protecting pas- celerator, brake and clutch pedals unim- sengers along with the rear seat belts. paired to the floor.

– And one position for non-use (head re- – Ensure that the pedals can return unim- straint lowered). paired to their initial positions.

– To fit the head restraints in position for use, – Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas- pull on the edges with both hands in the di- tened during the trip and do not obstruct rection of the arrow. the pedals ››› . Fig. 86 Head restraints in the correct position. Only use floor mats which leave the pedals WARNING clear and which are secured to prevent them ● Under no circumstances should the rear from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor passengers travel while the head restraints mats from a specialised dealership. are in the non-use position. See the warning label located on the rear side fixed win- If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be dow ››› Fig. 87. pressed down thoroughly in order to stop the vehicle. ● Do not swap the centre rear head restraint with either of the outer seat rear head restraints. Risk of injury in case of an Wear suitable footwear accident! Always wear shoes which support your feet properly and give you a good feeling for the Fig. 87 Head restraint position warning label. CAUTION pedals.

Properly adjusted head restraints are an im- Note the instructions on the adjustment of WARNING portant part of the passenger protection and the head restraints ››› page 148. can reduce the risk of injuries in most acci- ● If the pedals are obstructed, an accident dent situations may occur. Risk of serious injuries. ● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor coverings over the original floor mats. This

68 Seat belts would reduce the pedal area and could ob- Seat belts Seat belt control lamp* struct the pedals. Risk of accident. ● Never place objects in the driver footwell. An object could move into the pedal area Why wear a seat belt and impair pedal operation. In the event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, Number of seats you will not be able to operate the brake, clutch or accelerator pedal. Risk of acci- Your vehicle has five seats, two in the front dent! and three in the rear. Each seat is equipped with a three-point seat belt.

WARNING ● Never transport more than the permitted Fig. 88 Dashboard: right rear seat occupied amount of people in your vehicle. and corresponding seat belt fastened display. ● Every vehicle occupant must properly fasten and wear the seat belt belonging to  It lights up red his or her seat. Children must be protected Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt. with an appropriate child restraint system. The control lamp illuminates to remind the driver to fasten his seat belt. Before starting the vehicle:

● Fasten your seat belt securely. ● Instruct your passengers to fasten their seat belts properly before driving off. ● Protect children by using a child seat according to the child's height and weight.

When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speed surpasses approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and the seat belts are not fastened or are unfastened during the drive, a warning sound will be »

69 Safety

heard for a few seconds. The warning light The protective function of seat belts before every trip, even when "just driving will also flash . belts around the corner". The lamp  goes out when the driver and Ensure that your passengers wear their seat passenger seat belts are fastened with the belts as well. Accident statistics have shown ignition switched on. that wearing seat belts is an effective means of substantially reducing the risk of injury and Rear seat belts fastened display* improving the chances of survival when involved in a serious accident. Furthermore, Depending on the model version, when the properly worn seat belts improve the protec- ignition is switched on, the seat belt status tion provided by airbags in the event of an display ››› Fig. 88 on the instrument panel in- accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt forms the driver whether the passengers in is required by law in most countries. the rear seats have fastened their seat belts. The  symbol indicates that the passenger in Although your vehicle is equipped with air- this seat has fastened “his or her” seat belt. Fig. 89 Drivers with properly worn seat belts bags, the seat belts must be fastened and will not be thrown forward in the event of sud- worn. The front airbags, for example, are only When a seat belt in the rear seats is fastened den braking. triggered in some cases of head-on collision. or unfastened, the seat belt status is dis- The front airbags will not be triggered during played for approximately 30 seconds. The in- Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli- dication can be hidden by pressing the  in the proper position. These also help pre- sions, rollovers or accidents in which the air- button on the dash panel. vent uncontrolled movements that may result in serious injury and reduce the risk of being bag trigger threshold value in the control unit The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of thrown out of the vehicle. is not exceeded. 30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats Therefore, you should always wear your seat is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. An Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts belt and ensure that all vehicle occupants audible warning will also be heard if the vehi- correctly benefit greatly from the ability of have fastened their seat belts properly before cle is travelling at over 25 km/h (15 mph). the belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition, the front part of your vehicle and other pas- you drive off! sive safety features (such as the airbag system) are designed to absorb the kinetic energy released in a collision. Taken together, all Important safety instructions for these features reduce the releasing kinetic the use of seat belts energy and consequently, the risk of injury. This is why it is so important to fasten seat – Always wear the seat belt as described in this section.

70 Seat belts

– Ensure that the seat belts can be fastened ● Bulky and unfastened clothing (such as Head-on collisions and the laws of at all times and are not damaged. an overcoat over a sweater) impairs the physics proper fit and function of the seat belts, re- WARNING ducing their capacity to protect. ● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at ● The slot in the seat belt buckle must not all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The be blocked with paper or other objects, as optimal protection from seat belts can be this can prevent the latch plate from en- achieved only if you use them properly. gaging securely. ● Fasten your seat belt before every trip - ● Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings even when driving in town. Other vehicle or similar items to alter the position of the occupants must also wear the seat belts at belt webbing. all times, otherwise they run the risk of be- ● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to ing injured. the connections, belt retractors or parts of ● The seat belt cannot offer its full protec- the buckle could cause severe injuries in Fig. 90 A driver not wearing a seat belt is tion if the seat belt is not positioned cor- the event of an accident. Therefore, you thrown forward violently. rectly. must check the condition of all seat belts ● Never allow two passengers (even chil- at regular intervals. dren) to share the same seat belt. ● Seat belts which have been worn in an ● Always keep both feet in the footwell in accident and have been stretched must be front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in replaced by a specialised workshop. Re- motion. newal may be necessary even if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage ● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve- should also be checked. hicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury. ● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat ● The seat belt must never be twisted while belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re- it is being worn. moved or modified in any way. ● The seat belt should never lie on hard or ● The belts must be kept clean, otherwise Fig. 91 The unbelted passenger in the rear fragile objects (such as glasses or pens, the retractors may not work properly. seat is thrown forward violently, hitting the driv- etc.) because this can cause injuries. er who is wearing a seat belt. ● Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges. The effects of the laws of physics in the case ● Never wear the seat belt under the arm or of a head-on collision are easy to explain: the » in any other incorrect position.

71 Safety

moment a vehicle starts moving, a type of en- Even at low speeds the forces acting on the How to properly adjust your ergy called “kinetic energy” starts acting on body in a collision are so great that it is not both the vehicle and its passengers. possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In seat belt a frontal collision, unbelted passengers are The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on thrown forward and will make violent contact the speed of the vehicle and on the weight of Fastening and unfastening your with the steering wheel, dash panel, wind- the vehicle and of its passengers. The higher seat belt screen or whatever else is in the way the speed and the greater the weight, the ››› Fig. 90. more energy there is to be “absorbed” in an accident. It is also important for rear passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they could other- The most significant factor, however, is the wise be thrown forward violently through the speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), the rear seats who do not use seat belts en- for example, the corresponding kinetic ener- danger not only themselves but also the front gy is multiplied by four. occupants ››› Fig. 91. Because the vehicle occupants in our example are not restrained by seat belts, in the event of crashing against a wall, all of the occupants' kinetic energy will be absorbed solely by said impact. Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod- ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne (1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are even higher. Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are Fig. 92 Positioning and removing the seat belt not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on buckle. collision, they will move forward at the same speed their vehicle was travelling just before the impact. This example applies not only to head-on collisions, but to all accidents and collisions.

72 Seat belts

The seat belts are equipped with an auto- ● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve- matic retractor on the shoulder strap. Full hicle is in motion. If you do, you increase freedom of movement is permitted when the the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries. shoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, dur- ● An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause ing sudden braking, during travel in steep severe injuries in the event of an accident. areas or bends and during acceleration, the ● automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across locked. the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and fit The automatic belt retractors on the front comfortably on the torso seats are fitted with seat belt tensioners ● The lap part of the seat belt must lie ››› page 73. across the pelvis, never across the stom- Fig. 93 Position of seat belt during pregnancy. ach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit com- Releasing the seat belt fortably on the pelvis Pull the belt tight if necessary to take up any slack. Read the additional information carefully ● Press the red button on the belt buckle ›››  page 19. ››› Fig. 92. The latch plate is released and ● For pregnant women, the lap part of the springs out ››› . seat belt must lie as low as possible over the pelvis, never across the stomach, and Fasten your seat belt ● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls always lie flat so that no pressure is exer- The seat belt cannot offer its full protection if up easily and the trim is not damaged. ted on the abdomen ››› Fig. 93. the seat belt is not positioned correctly. ● Always engage the retractor lock when Positioning seat belts ● Adjust the seat and head restraint correct- you are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+ ly. Seat belts offer their maximum protection on- or 1 ››› page 80. ly when they are properly positioned. ● ● To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch Read and observe the warnings ››› page 70. plate and pull it slowly across your chest and WARNING lap. ● The seat belts offer best protection only ● Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the when the backrests are in an upright posi- appropriate seat and push it down until it is tion and the seat belts have been fastened Seat belt tensioners* securely locked with an audible click properly. ››› Fig. 92. ● Never put the latch plate in the buckle of How the seat belt tensioner works ● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is another seat. If you do this, the seat belt securely engaged in the buckle. will not protect you properly and the risk of Read the additional information carefully injury is increased. ›››  page 20 »

73 Safety

The seat belts for the front and side rear oc- belt tensioners function incorrectly or may Airbag system cupants are equipped with belt tensioners. not function at all. The belt tensioners are activated by sensors, So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten- although only in severe head-on and lateral sioner is not reduced and that removed parts Brief introduction collisions. This retracts and tightens the seat do not cause any injuries or environmental belts, reducing the forward motion of the oc- pollution, regulations, which are known to the Why is it so important to wear a cupants. specialised workshops, must be observed. seat belt and to sit correctly? The belt tensioners will not be triggered in the event of minor collisions, if the vehicle over- WARNING For the inflating airbags to achieve the best protection, the seat belt must always be worn turns, or in accidents where no major forces ● Improper use or repairs not carried out by act on the vehicle. qualified mechanics increase the risk of se- properly and the correct sitting position must vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners be assumed. Note may fail to trigger or may trigger in the The airbag system is not a substitute for seat ● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, a wrong circumstances. belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's fine dust is produced. This is normal and it ● Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or overall passive safety system. Please bear in is not an indication of fire in the vehicle. install parts of the belt tensioners or seat mind that the airbag system can only work ● The relevant safety requirements must be belts. effectively when the vehicle occupants are observed when the vehicle or components ● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and au- wearing their seat belts correctly and have of the system are scrapped. Specialised tomatic retractor cannot be repaired. adjusted the head restraints properly. There- workshops are familiar with these regula- ● Any work on the belt tensioners and seat fore, it is most important to properly wear the tions, which are also available to you. belts, including the removal and refitting of seat belts at all times, not only because this is system parts in conjunction with other re- required by law in most countries, but also for pair work, must be performed by a special- your safety ››› page 69, Why wear a seat Maintenance and disposal of belt ised workshop only. belt. tensioners ● The belt tensioners will only provide pro- The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so tection for one accident and must be if you are not properly seated when the air- The belt tensioners are components of the changed if they have been activated. bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju- seat belts that are installed in the seats of ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension- occupants assume a correct sitting position ers or remove and install parts of the system while travelling. when performing other repair work, the seat Sharp braking before an accident may cause belt may be damaged. The consequence a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be may be that, in the event of an accident, the 74 Airbag system thrown forward into the area of the deploying gered. Children up to 12 years old should ● side airbags, airbag. In this case, the inflating airbag may always travel on the rear seat. Never trans- ● curtain airbags, inflict critical or fatal injuries on the occupant. port children in the vehicle if they are not ● a control lamp  on the dash panel This also applies to children. restrained or the restraint system is not ap- ››› page 79. propriate for their age, size or weight. Always maintain the greatest possible dis- ● key-operated switch for front passenger tance between yourself and the front airbag. ● If you are not wearing a seat belt, or if airbag, This way, the front airbags can completely you lean forward or to the side while travel- deploy when triggered, providing their maxi- ling or assume an incorrect sitting position, ● a control lamp for disabling/enabling the mum protection. there is a substantially increased risk of in- front passenger airbag. jury. This increased risk of injury will be fur- The most important factors for triggering the ther increased if you are struck by an inflat- The airbag system operation is monitored airbag are the type of accident, the angle of ing airbag. electronically. The airbag control lamp will il- impact and the vehicle speed. ● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflat- luminate for a few seconds every time the ignition is switched on (self-diagnosis). Whether or not the airbags are triggered de- ing airbag, always wear the seat belt prop- pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration erly. There is a fault in the system if the control rate resulting from the collision and detected ● Always adjust the front seats properly. lamp : by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration occurring during the collision and measured ● does not light up when the ignition is by the control unit remains below the speci- Description of airbag system switched on ››› page 79, fied reference values, the front, side and/or ● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is curtain airbags will not be triggered. Take into Read the additional information carefully switched on, account that the visible damage in a vehicle ›››  page 21. ● turns off and then lights up again after the involved in an accident, no matter how seri- ignition is switched on, ous, is not a determining factor for the air- The airbag system is not a substitute for the bags to have been triggered. seat belts. The airbag system offers addition- ● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is al protection for the driver and passenger in moving. WARNING combination with the seat belts. The airbag system is not triggered if: ● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or as- The airbag system mainly comprises (as suming an incorrect sitting position can ● the ignition is switched off per vehicle equipment): lead to critical or fatal injuries. ● there is a minor frontal collision ● an electronic control and monitoring sys- ● All vehicle occupants, including children, ● there is a minor side collision who are not properly belted can sustain tem (control unit) ● critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is trig- ● frontal airbags for driver and passenger, there is a rear-end collision »

75 Safety

● the vehicle turns over. Activation factors In an accident with airbag activation: The conditions that lead to the airbag system ● the interior lights switch on (if the interior WARNING activating in each situation cannot be gener- light switch is in the courtesy light position); ● The seat belts and airbags can only pro- alised. Some factors play an important role, ● the hazard warning lights switch on; vide maximum protection if the occupants such as the properties of the object the vehi- ● all doors are unlocked; are seated correctly ››› page 64, Correct cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle position of the vehicle occupants. speed, etc. ● the fuel supply to the engine is cut. ● If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys- Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti- tem, have the system checked immediately vation. by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, during a frontal collision the system might not The control unit analyses the collision trajec- Safety instructions about trigger correctly or may fail to trigger at all. tory and activates the respective restraint airbags system. If the deceleration rate is below the prede- Front airbags Airbag activation fined reference value in the control unit the airbags will not be triggered, even though the Read the additional information carefully The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within accident may cause extensive damage to the ›››  page 21. thousandths of a second, to provide addition- car. al protection in the event of an accident. A WARNING fine dust may develop when the airbag de- The following airbags are triggered in seri- ● The seat belts and airbags can only pro- ploys. This is normal and it is not an indication ous head-on collisions: vide maximum protection if the occupants of fire in the vehicle. ● Driver airbag. are seated correctly ››› page 64, Correct The airbag system is only ready to function position of the vehicle occupants. ● Front passenger front airbag when the ignition is on. ● The deployment space between the front passengers and the airbags must not in In special accidents instances, several air- The following airbags are triggered in seri- any case be occupied by other passenger, bags may activate at the same time. ous side-on collisions: pets and objects. In the event of minor head-on and side colli- ● Front side airbag on the side of the acci- ● The airbags provide protection for just sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll- dent. one accident; replace them once they have over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate. ● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac- deployed. cident. ● It is also important not to attach any objects such as cup holders or telephone

76 Airbag system

mountings to the surfaces covering the air- ● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks, should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting bag units. must not be exerted upon the backrest bol- loudspeakers). If the front door is dam- ● Do not attempt to modify components of ster because the system may be damaged. aged, the airbag system may not work cor- the airbag system in any way. In this case, the side airbags would not be rectly. All work carried out on the front door triggered. must be done in a specialised workshop. ● Under no circumstances should protec- ● In a side-on collision the side airbags will tive covers be fitted over seats with side not work if the sensors do not correctly Side airbags* airbags unless the covers have been ap- measure the pressure increase on the inte- proved for use in your vehicle. Because the rior of the doors, due to air escaping Read the additional information carefully airbag deploys from the side of the back- through the areas with holes or openings in ›››  page 22. rest, the use of conventional seat covers the door panel. would obstruct the side airbag, seriously ● Never drive if the interior door panels WARNING reducing the airbag's effectiveness. have been removed or if the panels have ● If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean ● Any damage to the original seat uphols- not been correctly fitted. forward, or are not seated correctly while tery or around the seams of the side airbag ● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeak- the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater units must be repaired immediately by a ers in the door panels have been removed, risk of injury if the side airbag system is specialised workshop. unless the holes left by the loudspeakers triggered in an accident. ● The airbags provide protection for just have been closed properly. ● In order for the side airbags to provide one accident; replace them once they have ● Always check that the openings are their maximum protection, the prescribed deployed. closed or covered if additional loudspeak- sitting position must always be maintained ● Any work on the side airbag system or re- ers or other equipment are fitted inside the with seat belts fastened while travelling. moval and installation of the airbag com- door panels. ● Occupants of the outer seats must never ponents for other repairs (such as removal ● Any work carried out to the doors should carry any objects or pets in the deploy- of the front seat) should only be performed be made in an authorised specialised work- ment space between them and the airbags, by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, shop. or allow children or other passengers to faults may occur during the airbag system travel in this position. It is also important operation. not to attach any accessories (such as cup ● Do not attempt to modify components of holders) to the doors. This would impair the the airbag system in any way. Head-protection airbags* protection offered by the side airbags. ● The side and head airbags are managed ● The built-in coat hooks should be used Read the additional information carefully through sensors located in the interior of ›››  page 23. » only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave the front doors. To ensure the correct oper- any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the ation of the side and curtain (head) airbags pockets. neither the doors nor the door panels 77 Safety

WARNING Otherwise, faults may occur during the air- Deactivating airbags bag system operation. ● In order for the head-protection airbags to provide their maximum protection, the ● Do not attempt to modify components of Activation and deactivation of front prescribed sitting position must always be the airbag system in any way. passenger airbag* maintained with seat belts fastened while ● The side and head airbags are managed travelling. through sensors located in the interior of ● For safety reasons, the curtain airbag the front doors. To ensure the correct oper- must be disabled in those vehicles fitted ation of the side and curtain airbags nei- with a screen dividing the interior of the ve- ther the doors nor the door panels should hicle. See your technical service to make be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loud- this adjustment. speakers). If the front door is damaged, the airbag system may not work correctly. All ● There must be no other persons, animals work carried out on the front door must be or objects between the occupants of the done in a specialised workshop. outer seats and the deployment space of the head-protection airbags so that the head-protection airbag can deploy completely without restriction and provide the Fig. 94 Switch for activating and deactivating greatest possible protection. Therefore, the front passenger airbag. sun blinds which have not been expressly approved for use in your vehicle may not be attached to the side windows ● The built-in coat hooks should be used only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on coat hangers. ● The airbags provide protection for just one accident; replace them once they have deployed. ● Any work on the head-protection airbag Fig. 95 Centre of the instrument panel: control lamp for deactivated front passenger airbag in system or removal and installation of the centre console. airbag components for other repairs (such as removal of the roof lining) should only be performed by a specialised workshop. 78 Airbag system

Deactivate the front passenger front airbag Connect the front passenger front airbag Airbag system control lamps only if you have to use a rear-facing child ● Switch the ignition off. seat in the front passenger seat. ● Open the front passenger door.  It lights up on the combi-instru- SEAT recommends fitting the child seat in the ment ● Insert the key into the slot of the switch for rear seat to avoid having to deactivate the deactivating the front passenger airbag Fault in airbag system and seat belt tensioners. front passenger airbag. ››› Fig. 94. About 3/4 of the key should enter, Have the system checked immediately by a special- as far as it will go. ised workshop. Front passenger front airbag switch ● Turn the key gently to the  position. If you When the front passenger airbag is deacti- have difficulty, ensure that you have inserted   It lights up on the dash panel vated, this means that only the front passen- the key as far as it will go. ger front airbag is deactivated. All the other Front passenger front airbag disabled. ● Check whether the airbag should remain disabled airbags in the vehicle remain activated. Close the front passenger door. ● Check, with the ignition switched on, that Disconnect the front passenger front air- the   control lamp is not lit where it says   It lights up on the dash panel bag      in the centre of the dash Front passenger airbag enabled. panel ››› Fig. 95. The   control lamp lights ● Switch the ignition off. The control lamp switches off automatically 60 sec- up for 60 seconds and then goes off. onds after the ignition is switched on ● Open the door on the front passenger side. ● Insert the key into the slot of the switch for WARNING Several warning and control lamps light up deactivating the front passenger airbag ● The driver of the vehicle is responsible for for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ››› Fig. 94. About 3/4 of the key should enter; disabling or switching on the airbag. ed on, signalling that the function is being this is as far as it will go. verified. They will switch off after a few sec- ● Always switch off the ignition before dis- onds. ● Turn the key gently to the  position. If you abling the front passenger airbag! Failure have difficulty, ensure that you have inserted to do so could result in a fault in the airbag If the airbag and seat belt tensioner system the key as far as it will go. deactivation system. control lamp  remains on or flashes, it indi- ● Close the front passenger door. ● Never leave the key in the airbag disa- cates a malfunction in the airbag and seat bling switch as it could get damaged or en- ● Check, with the ignition switched on, that belt tensioner system ››› . Have the system able or disable the airbag during driving. the   control lamp remains lit where it checked immediately by a specialised work- says      in the centre of the ● If for any reason an airbag is deactivated, shop. dash panel ››› Fig. 95. reactivate it as soon as possible so that it If the front passenger airbag is deactivated, can fulfil its protective function. the warning lamp      remains lit on the dash panel to remind you that »

79 Safety

the airbag is deactivated. If, with the front Transporting children These systems have been especially de- passenger airbag deactivated, this lamp signed and approved, complying with the does not remain lit or if it is lit together with safely ECE-R44. regulation. the control lamp  on the dash panel, there SEAT recommends securing the child seats is a fault in the airbag system ››› . If the con- shown on the website as described below: trol lamp is flashing, there is a fault in the dis- Safety for children abling of the airbag system ››› . Have the ● Child seats in the opposite direction of trav- system checked immediately by a special- Introduction el (group 0+): ISOFIX and support bracket ised workshop. (Peke G0 Plus + ISOFIX Base (RWF)). For safety reasons, as we have learned from ● Child seats in the direction of travel (group WARNING accident statistics, we recommend that chil- 1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (Peke G1 ISOFIX dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear In the event of a fault in the airbag and seat DUO Plus). seats. Depending on their age, height and belt tensioner system, the airbags and seat ● Child seats directed towards the front of belts may not trigger correctly, may fail to weight, children travelling in rear seats must the vehicle for group 2: safety belt and ISOFIX trigger or may even trigger unexpectedly. use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety reasons, the child seat should be installed in the (RÖMER KIDFIX XP©). ● The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus- rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or taining severe or fatal injuries. Have the ● Child seats directed towards the front of in the centre back seat. system checked immediately by a special- the vehicle for group 3: safety belt and ISOFIX © ised workshop. The physical laws involved and the forces (TATAKI MAXI PLUS ). acting in a collision apply also to children ● Do not mount a child seat in the front Follow the manufacturer's instructions and page 71. But unlike adults, children do not passenger seat or remove the mounted ››› observe any statutory requirements when in- have fully developed muscle and bone struc- child seat! The front passenger front airbag stalling and using child seats. Always read may deploy during an accident in spite of tures. This means that children are subject to and note ››› page 81. the fault. a greater risk of injury. We recommend you always carry the manu- To reduce the risk of injuries, children must al- facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to- CAUTION ways use special child restraint systems gether with the on-board documentation. Always pay attention to any lit control when travelling in the vehicle. lamps and to the corresponding descrip- We recommend the use of child safety prod- tions and instructions to avoid damage to ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro- the vehicle or harm to the occupants. gramme, which includes systems for all ages made by “Peke” (not for all countries) (see www.seat.com).

80 Transporting children safely

Important information regarding ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an ● Never allow a child to be transported in a the front passenger's airbag accident increases. vehicle without being properly secured, or ● An inflating front passenger airbag can to stand up or kneel on a seat while travel- Read the additional information carefully strike the rear-facing child seat and project ling. In an accident, the child could be flung ›››  page 24. it with great force against the door, the roof through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal or the backrest. injuries to themselves and to the other vehi- Read and always observe the safety informa- cle occupants. ● Never install a child seat facing back- tion included in the following chapters: wards on the front passenger seat unless ● If children assume an improper sitting position when the vehicle is moving, they ex- ● the front passenger front airbag has been Safety distance with respect to the passen- pose themselves to greater risk of injury in ger airbag ››› page 74. disabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries to the child! However, if it is necessary, in ex- the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre ● Objects between the passenger and the ceptional cases, to transport a child in the or in an accident. This is particularly impor- passenger side airbag ››› in Front airbags front passenger seat, the front passenger tant if the child is travelling on the front on page 76. front airbag must always be disabled passenger seat and the airbag system is ››› page 78, Activation and deactivation of triggered in an accident; as this could The passenger side front airbag, when ena- front passenger airbag*. If the passenger cause serious injury or even death. bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facing seat has a height adjustment option, move ● A suitable child seat can protect your backward since the airbag can strike the seat it to the highest, most upright position. If it child! with such force that it can cause serious or is a fixed seat, it should be moved to the ● Never leave a child alone in the child seat fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old rearmost position possible. or inside the vehicle because depending on should always travel on the rear seat. ● For those vehicles that do not include a the season, very high temperatures may be Therefore we strongly recommend you to key lock switch to deactivate the airbag, reached inside a parked vehicle, which transport children on the rear seats. This is the vehicle must be taken to a technical could be fatal. the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative- service. Do not forget to reconnect the air- ● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tall ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa- bag when an adult wants to sit in the front must not wear a normal seat belt without a passenger seat. bled with a key-operated switch ››› page 78. child seat, as this could cause injuries to When transporting children, use a child seat ● All vehicle occupants, especially chil- the abdominal and neck areas during a suitable for the age and size of each child dren, must assume the proper sitting posi- sudden braking manoeuvre or in an acci- ››› page 82. tion and be properly belted in while travel- dent. ling. ● Do not allow the seat belt to become WARNING ● Never hold children or babies on your lap, twisted and the seat belt should be proper- this can result in potentially fatal injuries to ly in place ››› page 69. ● If a child seat is secured to the front pas- the child! senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain- ● Only one child may occupy a child seat ››› page 82, Child seats. » 81 Safety

● When a child seat is mounted in the rear WARNING Group 3 from 22 to 36 kg (up to approx. 7 seats, the door child-proof lock should be years old) An undue installation of the safety seat will activated ››› page 133. increase the risk of injury in the event of a Child seats that have been tested and ap- crash. proved under the ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129 ● Never tie the retainer strap to a hook in standard bear the test mark ECE-R 44 or Child seats the luggage compartment. ECE-R 129 on the seat (the letter E in a circle ● Never secure or tie luggage or other with the test number below it). Safety instructions items to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) or Follow the manufacturer's instructions and the upper ones (Top Tether). observe any statutory requirements when in- Read the additional information carefully stalling and using child seats.  page 23. ››› We recommend you to always include the Categorisation of child seats into manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual WARNING groups together with the on-board documentation. When travelling, children must be secured SEAT recommends you use child seats from in the vehicle with a restraint system suita- Use only child seats that are officially ap- ble for age, weight and size. proved and suitable for the child. the Original Accessories Catalogue. These child seats have been designed and tested ● Read and always observe information Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE- for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the right and warnings concerning the use of child R 44 or ECE-R 129. ECE-R stands for: Eco- child seat for your model and age group at seats ››› page 81. nomic Commission for Europe Regulation. SEAT dealers. The child seats are grouped into 5 catego- WARNING ries: Child seats by approval category The retaining rings are designed only for Child seats may have the approval category Group 0 Up to 10 kg (up to around 9 use with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system of universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific months) child seats. (all according to the ECE-R 44 standard) or i- ● Never secure other child seats that do Group 0+ Up to 13 kg (up to around 18 Size (according to the ECE-R 129 standard). not have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* sys- months) tem, or retaining belts or objects to the fas- ● Universal: child seats with universal appro- tening rings - this can result in potentially Group 1 from 9 to 18 kg (up to approx. 4 val can be installed in all vehicles. There is no fatal injuries to the child. years old) need to consult any list of models. In the case ● Ensure that the child seat is secured cor- of universal approval for ISOFIX, the child rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* Group 2 from 15 to 25 kg (up to approx. 7 seat is additionally provided with a Top Tether securing rings. years old) belt. 82 Transporting children safely

● Semi-universal: semi-universal approval, The child seat has two rigid attachment clips, available in the instructions for child restraint in addition to the standard requirements of called connectors. These connectors are fit- systems. universal approval, requires safety devices to ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings found lock the child seat, which require additional between the seat cushion and the backrest Recommended systems for attaching testing. Child seats with semi-universal ap- of the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISO- child seats proval include a list of vehicle models for FIX attachment systems are used mainly in SEAT recommends attaching child seats as which they can be installed. Europe  page 27. If necessary, ISOFIX ››› follows: ● Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approval attachment may have to be supplemented requires a dynamic test of the child seat for with a Top Tether belt or a support bracket. ● Baby carriers or child seats in the oppo- each vehicle model separately. Child seats site direction of travel: ISOFIX and support ● Automatic three-point seat belt. When- with vehicle-specific approval also include a bracket or iSize. ever possible, it is preferable to attach the list of vehicle models for which they can be child seats with the ISOFIX system rather than ● Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO- installed. attaching them with an automatic three-point FIX and Top Tether. ● i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval must seat belt ›››  page 25. meet the requirements prescribed in the ECE- WARNING R 129 standard in relation to installation and Additional attachment: Incorrect use of the support bracket can safety. Child seat manufacturers can tell you cause serious or fatal injury. ● Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guided which seats have i-Size approval for this vehi- over the back of the rear seat and attached ● Make sure the support bracket is correct- cle. to an anchor point with a hook. Anchor points ly and safely installed. are located at the back of the rear seat backrest on the boot side ›››  page 30. The Attachment systems rings for retaining the Top Tether belt are marked with an anchor symbol. Depending on the country, different attach- ● ment systems are used for safely installing Support bracket: some child seats rest on child seats. the floor of the vehicle with a support bracket. The support bracket prevents the child seat from tipping forward in the event of impact. Attachment systems overview Child seats fitted with a support bracket ● ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach- should only be used in the passenger seat ment system allowing quick and safe attach- and side rear seats ››› . For the assembly of ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at- this type of seat you should also consult the tachment establishes a rigid connection be- list of approved vehicles for this assembly, tween the child seat and the car body. 83 Emergencies

Emergencies Note ● Towline anchorage ● ● The first-aid kit and the fire extinguisher Box spanner for wheel bolts* are not part of the vehicle's standard ● Jack* Self-help equipment. ● Wire hook for pulling off the wheel covers* / ● The first aid kit must comply with legal wheel bolt cap clip. Emergency equipment requirements. ● Observe the expiry date of the contents Some of the items listed are only provided in certain model versions, or are optional extras. Emergency warning triangle* of the first aid kit. After it has expired you should purchase a new one. WARNING The use of reflective warning triangles is ● The fire extinguisher must comply with le- obligatory in emergencies in some countries. gal requirements. ● The factory-supplied jack is only designed for changing wheels on this model. As are the first aid kit and a set of spare light ● Ensure that the fire extinguisher is fully On no account attempt to use it for lifting bulbs. functional. The fire extinguisher should, heavier vehicles or other loads. Risk of in- therefore, be checked regularly. The sticker The warning triangle is under the storage jury. on the fire extinguisher will inform you of compartment which is located under the lug- the next date for checking. ● Use the jack only on a firm, level ground. gage compartment floor. ● Before acquiring accessories and emer- ● Never start the engine when the vehicle is Note gency equipment see the instructions in on the jack. Risk of accident. “Accessories and spares” ››› page 307. ● If work is to be carried out underneath the ● The warning triangle is not part of the ve- vehicle, this must be secured by suitable hicle's standard equipment. means. Otherwise, there is a risk of injury. ● The warning triangle should meet legal Vehicle tools requirements. Note Read the additional information carefully The jack does not generally require any  page 53 ››› maintenance. If required, it should be First-aid kit and fire extinguisher* Depending on the equipment, the tools and greased using universal type grease. The first-aid kit can go in the storage com- anti-puncture kit* are stored under the floor partment which is located under the luggage panel in the luggage compartment. compartment floor. The tool kit includes: The fire extinguisher* is attached to the lug- ● Adapter for the anti-theft wheel bolts* gage compartment carpet with Velcro.

84 Self-help

Tyre repair ● If the sealant bottle has passed its use by ● Always stop the engine, apply the hand- date. brake lever firmly and engage gear if using TMS (Tyre Mobility System)* a manual gearbox, in order to reduce the WARNING risk of vehicle involuntary movement. Read the additional information carefully Using the tyre mobility system can be dan- ›››  page 52 gerous, especially when filling the tyre at WARNING the roadside. Please observe the following The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System) rules to minimise the risk of injury: A tyre filled with sealant does not have the will reliably seal punctures caused by the same performance properties as a conven- ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi- tional tyre. penetration of a foreign body of up to about ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur- ● 4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreign rounding traffic to fill the tyre. Never drive faster than 80 km/h objects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre. (50 mph). ● Ensure the ground on which you park is ● After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre, flat and solid. Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast cornering. you must again check the tyre pressure ● All passengers and particularly children ● about 10 minutes after starting the engine. must keep a safe distance from the work Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum area. speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check You should only use the tyre mobility set if the the tyre. vehicle is parked in a safe place, you are fa- ● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warn miliar with the procedure and you have the other road users. For the sake of the environment necessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, you ● Use the tyre mobility system only if you should seek professional assistance. are familiar with the necessary procedures. Dispose of used or expired sealant observ- Otherwise, you should seek professional ing any legal requirements. Do not use the tyre sealant in the following assistance. cases: ● The tyre mobility set is intended for tem- Note porary emergency use only until you can ● If the wheel rim has been damaged. ● A new bottle of sealant can be purchased reach the nearest specialised workshop. ● In outside temperatures below -20°C at SEAT dealerships. ● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre (-4°F). ● Take into account the separate instruc- mobility set as soon as possible. ● In the event of cuts or perforations in the tion manual of the tyre mobility set* manu- ● The sealant is a health hazard and must tyre greater than 4 mm. facturer. be cleaned immediately if it comes into ● If you have been driving with very low pres- contact with the skin. sure or a completely flat tyre. ● Always keep the tyre mobility set out of the reach of small children.

85 Emergencies

Contents of the tyre mobility sys- 6 Air bleed screw (it can also be integrated CAUTION in the inflator tube). tem* Switch off the air compressor after a maxi- 7 Warning provided by tyre pressure moni- mum of 8 operational minutes to avoid toring system (it can also be integrated in overheating! Before switching on the air the inflator tube). compressor again, let it cool for several mi- 8 Tube for inflating tyres nutes. 9 12 volt connector

10 Bottle of sealant Check after 10 minutes of driving 11 Spare tyre valve Screw in the inflator tube ››› Fig. 96 8 again The valve insert remover 1 has a gap at and check the pressure on the gauge 7 . the lower end for the valve insert. The valve insert can only be screwed or unscrewed in this way. This also applies to its replacement 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower: part 11 . ● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be Fig. 96 Standard display: contents of the anti- sealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set. puncture kit. WARNING ● You should obtain professional assistance The anti-puncture kit is located underneath When inflating the wheel, the air compres- ››› . the floor covering in the luggage compart- sor and the inflator tube may become hot. ment. It includes the following components ● Protect hands and skin from hot parts. 1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher: ››› Fig. 96: ● Do not place the hot flexible inflator tube ● Set the tyre pressure to the correct value or hot air compressor on flammable mate- again. 1 Valve insert remover rial. ● Carefully resume your journey, without ex- 2 A sticker to be adhered to the instrument ● Allow them to cool before storing the de- ceeding 80 km/h (50 mph), until you reach cluster, within the driver's visual field, to vice. the nearest specialised workshop and re- remind that the maximum advisable ● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at place the tyre. speed “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph” least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is 3 Filler tube with cap too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a WARNING good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con- 4 Air compressor Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance. 5 ON/OFF switch and can cause accidents and serious injury.

86 Self-help

● Do not continue driving if the tyre pres- checked by a specialised workshop and cor- windscreen in the winter to keep it clear of sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower. rected if necessary. ice. ● Seek specialist assistance. WARNING Do not drive unless you have good visibility through all windows! Towing or tow-starting Changing the windscreen ● Clean the windscreen wiper blades and wiper blades all windows regularly. General information ● The wiper blades should be changed Read the additional information carefully once or twice a year. Changing the windscreen and rear ›››  page 58. window wiper blades CAUTION Tow-starting means starting the engine of the vehicle while another pulls it. Read the additional information carefully ● Damaged or dirty windscreen wipers ›››  page 61. could scratch the glass. Towing means one vehicle pulling another that is not roadworthy. Perfect windscreen wiper blade condition is ● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint essential for clear vision. Damaged wiper thinner or similar products to clean the win- If the vehicle comes with the Keyless Access blades should be replaced immediately. dows. This could damage the windscreen system, towing is only allowed with the igni- wiper blades. tion on! The windscreen wiper blades are supplied as ● Never move any windscreen wiper by The vehicle battery drains if the vehicle is standard with a layer of graphite. This layer is hand. This could cause damage. responsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent. towed with the engine switched off and the ● To prevent damage to the bonnet and the If the graphite layer is damaged, the noise of ignition connected. Depending on the battery windscreen wiper arms, the latter should the water as it is wiped across the windscreen charge status, the drop in voltage may be so only be lifted off the windscreen when in will be louder. large, even after just a few minutes, that no service position. electrical device in the vehicle may work e.g. Check the condition of the wiper blades reg- the hazard warning lights. In vehicles with the ularly. If the wipers scrape across the Note Keyless Access system, the steering wheel glass, they should be changed if they are could lock up. damaged, or cleaned if they are dirty ››› . ● The windscreen wiper arms can be moved to the service position only when If this does not produce the desired results, the bonnet is properly closed. WARNING the setting angle of the windscreen wiper ● You can also use the service position, for If the vehicle has no electrical power, the arms might be incorrect. They should be example, if you want to fix a cover over the brake lights, turn signals and all other »

87 Emergencies

lights will no longer function. Do not have Indications for tow-starting Note the vehicle towed away. Failure to follow The vehicle can only be tow-started if the this instruction could result in an accident. Vehicle's should not generally be tow- electronic parking brake and, if appropri- started. The jump start should be used in- ate, the electronic lock of the steering col- stead ›››  page 59. WARNING umn are deactivated. If the vehicle has no power supply or there is an electric system The risk of accidents is high when tow- For technical reasons, towing the following fault, the engine must be tow-started to de- starting, for example, the towed vehicle vehicles is not allowed: activate the electronic parking brake and can easily be driven into the towing vehicle. ● Vehicles with an automatic gearbox. the electronic lock of the steering column. ● If the vehicle battery is discharged, be- CAUTION cause in vehicles with the Keyless Access If there is no oil in the gearbox or no lubri- locking and ignition system the steering re- cant in the automatic transmission the car mains locked and the electronic parking may only be towed with the driven wheels brake cannot be deactivated nor can the lifted clear of the road, or transported on a electronic lock of the steering column be re- special car transporter or trailer. leased if they are activated. ● If the battery is flat, it is possible that the CAUTION engine control units may not operate correct- Do not tow a vehicle for more than 50 m in ly. attempt to start it. There is risk of damage to the catalytic converter. However, if the vehicle must absolutely be tow-started (in the case of manual gear- Note boxes): ● ● Please observe related legal require- Engage the 2nd or 3rd gear. ments. ● Keep the clutch pressed down. ● Switch on the hazard warning lights of ● Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn- both vehicles. However, observe any regu- ing lights. lations to the contrary. ● Once both vehicles are moving, release the ● The tow rope must not be twisted. Other- clutch. wise the front tow line anchorage could be ● Once the engine starts, press the clutch pulled off the vehicle. and disengage the gear to avoid colliding with the towing vehicle. 88 Self-help

Anchoring the front tow line – Take the towline anchorage from the on- board tool set.

– Remove the cover by pressing down on its right-hand side until it is unclipped ››› Fig. 97. – Bolt the anchorage to its limit to the left, in the direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 98.

After use, unscrew the towline anchorage and fit the cover back on the bumper. Put the towline anchorage back in the vehicle tool kit. Fig. 100 Right side of the rear bumper: towline anchorage screwed in. The towline anchorage should always be Fig. 97 Right side of the front bumper: remove kept in the vehicle. the lid. The rear towline anchorage should only be mounted if you wish to tow another vehicle. Rear towline anchorage On the right of the rear bumper there is a cover which covers a threaded hole.

– Take the towline anchorage out of the vehicle tool set ››› page 84. – Remove the cover by pressing down on its right-hand side until it is unclipped ››› Fig. 99. – Screw the towline anchorage into the screw connection as far as it will go ››› Fig. 100 Fig. 98 Right side of the front bumper: towline anchorage screwed in. and tighten with the wheel brace. After use, unscrew the towline anchorage and The front towline anchorage is only mounted Fig. 99 Right side of the rear bumper: cover- put it back in the vehicle tool kit. Replace the if the vehicle has to be towed. cap. cover on the bumper. The towline anchorage There is a cover with an opening into which should always be kept in the vehicle. » the towline anchorage is screwed on the right part of the front bumper.

89 Emergencies

WARNING Towing a vehicle equipped with au- Note ● If the towline anchorage is not screwed in tomatic gearbox ● If it is not possible to tow the vehicle in as far as the stop, there is a risk of the the normal way, or if it has to be towed fur- screw connection shearing off during tow- Certain restrictions must be observed when ther than 50 km (30 miles), it must be ing (accident risk). towing your vehicle. transported on a special car transporter or ● If your car has a towing bracket, only use Please observe the relevant instructions trailer. special towing ropes. Risk of accident! ››› page 87. ● Should the power supply to the selector lever be interrupted in position P, the selec- The vehicle can be towed with a tow bar or tor lever will be locked. Before the vehicle CAUTION tow rope in the normal way, with all four can be recovered/manoeuvred you must In vehicles fitted with a towing bracket, on- wheels on the ground. When doing so, please manually release the selector lever. ly use special tow bars to prevent damage note the following points: to the ball joint. These tow bars have been specially approved for use with towing ● Make sure the selector lever is in the N brackets. position. ● The vehicle must not be towed faster than 50 km/h (30 mph). Towing vehicles with a manual ● The vehicle must not be towed further than gearbox 50 km (30 miles). Reason: when the engine is not running, the gearbox oil pump does not Towing is relatively straightforward. work and the gearbox is not adequately lubricated for higher speeds or longer distances. Please observe the relevant instructions ››› page 87. If the vehicle has to be towed with a breakdown truck, it must only be suspended at the The vehicle can be towed using a tow bar or front wheels. Reason: the drive shafts are lo- tow rope in the normal way, with all four cated on the front wheels. If the car is towed wheels on the road; it can also be towed with with the rear wheels lifted off the road (I.e. either the front or rear wheels lifted off the travelling backwards), the drive shafts also road. The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h turn backwards. The planetary gears in the (30 mph). automatic gearbox then turn at such high speeds that the gearbox will be severely damaged in a short time.

90 Fuses and bulbs

Fuses and bulbs perage (same colour and markings) and ● Positions not containing a fuse do not ap- size. pear in the following tables. Fuses ● Never repair a fuse. ● Some of the equipment listed in the ta- ● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta- bles below pertain only to certain versions ple or similar. of the model or are optional extras. Introduction ● Please note that the above lists, while correct at the time of printing, are subject CAUTION In general, a fuse can be assigned to various to change. electrical components. Likewise, an electrical ● To prevent damage to the vehicle's elec- component can be protected by several tric system, before replacing a fuse always fuses. turn off the ignition, the lights and all electrical elements and remove the key from Fuses to the left of the instrument Only replace fuses when the cause of the the ignition. panel problem has been solved. If a newly inserted fuse blows after a short time, you must have ● If you replace a fuse with higher-rating Read the additional information carefully the electrical system checked by a special- fuse, you could cause damage to another ›››  page 50 ised workshop as soon as possible. part of the electrical system. ● Protect the fuse boxes when open to pre- Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same WARNING vent the entry of dust or humidity as they amperage (same colour and markings) and can damage the electrical system. size. The high voltages in the electrical system can give serious electrical shocks, causing ● Always carefully remove the fuse box burns and even death! covers and refit them correctly to avoid No. Consumer/Amps problems with your vehicle. ● Never touch the electrical wiring of the 1 Tow Hook 20 ignition system. Note 2 Cigarette lighter /Power point 20 ● Take care not to cause short circuits in the electrical system. ● One component may have more than one 3 Sound amplifier 30 fuse. 6 Central locking 40 WARNING ● Several components may run on a single fuse. 8 Heating fan/Climatronic 30 Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or bridging a current circuit without fuses can ● In the vehicle, there are more fuses than 10 Tow Hook 20 cause a fire and serious injury. those indicated in this chapter. These should only be changed by a specialised Lights switch, steering column LSS ● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only workshop. 13 and SMLS, diagnostic port, 7.5 » replace fuses with a fuse of the same am- rain/light sensor 91 Emergencies

No. Consumer/Amps No. Consumer/Amps No. Consumer/Amps

14 Steering Column LSS: wiper control 10 36 Signal Horn 20 60 Tow Hook 30

15 Instrument panel 7.5 37 Heated seats control unit 30 61 Tow Hook 30

16 Right Lights Power Supply 40 38 BCM Power C63 30

17 Right Door Window Control 30 39 BSD, PDC, MRR 10 Fuse arrangement in engine com- 18 Windscreen wipers 30 Light switch, diagnosis input, head- partment lamp range regulator, LSS steering 19 Radio, Multimedia System 25 40 column: lamps, halogen lamps, 7.5 Read the additional information carefully switch, reverse gear, electrochromic  page 50 20 Heated Rear Window 30 mirror, RKA without radio. ››› Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same 21 SCR Control Unit 30 Regulation of unfolded exterior mir- 41 7.5 rors, amperage (same colour and markings) and 23 Rear View Camera 7.5 size. Clutch pedal, ignition relays, AA Connectivity Box, external audio 42 7.5 pressure sensor 24 source wiring (Double USB-Aux IN), 5 No. Consumer/Amps telephone amplifier, MIB display 43 DWP relay coil, rear window wiper 15 MPI Engine Injection Module 10 motor, heated nozzles 25 Steering Column Electronics (MFL) 7.5 1 TSI Engine Injection Module 15 44 Airbag 7.5 26 Gateway 7.5 Diesel Engine Injection Module 30 45 Leimo Plus left headlight 7.5 27 Active Suspension Control Unit 7.5 Fuel metering valve (TJ4/T6P/TJ7), 46 Leimo Plus right headlight 7.5 28 DWA Sensor 7.5 Low temperature coolant pump Steering Column Lock, Kessy Con- (TJ4/T6P/TJ7); Oil Pressure Regu- 29 DWA Horn 7.5 48 7.5 2 7.5 trol Unit lating Valve (TJ1), Coolant Valve AGR (TJ1), High and Low Water 9AA/9AB climate control unit 7.5 Bumps (TJ1), SCR relay coil 31 49 SCR Relay Coil 7.5 9AK Climatronic control unit 15 53 Automatic gearbox lever, ZSS 7.5 3 Lambda probes 15 32 Steering Column LSS, without Kessy 7.5 Petrol engine pump relay (MPI), 58 Double Water Pump 7.5 4 15 Gauge control unit (TSI and diesel) 33 Left Door Window Control 30 59 Heated rear view mirrors 10 35 Left Lights Power Supply 40

92 Fuses and bulbs

No. Consumer/Amps No. Consumer/Amps Depending on how equipped the vehicle is, there are different sets of headlights and tail Pressure transducer, EPW Solenoid TH4 fan with A/C or T5I for moder- 20 lights: Valve, TOG Sensor, PWM Electric 25 ate climate countries 5 fan, Camshaft Control Valve, Active 10 ● Halogen headlights. Carbon Tank Valve and Oil Pressure PTC1 40 ● Regulating Valve (TSI) Full-LED main headlights* TJ1/TJ4/TJ7/T6P or TH4/T5I Electric 26 50 ● Halogen headlights with LED daytime run- Ignition coils (MPI and TSI) 20 fan for warm climate countries ning lights* 6 Glow plug relay, Suction hose re- TH4 fan with A/C or T5I for moder- 7.5 30 ● Rear bulb light sistance (diesel) 27 ate climate countries ● LED rear light* 7 Vacuum pump (TSI) 15 PTC2 40 Full-LED headlight system* Injectors and EKP Relay Coil (MPI), 28 PTC3 40 8 10 Fuel metering valve (diesel) Full-LED headlights handle all light functions (daylight, side light, turn signal, dipped beam 9 Servo sensor 7.5 and route light) with light emitting diodes Vref Battery: Gateway, BDM and Changing bulbs (LEDs) as a light source. 10 7.5 BCM Full-LED headlights are designed to last the Engine Injection Module, Main En- General notes 14 7.5 lifetime of the vehicle and the bulbs cannot gine Relay, ESC be replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to Read the additional information carefully Automatic Gearbox DQ200 and an authorised workshop to have it replaced. 15 30 ›››  page 51 AQ160 Changing bulbs requires a certain degree of WARNING 17 50 Diag 7.5 practical skill. ● Take particular care when working on 18 Starter Motor 30 If you choose to change the engine compart- components in the engine compartment if the engine is warm, there is a risk of burns. ESC (Pump) 60 ment lamps yourself, remember that it is a 20 dangerous area ››› in Safety notes for ● Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The ABS (Pump) 40 work in the engine compartment on glass can break when you touch the bulb, page 316. causing injury. 21 ESC/ABS (Valves) 25 Always use identical bulbs with the same ● When changing bulbs, please take care TH4 Electric fan without A/C for 24 30 designation. The name can be found on the not to injure yourself on sharp parts in the moderate climate countries headlight housing. » base of the bulb holder.

93 Emergencies

CAUTION heat generated by the bulb, they will be – Remove the bulb connector 2 by pulling it deposited on the reflector and will impair outwards. ● Remove the ignition key before working its surface. on the electric system. Otherwise, a short – Remove the bulb by pulling it out and fit the circuit could occur. ● Depending on the level of equipment fit- new one. ted in the vehicle, LEDs may be used for ● Switch off the lights or parking lights be- – 2 part or all of the interior and/or exterior Fit the bulb connector . fore you change a bulb. lighting. LEDs have an estimated life that – Fit cover 1 , turning it towards the right. exceeds that of the vehicle. If an LED light For the sake of the environment fails, go to an authorised workshop for its – Check whether the new bulb is working. Please ask your specialist retailer how to replacement. dispose of used bulbs in the proper manner.

Note Change the front bulbs ● Depending on weather conditions (cold or wet), the front lights, the fog lights, the Main beam headlight bulb tail lights and the turn signals may be temporarily misted. This has no influence on the useful life of the lighting system. By switching on the lights, the area through which the beam of light is projected will quickly be demisted. However, the edges may continue to be misted. ● Please check at regular intervals that all lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on your vehicle is functioning properly. This is not only in the interest of your own safety, but also that of all other road users. Fig. 101 In the engine compartment: main ● Before changing a bulb, make sure you beam lamp. have the correct new bulb. ● Do not touch the glass part of the bulb – Raise the bonnet. with your bare hands, use a cloth or paper towel instead. The residue left by the fin- – Turn the cover 1 anti-clockwise and take it gerprints would vaporise as a result of the out ››› Fig. 101.

94 Fuses and bulbs

Dipped beam headlight – Raise the bonnet. Turn signal light and DRL (daytime 1) – Move the loop ››› Fig. 102 1 in the direc- running light) tion of the arrow and remove the cover.

– Remove the bulb connector ››› Fig. 103 2 . – Unclip the retainer spring ››› Fig. 103 3 pressing inwards to the right.

– Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so that the lug on the base fits into the recess on the reflector.

– Fit the connector. Fig. 102 In the engine compartment: remove – Fit the cover and close the strap. Make sure the lid. that the gasket sits well on the casing cover Fig. 104 In the engine compartment: turn sig- during the operation. nal light bulb 1 and DRL (daytime running light) bulb 2 . – Check whether the new bulb is working. – Raise the bonnet.

– Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 104 1 or 2 to the left and pull.

– Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb holder and turning it anticlockwise at the same time.

– Installation involves all of the above steps in Fig. 103 In the engine compartment: dipped reverse sequence. beam lamp.

1) In headlight versions with LED DRL, this light source cannot be replaced. It is designed to last the length of the vehicle’s service life. In case of failure, go to an authorised workshop to have it replaced. 95 Emergencies

Fog light bulb 3. Remove the bulb connector 2 . 4. Turn the bulb holder 3 to the left and pull. 5. Remove the bulb by pressing on it and turning it anticlockwise at the same time. 6. Replace the bulb, making sure that the fixing guides are in the right position and then press it and turn it clockwise. 7 To install the headlight go back through the above steps in reverse. Fig. 108 Retaining tabs on reverse side of tail 8. Check that the bulb works properly. light. Fig. 105 Fog light: remove the grille Follow the steps indicated: Change the rear bulbs 1. Check which of the bulbs is defective. 2. Open the rear lid. Rear bulbs (in the side panel) 3. Remove the lid, levering the flat side of a screwdriver into the recess ››› Fig. 107 1 . 4. Remove the bulb connector 2 . 5. Unscrew the light securing bolt 3 by hand or using a screwdriver.

Fig. 106 Fog light: detach the bulb holder 6. Remove the light from the body, gently pulling it toward you, and place on a Follow the steps indicated: clean, smooth surface. 7. Remove the bulb holder unlocking the 1. Lever the groove with a screwdriver retaining tabs ››› Fig. 108 A . ››› Fig. 105 (arrow). Next, unclip the clips Fig. 107 Boot: access to the bolt securing the located on the edge of the grille, pulling 8. Change the damaged bulb. tail light unit. on it. 9. To refit follow the steps in reverse order, taking special care when fitting the bulb 2. Remove the 3 screws ››› Fig. 106 1 and remove the fog light. 96 Fuses and bulbs

holder. The securing tabs must click into Note place. ● For LED lights, you can only change the CAUTION turn signal and reverse light bulbs. Take care when removing the rear light unit to make sure there is no damage to the paintwork or any of its components. Number plate light

Note Note Number plate lights use LED technology. ● Make sure you have a soft cloth ready to Fig. 110 Remove the bulb holder. LEDs have an estimated life that exceeds place under the glass on the rear light unit, than that of the car. If a light with LEDs fails, to avoid any scratches. Follow the steps indicated: go to an authorised workshop for replace- ● For LED lights, you can only change the ment. turn signal and reverse light bulbs. 1. Check which of the bulbs is defective. 2. Open the rear lid. 3. Remove the rear lid cover in the direction Side turn signals Rear lights (in the rear lid) indicated ››› Fig. 109. 4. Remove the bulb connector ››› Fig. 110 1 . 5. Remove the bulb holder unlocking the retaining tabs A . 4. Change the damaged bulb. 6. Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from the glass part of the bulb. 7. Check that the new bulb works properly. 8. Carry out the same actions in reverse order for assembly and pay special atten- Fig. 111 Turn signal integrated in the rear view Fig. 109 Rear lid open: remove the lid. tion to placing the bulb holder, ensuring mirror that the tabs are properly secured. The side turn signals are LEDS and are integrated in the rear view mirrors. »

97 Emergencies

In case of failure, go to an authorised work- – Carefully remove the glass, levering it to Luggage compartment light* shop to have it replaced. avoid possible damage.

To replace the bulbs Additional brake light – Pull the bulbs outwards.

Given the difficulty involved in the replace- – To remove the central bulb, hold and press ment of this light it should be done by Techni- to one side. cal Services. Assembly – Proceed in the reverse order, pressing gen- Changing the interior bulbs tly on the outer edge of the side light. Fig. 113 Boot light. – First fit the glass with the fastening tabs Interior light and front reading over the frame of the switch. Next press the front part until the two long tabs click on lights the support.

Note In LED courtesy lights it is not possible to replace the light sources. If the light does not work, take the vehicle to an official Service.

Fig. 114 Boot light.

– Extract the bulb by pressing on its inside Fig. 112 Front reading light. edge using the flat side of a screwdriver ››› Fig. 113. To remove the glass – Disconnect the cable. – Insert a fine screwdriver between the cas- – Press the bulb sideways and remove it from ing and the glass ››› Fig. 112. its housing ››› Fig. 114.

98 Fuses and bulbs

– Change the bulb.

– Connect the cable again.

– Refit the bulb and press it in until it engages.

99 Operation

Fig. 115 Dash panel.

100 Controls and displays Operation – Control and warning lamps ...... 37 – Park assist system ...... 276 9 Lever for: – Tyre pressure monitoring* ...... 329

– Windscreen wipers and washer . . . 145 19 Handbrake lever ...... 223 Controls and displays – Wipe and wash system* ...... 145 20 Start-up push button (Keyless Ac- – Multi-function display control* . . . 108 cess closing and start-up sys- General instrument panel tem) ...... 220 10 Infotainment system: 21 Depending on the equipment: 1 Electric window controls ...... 136 11 Hazard warning lights ...... 143 – USB/AUX-IN input...... 214 2 Door release lever 12 Depending on the equipment, glove – Connectivity Box/Wireless Charg- 3 Control for adjusting electric exteri- compartment with: ...... 153 er* ...... 215 or mirrors ...... 147 – CD player* and/or SD card* . . . . . 194 22 Driver's seat heating control* ...... 150 4 Air vents 13 Front passenger airbag* ...... 21 23 Ignition lock (vehicles without Key- 5 Lever for: 14 Front passenger airbag disconnec- less Access) ...... 217 – Turn signals/main beam head- tion switch* ...... 78 24 Steering column adjustment lev- lights ...... 140 15 Switches for: er ...... 20 – Cruise control* ...... 250 – Heating and ventilation ...... 164 25 Fuse housing ...... 91 6 Depending on equipment fitted: – Air conditioning* ...... 166 26 Lever for unlocking the bonnet ...... 17 – Lever for cruise control ...... 250 – Climatronic* ...... 168 27 Light range control* ...... 144 7 Steering wheel with horn and 16 Front passenger seat heating con- 28 Light switch ...... 139 – Driver airbag ...... 74 trol* ...... 150 – On-board computer controls . . . . . 116 17 Gear lever Note – Controls for radio, telephone, – Manual gearbox ...... 232 ● Some of the equipment listed in this sec- navigation and speech dialogue – Automatic gearbox ...... 233 tion is only fitted on certain models or are system ...... 119 optional extras. 18 Depending on the equipment, but- – Paddle levers for tiptronic gear- tons for: ● The arrangement of switches and con- shift (automatic gearbox) ...... 236 trols on right-hand drive models* may be – Central locking* ...... 129 slightly different from the layout shown in 8 Instrument panel and warning – Start-Stop operation button ...... 248 ››› page 101. However, the symbols used to lamps: identify the controls are the same. – SEAT Drive Profile ...... 274 – Instruments ...... 102

101 Operation

Instruments and warn- The vehicle can be fitted with a instrument on the screen of the instrument panel and panel digital lap timer or one Digital (SEAT to the instructions on the screen of the Info- ing/control lamps Cockpit). tainment system when the vehicle is sta- After switching the engine on with a 12-volt tionary. Dashboard battery that is heavily discharged or newly changed some system settings (such as the Introduction time, the date, the personalised comfort settings and the programming) might be altered or deleted. Check and correct these settings once the battery is sufficiently charged.

WARNING Any distraction may lead to an accident, Fig. 116 Related video: with the risk of injury. Dash panel ● Do not operate the instrument panel controls when driving. ● To reduce the risk of accident and injury, only make adjustments to the instructions

102 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Analogue instrument panel

Fig. 117 Instrument panel, on dash panel.

Details of the instruments ››› Fig. 117: 2 Engine coolant temperature display 4 Adjuster button and display. ››› page 114 or natural gas gauge in 5 Speedometer. 1 Revolution counter (with the engine run- vehicles with natural gas engine (CNG) 6 Fuel gauge page 113. ning, in hundreds of revolutions per mi- ››› page 114 ››› nute) ››› page 112. 3 Displays on the screen ››› page 106.

103 Operation

Digital instrument panel (SEAT Digital Cockpit)

Fig. 118 SEAT Digital Cockpit on the instrument panel (classic view).

Details of the instruments: The Digital SEAT Cockpit is an instrument All views will display information on the 1 Engine coolant temperature display panel digital with monochrome screen in col- screen about audio, phone, travel data, vehi- 1) 1) ››› page 114 our high resolution. It has a 3 views accessi- cle status, navigation and driving aids . ble using the button  of the multifunction 2 Revolution counter. Revolutions per mi- In Classic View and Semicircular watches it is steering wheel. By selecting different infor- nute the engine is running page 112. possible to customise the information dis- ››› mation profiles, indications other than the played under Information Profiles 3 Gear engaged or position of the selec- classic circular instruments can be displayed, ››› Fig. 118 8 . tor lever currently selected such as navigation data, multimedia information or travel data. 4 Screen display ››› page 106 Information profiles 5 Speedometer The 3 views are: With the option INSTRUMENT PANEL (Infotain- 6 Digital speed display – Classic View ment button  /  > Vehicle function 7 Fuel gauge page 113. button > View > Instrument cluster) ››› – Digital maps (no information profiles) 8 Information Profile page 104. ››› – Semicircular watches

1) Depending on the version. 104 Instruments and warning/control lamps you can choose between the different dis- ● Information about the final destination. Navigation system in the SEAT play options of the information that appears Digital display of the remaining travelling Digital Cockpit* in the Digital SEAT Cockpit. time, distance to the destination and the estimated time of arrival. Classic View ● Operating range. Digital display of the re- The revolutions per minute and speedometer maining range. needles appear along the entire length ● Travel time. ››› Fig. 118. ● Route guidance.

View 1, 2, 3 or AUTOMATIC*1) ● Journey. Digital display of the distance travelled. Personalisation of the information that ap- ● Assistance systems. Graphic representa- pears in the Digital SEAT Cockpit. Only 2 of tion of different assistance systems. these items of information can be displayed at the same time, but the user chooses which ● Traffic signs. Display of traffic signs detec- Fig. 119 Infotainment system: map transfer button to display, and in what order, by moving the ted. finger vertically over the dials. ● Navigation. Graphical representation of Depending on the features, the SEAT Digital Depending on the version, the Views can be the navigation with arrows. Cockpit can display a detailed map. To do memorised by exiting the menu or keeping It may vary based on the features, the num- this, select the Navigation option in the the View button pressed. ber and the contents of the selectable infor- menu menu on the instrument panel ››› page 107. ● Consumption. Graphic representation of mation profiles.. the current consumption and digital display Depending on the features or the navigation of the average consumption. map, it can be shown in the Digital SEAT Cockpit or on the Infotainment system or on ● Audio. Digital display of the current audio both at the same time. If it is displayed only in playback. the Infotainment system, the SEAT Digital ● Altitude. Digital display of the current alti- Cockpit will only display the arrows for ma- tude above sea level. noeuvres. » ● Compass. Digital display of the compass.

1) Pre-set information depending on the “Driving mode” selected. 105 Operation

Transfer of navigation map ● Display of travel data (multifunction dis- some cases, the gear engaged in each case Using the map transfer key ››› Fig. 119, the play) and menus for different settings is shown on the instrument panel display. map is transferred from the Infotainment sys- ››› page 107 tem to the Digital SEAT Cockpit and vice ver- ● Service interval display ››› page 115 Outside temperature display sa. ● Speed warning ››› page 108 If the outside temperature is lower than approximately +4°C (+39°F), the “ice crystal Using the right thumbwheel of the multifunc- ● Speed warning for winter tyres symbol”  on the outside temperature dis- tion steering wheel, in the Navigation menu, ● Start-Stop system status display play also lights up. This symbol remains lit un- you can transfer the map back to the Info- ››› page 248 til the outside temperature exceeds +6°C tainment System. ● Indication of the status of active cylinder (+43°F) ››› . management (ACT®) page 244 ››› When the vehicle is stationary, when the aux- Display indications ● Low consumption driving  iliary heater is switched on or when driving at ● Identifying letters on engine (LDM) very low speeds, the outside temperature indicated may be higher than the actual tem- Possible indications on the instrument ● Driver assistance system display perature due to the heat produced by the en- panel display ››› page 248 gine. Different pieces of information can be dis- ● Copyright played on the screen of the instrument panel, The margin of measurement ranges from depending on the features of the vehicle. Doors, bonnet and rear lid open -45°C (-49°F) to +76°C (+169°F). ● Doors, bonnet and rear lid open When the vehicle is unlocked and while driv- Driving recommendation ● Warning and information messages ing, the instrument panel display shows if any While driving, the instrument panel of certain ● Odometer of the doors, the bonnet or rear lid are opened and, in some cases, it is also indica- vehicles may indicate a gear recommenda- ● Time page 111 ››› ted by an audible warning. The display may tion for saving fuel ››› page 240. ● Indications of the radio and navigation sys- vary according to the type of instrument pan- tem el fitted. Odometer ● Indications of the phone The odometer registers the total distance ● Outside temperature Selector lever positions (dual-clutch travelled by the car. DSG®) ● Indications of the compass The partial odometer (trip) shows the dis- The current position of the selector lever is tance travelled since the last time it was reset ● Selector lever positions shown on the side of the lever and on the in- to zero. ● Gear-change recommendation strument panel display. When the lever is in ››› page 240 the D/S position or in the Tiptronic position, in 106 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Vehicles with analogue instrument panel: Low consumption driving* Note ● Briefly press the button 0.0/SET Depending on the equipment, when driving, ● There are different instrument panels and Fig. 117 4 to reset the trip recorder to 0. ››› the  display appears on the instrument therefore the versions and instructions on ● Keep the button 0.0/SET 4 pressed for panel when the vehicle is in low consumption the display may vary. In the case of dis- about 3 seconds and the previous value will status due to active cylinder management plays without warning or information texts, be displayed. (ACT®)* ››› page 244. faults are indicated exclusively by the control warning lamps. Vehicles with digital instrument panel: Identifying letters on engine (LDM) ● Some indications on the instrument panel ● Set the odometer to zero via the Infotain- Vehicles with analogue instrument panel: screen may be concealed by a sudden ment system or the multifunction steering event, e.g. an incoming call. ● Switch the ignition on, but do not start the wheel ››› page 108. ● engine. Depending on the equipment, some settings and instructions can be carried out or Speed warning for winter tyres ● Hold the button 0.0/SET ››› Fig. 117 4 displayed on the infotainment system as down for more than 15 seconds to display the If the maximum speed set is exceeded, this is well. identifying letters of the vehicle engine. displayed on the instrument panel ● If there are several warnings at the same ››› page 107. time, the symbols will be displayed one af- Copyright ter the other for a few seconds. The sym- The speed warning can be adjusted on the Legal text about the property rights and bols will stay on until you remove the Infotainment system: using button  /  copyrights of the instrument cluster. cause. and the SETTINGS > Driver Assistance ● If when switching on the ignition warnings  page 34 button. ››› WARNING are shown about existing faults, it might not be possible to change the settings or show Even when the outside temperature is high- Compass indication the information as described. In this case, er than freezing temperature, some roads go to a specialised workshop and request a Depending on the equipment, when the igni- and bridges could be frozen. tion is on, the instrument panel display indi- repair. ● The “ice crystal symbol” indicates that cates the direction in which you are driving there may be a risk of freezing. with a symbol, e.g. NW for Northwest. ● At outside temperatures above +4°C Instrument panel menus When the Infotainment system is on and there (+39°F), there may be ice even when the is no route guidance active, the graphic rep- “ice crystal symbol” is not on. The number of menus and information items resentation of a compass is also shown. ● The outside temperature sensor takes a available will depend on the vehicle’s elec- guideline measurement. tronics and features. »

107 Operation

A specialised workshop can programme or the keys on the multifunction steering wheel Travel data (multifunction indica- modify additional functions, according to the as usual. tor) vehicle equipment. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this. Restart the service interval display The display of the travel data (multifunction Some menu options can only be read when Select the Service menu and follow the in- display) shows different values about the the vehicle is stationary. structions on the screen of the instrument journey and the consumption. panel. ■ Driving data page 108 ››› Change from one display to another ■ Assistance systems. Restart the oil service Vehicles without multifunction steering wheel: ■ Front Assist On/Off ››› page 255 Select the Restore Oil service menu and ● press the rocker switch  on the wind- ■ ACC (only display) ››› page 259 follow the instructions on the instrument pan- screen wiper lever ››› page 117. ■ Navigation. el display. ■ Audio. Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel: ■ Telephone. Restart journey data ● Turn the right thumbwheel of the multifunc- ■ Vehicle status ››› page 110 Select the Reset trip menu and follow the tion steering wheel ››› page 118. instructions on the instrument panel display to reset the value. Changing memory (vehicles with ana- Service Menu logue instrument cluster) Identifying letters on engine (LDM)  3 Applies to vehicles with Active Info Display Press the button on the windscreen (Digital SEAT Cockpit) Select the menu Engine code. The identify- wiper lever or the  button of the multifunc- ing letters of the engine will be shown on the tion steering wheel. In the Service menu various settings can be instrument cluster display at the bottom left. adjusted depending on the features. Setting the clock Open the Service menu Select the Time menu and set the correct To open up the Service menu, select the time by turning the right thumbwheel of the Driving range information profile while in multifunction steering wheel. the Travel data menu, and keep the  key pressed on the multifunction steering wheel for approximately 4 seconds. When it is released, the Service menu will be displayed. Now you can browse through the menu using

108 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Changing memory (vehicles with digital function wheel pressed down for about 2 less than 2,400 km and cannot be de- instrument cluster) seconds. activated.2) While in Travel data > General infor- Distance travelled Distance covered in mation press  on the multi-function steer- Select the instructions km (m) after switching on the ignition. ing wheel to switch between the 3 memo- In the Infotainment system, in the menu Vehi- Average speed The average speed will be 1) ries : cle settings, you can display different travel shown after driving for approximately data ›››  page 34. 100 metres. Since start The memory is deleted if the journey is interrupted for more than 2 Current fuel consumption The current Digital speed Current speed displayed in hours. fuel consumption display operates digital format. Since refuelling Display and storage of throughout the journey, in litres/100 km; Convenience consumers Displays a list of the journey data and the consumption and with the engine running and the ve- the connected comfort systems that in- values collected. When refuelling, the hicle stopped, in litres/hour. crease energy consumption, e.g. air memory is deleted. Average fuel consumption The average conditioning. Long-term This memory contains travel data fuel consumption is displayed after driv- Set a speed warning up to a maximum of 19 hours and 59 mi- ing for approximately 300 metres. nutes or 99 hours and 59 minutes, or up Travelling time This indicates the hours ● Select the display Speed warning at to a maximum of 1999.9 km or (h) and minutes (min) since the ignition --- km/h or Speed warning at --- mph. 9999.9 km. When one of these values is was switched on. ● Press the button  on the windscreen exceeded (varies depending on the ver- Operating range Approximate distance in wiper lever or the button  on the multifunc- sion of the instrument panel), the memo- km that can still be travelled if the same tion steering wheel to store the current speed ry is deleted. driving style is maintained. and activate the warning. Adblue Autonomy or Autonomy  Approxi- ● Activate: adjust to the desired speed within Delete journey data presets mate distance in km that can still be 5 seconds using the rocker switch  on the ● Select the memory that you wish to erase. travelled with the current level of the windscreen wiper lever or by turning the ● Hold the  button of the multifunction AdBlue® tank with the same driving style. thumbwheel on the multifunction steering steering wheel or the  button of the multi- The indication appears from a range of wheel. Next, press the button  or  »

1) This will show all data on the display at the same time: distance travelled, average consumption, average speed and autonomy. 2) Not available in all countries. 109 Operation

again or wait several seconds. The speed is symbols may vary depending on the version ● If when switching on the ignition warnings stored and the warning activated. of the instrument panel. are shown about existing faults, it might not ● Deactivate: press button  or button Existing faults can also be checked manually. be possible to change the settings or show  . The stored speed is deleted. To do so, open the menu Vehicle status or the information as described. In this case, go to a specialised workshop and request a Vehicle ››› page 107. The warning can be adjusted for speeds be- repair. tween 30 km/h (18 mph) and 250 km/h Priority 1 warning (red). The symbol lights (155 mph). up or flashes (in part accompanied by audible warnings).  Stop driving! Dan- Fatigue detection (break recom- Display Oil temperature ger! Check the fault and eliminate the mendation)* The engine reaches its operating tempera- cause. If necessary, seek professional ture when, under normal driving conditions, assistance. the oil temperature is between 80°C and Priority 2 warning (yellow). The symbol 120°C. If the engine is under a lot of stress lights up or flashes (in part accompa- and the outside temperature is high, the en- nied by audible warnings). Operating gine oil temperature can increase. This does faults or the lack of operating fluids can not present any problem as long as the warn- cause damage to the vehicle or a fault. ing lamps  or  ››› page 318 do not ap- Check the faulty function as soon as pear on the display. possible. If necessary, seek professional assistance. Information message. It provides informa- Warning and information messages tion about processes in the vehicle. Fig. 120 On the screen of the instrument pan- (Vehicle status) el: fatigue detection. Note The Fatigue detection informs the driver when The system runs a check on certain compo- ● Depending on the equipment, some set- their driving behaviour shows signs of fatigue. nents and functions when the ignition is tings and instructions can be carried out or switched on and while the vehicle is moving. displayed on the infotainment system as Faults displayed on the instrument panel as well. Function and operation red and yellow warning symbols accompa- ● If there are several warnings at the same Fatigue detection determines the driving be- nied with messages and ›››  page 37, de- time, the symbols will be displayed one af- haviour of the driver when starting a journey, pending on the case, even an audible warn- ter the other for a few seconds. The sym- making a calculation of tiredness. This is con- ing. The representation of the messages and bols will stay on until you remove the stantly compared with the current driving because. haviour. If the system detects that the driver is 110 Instruments and warning/control lamps tired, an audible warning is given with a tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre- ● Never drive if you are tired. sound and an optic warning is shown with a vent it from functioning. ● The system does not detect the tiredness symbol and complementary message on the of the driver in all circumstances. Consult instrument panel display ››› Fig. 120. The ● At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph) the information in the section ››› page 111, ● message on the instrument panel display is At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph) System limitations. shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de- ● When cornering ● pending on the case, is repeated. The system In some situations, the system may incor- ● On roads in poor condition rectly interpret an intended driving ma- stores the last message displayed. noeuvre as driver tiredness. ● In unfavourable weather conditions The message on the instrument panel display ● No warning is given in the event of the ef- ● When a sporty driving style is employed can be switched off by pressing the  fect called microsleep! button on the windscreen wiper lever or the ● In the event of a serious distraction to the ● Please observe the indications on the in- button  on the multi function steering driver strument panel and act as is necessary. wheel ››› page 116. Fatigue detection will be restored when the The message can be recalled to the instru- vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes, Note ment panel display using the multifunction when the ignition is switched off or when the ● display ››› page 108. Fatigue detection has been developed driver has unbuckled their seat belt and for driving on motorways and well paved opened the door. roads only. Conditions of operation In the event of slow driving during a long peri- ● If there is a fault in the system, have it Driving behaviour is only calculated on od of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the sys- checked by a specialised workshop. speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to tem automatically re-establishes the tired- around 200 km/h (125 mph). ness calculation. When driving at a faster speed the driving behaviour will be recalcula- Time Switching on and off ted. Fatigue detection can be activated or deacti- Setting the time on the infotainment sys- WARNING vated in the Easy Connect system with the tem  /  button and the SETTINGS function Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fati- ● Press the infotainment  /  button. button ›››  page 34. A mark indicates gue detection system tempt you into taking that the adjustment has been activated. any risks when driving. Take regular breaks, ● Press the SETTINGS function button. sufficient in length when making long jour- ● Select the menu option Date and time to System limitations neys. set the time ›››  page 34. » The Fatigue detection has certain limitations ● The driver always assumes the responsi- inherent to the system. The following condi- bility of driving to their full capacity. 111 Operation

Setting the time on analogue the instru- ● Adjust the correct time by turning the right ● When the engine is cold, avoid high revs ment panel thumbwheel of the multifunction steering and heavy acceleration and do not make ● To set the time (for all vehicle clocks), press wheel. the engine work hard. and hold the button 0.0/SET on the instrument panel until the Time is displayed. For the sake of the environment ● Release the button 0.0/SET . The time is dis- Revolution counter Changing up a gear early will help you to played on the instrument panel display and The rev counter indicates the number of en- save fuel and minimise emissions and en- the hours field is highlighted. gine noise. gine revolutions per minute. ● Afterwards, press the button 0.0/SET until the desired time is displayed. To scroll quick- Together with the gear-change indicator, the ly, hold the button 0.0/SET . rev counter offers you the possibility of using the engine of your vehicle at a suitable ● When they have finished setting the hour, speed. wait until the minute field is marked on the instrument panel display. The beginning of the red zone of the rev ● Immediately after, press the button 0.0/SET counter indicates the maximum speed in any as many times as required until the correct gear after running-in and with the engine hot. minute is displayed. To scroll quickly, hold the However, it is advisable to change up a gear button 0.0/SET . or move the selector lever to D (or lift your foot off the accelerator) before the needle ● Release the button 0.0/SET in order to fin- reaches the red zone ››› . ish setting the time. We recommend that you avoid high revs and Adjusting the time in the SEAT Digital that you follow the recommendations on the Cockpit gear-change indicator. Consult the addition- ● While on the Driving data menu select al information in ››› page 240, Gear-change Range (Infotainment button  /  > View > recommendation. Driving data > Range). ● Press the button  on the multifunction CAUTION steering wheel until the Service menu is dis- ● To prevent damage to the engine, the rev played on the instrument panel display counter needle should only remain in the ››› page 108. red zone for a short period of time. ● Select the menu Time.

112 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Fuel level indicator Control lamps switches off due to lack of fuel or an irregular supply thereof.  It lights up, and in addition, the lower diode lights up in red ● Always refuel when there is only one quarter of fuel in tank to prevent the vehicle Fuel tank almost empty. The fuel reserve level has to stop due to lack of fuel. been reached ››› . Refuel as soon as possible. When the fuel level is very low, the lower diode flashes in red. CAUTION Never run the fuel tank completely dry. An  It lights up yellow irregular fuel supply can cause misfiring and unburnt fuel could enter the exhaust Presence of water in the diesel. system. The catalytic converter or the par- Switch off the engine and request the assistance of ticulate filter may get damaged! Fig. 121 Analogue instrument panel: fuel specialised personnel. gauge The display only works when the ignition is Note switched on. The small arrow on the fuel gauge next to The fuel range is displayed on the instrument the fuel pump symbol points out towards panel. the side of the vehicle with the fuel tank flap. You can consult the tank capacity of your vehicle in the ›››  page 46 section.

WARNING When driving with low fuel, the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause accidents and se- Fig. 122 Digital instrument panel: fuel gauge. vere injuries. ● If the fuel tank level is too low, fuel could reach the engine irregularly, particularly when driving up or down slopes. ● The steering system and the driver assistance systems and brakes do not work when the engine is running irregularly or

113 Operation

Natural gas level (CNG) Things to note 3 Valid in vehicles equipped with natural gas en- If the vehicle is left parked for a long time im- gine (CNG) mediately after refuelling, the natural gas level indicator may not accurately indicate the same level shown after refuelling when the vehicle is started up again. This is not due to a leak in the system, but to a drop in pressure in the gas tank for technical reasons after a cooling phase just after refuelling.

Fig. 125 Digital instrument panel: engine cool- Engine coolant temperature dis- ant temperature display. play ››› Fig. 124, ››› Fig. 125: Fig. 123 Analogue instrument panel: natural A Cool zone. The engine has not reached gas gauge operating temperature yet. Avoid high engine speeds and stressing the engine if it Control lamp has not reached operating temperature.

 It lights up green ››› Fig. 123 1 B Normal zone. At high outside temperatures and when making the engine work The vehicle is running with natural gas. hard, the diodes may continue lighting up The warning lamp turns off when the natural gas runs and reach the upper zone. This is no out. The engine changes to operate with petrol. cause for concern, provided the control lamp does not light up  It lights up, and in addition, the  C Warning area. When the engine is work- lower diode lights up in red Fig. 124 Analogue instrument panel: engine coolant temperature display. ing hard, especially at high outside tem- The fuel reserve level has been reached. peratures, the diodes may light up in the When the fuel level is very low, the lower diode flash- warning area. es in red. The coolant temperature gauge only works The display only works when the ignition is when the ignition is switched on. switched on.

114 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Control and warning lamp ● The front spoiler also ensures proper dis- and individual driving styles are considered. tribution of the cooling air when the vehicle The advance warning first appears 20 days  It lights up red is moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can before the date established for the corre-  Do not keep driving! reduce the cooling effect, which could sponding service. The kilometres (miles) re- Engine coolant level too low, coolant temperature too cause the engine to overheat. Seek spe- maining until the next service are always high cialist assistance. rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) and the time is given in complete days. The cur-  Flashes red rent service message cannot be viewed until Service intervals 500 km after the last service. Prior to this, on- Fault in the engine coolant system. ly lines are visible on the display.

● The service interval indication appears on the Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and Inspection reminder let it cool down. instrument panel display and the Infotain- ment system. If a service or an inspection has to be carried ● Check the engine coolant level out soon, a service reminder will be dis- page 320. There are different versions of instrument ››› played when the ignition is switched on. panels and infotainment systems, so the ver- ● If the warning lamp does not switch off even sions and instructions on the screens may The figure displayed are the kilometres that if the coolant level is correct, request assis- vary. can still be travelled or the time until the next tance from specialised personnel. service. SEAT distinguishes between services with en- CAUTION gine oil change (e.g. Oil change service) and Service due ● To ensure a long useful life for the engine, services without engine oil change (e.g. In- avoid high revs, driving at high speed and spection). When the time for a service or an inspection comes, an audible warning will be emit- making the engine work hard for approxi- In vehicles with Services established by ted when the ignition is switched on and the mately the first 15 minutes when the engine time or mileage, the service intervals are al- fixed key symbol  may appear on the in- is cold. The phase until the engine is warm ready pre-defined. also depends on the outside temperature. If strument panel for a few seconds, along with necessary, use the engine oil temperature* In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter- one of the following messages: ››› page 110 as a guide. vals are determined individually. Thanks to ● Service now! ● Additional lights and other accessories in technological progress, maintenance work front of the air inlet reduce the cooling ef- has been greatly reduced. Because of the ● Request an inspection. technology used by SEAT, with this service fect of the coolant. At high outside temper- ● Oil service required! atures and high engine loads, there is a risk you only need to change the oil when the ve- ● of the engine overheating. hicle so requires. To calculate this variation Oil service and inspection re- (max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of use quired! » 115 Operation

Inspection of compressed natural gas Vehicles with digital instrument panel screen wiper lever, or OK on the multifunc- tanks (CNG) reminder ● The date of the service can only be read tion steering wheel. When less than 90 days for the review of the through the Service menu ››› page 108. ● In vehicles with the LongLife system in compressed natural gas tanks (CNG), when which the battery has been disconnected the ignition is switched on, the instrument Resetting service interval display for a long period of time, it is not possible to panel display will a reminder for review of If the service was not carried out by a SEAT calculate the date of the next service. the gas tanks and an audible warning will be dealership, the display can be reset as fol- Therefore the service interval display may not be correct. In this case, bear in mind the emitted. lows: maximum service intervals permitted As approaches the service date of inspection Vehicles with analogue instrument panel ››› page 333. of the gas tanks, the message and the audi- ● If you reset the display manually, the next ble warning will stop modify accordingly. ● Switch off the ignition, press and hold the service interval will be indicated as in vehi- button 0.0/SET ››› Fig. 117 4 . cles with fixed service intervals. For this Check a service warning ● Switch ignition back on. reason we recommend that the service in- With the ignition switched on, the engine off ● Release the button 0.0/SET and press it terval display be reset by a SEAT author- and the vehicle at a standstill, the current again for the next 20 seconds. ised Dealer. service notification can be read: ● If the period of 48 months for an inspec- Vehicles with digital instrument panel tion at a specialised workshop of com- Check the date of the current service on the ● The service interval display can only be re- pressed natural gas tanks (CNG) is excee- infotainment system set through the Service menu ››› page 108. ded, the vehicle may not working in this ● Press the infotainment  /  button. mode. Do not restart the indicator between the ● Press the SETTINGS function button service intervals, otherwise the information ›››  page 34. displayed will be incorrect. ● Select the Service menu option to display If the oil change service is reset manually, the Using the instrument panel information about the services. service interval display changes to a fixed Introduction Vehicles with analogue instrument panel service interval, also in vehicles with Flexible oil change service. ● Press and hold the button 0.0/SET With the ignition switched on, it is possible to ››› Fig. 117 4 for more than 5 seconds to con- Note read the different functions of the display by sult the service message. scrolling through the menus. ● The service message disappears after a few seconds, when the engine is started or when OK/RESET is pressed on the wind-

116 Instruments and warning/control lamps

In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel, Operation with the windscreen wip- ● To open the menu or the informative display the multifunction display can only be er lever shown, press button 1 or wait a few seconds operated with the steering wheel buttons. until the menu or the informative display opens automatically. Some menu options can only be read when the vehicle is at a standstill. Changing menu settings WARNING ● In the menu displayed, press the upper or lower part of the rocker switch 2 until the re- Distracting the driver in any way can lead to an accident and cause injuries. quired menu option is checked. The option appears framed. ● Never use the menus on the instrument panel display while the vehicle is in motion. ● Press button 1 to make the required modifications. A mark indicates that the system or function is activated. Note Fig. 126 Windscreen wipers lever: control but- After loading or changing the 12-volt bat- tons. Back to menu selection tery, check the system settings. If the pow- Select Back on the corresponding menu to er supply is interrupted, the system settings As long as a priority 1 ››› page 110 warning is exit. might be incorrect or deleted. active, it will not be possible to access any menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and hidden with the button ››› Fig. 126 1 . Note If when switching on the ignition warnings Select a menu or an informative display are shown about existing faults, it might not be possible to change the settings or show ● Switch the ignition on. the information as described. In this case, ● If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed, go to a specialised workshop and request a press button 1 ; if necessary, several times. repair. ● To display the menus ››› page 107 or to return to the selection of menus from a menu or from an informative display, hold down the rocker button 2 . ● To change from one menu to another, press the upper or lower part of the rocker switch.

117 Operation

Using the multifunction steering wait a few seconds until the menu or the in- The control and warning lamps are indicators wheel formative display opens automatically. of warnings, ››› , faults ››› or certain functions. Some control and warning lamps come Changing menu settings on when the ignition is switched on, and switch off when the engine starts running, or ● In the menu displayed, turn the right thumb- while driving. wheel of the multifunction steering wheel ››› Fig. 127 until the desired option of the Depending on the model, additional text menu is highlighted. The option appears messages may be viewed on the instrument framed. panel display. These may be purely informa- ● Press the button  ››› Fig. 127 to make the tive or they may be advising of the need for required modifications. A mark indicates that action ››› page 102, Dashboard. the system or function is activated. Depending upon the equipment fitted in the vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some- Fig. 127 Right side of multifunction steering Back to menu selection times a symbol may be displayed on the in- wheel: buttons to the menus and informative instrument panel. dications on the instrument panel. Press the button  or  ››› Fig. 127. When certain control and warning lamps are As long as a priority 1 ››› page 110 warning is Note lit, an audible warning is also heard. active, it will not be possible to access any If when switching on the ignition warnings menu. Some warnings can be confirmed and are shown about existing faults, it might not WARNING hidden with the button  of the multifunction be possible to change the settings or show If the warning lamps and messages are ig- steering wheel Fig. 127. the information as described. In this case, ››› nored, the vehicle may stall in traffic, or go to a specialised workshop and request a may cause accidents and severe injuries. Select a menu or an informative display repair. ● Never ignore the warning lamps or text ● Switch the ignition on. messages. ● If a message or vehicle symbol is displayed, ● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi- press the button  ››› Fig. 127; if necessary, Control and warning lamps ble. several times. ● Park the vehicle away from traffic and ● To change menus, use buttons   Warning symbols ensure that there are no highly flammable or   ››› Fig. 127. materials under the vehicle that could come into contact with the exhaust system ● To open the menu or the information dis- Read the additional information carefully  page 37 (e.g. dry grass, fuel). played, press the button  ››› Fig. 127 or ›››

118 Instruments and warning/control lamps

● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci- There are two versions of the multifunction dent for the driver and for other road users. module: If necessary, switch on the hazard warning ● Voice-controlled audio, phone and navi- lamps and put out the warning triangle to advise other drivers. gation version: for controlling the audio functions available (radio, audio CD, MP3, ● Before opening the bonnet, switch off the iPod®1), USB1), SD1)) and Bluetooth system engine and allow it to cool. from the steering wheel. ● In any vehicle, the engine compartment is ● Voice-controlled audio, phone and navi- a hazardous area and could cause severe gation version: for controlling the audio injuries ››› page 315. functions available (radio, audio CD, MP3, iPod®1), USB1), SD1)) and Bluetooth system CAUTION from the steering wheel. Failure to heed the control lamps and text messages when they appear may result in faults in the vehicle.

Multifunction steering wheel*

General information

The steering wheel includes a multifunction module from where it is possible to control the audio, telephone and radio/navigation functions without needing to distract the driver.

1) Depending on the vehicle equipment. 119 Operation

Operating the audio, telephone and navigation system with voice control

Fig. 128 Controls on the steering wheel.

Applies to vehicles with analogue instrument panel Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

Turn announcement volume up/down. You do not need to Turn volume up/down. You do Turn volume up/down. You do Turn volume up/down. You do Turn volume up/down. You do A be in navigation mode but not need to be in audio mode not need to be in audio mode not need to be in audio mode not need to be in telephone Turn there has to be an announce- (radio). (media). (media). mode. ment active when you adjust the volume.

A Mute the current navigation Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call. Press announcement.

Activate/deactivate voice control. B a) This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data). When the system is in telephone mode this button’s function is deactivated during the ongoing call, and without Radio/Media functionality (except AUX).

Short press: Switch to the – There is no active call: Ra- No function for the other previous/next song. dio/Media functionality (ex- Search for the previous/next modes (navigation, assis- C / D No function cept AUX) stationb). tants, vehicle status, travel Hold down: Fast rewind/for- data). wardc). – Active call: no function

Change instrument panel menu. E / F a) This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data). 120 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

Coloured instrument panel: change to the previous menu. G Monochrome Instrument panel: switch to the previous function.

– There is no active call: List – Active route: access the of last calls. Coloured instrument panel: view to halt guidance to des- Coloured instrument panel: H List of stations available (on- tination. next track (only if the instru- No function – Active call: access the call Turn ly if the instrument panel is in ment panel is in audio menu). options list (call on hold, audio menu). – No active route: list of previ- hang up, mute microphone, ous destinations. private number, etc.).

H Acts on the instrument panel or confirms the instrument panel menu option depending on the menu option. Press a) According to the vehicle's equipment package. b) This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode. c) These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

Applies to vehicles with Active Info Display (Digital SEAT Cockpit) Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

Turn announcement volume Turn volume up/down. You Turn volume up/down. You Turn volume up/down. You Turn volume up/down. You up/down. You do not need to be in A do not need to be in audio do not need to be in audio do not need to be in audio do not need to be in tele- navigation mode but there has to Turn mode (radio). mode (media). mode (media). phone mode. be an announcement active when you adjust the volume.

A Mute the current navigation an- Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call. Press nouncement.

Enable/disable voice controlb). B a) This function can be used from any mode, except with an active call.

Short press: Switch to the – No active call: Radio/Me- No function for the other modes Search for the previous/next previous/next song. C / D No function dia functions (except AUX) (navigation, assistants, vehicle stationc). Hold down: Fast rewind/for- – Active call: no function status, travel data). » wardd).

121 Operation

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

E / F a) Change menu on instrument panel.b)

Short pressb): change views Classic Info / Digital Maps / Semi-circular clocks G Long pressb): access settings of “Individual Profiles”.

If there is a map on the Digital – There is no active call: Re- Scorecard: Zoom in-out (with or cent calls list. without an active route). H List of sources available List of sources available – Active call: go to the call If there is no map on the Digital No function Turn (audio/media). (audio/media). options list (call in standby, Scorecard: the map is transferred hang up, mute microphone, from the Infotainment System dis- private number, etc.). play to the Digital Scorecard (with and without active route).

H Auto/Manual Zoom Zoom if the No function No function No function No function Press map on the DigitScorecard.

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package. b) This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, vehicle status, travel data). c) This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode. d) These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

122 Instruments and warning/control lamps

Operating the audio, telephone and navigation system without voice control

Fig. 129 Controls on the steering wheel.

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

A Mute the current navigation Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call. Press announcement.

– Incoming call: pick up (short press), reject (long press). – Ongoing call: hang up (short press). B a) – No incoming/ongoing call: open phone menu (short press), repeat last ongoing call (long press). These functions can be carried out on any mode (audio, media, navigations, assistants, vehicle status, travel data).

Change instrument panel menu. E / F a) This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data). »

123 Operation

Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone* Navigation*

Cycles through the audio source: FM/AM – CD – SD - USB - AUX - BT Audio (only those that are available). G This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assistants, vehicle status, travel data).

H Acts on the instrument panel or confirms the instrument panel menu option depending on the menu option. Press

a) According to the vehicle's equipment package. b) This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode. c) These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.

124 Opening and closing

Opening and closing Duplicate keys Remote control* If you need a replacement key, go to a Tech- nical Service with your vehicle identification Keys number.

Set of keys WARNING ● An incorrect use of the keys can cause serious injuries. ● Never leave children or disabled persons in the vehicle. In case of emergency, they may not be able to leave the vehicle or manage on their own. Fig. 131 Assignment of buttons on the remote ● An uncontrolled use of the key could start control key. the engine or activate any electric equipment (e.g. electric windows), causing risk of accident. The doors can be locked using the remote control key. This could become Fig. 130 Set of keys. an obstacle for assistance in an emergency situation. The set of keys may consists of the following, ● Never forget the keys inside the vehicle. depending on the version of your vehicle: An unauthorised use of your vehicle could result in injury, damage or theft. Therefore ● a remote control key ››› Fig. 130 A always take the key with you when you ● a key without remote control B , leave the vehicle. ● a plastic key tab* C . ● Never remove the key from the ignition if the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the Fig. 132 Vehicle key with alarm button. or steering could suddenly block and it would be impossible to steer the vehicle. The radio frequency remote control key is ● two keys with remote control A used to lock and unlock the vehicle from a ● a plastic key tab* C . distance. CAUTION By using button 4 ››› Fig. 131 on the control, There are electronic components in the re- the key shaft is released. mote control key. Avoid wetting and hitting the keys. Unlocking the vehicle  ››› Fig. 131 1 . » 125 Operation

Locking the vehicle  ››› Fig. 131 2 . ● If the vehicle cannot be unlocked or SEAT recommends you ask a specialised workshop to replace the battery. Unlocking the rear lid. Press button  locked by using the radio frequency remote ››› Fig. 131 3 until all the turn signals on the control, the remote control key will have to The battery is located to the rear of the vehi- vehicle flash briefly. When the unlocking but- be re-synchronised. For this, go to your cle key, under a cover. technical services. ton  3 is pressed, you have 2 minutes to open the door. Once this time has passed, it Changing the battery will lock again. ● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 125. Replacing the battery Moreover, the battery indicator on the key ● Remove the cover from the back of the ve- ››› Fig. 131 (arrow), will flash. hicle key ››› Fig. 133 in the direction of the ar- The remote control transmitter and the bat- row ››› . teries are integrated in the key. The receiver is ● Extract the battery from the compartment inside the vehicle. The maximum range de- using a suitable thin object ››› Fig. 134. pends on different factors. The range is re- ● Place the new battery in the compartment duced as the batteries start to lose power. as shown ››› Fig. 134, pressing in the opposite direction to that shown by the arrow ››› . Alarm button* ● Fit the cover as shown ››› Fig. 133, pressing Only press alarm button in the event of an it onto the vehicle key casing in the opposite emergency ››› Fig. 132 5 ! When the alarm direction to that shown by the arrow until it button is pressed, the vehicle horn is heard Fig. 133 Vehicle key: opening the battery com- clicks into place. and the turn signals are switched on for a partment. short time. When the alarm button is pressed CAUTION again, the alarm is switched off. ● If the battery is not changed correctly, the vehicle key may be damaged. WARNING ● Use of unsuitable batteries may damage Read and observe the relevant warnings the vehicle key. For this reason, always re- in Set of keys on page 125. ››› place the dead battery with another of the same voltage, size and specifications. Note ● When fitting the battery, check that the ● The remote control key works only when polarity is correct. you are in its scope. Fig. 134 Vehicle key: removing the battery.

126 Opening and closing

For the sake of the environment Spare remote control keys are available at – Locking system “Safe*” your Technical Service, where they must be – Selective* unlocking system Please dispose of your used batteries cor- matched to the locking system. rectly and with respect for the environ- – Self-locking system to prevent involunta- ment. Up to five remote control keys can be used. ry unlocking – Automatic speed dependent locking and unlocking system* Synchronising the remote control Central locking system – Emergency unlocking system key Description Unlocking the vehicle* If it is not possible to unlock or lock the door – Press the  button ››› Fig. 131 on the re- with the remote control, it should be re- Read the additional information carefully mote control to unlock all the doors and synchronised. ›››  page 15. the rear lid.

While the vehicle is open: The central locking system enables you to lock and unlock all doors and the rear lid by Locking the vehicle* – Press button  2 ››› Fig. 131 on the remote just pushing the button. – Press the  button ››› Fig. 131 on the re- control. Central locking can be activated by using mote control to lock all doors and the – Then close the vehicle using the key shaft any of the following options: rear lid or turn the key in the door to lock within one minute. all doors and the rear lid. ● the key, by inserting it into the driver door While the vehicle is closed: cylinder and rotating it in the opening direc- WARNING tion. Depending on the vehicle version, either – Press button  1 ››› Fig. 131 on the remote ● Locking from the outside carelessly or control. all doors will be unlocked or only the driver without good visibility may lead to bruising, door will be unlocked. All doors will be locked particularly in the case of children. – Then close the vehicle using the key shaft on locking the vehicle using the key. ● within one minute. When locking a vehicle, never leave chil- ● the interior central lock button dren unaccompanied inside, as from the If the  is pressed repeatedly outside the ››› page 129. outside it will be difficult to provide assis- range of action of the remote control, the ve- ● the radio frequency remote control, us- tance if required. hicle may not open or close when using the ing the buttons on the key ››› page 125. ● Having the doors locked prevents intrud- remote control. The remote control key will ers from getting in, for example when stop- have to be resynchronised. Various functions are available to improve the ped at a traffic light. » vehicle safety:

127 Operation

Note When the ignition is switched off, the instru- Safe enabled with or without alarm: con- ment panel display indicates that the “Safe” tinuous flashing of warning lamp. For anti-theft security, only the driver door system is on. is fitted with a lock cylinder. Safe disabled without alarm: the warning lamp stays off. Deactivation Safe disabled with alarm: the warning lamp Rotate the key inserted in the lock cylinder 1) stays off. “Safe” security system* twice towards the locking direction. This is an anti-theft device which consists of a To activate the system using the remote con- WARNING double lock for the door locks and a deacti- trol, press the lock button  on the remote No one should remain inside the vehicle if vation function for the boot in order to prevent twice in less than 5 seconds. the “Safe” system is activated because forced entry. On deactivating the “Safe” system, the alarm opening the doors will not be possible in volumetric sensor is also deactivated. the event of an emergency neither from the Activation inside nor the outside and help from the With the “Safe” switched off, doors can be The “safe” system is activated when the vehi- outside is made difficult. Danger of death. opened from the interior but not from the ex- cle is locked using the key or the remote con- Passengers could become trapped inside terior. in case of emergency. trol. See “Selective unlocking system*” To activate it with the key, rotate once it is inserted in the door lock cylinder in the locking “Safe” status Selective unlocking system* direction. On the driver door, there is warning lamp visi- To activate the system using the remote con- This system allows to unlock either just the ble from outside the vehicle through the win- trol, press the lock button once  on the re- driver door or all the vehicle. dow which shows the “Safe” system status. mote. We will know that “Safe” system is activated Driver door unlock button Once this system is activated, opening doors by the flashing warning lamp. The indicator from the outside and the inside is not possi- Unlock once. Use either the key or the remote will flash on all vehicles, fitted and nor fitted ble. The rear lid can not be opened. The cen- control. with an alarm, until they unlock. tral lock button does not work. Once the key is inserted in the lock cylinder, Remember: rotate once in the unlock direction. The driver door will remain without “Safe” and unlocked.

1) Available depending on market and version. 128 Opening and closing

In vehicles fitted with an alarm, see the Anti- Automatic speed-dependent lock- Note theft Alarm section ››› page 133. ing and unlocking system* If the airbags are triggered during an acci- Using the remote control, press the unlock dent, the vehicle is unlocked, except for the button on the remote  once. The “Safe” sys- This is a safety system which prevents access luggage compartment. It is possible to lock tem for all the vehicle is deactivated, only the to the vehicle from the outside when it is run- the vehicle from inside with the central driver door is unlocked and both the alarm ning (e.g. when stopped at a traffic light). locking, after turning the ignition off and and the warning lamp are also turned off. back on again. Locking Unlocking all doors and the luggage com- The doors will lock automatically if the speed partment of 15 km/h (9 mph) is exceeded. The rear lid Central lock button* The unlock button on the remote control  will lock automatically if the speed of 6 km/h must be pressed twice so that all doors and (4 mph) is exceeded. the luggage compartment can be opened. If the vehicle is stopped and any of its doors Press twice within 5 seconds to deactivate open, when starting again and exceeding the the “Safe” system for all vehicle, to unlock all mentioned speed, all doors will lock again. doors and to use the luggage compartment. The warning lamp and the alarm (only vehi- Unlocking cles fitted with one) are turned off. On withdrawing the ignition key, the vehicle will returns to its status prior to self-locking. Unlocking the luggage compartment Each door can be unlocked and opened in- See ›››  page 16. dependently from the inside (for example, Fig. 135 Central lock button. when a passenger gets out). To do it, simply operate the lever inside the door. Read the additional information carefully Self-locking system to prevent in- ›››  page 15 voluntary unlocking WARNING The central lock button allows you to lock The door handles must not be operated and unlock the vehicle from the inside. It is an anti-theft system and prevents the un- when the vehicle is running: the door would The central lock button also works with the intentional unlocking of the vehicle. open. ignition switched off, except when the “safe” If the vehicle is unlocked and none of the system is activated. doors (including the boot) are opened within 30 seconds, it re-locks automatically. Please note the following if you lock your vehicle with the central lock button: » 129 Operation

● Locking the doors and rear lid prevents access from the outside (for safety reasons, e.g. when stopped at a traffic light). ● The driver door cannot be locked while it is open. This avoids the user from forgetting his key inside the vehicle. Fig. 137 Technology ● All doors can be unlocked separately from inside the vehicle. To do so, pull the door release lever once. Unlocking and locking the vehicle WARNING with Keyless Access* Fig. 139 Locking and ignition system without Keyless Access: sensor surface A for unlock- ● If the vehicle is locked, children and disa- ing inside the door handle and sensor surface bled people may be trapped inside it. B for locking on the exterior of the handle. ● Repeated operation of central locking will prevent the central lock button from Depending on the equipment, the vehicle working for a few seconds. Then, it can only may have the Keyless Access system. be unlocked in case it has been previously Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni- locked. After few seconds, the central lock- tion system to unlock and lock the vehicle ing becomes operative again. without actively using its key. To do this, all ● The central lock button is not operative that is required is to have a valid vehicle key in when the vehicle is locked from the outside the detection area where you are attempting (with the remote control or the key). Fig. 138 Keyless Access locking and ignition to access the vehicle ››› Fig. 138 and to touch system: In the proximity of the car. one of the sensor surfaces on the door handles ››› Fig. 139 ››› . Related videos Keyless Access The vehicle can be unlocked and locked via the driver door only. When doing so, the remote control key must be no further than approx. 1.5 m away from the door handle. It does not matter where you carry the key, for instance whether it is in your jacket pocket or in a briefcase. Fig. 136 Convenience

130 Opening and closing

Once the doors have been locked, they can- Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a ● Touch (once) the locking sensor surface B not be opened again immediately. This will double flash of the indicator lights; locking by (arrow) on the driver door handle. The door enable you to check that the doors are prop- a single flash. that is used must be closed. erly closed. If the vehicle is locked and then all doors and In vehicles with safety system “Safe”: If you wish, when unlocking, you can unlock the rear lid are closed leaving the last key closing and locking the doors (Keyless-Ex- only the driver’s door, the side being un- used inside the vehicle and none outside, the it) locked, or the entire vehicle. The necessary vehicle will not lock immediately. All the ve- adjustments can be performed in vehicles hicle's indicator lights will flash four times. ● Switch the ignition off. with a driver information system The vehicle will lock after a few seconds if ● Close the driver's door. ›››  page 34. you do not open any door or the rear lid. ● Touch (once) the locking sensor surface B The vehicle will lock again after a few sec- (arrow) on the driver door handle. The vehicle General information onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to open locks with the “Safe” security system If a valid key is located in the proximity of the any door or boot hatch. ››› page 128. The door that is used must be car ››› Fig. 138, the Keyless Access locking closed. and starting system gives the key entry as Unlocking and opening the doors (Key- ● Touch (twice) the sensor surface B (arrow) soon as one of the sensor surfaces on the less-Entry) of the driver door handle to lock the vehicle driver door handle is touched. The following ● Grip the driver door lever. In doing this, the without activating the “Safe” security system features are then available without having to sensor surface ››› Fig. 139 A (arrow) on the ››› page 128. use the vehicle key actively: handle is touched and the vehicle unlocks. ● Keyless-Entry: unlocking the vehicle using ● Open the door. Unlocking and locking the boot hatch the handle of the front driver’s door or the When the vehicle is locked, the rear lid auto- softtouch/handle on the rear lid. On vehicles with selective opening or info- matically unlocks on opening if there is a val- tainment system configuration, pulling the ● Keyless-Exit: locking the vehicle using the id vehicle key in the proximity ››› Fig. 138. door handle twice will unlock all doors. sensor on the driver door handle. Open or close the rear lid normally. ● Press & Drive: keyless starting of the engine In vehicles without safety system “Safe”: After closing, the hatch locks automatically. If with the starter button ››› page 220. closing and locking the doors (Keyless-Ex- the complete vehicle is unlocked, the rear lid it) The central locking and locking systems op- will not lock automatically after closing it. » erate in the same way as a normal locking ● Switch the ignition off. and unlocking system. Only the controls ● Close the driver's door. change.

131 Operation

What happens when locking the vehicle Keyless Access temporary disconnection handle for a few seconds until the windows with a second key function* have closed. If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and You can deactivate the vehicle's Keyless Ac- The doors opened by touching the sensor it is locked from the outside with a second ve- cess unlocking for a locking and unlocking surface of the door handle depend on the hicle key, the key inside the vehicle is blocked cycle. settings that have been activated in the Easy for engine ignition ››› page 217. In order to Connect system with the  /  button and ● Move the gear lever to position P (if the ve- enable engine ignition, press the  button on the SETTINGS > Opening and closing hicle has automatic gearbox), since other- the key inside the vehicle. function buttons. wise the vehicle cannot be locked. Automatically disabling sensors ● Close the door. CAUTION If the vehicle is not locked or unlocked for a ● Push the central locking button  on the re- The sensor surfaces on the door handles long period of time, the proximity sensors on mote control and touch the locking sensor could engage if hit with a water jet or high the passenger doors are automatically disa- surface of the driver door handle pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle bled. ››› Fig. 139 B within the following 5 seconds. key in the proximity. If at least one of the Do not grasp the door handle; otherwise the electric windows is open and the sensor If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han- vehicle will not unlock. Deactivation is also surface B (arrow) on the handle is activa- dles is often activated in an unusual manner possible if the vehicle is locked through the ted continuously, all windows will close. with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branches driver’s door lock. of a bush rubbing against it), all proximity Note sensors are disabled for a certain period of ● To check that the function has been deacti- time. vated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pull ● If the vehicle battery has little or no on the door handle. The door should not charge, or the vehicle key battery is almost Sensors will again be enabled: open. or entirely out of charge, you will probably ● After a time. not be able to lock or unlock the vehicle The next time the door can only be unlocked with the Keyless Access system. The vehi- ● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but- via the remote control or the lock cylinder. cle can be unlocked or locked manually. ton  on the key. The next time the door is locked/unlocked, ● To control the proper locking of the vehi- Keyless Access will be active again. ● OR: if the boot is opened. cle, the release function is disabled for ap- ● OR: if the vehicle is unlocked manually with prox. 2 seconds. Convenience functions the key. ● If the message Keyless access system To close all the electric windows using the faulty is displayed on the screen of the convenience function, keep a finger on the dash panel, abnormalities may occur in the locking sensor surface B (arrow) of the door operation of the Keyless Access system. Contact a specialised workshop. SEAT 132 Opening and closing recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for Childproof lock for the left-hand side doors ››› Fig. 140 and this. clockwise for the right-hand side doors. ● Depending on the function set on the infotainment system for the mirrors, the exte- Deactivating the childproof lock rior mirrors will unfold and the surround – Unlock the vehicle and open the door lighting will come on when unlocking the whose childproof lock you want to deacti- vehicle using the sensor surface on the vate. driver door handle. – With the door open, rotate the groove in the ● If there is no valid key inside the vehicle door using the ignition key, anti-clockwise or the system fails to detect one, a warning for the right-hand side doors, and clock- will display on the dash panel screen. This wise for the left-hand side doors could happen if any other radio frequency ››› Fig. 140. signal interferes with the key signal (e.g. Fig. 140 Childproof lock on the left hand side from a mobile device accessory) or if the door. Once the childproof lock is activated, the key is covered by another object (e.g. an door can only be opened from the outside. aluminium case). The childproof lock prevents the rear doors The childproof lock can be activated or de- ● from being opened from the inside. This sys- If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a activated by inserting the key in the groove tem prevents minors from opening a door ac- layer of salt, the correct functioning of the when the door is open, as described above. sensors on the door handles may be affec- cidentally while the vehicle is running. ted. In this case, clean the vehicle. This function is independent of the vehicle ● If the vehicle is equipped with an auto- electronic opening and locking systems. It matic gearbox, it may only be locked in the only affects rear doors. It can only be activa- Anti-theft alarm* gear stick is in position P. ted and deactivated manually, as described ● To improve the safety of your vehicle, the below: Description of anti-theft alarm sys- remote control of the system is equipped tem* with a position sensor. If this remote control Activating the childproof lock does not detect movement for a certain The anti-theft alarm makes it more difficult to length of time, the system will conclude – Unlock the vehicle and open the door in break into the vehicle or steal it. The system that the vehicle cannot be opened (e.g. on which you wish to activate the childproof will initiate acoustic and optical warning sig- a night table) so it will be disabled. lock. nals when your vehicle is tried to be forced. – With the door open, rotate the groove in the door using the ignition key, anti-clockwise The anti-theft alarm system is automatically switched on when locking the vehicle. The system is immediately activated and the turn » 133 Operation

signal light located on the driver door will ● The rear lid is opened. the vehicle is opened using the driver door flash along with the turn signals, indicating ● Ignition switched on with a non-validated key. that the alarm and the locking security sys- key. Otherwise, the alarm will trigger for 30 sec. tem (double lock) have been turned on. ● Movements in the driving compartment (ve- and the ignition will be blocked. If any of the doors or the bonnet are open, hicles with a volume sensor). they will not be included in the protection Note ● Towing of the vehicle1). zones of the vehicle when the alarm is con- ● Vehicle tilt angle1). ● After 28 days, the indicator light will be nected. If the door or the bonnet are subse- switched off to prevent the battery from quently closed, they will be automatically in- ● Undue manipulation of the alarm. draining if the vehicle has been left parked cluded in the protection areas of the vehicle ● Battery handling. for a long period of time. The alarm system and the turn signals will flash accordingly remains activated. when the doors close. In this case, the acoustic signals will go off ● The alarm will trigger again if attempts and the turn signal will flash for approximate- are made to open another protection zone. ● The turn signal light will flash twice on ly 30 seconds. This cycle may be repeated ● The alarm system can be activated or opening and deactivating the alarm. up to 10 times depending on the country. deactivated using the radio frequency re- ● The turn signal light will flash once on clos- mote control ››› page 125. ing and activating the alarm. Opening all the doors in manual mode ● The anti-theft alarm is not activated In vehicles without an alarm, when opening when the vehicle is locked from within using When does the system trigger an alarm? the driver door manually, all doors are the central locking button . The system triggers an alarm, if the following opened. ● If the vehicle battery is run down or flat unauthorised actions are carried out when then the anti-theft alarm will not operate the vehicle is locked: How to switch the alarm off correctly. ● Mechanical opening of the vehicle with the To deactivate the anti-theft alarm, turn the ● Vehicle monitoring remains active even if vehicle key without switching on the ignition in key in the opening direction, open the door the battery is disconnected or not working the next 15 seconds (in certain markets, such and switch the ignition on, or press the unlock for any reason. as the Netherlands, the alarm is activated im- button  on the remote control. ● The alarm is triggered immediately if one mediately). In vehicles equipped with an anti-theft alarm of the battery cables is disconnected while the alarm system is active. ● A door is opened. system, you have 15 seconds to insert the key in the ignition lock and activate the ignition if ● Opening the bonnet.

1) With vehicles fitted with a tow-away protection 134 Opening and closing

Vehicle interior monitoring and an- on. In order to activate it, all the doors and the alarm is switched on again, unless it is ti-tow system* the rear lid must be closed. deliberately switched off. If you wish to switch off the vehicle interior ● If the alarm has been triggered by the Monitoring or control function incorporated in monitoring and the anti-tow system, it must volumetric sensor, this will be indicated by the anti-theft alarm* which detects unau- be done each time that the vehicle is locked; a flashing of the warning lamp on the driver thorised vehicle entry by means of ultra- if not, they will be automatically switched on. door when the vehicle is opened. The flash sound. is different to the flash indicating the alarm The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- is activated. tow system should be switched off if animals Activation ● The vibration of a mobile phone left in- are left inside the locked vehicle (otherwise, side the vehicle may cause the vehicle in- – It is automatically switched on when the their movements will trigger the alarm) or anti-theft alarm is activated. terior monitoring alarm to trigger, as both when, for example, the vehicle is transported sensors react to movements and shakes in- or has to be towed with only one axle on the side the vehicle. Deactivation ground. ● If on activating the alarm, any door or the – Open the vehicle with the key, either me- rear lid is open, only the alarm will be acti- chanically or by pressing the  button on False alarms vated. The vehicle interior monitoring and the remote control. If the vehicle is opened Interior monitoring will only operate correctly the anti-tow system will only be activated mechanically, the time period from when if the vehicle is completely closed. Please ob- once all the doors are closed (including the the door is opened until the key is inserted serve related legal requirements. rear lid). into the contact should not exceed 15 seconds, otherwise the alarm will be triggered. The following cases may cause a false – Press the  button on the remote control alarm: Deactivating the vehicle interior twice. The volumetric sensor and tilt sen- ● Open windows (partially or fully), monitoring and anti-tow system* sors will be deactivated. The alarm system ● Movement of objects inside the vehicle, remains activated. such as loose papers, items hanging from the When the vehicle is locked, the alarm will be triggered if movements are detected in the in- The vehicle interior monitoring and the anti- rear vision mirror (air fresheners), etc. terior (e.g. by animals) or if the vehicle's incli- tow system are automatically switched on nation is changed (e.g. during transport). You again next time the vehicle is locked. Note can prevent the alarm from being triggered The vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow ● If the vehicle is relocked and the alarm is accidentally by switching off the vehicle inte- activated without the volumetric sensor sensor (tilt sensor) are automatically switch- rior monitoring and/or tow-away protection. function, relocking will activate the alarm ed on when the anti-theft alarm is switched with all its functions, except the volumetric – To switch off the interior monitoring and sensor. This function is reactivated when tow-away protection, switch off the ignition » 135 Operation

and, using the Infotainment system, select: ● The rear lid must not be opened when the Controls for the windows Infotainment button  /  and then the reverse or rear fog lights are lit. This may SETTINGS > Opening and closing > damage the tail lights. Central locking > Vehicle interior Opening and closing the electric ● Do not close the rear lid by pushing it windows monitoring button. down with your hand on the rear window. – When the vehicle is locked now, the vehicle The glass could smash. Risk of injury! interior monitoring and the tow-away pro- ● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing tection are switched off until the next time it. If not, it may open unexpectedly while the door is opened. driving. ● Never allow children to play in or around If the anti-theft security system (Safelock)* the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjec- page 128 is switched off, the vehicle interi- ››› ted to extremely high and low tempera- or monitoring and the tow-away protection tures, depending on the time of year, thus are automatically switched off. causing serious injuries/illness. It could even have fatal consequences. Close and WARNING lock both the rear lid and all the other Observe the safety warnings ››› in De- doors when you are not using the vehicle. scription on page 127. ● Closing the rear lid without observing and ensuring it is clear could cause serious Fig. 141 Detail of the driver door: controls for injury to you and to third parties. Make sure the front and rear windows. that no one is in the path of the rear lid. Rear lid ● Never drive with the rear lid open or half- Read the additional information carefully closed, exhaust gases may enter into the ›››  page 18 Opening and closing interior of the vehicle. Danger of poisoning! The front and rear electric windows can be ● If you only open the rear lid, do not leave operated by using the controls on the driver Read the additional information carefully the key inside. The vehicle cannot be door. The other doors each have a switch for ›››  page 16 opened if the key is left inside. their own window.

WARNING Always close the windows fully if you park the ● Always close the rear lid properly. Risk of vehicle or leave it unattended ››› . accident or injury. You can use the electric windows for approx. 10 minutes after switching off the ignition if neither the driver door nor the front

136 Opening and closing passenger door has been opened and the ● Therefore always take the key with you ● If the window is still obstructed, the window key has not been removed from the ignition. when you leave the vehicle. will stop at this point. ● The electric windows will work until the ● If there is no obvious reason why the win-  Safety switch ignition has been switched off and one of dow cannot be closed, try to close it again by The safety switch ››› Fig. 141 5 on the driver the front doors has been opened. pulling the tab within ten seconds. The win- door can be used to disable the electric win- ● If necessary, use the safety switch to dis- dow closes with maximum force. The roll- dow buttons on the rear doors. able the rear electric windows. Make sure back function is now deactivated. that they have been disabled. ● Safety switch not pressed: buttons on rear If more than 10 seconds pass, the window will doors are activated. open fully when you operate one of the but- Note tons. One-touch closing is reactivated. ● Safety switch pressed: buttons on rear doors are deactivated. The safety control If the window is not able to close because it WARNING symbol  lights up in yellow if the buttons on is stiff or because of an obstruction, the the rear doors are switched off. window will automatically open again ● Always take the ignition key with you ››› page 137. If this happens, check why the when leaving the vehicle, even if you only WARNING window could not be closed before at- intend to be gone for a short time. Please tempting to close it again. ensure that children are never left alone in- Observe the safety warnings in Set of ››› side the vehicle. keys on page 125. ● The electric windows will work until the ● Incorrect use of the electric windows can Roll-back function ignition has been switched off and one of result in injury. the front doors has been opened. ● Never close the rear lid without observing The roll-back function reduces the risk of in- ● Closing the windows without observing and ensuring it is clear, to do otherwise jury when the electric windows close. and ensuring it is clear could cause serious could cause serious injury to you and third injury to you and third parties. Make sure parties. Make sure that no one is in the path ● If a window is obstructed when closing au- that no one is in the path of a window. of a window. tomatically, the window stops at this point ● Never allow people to remain in the vehi- ● If the ignition is switched on, the electric and lowers immediately ››› . cle when you close the vehicle from the equipment could be activated with risk of ● Next, check why the window does not close outside. The windows cannot be opened injury, for example, in the electric windows. before attempting it again. even in an emergency. ● The doors can be locked using the re- ● If you try within the following 10 seconds ● The roll-back function does not prevent mote control key. This could become an and the window closes again with difficulty or fingers or other parts of the body getting obstacle for assistance in an emergency there is an obstruction, the automatic closing pinched against the window frame. Risk of situation. will stop working for 10 seconds. accident.

137 Operation

Convenience opening and closing WARNING Resetting one-touch opening and closing ● Never close the windows without due – The automatic open and close function will Use the convenience opening/closing func- care or proper control. There is a risk of suf- not work if the battery has been temporarily tion to easily open/close all the windows fering injury. disconnected. The function can be restored from the outside. as follows: ● For safety reasons, you should only use the remote control open and close func- Convenience open function – Close the window as far as it will go by lift- tions within about 2 metres of the vehicle. ing and holding the electric window switch. – Press and hold the  button on the remote To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on the control key until all the windows have windows when pressing the button to close – Release the switch and then lift it again for 1 reached the desired position, or them. The windows stop moving as soon as second. This will re-enable the automatic the button is released. function. – First unlock the vehicle using the  button on the remote control key and then keep If you push (or pull) a button to the first stage, the key in the driver door lock until all the the window will open (or close) until you re- windows have reached the required posi- One-touch opening and closing* lease the button. If you push or lift the button tion. briefly to the second stage, the window will One-touch opening and closing means you open (one-touch opening) or close (one- Convenience close function do not have to hold down the button. touch closing) automatically. If you operate the button while the window is opening or – Press and hold the  button on the remote Buttons ››› Fig. 141 1 , 2 , 3 and 4 have two control key until all the windows are closed positions for opening windows and two for closing, it stops at this position. ››› , or closing them. This makes it easier to open and close windows to the desired position. – Lock the driver's door with the key and hold the key in the lock position until all the win- One-touch closing dows are closed – Pull up the window button briefly up to the Programming convenience opening in the second position. The window closes fully. Easy Connect* One-touch opening – Select:  /  SETTINGS> Opening and closing > Electric windows > Con- – Push down the window button briefly up to venience opening, to choose between all the second position. The window opens the windows (All), only the driver’s window fully. (Driver) or none (Deactivated).

138 Lights and visibility

Lights and visibility verified. They will switch off after a few sec- Automatic dipped beam control onds. *

Lights WARNING The automatic dipped beam control is merely Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warn- intended as an aid and is not able to recog- Control lamps ing symbols on page 118. nise all driving situations. When the light switch is in position , the  It lights up vehicle lights and the instrument panel and Driving light totally or partially faulty. Switching lights on and off switch lighting switch on and off automatically in the following situations ››› in Daytime Fault in the cornering light system. Read the additional information carefully running lights on page 140: ›››  page 31  It lights up The driver is personally responsible for the Automatic switch- Automatic switch- correct use and adjustment of the lights in all ing on ing off Rear fog light switched on ››› page 140. situations. The photo sensor de- When adequate lighting tects darkness, for exam- is detected. It lights up  Note ple, when driving through a tunnel. Left or right turn signal. ● The legal requirements regarding the use The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turn of vehicle lights in each country must be The rain sensor detects When the windscreen signal is faulty. observed. rain and activates the wipers have been inac- windscreen wipers. tive for a few minutes. Hazard warning lights on ››› page 143. ● The dipped beam headlights will only work with the ignition on. The side lights  It lights up come on automatically when the ignition is WARNING turned off. If the road is not well lit and other road Trailer turn signals ● If the lights are left on after the key has users cannot see the vehicle well enough been taken out of the ignition lock, an audi- or at all, accidents may occur.  It lights up ble warning sounds while the driver door ● The automatic dipped beam control remains open. This is a reminder to switch () only switches on the dipped beam Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 140. the lights off. when there are no changes in brightness, ● Several warning and control lamps light up The use of the lighting described here is and not, for example when it is foggy. subject to the relevant statutory require- for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- ments. ed on, signalling that the function is being

139 Operation

Daytime running lights Fog lights ly has one position. The  lamp on the instrument panel lights up. The daytime running lights consist of individual lights, integrated in the front headlights. By connecting the daytime running lights, these Turn signal and main beam lever lights are switched on1) ››› . The daytime running lights switch on every Read the additional information carefully time the ignition is switched on, if the switch is ›››  page 32 in positions  or , according to the level of exterior lighting. Parking lights ● Switch the ignition off and remove the key When the light switch is in position , a light from the lock. sensor automatically switches dipped beam Fig. 142 Instrument console: light panel. on and off (including the control and instru- ● Move the turn signal lever up or down to turn the right or left-hand parking lights on, ment lighting) or the daytime running lights Switching on the front fog lights* depending on the level of exterior lighting. respectively. ● Pull the light switch to the first point WARNING ››› Fig. 142 1 , from positions ,  or . Convenience turn signals The symbol  in the light switch lights up. ● Never drive with daytime lights if the road For the one-touch signalling, when the igni- is not well lit due to weather or lighting tion is switched on, move the lever as far as Switching on the rear fog light (vehicles conditions. Daytime lights do not provide possible upwards or downwards and release with front fog lights) enough light to illuminate the road properly the lever. The turn signal will flash three times. or be seen by other road users. ● Completely pull the light switch 2 from One-touch signalling is activated and deacti- ● On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs, position ,  or . The  lamp on the in- vated in the Easy Connect system via the when activating the daytime running light strument panel lights up.  /  button and the function button SET- the rear lights are not switched on. A vehi- TINGS > Lights > One-touch signal- cle which does not have the rear lights on Switching on the rear fog light (vehicles may not be visible to other drivers in the with no front fog lights) ling ›››  page 34. darkness, in the case of heavy rain or in ● Completely pull the light switch 2 from conditions of poor visibility. position ,  or . This type of switch on-

1) On vehicles equipped with rear LED lights, the rear side light is switched on as well. 140 Lights and visibility

In vehicles that do not have the correspond- lights are switched on. The warning lamp  lights, the tail lights and the number plate ing menu, this function can be deactivated in then comes on in the instrument panel. light will light up to provide assistance. a specialised workshop. ● When the parking lights are switched on, the headlight and the tail light on the cor- Coming Home function WARNING responding side of the vehicle light up. The The Coming Home function is activated by The main beam can dazzle other drivers. parking lights will only work with the igni- switching off the ignition. When the driver Risk of accident! Never use the main beam tion off. If said light is on, an audible warn- door is opened, the Coming Home lighting headlights or the headlight flasher if they ing will be emitted while the driver door is comes on. could dazzle other drivers. open. The Coming Home lighting switches off in the ● If the turn signal lever is left on after the following cases: Note key has been taken out of the ignition lock, an acoustic signal sounds when the driver ● ● If the convenience turn signals are oper- If, 30 seconds after being connected, any door is opened. This is intended as a re- doors or the rear lid remain open. ating (three flashes) and the other conven- minder to switch off the turn signal, unless ience turn signals are switched on, the ac- you wish to leave the parking light on. ● If the light switch is turned to position . tive part stops flashing and only flashes ● If the ignition is switched on. once in the new part selected.

● The turn signals only work when the igni- Automatic Leaving Home function tion is switched on. The corresponding Coming Home/Leaving Home Func- warning lamp   flashes in the instrument tion* The Leaving Home function is activated when panel. The control lamp  flashes when the vehicle is unlocked if: the turn signals are operated, provided a ●  trailer is correctly attached and connected the light control is in position and to the vehicle. If a turn signal bulb is defec- ● the photosensor detects “darkness”. tive, the control lamp flashes at double speed. If the trailer turn signal bulbs are The Leaving Home lighting switches off in the defective, the control lamp  does not following cases: light up. Change the bulb. Fig. 143 Related video ● If the time period for the delay in switching ● The main beam headlights can only be The Leaving Home function is controlled with off the headlights has ended switched on if the dipped beam headlights are already on. The warning lamp  then a photosensor. ● If the vehicle is locked again. comes on in the instrument panel. If the Coming Home or Leaving Home func- ● If the light switch is turned to position . ● The headlight flasher comes on for as tion is connected, the front side and dipped ● If the ignition is switched on. » long as you pull the lever – even if no other

141 Operation

Note Reverse gear justment of the headlights to avoid dazzling other drivers. ● To activate the Coming/Leaving home ● When engaging the reverse gear, both fog function, the rotary light switch must be in lights turn on. In such cases, the regulations specify certain position  and the light sensor must de- light values that must be complied with for tect darkness. designated points of the light distribution. This Motorway light* is known as “Tourist light”. The light distribution of the halogen and full- The motorway light is available on vehicles Fog lights with cornering light func- LED headlights allows the specific “tourist equipped with full-LED lights. tion* light” values to be met without the need for The function is connected/disconnected via stickers or changes in the settings. 3 Not available on vehicles equipped with full- the corresponding Easy Connect system LED headlights and bulb fog lights. menu. Note The cornering light function is an additional “Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. If ● Activation: when going above 110 km/h function to the dipped beam headlights to you are planning a long stay in a country (68 mph) for more than 10 seconds, the dip- improve lighting of the side of the road when that drives on the other side, you should ped beam raises slightly to increase the driv- taking a sharp turn at low speed. take the vehicle to an Authorised Technical er's visibility distance. Service to change the headlights. The cornering light function works when the ● Deactivation: when reducing the speed of dipped beam headlights are already on and the car below 100 km/h (62 mph), the dipped it is enabled when driving at speeds below beam returns to its normal position. approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

Forward gear Driving abroad ● If the steering wheel is turned to the right or the right-hand turn signal switched on, the The light beam of the dipped beam lights is right-hand fog lamp is gradually switched on. asymmetric: the side of the road on which ● If the steering wheel is turned to the left or you are driving is lit more intensely. the left-hand turn signal switched on, the left- When a car that is manufactured in a country hand fog lamp is gradually switched on. that drives on the right travels to a country ● After the turn, the cornering light function is that drives on the left (or vice versa), it is nor- gradually switched off. mally necessary to cover part of the headlight bulbs with stickers or to change the ad-

142 Lights and visibility

Headlight range control Value Vehicle load statusa) If your vehicle breaks down: 1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance from Driver only, luggage compartment full  With trailer and maximum drawbar load. moving traffic. 2. Press the button to switch on the hazard a) If the vehicle load does not correspond to those shown in the table, it is possible to select intermediary warning lights ››› . positions. 3. Switch the ignition off.

Dynamic headlight range control 4. Apply the handbrake. The control is not mounted in vehicles with 5. For a manual gearbox, engage 1st gear; dynamic headlight range control. The head- for an automatic gearbox, move the gear light range is automatically adjusted accord- lever to P. Fig. 144 Instrument panel: headlight range ing to the vehicle load status when they are 6. Use the warning triangle to draw the at- control. switched on. tention of other road users to your vehicle. The lights range control adapts according to WARNING 7. Always take the vehicle key with you when the value of the headlight beam and the vehi- you leave the vehicle. Heavy objects in the vehicle may mean cle load status. This offers the driver optimum that the headlights dazzle and distract oth- visibility and the headlights do not dazzle on- All turn signals flash simultaneously when the er drivers. This could result in a serious ac- coming drivers ››› . hazard warning lights are switched on. The cident. two turn signal turn signal lamps   and the The headlights can only be adjusted when ● Adjust the light beam to the vehicle load turn signal lamp in the switch  will flash at the dipped beam is switched on. status so that it does not blind other driv- the same time. The simultaneous hazard To reset, turn switch ››› Fig. 144: ers. warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off. Value Vehicle load statusa) Hazard warning lights  WARNING Two front occupants, luggage compart-  ment empty ● The risk of an accident increases if your Read the additional information carefully vehicle breaks down. Always use the haz- All seats occupied, luggage compart- ›››  page 32 ard warning lights and a warning triangle to  ment empty The hazard warning lights are used to draw draw the attention of other road users to your stationary vehicle. All seats occupied, luggage compart- the attention of other road users to your vehi-  ment full. With trailer and minimum cle in emergencies. ● Due to the high temperatures that the drawbar load. catalytic converter can reach, never park » 143 Operation

in an area where the catalytic converter With the ignition on and without light activa- It will be switched on at full brightness when could come into contact with highly inflam- tion, the analogue instrument panel lighting the doors are opened and the lights will be mable materials, for example dry grass or remains activated in daytime light conditions. dimmed during driving, when the light selec- spilt petrol. This could start a fire. The lighting is reduced as the exterior light di- tor is in ,  or . minishes. In some cases, e.g. when driving The brightness of the ambient light* can be through a tunnel without the  function ac- Note adjusted through the Easy Connect menu, as tive, the instrument panel lighting may even can colour, in versions with lighting on the ● The battery will run down if the hazard switch off. The objective of this function is to front door panel (the  /  button and the warning lights are left on for a long time, provide the driver with a visual indication that function button SETTINGS > background even if the ignition is switched off. he or she should activate the dipped beam. lighting ›››  page 34). ● The use of the hazard warning lights de- If your vehicle is equipped with a digital in- scribed here is subject to the relevant stat- strument panel (Digital SEAT Cockpit), the Note utory requirements. following message will appear Turn on the If not all the vehicle doors are closed, the lights on the instrument panel. interior lights will be switched off after approx. 10 minutes, providing the ignition key Interior lights has been removed and the courtesy light Interior and reading lights position selected. This prevents the battery Lighting of the instrument panel, from discharging. Read the additional information carefully screens and controls ›››  page 33

Luggage compartment lighting The light is activated when the rear lid is open, even when the ignition and lights are turned off. For this reason, ensure that the rear lid is always closed. Fig. 145 Related video Ambient light* Depending on the model, the lighting of the instrument panel and controls can be adjus- The ambient light lights up the area of the ted in the Easy Connect system, using the centre console and the footwell area and,  /  button and the SETTINGS function depending on the version, the front door pan- button ›››  page 34. els as well.

144 Lights and visibility

Visibility when normal operating conditions are re- WARNING established. Folded sun blinds can reduce visibility. Heated rear window ● Always store sun blinds and visors in their housing when not in use. Sun visors

Windscreen wiper and rear window wiper systems

Windscreen wiper and window wiper Fig. 146 With the air conditioning controls: heated rear window. Read the additional information carefully The heated rear window only works when the ›››  page 33 engine is running. When it is switched on, a Fig. 147 Sun visor on the driver side. lamp lights up on the switch. WARNING Options for adjusting driver and front pas- ● Worn and dirty wiper blades reduce visi- After approximately 8 minutes, the heating senger sun visors: bility and safety levels while driving. device of the rear window switches off automatically. ● Lower the sun visor towards the wind- ● In cold conditions you should not use the screen. wash/wipe system unless you have For the sake of the environment ● The sun visor can be pulled out of its warmed the windscreen with the heating and ventilation system. The windscreen mounting and turned towards the door The heated rear window should be switch- washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the ››› Fig. 147 1 . ed off as soon as the glass is demisted. By windscreen and obscure your view of the saving electrical power you can also save ● Swing the sun visor towards the door, longi- road. fuel. tudinally backwards. ● Always note the corresponding warnings ›››  page 61. » Note Vanity mirror To avoid possible damage to the battery, There is a vanity mirror, with a cover 2 , on an automatic temporary disconnection of the rear of the sun blind. this function is possible, coming back on 145 Operation

WARNING ● If you stop the vehicle with the wind- Interior mirror with automatic anti-dazzle screen wiper in position 1 or 2, it will auto- function* The rain sensor* may not detect enough matically change to a lower position rain to switch on the wipers. The anti-dazzle function is activated every speed. The set speed will be resumed when time the ignition is switched on. ● If necessary, switch on the wipers man- the vehicle pulls away. ually when water on the windscreen ob- When the anti-dazzle function is enabled, the ● The windscreen will be wiped again after structs visibility. interior rear vision mirror will darken auto- approximately five seconds once the “automatic wash/wipe system” has been acti- matically according to the amount of light it CAUTION vated, provided the vehicle is moving (drip receives. The anti-dazzle function is cancelled if reverse gear is engaged. In icy conditions, always check that the function). If you activate the wipers less than 3 seconds after the drip function, a windscreen wipers and the window wiper Note are not frozen. If you switch on the wind- new wash sequence will begin without per- screen wipers when the wiper blades are forming the last wipe. For the “drip” func- ● The automatic anti-dazzle function will frozen to the windscreen, you could dam- tion to work again, you have to turn the ig- only work properly if the sun blind* for the age both the wiper blades and the wiper nition off and then on again. rear window is retracted and there are no motor. ● Do not put stickers on the windscreen in other objects preventing light from reach- front of the rain sensor*. This may cause ing the interior rear vision mirror. sensor disruption or faults. Note ● If you have to stick any type of sticker on ● Depending on the version of the model, the windscreen, do not do so in front of the ● The wipers and washers will work only when you engage reverse gear and with sensors. Doing so could prevent the anti- when the ignition is switched on. the headlight wiper activated, this can dazzle function from working well or even ● The heat output of the heated jets* is start a wipe. from working at all. controlled automatically when the ignition is switched on, depending upon the outside temperature. Folding in the exterior mirrors man- ● In certain versions of vehicles with Rear view mirrors alarms, the windscreen wiper will only work ually in interval/rain sensor mode when the igni- Interior mirror The exterior mirrors of the vehicle may be fol- tion is on and the bonnet closed. ded in. For this, press the mirror housing to- ● It is dangerous to drive if you cannot see When the interval wipe function is on, the wards the vehicle. intervals are directly proportional to the clearly through the rear window. speed. This way, the higher the vehicle speed the shorter the intervals.

146 Lights and visibility

Note 3. Turn the knob to position R (right exterior Fold the rearview mirrors when locking the mirror). vehicle* Before washing the vehicle with an automatic car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors 4. Swivel the rotary knob to position the exte- The Easy Connect system, the  /  but- to avoid damage. rior mirror so that you have a good view to ton and the function buttons SETTINGS > the rear of the vehicle ››› . Mirrors and windscreen wipers can be used to have the exterior mirrors fold in when the vehicle is parked and locked Electric exterior mirrors* Heated exterior mirrors* ›››  page 34. – Press the demisting button  ››› Fig. 146 When the vehicle is locked with the remote – The mirrors demist for some minutes to pre- control, the exterior mirrors are retracted au- vent draining the battery unnecessarily. tomatically. When the vehicle is opened with – If necessary, press the button again to re- the remote control, the exterior mirrors are peat the function. deployed automatically.

– The exterior mirror heating is not activated in temperatures above approximately WARNING +20°C (+68°F). ● Convex or aspheric mirrors increase the field of vision however the objects appear Folding in the exterior mirrors electrically* smaller and further away in the mirrors. If Fig. 148 Exterior mirror controls. – Turn the control ››› Fig. 148 to position  to you use these mirrors to estimate the distance to vehicles behind you when chang- Read the additional information carefully fold in the exterior mirrors. You should always fold in the exterior mirrors if you are ing lane, you could make a mistake. Risk of ›››  page 20 accident. driving through an automatic car wash. This The exterior mirrors can be adjusted using the will help prevent damage. ● If possible, use the rear vision mirror to rotary knob in the driver door. estimate distances to vehicles behind you. Folding exterior mirrors back out to the ex- ● Make sure that you do not get your finger Basic setting of exterior mirrors tended position* trapped between the mirror and the mirror base when folding back the mirrors. Risk of 1. Turn knob ››› Fig. 148 to position L (left ex- – Turn the knob to position L or R to return the injury! » terior mirror). exterior mirrors to their original position 2. Turn the rotary knob to position the exterior ››› . mirror so that you have a good view to the rear of the vehicle.

147 Operation

For the sake of the environment Seats and head restraints seat belts. The further the backrests are tilted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury The exterior mirror heating should be due to improper positioning of the belt web! switched off when it is no longer needed. Adjusting the seat and head Otherwise, it is an unnecessary fuel waste. ● Exercise caution when securing the seat restraints height into forwards/backwards position. Injuries can be caused if the seat height is Note adjusted without due care and attention. Adjusting the front seats ● If the electrical adjustment ever fails to ● To move the seat forwards and back- operate, the mirrors can be adjusted by Read the additional information carefully wards, pull upwards and not sideways on hand by lightly pressing the edge of the ›››  page 19 the lever, as the force exerted on it in that mirror glass. direction could damage it. ● In vehicles with retractable external rear- WARNING view mirrors, the following must be considered: if, due to an external force (e.g. being The safe driving chapter contains impor- knocked while manoeuvring), the adjust- tant information, tips, suggestions and Adjusting the front head restraints ment of the mirror housing is altered, the warnings that you should read and observe Read the additional information carefully mirror will have to be fully folded electri- for your own safety and the safety of your cally. Do not readjust the rear vision mirror passengers ››› page 63. ›››  page 19 housing by hand, as this will interfere with Adjust the head restraint ›››  page 19 so the mirror adjuster function. WARNING that as far as possible the top of the head re- ● The fold-in function on the exterior mir- straint is level with the top of your head. When ● Never adjust the driver or front passenger rors will not activate at speeds over this is not possible, try to get as close as pos- seat while the vehicle is in motion. While 40 km/h (25 mph). adjusting your seat, you will assume an in- sible to this position. correct sitting position. Risk of accidents. Adjust the driver or front passenger seat WARNING only when the vehicle is stationary. ● Never drive if the head restraints have ● To reduce the risk of injury to the driver been removed. Risk of injury. and front passenger in case of a sudden ● After refitting the head restraint, you braking or an accident, never drive with the must always adjust it properly for height to backrest tilted towards the rear. The maxi- achieve optimal protection. mum protection of the seat belt can be ● Please observe the safety warnings ››› achieved only when the backrests are in an in Correct adjustment of front head re- upright position and the driver and front straints on page 67. passenger have properly adjusted their 148 Seats and head restraints

Note – To set the head restraint lower down, press WARNING the 1 ››› Fig. 149 button and move it ● When fitting the head restraints again, in- downwards. ● Please observe the general notes sert the tubes as far as possible into the ››› page 68. guides without pressing the button. Removing the head restraint ● Remove the rear head restraints only when it is necessary for the placement of a To remove the head restraint, the corre- child seat ››› page 80. After removing a sponding backrest must be partially folded Adjustment of the rear head re- child seat, remount the head restraint im- forward. mediately. Travelling with the head restraints – Unlock the backrest ››› page 151. straints removed or improperly adjusted increases the risk of severe injuries. – Move the head restraint upwards until it ar- rives to the top. – Press button 1 , while simultaneously Seat functions pressing on the security hole 2 with a flat screwdriver a maximum of 5 mm wide, and remove the head restraint. Introduction

– Move the backrest until it engages properly WARNING ››› . Inappropriate use of the seat functions can Fig. 149 Rear centre head restraint: release Fitting the head restraint cause severe injuries. point. To mount the external head restraints, the ● Assume the proper sitting position before your trip and remain in it throughout. This corresponding backrest must be partially fol- When transporting people in the back seat, also applies to the other occupants. ded forward. place the head restraints of the occupied ● Always keep hands, fingers, feet and oth- seats at a minimum of the next socket up – Unlock the backrest ››› page 151. er parts of the body away from the operat- ››› . – Insert the head restraint bars into the ing radius and the adjustment of seats. guides until they perceptibly engage. It Adjusting the head restraints should not be possible to remove the head – To set the head restraint higher, grasp the restraint from the backrest. sides with both hands and move it upwards, – Move the backrest until it engages properly until you see it engage. ››› .

149 Operation

Heated seats* Activate WARNING Press the button  or . Seat heating is If the fabric of the cushion is wet, this can switched on fully. adversely affect the operation of the seat heating, increasing the risk of burns. Adjusting the heating output ● Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior to Press the button  or  repeatedly until the using the seat heater. desired temperature is reached. ● Do not sit on the seat with clothing that is wet or damp. Deactivating ● Do not leave clothing that is wet or damp Press the button  or  until all the warning on the seat. lamps switch off. ● Do not spill liquid on the seat.

WARNING CAUTION Children and people who cannot perceive ● To avoid damaging the heating elements pain or temperature because of medica- Fig. 150 On the centre console: front seats of the seat heaters, please do not kneel on tions, paralysis or chronic diseases (e.g. heating switch : version with Climatronic. : the seat or apply sharp pressure to a single diabetes) or have a limited perception of version with manual air conditioning. point on the seat cushion or backrest. these, may suffer burns to the back, but- The seat cushions can be heated electrically tocks or legs when using seat heating, an ● Liquids, sharps objects and insulating when the ignition is switched on. The backrest occurrence that may entail a very lengthy materials (e.g. covers or child seats) can damage the seat heating. is also heated in some versions. recovery period or from which it may not be possible to recover fully. Seek medical ad- ● In the event of smells, switch off the seat The seat heating should not be engaged in vice if you have doubts regarding your heating immediately and have it inspected any of the following conditions: health. by a specialised workshop. ● ● The seat is unoccupied. People with limited pain and temperature thresholds must never use seat heating. For the sake of the environment ● The seat has a covering. ● If an abnormality in the device's temper- The seat heating should remain on only ● There is a child seat installed in the seat. ature control is detected, have it checked when needed. Otherwise, it is an unneces- by a specialist workshop. ● The seat cushion is wet or damp. sary fuel waste. ● The indoor or outdoor temperature is greater than 25°C (77°F).

150 Seats and head restraints

Fold down the rear seats WARNING Removable seat covers ● Please be careful when folding back the backrest! Injuries can be caused if the seat height is adjusted without due care and attention. ● Do no trap or damage seat belts when raising the backrest. ● After raising the backrest, check it has engaged properly in position. Do this by pulling on the central seat belt or directly on the backrest and check that the position lever is in the neutral position. Fig. 151 On the rear seat backrest: release ● The three point automatic seat belt only button 1 ; red mark 2 . works correctly when the backrest of the Folding the backrest forwards central seat is correctly engaged. ● Completely lower the rear headrests ››› page 148. ● Press the unlock button ››› Fig. 151 1 forwards and at the same time fold the backrest down. The rear seat backrest is not engaged when the red marking of the button 2 is visible.

Converting the table to a seat Fig. 152 Remove the covers.  Left front seat; ● Raise and lock in the back rest. The red  Rear seats » marking on the tab 2 should no longer be visible when the backrest is properly secured.

On split rear seats*, the backrest can be lowered in two sections.

151 Operation

Putting the cover Note ● Move the seat backwards until the anchor ● If using the seats without removable cov- 1) point of the zip is completely accessible . ers, the handle of the zip must be at the ● Place the removable cover on the anchor start of the zip. of the zip (the pillows have 2 anchor points). ● To clean the upholstery of the seats, see ● Move the handle of the zip against the di- the fabric cleaning section ››› page 339. rection indicated by the arrow ››› Fig. 152. ● Insert the excess fabric in the joint between Fig. 153 Label on the covers: washing instruction symbols pillow and backrest, ensuring that the removable cover is firm1). Seasonal seats are seats with removable, re- ● Move the seat back to driving position1). versible, exchangeable and washable covers. CAUTION Removing the cover ● Washing instructions for removable cov- It is suggested to move the rear seats to their ers ››› Fig. 153: rearmost position so it is easier to remove and – Wash the covers in a washing machine put the covers. using a delicate program, with water at 30°C and separately. ● Move the seat backwards until the handle of the zip is completely accessible – Do not use bleach, centrifuge or dry- clean. ››› Fig. 152 1 1). – Hang out the covers horizontally. ● Move the handle of the zip in the direction indicated by the arrow ››› Fig. 152. The re- – Iron the covers with steam, placing a movable cover is released. piece of fabric between cover and iron. ● Pull the cover off. – Avoid contact between the iron and the Alcantara leather parts. ● Move the seat back to driving position1).

1) Only in font seats. 152 Transport and practical equipment

Transport and practical WARNING Note Always keep the storage compartment The storage drawer will hold a maximum equipment cover closed while the vehicle is in motion weight of 1.5 kg. in order to reduce the risk of injury caused Practical equipment by a sudden braking or by an accident. Storage pocket in the seat* Glove compartment Storage compartment under the front seats*

Fig. 156 Storage pocket. Fig. 154 Passenger side: glove compartment. There is a storage pocket on the rear of the The compartment can be opened by pulling Fig. 155 Storage compartment under the right front seats. the lever ››› Fig. 154. front passenger seat. This compartment can hold documents in A4 To open format, a water bottle of 1.5 L, etc. Storage compartment in front door – The compartment is opened by pulling on Depending on the vehicle equipment, the CD panel* the lever and guiding it with your hand. player is located in the glove compartment. In this storage compartment a 1.5l water bot- Separate operating instructions are enclosed To close tle, etc. can be stored. for this equipment in the corresponding In- struction Manual. – Press the cover inwards until the closed drawer “clicks” into position.

153 Operation

Front drink holder* Front ashtray* Electrical power socket

Fig. 157 Front drink holders in the centre con- Fig. 158 Ashtray in the centre console. Fig. 159 Front power socket. sole. Opening and closing the ashtray The 12 Volt cigarette lighter power socket can In the central console, next to the hand brake, also be used for other electrical components ● To open the ashtray, lift the cover there are two drinks holders ››› Fig. 157. with a power rating of up to 120 Watt. When ››› Fig. 158. the engine is switched off, however, the vehi- WARNING ● To close, push the cover down. cle battery will discharge. For further informa- ● Do not put hot drinks in the drink holders. tion see ››› page 307. Emptying the ashtray During sudden or normal driving manoeuvres, when braking suddenly or in case of ● Extract the ashtray and empty it. WARNING an accident, the hot drink could spill. Risk The power sockets and the connected ac- of scalding. WARNING cessories will only operate when the igni- ● Never use rigid materials (for example, Never put paper in the ashtray. Hot ash tion is on or when the engine is running. Im- glass or ceramic), since they could cause could ignite the paper in the ashtray and proper use of the sockets or electrical ac- injury in the case of an accident. cause a fire. cessories can lead to serious injuries or ● When travelling, the drinks holder should cause a fire. To avoid the risk of injury, nev- always be closed to prevent risk in the er leave children alone inside the vehicle. event of sudden breaking or accident. CAUTION Always use the correct type of plugs to avoid damaging the sockets.

154 Transport and practical equipment

Note ● Using the lighter carefully. Carelessness – Distribute the load evenly in the luggage or negligence when using the cigarette compartment. ● The use of electrical appliances with the lighter can cause burns and serious inju- engine switched off will cause a battery – Place heavy objects as far forward as pos- ries. discharge. sible in the luggage compartment ● The lighter only works when the ignition is ● Before using any electrical accessories, ››› Fig. 161. turned on or the engine is running. To avoid see the instructions in ››› page 307. the risk of fire, never leave children alone – Place the heavy objects first. inside the vehicle. – Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening rings* ››› page 157. Cigarette lighter* – Secure loose loads with a luggage net* or Luggage compartment with non-elastic straps secured to the fastening* rings. Loading the luggage compartment WARNING ● Loose luggage and other objects in the luggage compartment could cause serious injuries. ● Always stow objects in the luggage compartment and secure them on the fastening rings*. Fig. 160 Lighter. ● During sudden manoeuvres or accidents, loose objects can be thrown forward, injur- – Press on the cigarette lighter ››› Fig. 160 to ing vehicle occupants or even third parties. activate it ››› . This increased risk of injury will be further increased if a loose object is struck by an – Wait for the lighter to spring out. Fig. 161 Position heavy items as far forward as possible. inflating airbag. If this happens, objects – Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the may shoot outward like a missile. Risk of fa- cigarette on the glowing coil. All luggage and other loose objects must be tal injury. safely secured in the luggage compartment. ● Always keep all objects in the luggage WARNING Unsecured objects which shift back and forth compartment and use appropriate grips to ● Improper use of the cigarette lighter can could affect safety or driving characteristics secure them, particularly in the case of lead to serious injuries or start a fire. of the vehicle by shifting the centre of gravity. heavy objects. »

155 Operation

● Never exceed the allowed axle weights or Note allowed maximum weight. If said weights ● The tyre pressure must be adjusted ac- are exceeded, the driving characteristics of cording to the load. When necessary, the vehicle may change, leading to acci- check the tyre pressures on the adhesive dents, injuries and damage to the vehicle. label stuck to the back of the front left door ● Please note that the centre of gravity frame ››› page 326. may shift when transporting heavy objects; ● Air circulation in the vehicle helps reduce this may affect vehicle handling and lead fogging of the windows. Used air escapes to an accident. Therefore, it is essential to through ventilation slits in the side trim of adjust your speed and driving style ac- the luggage compartment. Ensure that the cordingly, to avoid accidents. ventilation slots are never covered. Fig. 163 In the boot: removing and installing ● Never leave your vehicle unattended, es- the shelf. ● Straps for securing the load to the fas- pecially when the rear lid is open. Children tening rings* are commercially available could climb into the luggage compartment, Removing from accessory shops. closing the door behind them; they will be ● Detach the cord loops ››› Fig. 162 B from trapped and run the risk of death. their hooks A . ● Never allow children to play in or around ● Remove the rear shelf from the side sup- the vehicle. Close and lock all the doors Luggage compartment shelf ports Fig. 163 by pulling it upwards and and the rear lid when you leave the vehicle. ››› Before you lock the vehicle, make sure that then take it out. there are no adults or children in the vehicle. Storing the rear shelf ● Please observe the notes on the Depending on the equipment, once the lug- ››› page 63. gage compartment shelf has been removed, it can be stored under the boot's variable CAUTION floor ››› page 158. Hard objects on the rear shelf could chafe ● Remove the side cover sliding it upwards against the wires of the heating element in and place the shelf in the bottom. the heated rear window and cause dam- Fig. 162 In the boot: removing and installing ● Replace the side cover. age. the shelf. To remove it proceed in reverse order.

156 Transport and practical equipment

Fitting Fastening rings* of injury will be further increased if a loose ● Insert the cover horizontally so that the “re- object is struck by an inflating airbag. cess” fits onto the axis of the supports WARNING ››› Fig. 163 and press down until it engages. ● ● Hook the loops ››› Fig. 162 B to the rear lid. If pieces of baggage or other objects are secured to the fastening rings with inappro- WARNING priate or damaged retaining cords, injuries could result in the event of braking ma- Do not place heavy or hard objects on the noeuvres or accidents. rear shelf, because they will endanger the ● Never secure a child seat on the fasten- vehicle occupants in case of sudden braking rings. ing.

Fig. 164 Location of fastening rings in luggage CAUTION compartment. ● Before closing the rear lid, ensure that the rear shelf is correctly fitted. There may be some fastening rings included in the luggage compartment for fastening ● An overloaded luggage compartment luggage and other objects ››› Fig. 164 (ar- could mean that the rear shelf is not cor- rows). rectly seated and it may be bent or damaged. – Always use suitable and undamaged straps ● If the luggage compartment is overloa- to secure luggage and other objects to the ded, remove the tray. fastening rings ››› in Loading the luggage compartment on page 155.

Note Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying ● Ensure that, when placing items of cloth- unsecured in the vehicle. During a frontal col- ing on the luggage compartment cover, lision at a speed of 50 km/h (31 mph), this ob- rear visibility is not reduced. ject generates a force corresponding to 20 times its weight. That means that the effective weight of the object increases to approximately 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of the injuries which might be sustained if this “object” strikes an occupant as it flies through the interior of the vehicle. This increased risk 157 Operation

Luggage compartment variable Variable floor in the tilted position floor When the variable floor is tilted you can access the spare wheel/anti-puncture kit area.

● Lift the variable floor in the high position using handle 1 , pull it up and push it towards the backrest of the rear seats until the floor folds along the hinge line and the movable part of the floor is resting on itself. ● Rest the floor on its housings ››› Fig. 166 Fig. 166 Variable boot floor: tilted position. (arrows).

Variable floor in high position WARNING ● Lift the floor using handle ››› Fig. 165 1 During a sudden driving or braking ma- and pull it back until the front of the floor has noeuvre, or in the event of an accident, ob- fully passed the supports 2 . jects could be flung though the interior and ● Move the floor forward over the supports as cause serious or fatal injuries. far as the rear seat backrest and then lower ● Always secure objects, even when the the floor with the handle 1 . luggage compartment floor is properly lifted. Variable floor in low position ● Only objects that do not protrude more than 2/3 the height of the floor may be car- ● Lift the floor using handle 1 and pull it ried between the rear seat and the raised back until the supports 2 have fully passed Fig. 165 Variable boot floor:  raised position; luggage compartment floor.  lowered position. the front part of the floor. ● Only objects that do not weigh than ap- ● Now match the front part with the lower proximately 7.5 kg may be carried between grooves of the supports and slide the floor the rear seat and the raised luggage com- forwards as far as the rear seat backrest and partment floor. lower the floor at the same time with the handle 1 .

158 Transport and practical equipment

CAUTION ● When the vehicle is washed in a car wash. ● Any cross bars, roof carrier systems or ● loads secured to them must not interfere ● The maximum weight that can be loaded When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi- with the roof aerial or block the path of the on the luggage compartment variable floor mum height, for example, in some garages. rear lid. in the top position is 150 kg. WARNING ● On opening the rear lid make sure that it ● Do not let the luggage compartment does not knock into the roof load. floor fall when closing it. Always carefully When heavy or bulky loads are transported guide it downwards in a controlled manner. on the roof carrier system, car driving per- Otherwise, the lining and the floor of the formance is affected, as the centre of grav- For the sake of the environment luggage compartment could be damaged. ity shifts and there is greater wind resist- When cross bars and a roof carrier system ance. are installed, the increased air resistance Note ● Always secure the load properly using means that the vehicle uses more fuel. belts or retaining straps that are suitable SEAT recommends the use of straps to se- and in a good condition. cure objects to retaining rings. ● Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have a negative effect on aerodynamics, the cen- Attach the cross bars and the roof tre of gravity and driving performance. carrier system Roof carrier* ● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres. ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all Introduction times to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. The vehicle roof has been designed to optimise aerodynamics. For this reason, cross CAUTION bars or conventional roof carrier systems ● Remove the cross bars and the roof carri- cannot be secured to the roof water drains. er system before entering a car wash. As the roof water drains are integrated in the ● Vehicle height is increased by the instal- roof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap- lation of cross bars or a roof carrier system proved cross bars and roof carrier systems and the load secured on them. For this pur- can be used. pose, check that your vehicle's height does not surpass the headspace limit, for exam- Fig. 167 Attachment points for the roof railings for the roof carrier system. Cases in which cross bars and the roof ple, for underpasses or for entering garage carrier system should be disassembled. doors. The crossbars are the basis of a series of ● When they are not used. special roof carrier systems. For safety » 159 Operation

reasons, special fixtures must be used to ● Always fit the special roof carrier sys- able to carry the maximum authorised roof safely transport luggage, bicycles, skis, surf tems correctly for wheels, skis and surf- load. In this case, do not exceed the maxi- boards or boats on the roof. Suitable acces- boards, etc. mum weight limit for the roof carrier which is sories can be acquired at SEAT dealerships. listed in the fitting instructions. ● Do not modify or repair the crossbars or Always secure the crossbars and the roof roof carrier system. Distributing a load carrier system properly. Always take the assembly instructions that come with the cross- Note Distribute loads uniformly and secure them bars and the roof carrier system in question correctly ››› . into account. Always read the assembly instructions that come with the crossbars and the roof carri- Check attachments The crossbars are assembled on the roof rail- er system carefully and keep them in the ings. The distance between cross bars vehicle. Once the cross bars and roof carrier system ››› Fig. 167 A should be 75 cm and the dis- have been installed, check the bolted con- tance between the cross bars and the brack- nections and attachments after a short jour- ets of the roof railings B should be 5 cm. Loading the roof carrier system ney and subsequently with a certain frequency. WARNING The load can only be secured if the crossbars WARNING Incorrect attachment and use of the cross- and the roof carrier system are properly in- bars and the roof carrier system may cause stalled ››› . Exceeding the maximum authorised roof the whole system to detach from the roof load can result in accidents and considera- and cause an accident and injuries. Maximum authorised roof load ble vehicle damage. ● Always take the manufacturer assembly The maximum permissible roof load is 75 kg. ● Never exceed the maximum authorised load on the roof and on the axles or the ve- instructions into account. This figure comes from the combined weight hicle's maximum authorised weight. ● Use only crossbars and the roof carrier of the roof carrier, the cross bars and the load system when they are in perfect condition itself on the roof ››› . ● Never exceed the load capacity of the and are properly secured. cross bars and the roof carrier system, Always check the weight of the roof carrier ● Secure the crossbars and the roof carrier even if the maximum authorised roof load system, the cross bars and the weight of the system properly. has not been reached. load to be transported and weigh them if ● ● Check threaded joints and attachments Secure heavy items as far forward as necessary. Never exceed the maximum au- possible and distribute the vehicle load travelling and if necessary tighten them af- thorised roof load. ter you have travelled a short distance. uniformly. When making long trips, check the threa- If you are using cross bars and a roof carrier ded joints whenever you stop for a rest. with a lower weight rating, you will not be

160 Air conditioning

WARNING Air conditioning ged, so as to maintain good visibility of ev- erything outside. If the load is loose or not secured, it could fall from the roof carrier system or cause Heating, ventilation and ● The maximum heat output required to de- accidents and injuries. frost windows as quickly as possible is only available when the engine has reached its ● Always use belts or retaining straps that cooling normal running temperature. Only drive are suitable and in a good condition. when you have good visibility. ● Secure the load properly. General notes ● Always ensure that you use the heating Read the additional information carefully system, fresh air system, air conditioner ›››  page 41 and the heated rear window to maintain good visibility to the outside. Pollution filter ● Never leave the air recirculation on for a long period of time. If the cooling system is The pollution filter (a combined particulate switched off and air recirculation mode filter and active carbon filter) serves as a bar- switched on, the windows can mist over rier against impurities in the outside air, in- very quickly, considerably limiting visibility. cluding dust and pollen. ● Switch air recirculation mode off when it For the climate control system to work with is not required. maximum efficiency, the pollution filter must be replaced at the specified intervals in the WARNING Maintenance Programme. Stuffy or used air will increase fatigue and If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due to reduce driver concentration possibly re- use in areas reaching very high pollution lev- sulting in a serious accident. els, the pollen filter must be changed more ● Never leave the fresh air fan turned off or frequently than stated in the Service Sched- use the air recirculation for long periods of ule. time; the air in the vehicle interior will not be refreshed. WARNING Reduced visibility through the windows in- CAUTION creases the risk of serious accidents. ● If you suspect that the air conditioner is ● Always ensure that all windows are free damaged, switch it off with the A/C button » of ice and snow, and that they are not fog-

161 Operation

to prevent further damage and have it structing these slots with any kind of ob- ● To ensure correct operation, the grilles checked by a specialised workshop. ject. on both sides of the screen must not be ob- ● Repairs to the air conditioner require spe- ● The air conditioner operates most effec- structed. cialist knowledge and special tools. There- tively with the windows closed. However, if ● When the engine is under extreme strain, fore, we recommend you to take the vehicle the temperature inside the vehicle is exces- switch off the compressor for a moment. to a specialised workshop. sive because of the sun, the air inside can be cooled faster by opening the windows for a short time. Note Economic use of the air condition- ● Do not smoke while air recirculation ● If the humidity and temperature outside mode is on, as smoke drawn into the air ing the vehicle are high, condensation can drip conditioning system leaves residue on the off the evaporator in the cooling system evaporator, producing a permanent un- When the air conditioning is switched on, the and form a pool underneath the vehicle. pleasant odour. compressor consumes engine power and has This is normal and does not indicate a leak. influence on fuel consumption. Consider the ● At low outside temperatures, the com- ● following points in order to have the system Keep the air intake slots in front of the pressor switches off automatically and windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to operating in the minimum possible time. cannot be switched on even with the AUTO ensure heating and cooling are not im- button. paired, and to prevent the windows from ● If the vehicle interior has overheated due to misting over. ● It is advisable to turn on the air condition- an excessive solar radiation, it is best to open ing at least once a month, to lubricate the the windows or doors to allow the hot air to ● The air from the vents flows through the system gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de- escape. vehicle interior and is extracted by slots in crease in the cooling capacity is detected, ● While in motion, the air conditioning should the luggage compartment designed for this a Technical Service should be consulted to purpose. Therefore, you should avoid ob- check the system. not be switched on if the windows are open.

162 Air conditioning

Air outlets

Fig. 168 Air vents.

To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti- Air recirculation ● Press the  button, the button’s lamp will lation in the vehicle interior, air vents light up, indicating that air recirculation inside ››› Fig. 168 1 should remain open. Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells, the vehicle has been activated. e.g. when passing through a tunnel or in ● The outlets can be closed or opened sepa- queuing traffic, from entering the interior. Disconnecting the recirculation rately using the slats and the air flow directed according to need. If the air distribution is in the thaw position, the In any air distribution position except thaw: recirculation flap will always be open (indica- ● Press the  button again and the button's There are other additional, non-adjustable air tor light off). vents in the dash panel 2 , in the footwell and lamp will go off, indicating that air entry from If the air distribution is switched from any po- in the rear area of the interior. the outside has been activated. sition to the thaw position, recirculation will In the thaw position  the entry of air into the Note be automatically deactivated. vehicle interior is always from the outside. Food, medicine and other heat or cold sen- Connecting the recirculation sitive objects should never be placed in WARNING front of the air outlets as they may be dam- In any air distribution position except thaw: In air recirculation mode, no cold air from aged or made unsuitable for use by the air the outside enters the vehicle interior. If the coming from the air vents. air conditioner is switched off, the windows » 163 Operation

can quickly mist over. Therefore, never Note ● If the function is not deactivated by leave the air recirculation mode switched pressing the button, it will deactivate after ● Activating air recirculation automatically on for a long time (risk of accident). approximately 20 minutes. activates the  button (to prevent the windows from fogging). If the temperature regulator is turned to the coldest setting (blue point), the air recirculation function and the  button are automatically activated.

Heating and fresh air

Controls

Fig. 169 Heating controls on the dash panel.

1 Temperature regulator ››› page 165. 3 Air distribution regulator. Air distribution 2 Blower control. There are four speed set-  Heated rear window. Control 3 for setting the flow of air in the re- tings for the blower. The blower should al- quired direction. ways be set at the lowest speed when  – Air distribution towards the windscreen in driving slowly. order to demist. 164 Air conditioning

 – Air distribution to upper body. ● Turn blower switch 2 to any of the levels ● Close the central outlets. 1-4.  – Air distribution to footwell. ● Open and turn the side outlets towards the ● Set the airflow to the desired direction using windows.  – Air distribution to the windscreen and the air distribution control 3 . footwell. ● Open the relevant air outlets. Keeping the windscreen and the side windows demisted WARNING Interior heating ● Turn the temperature regulator ● For your safety, the windows should nev- ››› Fig. 169 1 to the heating zone. er be fogged up or covered with snow or Maximum heat output, which is needed to de- ice. This is essential to ensure good visibili- frost the windows quickly, is only available ● Turn blower switch 2 to any of the levels ty. Please familiarise yourself with the cor- when the engine has reached its operating 2-3. rect operation of the heating and ventila- temperature. ● Turn air distribution control to . tion system, including the demist/defrost ● functions for the windows. ● Turn the temperature selector Close the central outlets. ››› Fig. 169 1 clockwise to select the re- ● Open and turn the side outlets towards the quired temperature. Note windows. ● Turn blower switch 2 to any of the levels ● Once the windows are demisted and as a Please consider the general notes 1-4. ››› page 161. preventive measure, the control 3 can be set ● Set the airflow to the desired direction using in position  greater comfort while prevent- air distribution control 3 . ing the windows from misting again. Functions ● Open the relevant air outlets. Note Ventilating the vehicle interior Defrosting the windscreen Remember that the temperature of the engine coolant should be optimum to ensure The desired temperature inside the vehicle ● Turn the temperature regulator that the heating system functions correctly cannot be lower than the ambient tempera- ››› Fig. 169 1 clockwise to reach the maxi- (except in vehicles fitted with additional ture. mum temperature. heating*). ● Turn the blower switch 2 to level 4. ● Turn the temperature selector ● Turn air distribution control to . ››› Fig. 169 1 anti-clockwise.

165 Operation

Manual air conditioning*

Controls

Fig. 170 Air conditioning controls on the dash panel.

1 Temperature selector ››› page 166 WARNING Functions 2 Blower control. There are four speed set- For your safety, the windows should never Interior heating tings for the blower. At low speed, it is rec- be fogged up or covered with snow or ice. ommended to set the blower to a mini- This is essential to ensure good visibility. Maximum heat output, which is needed to de- mum of 1 to improve the intake of fresh air. Please familiarise yourself with the correct frost the windows quickly, is only available 3 Air distribution regulator. operation of the heating and ventilation when the engine has reached its operating system, including the demist/defrost func- temperature.  Air recirculation button page 163. ››› tions for the windows. When the function is activated, a warning ● Turn off the cooling system using the  light on the button is turned on. button ››› Fig. 170 (the button light turns off). Note  Heated rear window. ● Turn the temperature regulator 1 to set the Please consider the general notes.  Button to switch on air conditioning desired temperature inside the vehicle. ››› page 166. The air conditioning system ● Turn the blower switch to any of the settings only works when the engine is running 1-4. and the fan is switched on. 166 Air conditioning

● Set the air distribution regulator 3 to the ● Turn the blower switch to any of the settings ● Open and turn the side outlets towards the air flow configuration desired:  (towards the 1-4. windows. windscreen),  (towards the chest),  (to- ● Set the air distribution control to the air flow If the air conditioning does not work, this may wards the footwell) and  (towards the wind- configuration desired:  (towards the wind- be due to the following reasons: screen and footwell). screen),  (towards the chest),  (towards the footwell) and  (towards the windscreen ● The engine is stationary. Interior cooling and footwell). ● The fan blower is switched off. When the air conditioning is switched on, the ● The outside temperature is lower than +3°C temperature and the air humidity go down. Demisting the windscreen (+37°F). This way, if the outside humidity is extreme, ● Turn air distribution to . the air conditioning prevents the misting of ● The air conditioning system compressor ● Turn the fan control to one of the two levels the windows and therefore, comfort is im- has been temporarily switched off because depending on the speed required. proved. of an increased engine coolant temperature. ● Rotate the temperature control to the de- ● The air conditioner fuse is faulty. ● Turn on the cooling system using the  sired level of comfort. button (the button light turns on). ● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the air ● Close the central outlets. conditioning checked by a specialised work- ● Turn the temperature control switch until shop. the desired interior temperature is reached.

167 Operation

Climatronic*

General notes

Fig. 171 Climatronic: controls.

Read the additional information carefully Climatronic description Switching off the Climatronic  page 42 ››› Cooling only works if the following conditions ● Adjust fan power to zero ››› Fig. 171 2 or Climatronic automatically maintains a com- are met: press the  button. fortable temperature. To do so, it automati- ● The engine is running In order to ensure engines subject to heavy cally regulates the supplied air temperature ● the outside temperature is above +2°C loads are cooled, the air conditioning com- and the blower and air distribution levels. The (+36°F); pressor is switched off in the event of high system also allows for the effect of sunlight, coolant temperatures. so there is no need for manual adjustment. ●  turned on. Automatic operation guarantees maximum Starting the Climatronic Recommended setting for all seasons of comfort any time of year ››› page 169. the year When a button is pressed, the corresponding function will be activated (except for the re- ● Set the required temperature. We recom- circulation button), switching on the air condi- mend +22°C (+72°F). tioning if it was switched off. ● Press the button  ››› Fig. 171.

168 Air conditioning

● Adjust the vents so that the air flow is direc- It is possible to select interior temperatures Switching off windscreen defrosting ted slightly upwards. from +16°C (+64°F) to +29°C (+84°F). In this ● Press the  button several times or range the temperature is regulated automati- press the  button. Change between degrees Centigrade and cally. If a temperature below +16°C (+64°F) is degrees Fahrenheit selected, “LO” is displayed on the screen. If a The temperature is regulated automatically. temperature above +29°C (+84°F) is selec- The units of degrees can be changed via the The air output from the vents ››› Fig. 168 2 is ted, “HI” is displayed on the screen. At both Easy Connect system using the  /  but- increased. extremes, Climatronic works at maximum ton and the function button SETTINGS > cooling or heating power, respectively. The Units > Temperature. WARNING temperature is not regulated. Read and observe the safety warnings ››› Automatic mode In the event of prolonged, irregular distribu- in General notes on page 161. Automatic mode is used to maintain a con- tion of the air flow from the outlets (particu- stant temperature and demist the windows larly the footwells) and significant differences Note in temperature, e.g. on leaving the vehicle, inside the vehicle. ● sensitive people may catch cold. A visit to the specialised service once a year is recommended to clean the Clima- ● Set a interior temperature between +16°C tronic system. (+64°F) and +29°C (+84°F). Fan regulation ● The interior temperature sensor is at the ● Adjust the vents so that the air flow is direc- Climatronic automatically regulates blower bottom. Do not cover it with stickers or the ted slightly upwards. speed according to the interior temperature. like, as this could have a negative effect on ● Press the  button, AUTO is displayed on It is possible, however, to set the blower Climatronic operations. the screen. speed to suit requirements.

Automatic mode is switched off by pressing ● Press the 2 buttons to increase or reduce the air distribution buttons or increasing or fan speed. decreasing the blower speed. However, the Climatronic will switch off when the blower temperature remains regulated. switches off.

Adjusting the temperature Turn on windscreen defrost ● When you switch on the ignition, control 1 ● Press the button  ››› Fig. 171. ››› Fig. 171 can be used to set the required interior temperature.

169 Infotainment System

Infotainment System WARNING WARNING Distracting the driver in any way can lead Connecting, inserting or removing a data to an accident and cause injuries. Operat- medium while driving can distract your at- Introduction ing the Infotainment system can distract tention from the traffic and cause an acci- your attention from the traffic. dent. Safety warnings ● Always drive carefully and responsibly. ● Select volume settings that allow you to WARNING Infotainment system safety in- easily hear signals from outside the vehicle Connecting leads for external devices may at all times (e.g. emergency services sirens obstruct the driver. structions and horns). ● Arrange the connecting leads so that Travelling on today's roads requires the driv- ● Hearing may be impaired if using too high they do not obstruct the driver. er's full attention at all times. a volume setting, even if only for short periods of time. Only operate the radio and its various func- WARNING tions when the traffic situation really permits WARNING External devices that are loose or not prop- this. erly secured could move around the pas- The volume level may suddenly change senger compartment during a sudden driv- WARNING when you switch audio source or connect a ing or braking manoeuvre or an accident new audio source. ● Before starting the trip, you should famili- and cause damage or injury. ● arise yourself with the different radio func- Lower the base volume before connect- ● Never place or fit external devices to the tions. ing or switching audio sources. doors, windscreen, steering wheel, dash ● High audio volume may represent a dan- panel, the backs of the seats, on top of or ger to you and to others. WARNING near the area marked “AIRBAG” or between these areas and the occupants. External ● Adjust the volume in a way that you can The driving recommendations and traffic devices can cause serious injury in an acci- distinguish surrounding noise, for example, indications shown on the navigation system dent, especially when the airbags inflate. horns and sirens, etc. may differ from the current traffic situation. ● Changes to the Infotainment system set- ● Traffic signs and traffic regulations have WARNING tings should be made when the car is stop- priority over the recommendations and dis- ped, or by a passenger. plays provided by the navigation system. The armrest may obstruct the driver's arm ● Adjust your vehicle speed and driving movements, which could cause an acci- style to suit visibility, weather, road and dent and severe injuries. traffic conditions.

170 Introduction

● Always keep the armrest closed while the CAUTION vehicle is in motion. Any foreign objects stuck to a data storage device and non-round media may damage WARNING the CD player. Opening a CD player's housing can lead to ● Only clean, standard 12-cm CDs should injuries from invisible laser radiation. be used. ● Have CD players repaired only by a – Do not affix stickers or other items to qualified workshop. the data medium. Stickers may peel off and damage the drive. CAUTION – Do not use printable data media. Prin- ted labels and coverings may peel off The Infotainment system can be damaged and damage the CD drive. by the incorrect insertion of a data storage – Do not insert 8-cm “single” CDs or ir- device or the insertion of an incompatible regularly shaped CDs. data storage device. – Do not insert DVD-Plus discs, Dual ● When inserting a data storage device, Discs or Flip Discs, as these are thicker make sure it is correctly positioned than normal CDs. ››› page 191. ● Applying force may irreparably damage the memory card slot locking mechanism. CAUTION ● Only use compatible memory cards. The vehicle loudspeakers may be damaged if the volume is too high or the sound ● When inserting and removing CDs, al- is distorted. ways hold them at right angles to the front of the CD drive without tilting so as not to scratch them. Note ● If a CD is inserted while another is al- For the proper functioning of the Infotain- ready in the unit or being ejected, the CD ment system it is important that the date drive may be irreparably damaged. Always and time set in the vehicle are correct. wait until the data medium is completely ejected.

171 Infotainment System

Overview of the unit

Media System Touch / Media System Colour

Fig. 172 Overview of the controls (this configuration depends on the version).

1 Radio Mode (change of band frequency 5 Phone Mode ››› page 209 ››› page 190 6 Full Link ››› page 179 2 Touchscreen ››› page 175 7 Selecting the main menu ››› page 174 3 Vehicle settings ›››  page 34, 8 Volume. Off/on ››› page 174 ››› page 208 9 Slot for memory cards ››› page 194 4 Media mode (audio sources) 10 Settings button (search and selection) ››› page 191 ››› page 174

172 Introduction

Media System Plus / Navi System

Fig. 173 Overview of the controls (this configuration depends on the version).

1 Radio Mode (change of band frequency 7 Settings button (search and selection) ››› page 190 ››› page 174 2 Touchscreen ››› page 175 8 Phone Mode ››› page 209 3 Navigation Mode ››› page 198 9 Vehicle settings ›››  page 34, 4 Media mode (audio sources) ››› page 208 ››› page 191 10 Voice control 5 Full Link ››› page 179 11 Proximity sensor ››› page 178 6 Volume. Off/on ››› page 174 12 Selecting the main menu ››› page 174

173 Infotainment System

General instructions for use ● Restrictions on the use of devices using Infotainment buttons Bluetooth® technology may apply in some The buttons on the unit are shown in this Introduction countries. For further information, contact manual with the word “infotainment button” the local authorities. and their function within a rectangle, for ex- ● On some vehicles with ParkPilot, the vol- ample, the infotainment button  . ume of the audio source is automatically The Infotainment buttons are used by press- lowered when reverse gear is selected. The ing them or pressing and holding. volume can be lowered in the menu Sound > Volume.

Fig. 174 Related video Switching on and off Diagram of the menus If the setup is changed, this may change the To manually switch the Infotainment system display on the screen and in some cases, the on and off, briefly press the rotary knob  The Infotainment system touchscreen can be Infotainment system may behave in a manner Fig. 172 8 , Fig. 173 6 . used to select the different main menus. ››› ››› different to that described in this manual. When switching on, the system starts-up with Press the infotainment button  the last set volume, provided that this does Note ››› Fig. 172 7 , or button  ››› Fig. 173 12 to not exceed the preset maximum start-up vol- open the menu summary. ● Lightly pressing the buttons or briefly ume. Select Sound > Volume. pressing the touchscreen is sufficient to The display of the touchscreen's main menu The unit will switch off automatically when operate the Infotainment system. can be switched between “grid” and “carou- the key is removed from the ignition or when ● Not all listed function buttons and func- sel” via the Settings/System > Display the on/off button is pressed (depending on tions described may be available due to menu. the equipment fitted or the vehicle). If the In- the device software used in your market. fotainment system is switched on again, it will The equipment is not faulty if a function button is missing from the screen. switch off automatically after approximately Infotainment rotary/push knobs 30 minutes (switch-off delay). ● Due to country-specific legislation, certain functions may not be available on the Rotary/push knobs Note screen when the vehicle is travelling above The left-hand rotary knob  is the volume a certain speed. ● The Infotainment system is a part of the control or the on/off button. ● Using a mobile telephone in the vehicle vehicle. It cannot be used in any other vehi- may cause noise from the vehicle loud- The right-hand rotary knob is the setup but- cle. speakers. ton.

174 Introduction

● If the battery has been disconnected, the Muting the Infotainment system sound stops ignition must be activated before switching the media source that is playing The screen on the Infotainment system. displays .

Note Changing the basic volume If the base volume has been considerably increased to play a certain audio source, Increasing or decreasing the volume or lower the volume again before switching to muting the sound another audio source. Raise the volume: turn the volume control  Fig. 176 Sound setup menu clockwise or move the left thumbwheel on  Handling the function buttons and the multifunction steering wheel upward . The Infotainment system comes equipped display instructions Lower the volume: turn the volume control  with a touchscreen. clockwise or move the left thumbwheel on Active areas of the screen that call up a cer- the multifunction steering wheel downward tain function are called “function buttons”.  . These buttons are operated by briefly press- Changes in volume are indicated by a vol- ing the screen or by pressing and holding. ume bar on the screen. The volume can be The function buttons appear in the instruc- controlled using the steering wheel controls. tions with the label “function button” and a In this case, the changes in volume are dis- button symbol inside a rectangle . played on the instrument panel by a volume bar. Function buttons start functions or open submenus. The currently selected menu is dis- It is possible to preset certain volume settings played in the title bar ››› Fig. 175 A of the Fig. 175 View of some of the function buttons and adjustments. Select Menu > Sound > submenus. Volume. on the screen. Inactive (grey) function buttons cannot be se- Muting the Infotainment system sound lected. ● Turn the volume control  anti-clockwise Increase or decrease the size of the im- until it displays . ages displayed on the screen The size of the navigation map image ››› page 198 and, for example, photos when » 175 Infotainment System

viewing images ››› page 191 can be en- Display and function buttons: operation Opening list entries and searching larged or reduced. To do so, enlarge or re- and effect in lists duce the image displayed by moving two fin- Press it on some lists to move up a level, gers.  one by one.

Overview of screen and function buttons Press to return from the submenus one at BACK a time to the main menu or to undo the  Display and function buttons: operation entries made. and effect When pressed, a pop-up window opens The title bar shows the selected menu  (options window) which displays other A and, where applicable, other function setup options. buttons. Some functions or messages are accom- B Press it to open another menu. panied by a check box and are activated  /   or deactivated  by pressing said Fig. 177 Entries on a setup menu list. The scroll bar is shown on the right and its check box. size depends on the entries in the list. The entries on a list can be activated by Move the bar on the screen by pressing OK Press to confirm an entry or a selection. pressing them on the screen directly or by us- C lightly and without lifting the finger, see ing the adjustment button Fig. 172 10 , ››› page 176, Opening list entries and Press to close a pop-up window or an in- ››› × put window. searching in lists. ››› Fig. 173 7 . Press them to change the setup adjust- Movable cursor: Move the cursor around  /  ments one at a time. Mark list entries using the setup button the screen by pressing lightly and without and open them lifting the finger. Move the slider around the screen by ● Turn the setup button to mark the entries on OR: To move the cursor to a particular po-  pressing it lightly and without lifting your the list with a rectangle one by one and con- sition, press that spot on the screen. finger. tinue searching the list in this manner. D Fixed crosshair: Press the up, down, left ● Press the setup button to activate the and right arrows to move the sound ac- marked entry on the list. cording to preference. The cursor D will move. Search lists (scrolling the screen) OR: Press the central button to centre the stereo sound in the centre of the passen- The scroll bar is shown on the right and its ger compartment size depends on the entries in the list ››› Fig. 177 1 .

176 Introduction

● Briefly press the screen above or below the Subsequent chapters only explain those Overview of the function buttons scroll marker. functions that differ from those in the screen Function icon and text: operation and ef- ● shown in the figure. OR: Place a finger over the scroll marker fect and without lifting it, move it around the The input line with cursor is located in the top screen. Lift your finger off the screen when Letters bar of the screen. All inputs are displayed Press them to copy them into the input and dig- you reach the desired position. here. line. its ● OR: Place your finger in the centre of the screen and without lifting it, move it around Input windows for “free text input” Press to change the keypad to another language. Keypad languages can be se- the screen. Lift your finger off the screen In the input masks for open text, you may en- 1 when you reach the desired position. lected from the menu System set- ter letters, numbers and special characters in tings > Language. any combination. 2 Press to show symbols on the keypad.

Input masks with on-screen keypad Input windows for selecting a saved entry Displays the number and opens the list of (e.g. selection of a destination address) 3 remaining selectable entries that match the entered text. It is only possible to select a sequence of letters, numbers and special characters that Scroll bar, the size of which depends on 4 matches a stored entry. the number of matching entries.

Suggestions for matching destinations ap- Hold and press to display a pop-up win- pear depending on the characters entered in dow with the special characters based on the input line ››› Fig. 178 4 . In the case of 5 said letter. Press the desired character to enter it. Some special characters can be compound names, it is necessary to enter a written out instead (e.g. “AE” for “Ä”). space. Press to enter a space. If there are fewer than 99 selectable entries,  Fig. 178 Input window with on-screen keypad. the number of remaining entries is displayed Press to delete characters in the input line after the input line 3 . Pressing this function from right to left. Input windows with on-screen keypad are button displays these remaining entries in a  used for functions such as entering an entry Press and hold to delete several charac- list. ters. name, selecting a destination address or entering a search term for searching long lists. BACK Press to close the input window.  The function buttons listed below are not available in all countries or for all topics.

177 Infotainment System

Proximity sensors Initial configuration wizard Function button: function 3 Valid for: Media System Plus/Navi System Disables the possibility of changing the settings of the Infotainment sys- The Infotainment system is equipped with an tem. If you want to perform the initial NEVER integrated proximity sensor ››› Fig. 173 11 . system setup, you must enter via Sys- The image on the screen changes from dis- tem setup and select Configura- tion Wizard. play mode to automatic operation when your hand moves toward it. In operation mode, the START Starts up the Configuration Wizard. function buttons are automatically highligh- Press to configure the time and date (if ted to facilitate their use. it has a navigation system it will be A configured automatically with the GPS). Fig. 179 Initial configuration wizard Additional information and display Press to search and store to memory options the radio stations that have the best The initial configuration wizard will help you B to set up your Infotainment system the first reception at that moment on all avail- The displays appearing on the screen may time you switch it on. able bands (AM, FM and DAB). vary depending on the settings, and may dif- Press to link your mobile telephone to Every time you switch on the Infotainment C fer from those described here. the Infotainment system. system, the initial setup screen will appear The status bar on the screen can display, for ››› Fig. 179 if any parameters have not been Press to select your home address us- example, the current time and outside tem- set or if the NEVER function button has not D a) ing your current position or by man- perature. been pressed. ually entering an address. All displays can be viewed only after com- To go to the previous or next parameter pletely restarting the Infotainment system. Function button: function to set. When a parameter has been set, the PREVIOUS Closes the Configuration Wizard, and only way to reset it is from the main

the main menu or last mode in which menu, clicking on it, and not using the you used the Infotainment system will NEXT CLOSE Previous/Next buttons. appear. The next time you switch on When setting any parameter, a confir- the system, the Configuration Wizard mation mark will appear on it . will start up again.

178 Connectivity

Function button: function Connectivity ● Android Auto™ ● Apple CarPlay™ Once one or more settings have been applied, click on this in the main menu Data transfer of the wizard to confirm and finalize Interfaces the settings. FINISH This communication can allow data to be To access the Full Link system, press the info- If there are any parameters you have read and/or written. tainment button  /  or press the infotain- not set, the next time you connect the ment button  /  and then press Infotainment system, the Initial Config- From the SETTINGS menu > Data transfer Full Link . uration Wizard will start up. for SEAT apps, there is a checkbox to acti- a) Only valid for Navi System. vate/deactivate the function and a dropdown The connection to Full Link is made through a menu called Operation via apps which USB interface. controls the level of interaction between the apps and the system. WARNING If a mobile terminal is not secured or is incorrectly secured in the vehicle, it could move around the passenger compartment Full Link* in the event of a sudden driving manoeuvre, emergency stop or accident, resulting in in- Full Link technology description jury. ● While driving, mobile terminals must be securely fastened in position, outside the airbag deployment zones, or safely stowed away.

WARNING Fig. 180 Related video Any applications that are not suitable or execute incorrectly may cause damage to The Full Link system provides a way of bring- the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries. ing together technologies that allow commu- ● SEAT recommends the use of the Apps nication between the Infotainment System that SEAT provides for this vehicle. and mobile devices: ● To make full use of SEAT Apps, you must ● MirrorLink® activate the option , Settings/System > Data transfer for SEAT apps. » 179 Infotainment System

● The interaction level of the Apps on the during transmission or the improper use of Is Full Link blocked? system must be: ALLOW. mobile terminals. ● Protect the mobile terminal with its applications from improper use. Note ● Never make modifications to the applica- ● Use of Full Link technology may result in tions. high consumption of your 3G/4G data plan. ● Consult the instruction manual for the ● SEAT recommends having a high battery mobile terminal. charge on the device when connected to Full Link. WARNING ● SEAT recommends that to use Full Link, The use of applications while driving can the “Date and time” should be correctly distract your attention from the traffic. Dis- configured. Select Menu > Settings/Sys‐ Fig. 181 Message on Infotainment system tracting the driver in any way can lead to tem > Date and Time. screen. an accident and cause injuries. ● SEAT applications are designed to com- To unblock this feature, you must obtain the ● Always drive carefully and responsibly. municate with the vehicle and interact with it via the Full Link connection, therefore its accessory from your SEAT dealer. Otherwise, functionality is linked to the mobile device a message like this will appear on the screen CAUTION being connected via USB. whenever you select the feature ››› Fig. 181. ● In areas where special regulations apply ● You can find further information on the or the use of mobile terminals is forbidden, technical requirements, compatible devi- the mobile terminal must be switched off at ces, suitable applications and availability all times. The radiation produced by the at www.seat.com or at SEAT dealers. mobile terminal when switched on may interfere with sensitive technical and medical equipment, possibly resulting in malfunction or damage to the equipment. ● SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage caused to the vehicle as a result of the use of applications that are of poor quality or are defective, the inadequate programming of the applications, the insufficient coverage of the network, the loss of data

180 Connectivity

Requirements for Full Link websites to confirm whether your phone is compatible with the system. Mirror Link – Check smartphone compatibility: www.mirrorlink.com/phones – MirrorLink® 1.1 or higher – Some of the Apps certified by SEAT or the CCC must be installed in the device. Android Auto – Check smartphone compatibility. An- droid Auto™: www.android.com/auto/ – Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher – Install Android Auto™ app Apple CarPlay – Check smartphone compatibility. Apple CarPlay™:www.apple.com/ios/carplay – iPhone 5 or higher and iOS 7.1 or higher – Turn on the SIRI personal assistant (see phone settings)

3 USB cable connecting car to phone: use the USB cable approved and sup- Fig. 182 Full Link Requirements plied by the phone's official distributor.

1 Full Link Activated: If you do not have Full Link in your vehicle you can acquire it as an accessory at your Authorised Serv- ice. 2 Compatible Phones. Go to the Mirror- Link®, Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay™

181 Infotainment System

Activation of Full Link Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is not What should I do if it does not con- necessary to establish the connection be- nect? tween the smartphone and Full Link.

Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is neces- Restart the mobile device sary to enable all of the app features1). Check the USB cable visually. Proceed as follows to use Full Link: Make sure that the USB cable is not damaged. Check that both connections (USB/micro USB) are not dam- ● Switch on the Infotainment system aged or worn.

● Connect the smartphone to the vehicle's Clean the USB ports (device USB port using a USB cable ››› page 214. Visually check and vehicle). that the USB ports ● In the main menu for the Full Link setup, se- are properly con- Try another compatible mo- Fig. 183 Full Link Setup lect Activate data transfer for SEAT nected. bile device. apps ››› Fig. 183: Check that the vehicle and device Have the USB port replaced at Finally, a message will appear stating that USB connections a SEAT Authorised Service. data transfer will commence when the device are not damaged and/or worn. Have the mobile device re- is connected. Please note that data is trans- paired or replace it. ferred over connections between your vehicle and mobile device. Press OK. Once selec- Try another compatible mobile device. ted, the technology compatible with your device can be used.

Note

Fig. 184 Full Link menu Depending on your smartphone, it may have to be unlocked for the connection to occur.

1) Using the data connection to transfer the smartphone apps to Full Link may involve additional charges. Please check the charges with your operator. 182 Connectivity

Pairing of portable devices sup- systems, a choice will be presented for which Depends on each technology: ® one to make the connection with ››› Fig. 185. porting the MirrorLink , Android 1. Availability in a country Auto™ and/or Apple CarPlay™ View of the device list 2. Third party applications technologies iPhone™ devices only support Apple Car- For further information: Play™. MirrorLink®: There are some Android devices that support www.mirrorlink.com MirrorLink® and Android Auto™. Apple CarPlay™: Bear in mind that once the device is connec- www.apple.com/ios/carplay ted it will not be available as an audio source. Android Auto™: www.android.com/auto Full Link setup

Function button: function Note ● In order to use Android Auto™ technology  Activating data transfers for SEAT applications : allows Fig. 185 Full Link menu the exchange of information between the vehicle and it is necessary to download the Android applications authorised by SEAT. Auto™ application, located on Google Carousel Play™.

When you enter the Full Link context for the Last Mode ● Only compatible applications can be first time, the technologies available for pair- used, in accordance with the technology ing the portable device are displayed. If a session using one technology ends with- connected. out the disconnection being made from the Once the device connects via USB, the sys- Infotainment system (simply by disconnect- tem will offer you the technologies available ing the cable) then when the device is next for establishing a connection with your mo- connected to it, the session will start without bile phone. the user being required to take any action1). In the event of simultaneous connections between two devices with different operating Information Consult the mobile device manual.

1) Unless the device requires the screen to be unlocked in order to establish the connection. 183 Infotainment System

® MirrorLink the portable device on the Infotainment sys- Function button: function tem screen. Press to close the open apps. To avoid distracting the driver while driving, Then press the apps to be only specially adapted applications can be CLOSE APPS closed or the Close all function used ››› in Full Link technology descrip- button to close all the open ap- tion on page 179. plications. Press to change to the mobile 1 : 1 Requirements device screen. In order to use MirrorLink®, the following re- SETTINGS To open the Full Link setup quirements must be met: Press to return to the MirrorLink® ››› Fig. 187 1 ● The mobile device must be compatible with main menu. Fig. 186 Function buttons in the general view MirrorLink®. of compatible applications. Press to display all the function ● The mobile device must be connected to buttons in the lower or upper ››› Fig. 187 2 the Infotainment system via USB. right-hand margin of the screen. ● Depending on the mobile device used, a suitable application must be installed for the Fig. 187  /  ››› 1 2 ® Allows buttons and to be use of MirrorLink on the device. hidden or shown. ››› Fig. 173 12 Initiating the connection MirrorLink® setup ● In order to initiate the connection with the mobile device, it is simply necessary to con- Function button: function nect it to the Infotainment system via the USB connection.  Activate MirrorLink pop-up windows: Allows Mirror- Link® pop-up windows in applications that support it. Fig. 187 Other MirrorLink function buttons. ● A pop-up screen will appear, which will request that you accept the device. MirrorLink® is a protocol which enables communication between a portable device and Function buttons and possible messages the Infotainment system via USB. Using it makes it possible to display and man- Function button: function age the content and functions displayed on To return to the Full Link main Full Link menu. 184 Connectivity

Apple CarPlay™* ● If you start the session using Apple ● The mobile device must be connected to CarPlay™ technology, it will not be possible the Infotainment system via USB. 3 Valid for compatible iPhone™ mobile tele- to pair another device via Bluetooth®. The fol- phones. Also, iPhone™ mobile telephones only ● The Android Auto™ application should allowing message will appear in the main support Apple CarPlay™ ready be downloaded and installed on the Phone menu: mobile device. Apple CarPlay™ is a protocol which enables Please disconnect Apple CarPlay communication between a mobile telephone Initiating the connection and the Infotainment system via USB. first, before you can connect another mobile telephone. In order to initiate the connection with the This makes it possible to display and operate mobile device, it is simply necessary to con- Holding down the  button will start the the mobile telephone on the Infotainment nect it to the Infotainment system via the USB Apple™ voice “engine”. system screen. connection, and to be sure to follow the in- To return to the basic contents of the Infotain- structions of the device being paired. Requirements ment system, press the SEAT icon. ● The first connection to Android Auto™ must In order to use Apple CarPlay™, the following be done while the vehicle is stationary. requirements must be met: Android Auto™* ● Once the first pop-up window about ac- ● Make sure that you do not have Apple cepting data transfer between the car and CarPlay™ restricted on your device, at: Set- 3 Valid for compatible Android mobile phones. the device has been accepted, a message tings > General > Restrictions > Android Auto™ is a protocol which enables will appear requesting that you check your CarPlay > ON. communication between a portable device mobile device for the confirmations needed ● The mobile device must be compatible with and the Infotainment system via USB. to pair it with the Infotainment system. Apple CarPlay™. ● If you are initiating the session using This makes it possible to display and operate Android Auto™ technology via USB, the mo- ● The mobile device must be connected to the mobile telephone on the Infotainment bile telephone connects automatically via the Infotainment system via USB. system screen. Bluetooth® to the Infotainment system telephone and it will not be possible to pair an- Initiating the connection Requirements other mobile telephone via Bluetooth®. In order to initiate the connection with the In order to use Android Auto™, the following mobile device, it is simply necessary to con- requirements must be met: Holding down the  button will start the nect it to the Infotainment system via the USB Android™ voice “engine”. connection. ● The mobile device must be compatible with To return to the basic contents of the Infotain- Android Auto™. ● A pop-up screen will appear, which will re- ment system, press the Return to SEAT quest that you accept the device. button. » 185 Infotainment System

Note Is there a navigation option? If Full Link stops working, where can I have it repaired? Some mobile devices require a change in Navigation is possible in each one of the Full Link the USB connection mode in order to use technologies if the technology is available in your If the problem is in the car, you should go to the deal- Android Auto™. country and if you have the Navigation app. er. If the problem is in the mobile device, you should ● Make sure that your mobile is in “Media see your mobile telephone vendor. What is the difference between using the Full Link Transfer Protocol (MTP)” mode before it is system navigator (via telephone) instead of an- Will WhatsApp be certified? connected by USB to the Infotainment sys- other navigator? tem. This depends on the technology. Benefits: Daily updates. Issues: data consumption, reception problems. Is MirrorLink® available in my country? Note ® Android Auto™ requires the use of Google™ Can I send voice messages? Yes, MirrorLink is available in all the countries and regions where SEAT operates. services, as well as certain basic applica- With certified apps, you can answer but not send tions of the Android system. voice messages. What are the differences between MirrorLink®, ● Make sure that you always have Google™ Android Auto™ and Apple CarPlay™? services updated in order to use this tech- What apps are visible while driving? MirrorLink® is not compatible with Android Auto™ and nology. Depending on the technology: Apple CarPlay™, as they are different technologies. – for MirrorLink®: SEAT-certified apps and CCC, They all coexist in Full Link, although Android Auto™ is – for Android Auto™: Apps selected by Google™, designed for mobile devices with the Android™ oper- Frequently asked questions about – for Apple CarPlay™: Apps selected by Apple™. ating system, and Apple CarPlay™ for iPhone. Full Link Where can I find compatible apps? Can MirrorLink® be installed in a previous SEAT model? Compatible apps can be found on the following links: What is the connection method? www.mirrorlink.com/ No, this is not possible. www.android.com/auto/ USB Cable. www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ Where can I find more information about Full Link? Will the USB cable be supplied with the vehicle? Where can I download apps? If you have any questions, please see our Innova- No. The USB cable supplied with the device should On Google Play™ for Android Auto™/MirrorLink® and tion/Connectivity sections on our website: be used. on Apple Store™ for Apple CarPlay™. www.seat.es or www.seat.com or e-mail seat-re- [email protected]

186 Connectivity

SEAT Media Control* Share connection via WLAN > Configu- Data transmission and control ration. functions Introduction Make sure that data transfer for apps is acti- 3 Not available for model: Media System Touch / vated: Colour ● From the SETTINGS menu > Data transfer for SEAT apps, there is a checkbox to activate/deactivate the function and a dropdown menu called Operation via apps which controls the level of interaction between the apps and the system. Select Menu > Settings/System > Transfer data Fig. 188 Related video from mobile devices. Fig. 189 SEAT Media Control Main menu The SEAT Media Control1) app can be used You can obtain information about technical to remotely operate some partial functions in requirements on the SEAT website or at SEAT The Infotainment System can be operated Radio mode, Media mode and Navigation dealerships. from other seats in the vehicle as follows, with mode. Information can be exchanged be- Telephone functions are not part of the func- the help of SEAT Media Control: tween a device and the Infotainment System. tions of this app. ● Each one of the functions is operated by Radio remote control. means of a Tablet or partially by means of a ● Multimedia playback remote control. mobile phone. The following information can be exchanged between a device and the Infotainment Sys- Operating requirements: tem, depending on the country and the ● A tablet or mobile phone. equipment: ● The app must be available on the corre- ● sponding device. Navigation destinations. ● ● There must be a WLAN connection between Traffic information. the Infotainment System and the device. Se- ● Social media contents. lect Menu > Media > Settings > WLAN > ● Audio transmission. »

1) Availability depends on the country. 187 Infotainment System

● Vehicle data. ● The exchange of data packages over the ● Enter and confirm the network key dis- ● Location-specific information, for example, internet may generate additional costs, de- played on the wireless device. POIs. pending on your mobile phone rate, partic- The following settings can also be made on ularly if you are abroad (for example, roaming rates). the menu Share connection: Security level: WPA2 encryption automatical- WLAN access point* ly generates a network key. Setting up WLAN connection shar- Network key: Network key automatically gen- Introduction ing erated. Press the function button to 3 Not available for model: Media System Touch / manually change the network key. The Colour The Infotainment System can be used to network key must have a minimum of 8 share a WLAN connection with 8 wireless de- characters and a maximum of 63. The Infotainment System can be used to vices. share a WLAN connection with up to 8 devi- SSID: WLAN Network name (maximum of 32 ces page 188, Setting up WLAN connec- characters). ››› Establishing the connection with the wire- tion sharing. Do not send network name (SSID): Activate less network (WLAN) the checkbox to deactivate the visibility The Infotainment System can also use the ● Press the Infotainment button  and then of the wireless (WLAN) network. WLAN hotspot of an external wireless device press the Settings / System menu. to provide Internet to the devices connected ● Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on the The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish- to the hotspot (WLAN client) ››› page 189, Infotainment System. To do so, press the ed. To complete the connection, it may be Setting up Internet access. WLAN function button. necessary to enter other data into the wireless device. Note ● Activate the wireless network (WLAN) on the wireless device that is to be connected. If Repeat this process to connect other wireless ● Data transmission may incur charges. necessary, refer to the manufacturer’s in- devices. Due to the high volume of data exchanged, SEAT recommends the use of a flat rate struction manual. mobile phone deal for data transmission. ● Activate the mobile device assignment on Mobile phone operators can provide the the Infotainment System. To do so, press the relevant information. Enable WLAN connection button and activate the checkbox.

188 Connectivity

Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)1) Establishing the connection with the wire- Note less network (WLAN) Due to the large number of different wire- Wi-Fi Protected Setup can be used to create ● Activate and check the wireless hotspot on less devices in existence, it is not possible a ciphered local wireless network quickly and the external device. If necessary, refer to the to guarantee fault-free operation of all simply. manufacturer’s instruction manual. functions. ● Establish the connection with the wireless ● Press the Infotainment  button and then network (WLAN) ››› page 197. press the Settings menu; OR access Media or SEAT Media Control mode and press the SET- ● Press the WPS button on the WLAN router2) TINGS menu. until the warning light on the router starts flashing. ● Press the WLAN menu and then enter Inter- net access settings on your phone and acti- ● OR: Press and hold the WLAN button on the vate the checkbox. WLAN router until the WLAN light on the router starts flashing. ● Press the Find function button and select the wireless device you want from the list. ● Press the WPS button on the WLAN device. The wireless (WLAN) connection is establish- ● If necessary, enter the network key of the ed. wireless device in the Infotainment System and confirm with OK. Repeat this process to connect other wireless devices. Manual settings: To manually enter the network settings of an external wireless (WLAN) device.

Setting up Internet access The wireless (WLAN) connection is established. To complete the connection, it may be The Infotainment System can use the WLAN necessary to enter other data into the wire- hotspot of an external wireless device to es- less device. tablish an internet connection.

1) This function depends on the equipment and the country in question. 2) If the WLAN router does not support WPS the network must be configured manually. 189 Infotainment System

Operating modes Function button: function Opens the setup menu of the active SETTINGS Radio frequency band (FM, AM or DAB). Selects the previous or next stored sta- Related video tion or of the station list. This setting  /  can be changed in the Radio settings menu (FM, AM, DAB).

1 to 18 Memory buttons ››› page 191.

Fig. 192 Radio mode: station list (FM). Stops the scan function (only visible when the function is under way). It can SCAN be activated in the settings menu (FM, Press the infotainment button  /  Fig. 190 Radio mode AM and DAB). ››› Fig. 172 1 , ››› Fig. 173 1 to open the Ra- dio main menu ››› Fig. 191. Information and possible icons

Radio main menu Radio main menu function buttons Display: Meaning

Function button: function View the frequency or the name of the station and, where applicable, the radio To change the group of memory but- A text. The name of the radio station and 1 tons slide a finger over the memory the radio text will only be displayed if buttons from left to right or vice-versa equipped with RDS and if it is active. Allows you to select the frequency BAND RDS The RDS radio data service is deactiva- band. Off ted.

STATION Opens the list of currently receivable Traffic information can be retrieved: se- LIST radio from the active frequency band. TP lect Radio > Settings > Traffic station. Allows you to select the frequency MANUAL Fig. 191 Radio main menu. manually. No stations with traffic news are availa-  ble. Allows you to select the information VIEW shown on the screen. Only available in The radio station is stored on a memory DAB mode.  button.

190 Operating modes

Display: Meaning In the Radio main menu, you can store sta- Functions of the memory buttons tions from all available frequency wave- The tracking of alternative frequencies is lengths on the numbered function buttons. A station logo can be assigned to AF off disabled. These function buttons are called “memory the stations stored on the memory buttons. buttons”. Storing the A logo is automatically assigned Note station logo on from the database if the Advanced the memory Functions of the memory buttons radio settings option is enableda). ● The availability of AM and DAB bands de- buttons pends on the country and/or equipment. In A logo can also be assigned man- Press the memory button corre- the event that the AM and DAB bands are ually from an external data source sponding to the desired station. (USB/SD card). not available, the BAND function button Selecting the The stored stations can only be text will not be shown. station from a) Not available for the Media System Touch/Colour the memory played by pressing the corre- ● Bear in mind that being underground, in model. buttons sponding memory button provided tunnels, in areas with tall buildings or it can be received at your current mountains can interfere with radio signals. location. ● Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to Move your finger over the screen Media the windows may affect reception on vehi- from left to right or vice-versa. cles with a window aerial. Change mem- OR: Press one of the function but- Introduction ory bank tons ››› Fig. 193 A Memory buttons The memory buttons are displayed in three memory banks.

Keep and hold the desired memory Storing the button until an audible signal is station on the heard, the station will be stored on memory but- this memory button. You can also tons Fig. 194 Related video store a station from a station list. “Media sources” are audio sources containing audio files on various different data storage devices (e.g. CD, memory card, external MP3 player). These audio files can be played »

Fig. 193 Radio main menu.

191 Infotainment System

by the Infotainment system via their corre- Using the Media main menu, different media Function buttons of the main Media menu sponding drives or audio input sockets (inter- sources can be selected and played. nal CD drive, memory card slot, AUX-IN multi- Function button: function ● Press the infotainment button  /  media socket etc.). Indicates the media source being Fig. 172 4 , Fig. 173 4 to open the Me- ››› ››› played. Press to select another media main menu Fig. 195. Copyright ››› dia source ››› page 193.

Audio and video files on data storage devices It will continue playing the last media source CD : Internal CD drive are usually protected by intellectual property selected from the same point. ››› page 194. rights, as per the corresponding national and The media source being played is indicated SD CARD 1 , SD CARD 2 *: SD memo- international laws. Be aware of the current leon the dropdown list when pressing the ry card ››› page 194. gal provisions! SOURCE function button ››› Fig. 195. SOURCE USB 1 , USB 2 *: External data stor- Note If there is no available media source, the Me- age device connected to the USB dia main menu is displayed. port  ››› page 195. ● Do not use memory card adapters. ● SEAT assumes no liability for any deterio- AUX : External audio source connected to the AUX-IN multimedia ration or loss of files on data storage devi- socket page 195. ces. ››› BT AUDIO : Bluetooth® audio ››› page 196.

Media main menu Opens the track list. Depending on SELECTION the level, track list, folders or source.

Changes track in Media mode or  /  fast forward/rewind ››› Fig. 195.

Playback stops. The  function  button changes to  .

Playback is resumed. The  func-  tion button changes to  .

Opens the Media Settings SETTINGS menu. Fig. 195 Media main menu.

192 Operating modes

Function button: function Messages and symbols on the Media main Note menu Repeat all tracks. ● When the media source is inserted, play- Display: Meaning ing will not start automatically; it is neces- Repeats all the tracks that are on sary for the user to select the source. Nor the same memory level as the track Displays information about the artist will the media source change when it is  being played at that moment. If in name, album name and song title (CD ejected. REPEAT the Media Settings menu the text , ID3 tag on compressed audio  Mix/Repeat including subfolders op- files). tion is enabled, it also includes the A subfolders. Audio CD: displays track information. If no data is available, it only displays Changing the Media source  The current track will be repeated. Track and the number corresponding to the position it occupies on the data stor- REPEAT age device. Random play. Album cover display: If there are various Includes all the tracks that are on covers within the same folder/album, the the same memory level as the track system only displays one of them. being played at that moment. If in It prioritizes displaying the covers in the MIX  B the Media Settings menu the following manner:  Mix/Repeat including subfolders op- 1. Cover embedded in the file(s). tion is enabled, it also includes the 2. Image in file folder. subfolders. 3. Default icon of the connected device.

The playing time so far and time remain- Fig. 196 MEDIA mode: change media source. ing in minutes and seconds. In the case C of audio files with variable bit rates (VBR) ● From the Media main menu, press the the remaining time may vary.  /  ››› Fig. 172 4 , ››› Fig. 173 4 Info- The TP function is active and can be tainment button repeatedly to cycle through TPa) used: select Radio > Settings > the available media sources. Traffic programme (TP). ● OR: From the Media main menu, press the There are no traffic stations available: SOURCE function button ››› Fig. 196 and se- a) select Radio > Settings > Traf- lect the desired media source. fic programme (TP). In the pop-up window, the Media sources not a) Depends on the market and unit in question. selected are shown as deactivated (in grey). »

193 Infotainment System

When a Media source that has already been Insert or eject a CD ● The CD in the drive will be ejected and played is selected again, playback is re- must be removed within approximately 3 Valid for the model: Media System Plus/Navi sumed from the point at which it was stop- 10 seconds. System ped.

Optional Media playback sources Insert or eject a memory card Function button: media source Depending on the features and the country, CD Internal CD drive ››› page 194. the vehicle may have one or two slots for SD cards. SD CARD 1 SD memory card ››› page 194. SD CARD 2 * Inserting a memory card

USB 1 External data storage device con- Insert the compatible memory card, bevelled nected to the USB port  edge first and with the label face up (con- USB 2 * ››› page 195. Fig. 197 Slots for data storage devices in the tacts face down), into slot ››› Fig. 197 2 , until glove compartment. properly inserted. External audio source connected AUX to the AUX-IN multimedia socket The driver should refrain from operating the If a memory card cannot be inserted, make ››› page 195. unit while the vehicle is in motion. Insert or sure it is positioned correctly and is compati- BT AUDIO Bluetooth® audio ››› page 196. change the data storage device before mov- ble with the unit. ing off! External audio source connected WLAN *a) Removing a memory card by WLAN ››› page 197 The CD drive can play audio CDs and audio data CDs. The inserted memory cards must be pre- a) Not available for the Media System Touch/Colour pared for removal. model. Inserting a CD ● From the main Media menu, press the Note ● Hold the CD with the printed side facing up. SETTINGS button to open the Media Set- The Media source can be changed in the ● Push the CD into the slot ››› Fig. 197 3 to tings menu or press the infotainment button Track list view: select Media > View. the point where it is drawn in automatically.  /  ››› Fig. 172 7 , ››› Fig. 173 12 and then press Settings / System , to open menu Ejecting a CD System settings. ● Press the Remove safely function button. A ● Press button  1 . dropdown menu appears with the following options: SD1 Card, SD2 Card*, USB1 and 194 Operating modes

USB2*. After correctly ejecting the memory Instructions and restrictions ● Now the data storage device can be dis- card from the system, the function button be- Compatibility with Apple™ devices and other connected. comes inactive (grey colour). media players depends on the unit. ● Press the inserted memory card. The mem- Note The USB port  supplies the usual USB volt- ory card “jumps” to the eject position. ● Do not connect an external media player age of 5 volts for a USB connection. ● Remove the memory card. at the same time to play music via Blue- External hard disks with a capacity greater tooth® and via the USB port  with the In- fotainment system, as this could cause Unreadable memory card than 32 GB must be reformatted for the FAT32 file system in some circumstances. You will playback limitations. If a memory card is inserted and the data find the necessary software and information ● If the external player is an Apple™ device, cannot be read, the relevant warning ap- on the Internet. it cannot be simultaneously connected by pears. USB and by Bluetooth®. Take into account all other instructions and limitations regarding requirements for media ● If a connected device is not recognised, sources. disconnect all the connected devices and External data storage device con- try connecting the device again. nected to the USB port  Disconnecting ● Do not use memory card adaptors, USB extension cords or USB hubs! Depending on the features and the country, Any connected data storage devices must the vehicle may have one or two USB con- be prepared before their disconnection in or- nections ››› page 214. der to remove them. External audio source connected to Audio files on an external data storage device ● From the main Media menu, press the the AUX-IN multimedia socket  connected to the USB port  can be played SETTINGS button to open the Media Set- and controlled via the Infotainment system. tings menu or press the infotainment button Depending on the equipment and country  /  ››› Fig. 172 7 , ››› Fig. 173 12 and Where this manual refers to external data there may be an AUX-IN multimedia socket then press Settings / System , to open menu storage devices, this means USB mass stor- ››› page 214. System settings. age devices containing supported audio files, The connected external audio source is ● Press the Remove safely function button. A such as MP3 players, iPods™ and USB sticks. played over the vehicle speakers and cannot dropdown menu appears with the following be controlled via the Infotainment system Only supported audio files are displayed and options: SD1 Card, SD2 Card*, USB1 and controls. played. Other files are ignored. USB2*. After correctly ejecting the data storage device from the system, the function but- The connection of an external audio source is ton becomes inactive (grey colour). indicated by AUX on the screen. »

195 Infotainment System

Connecting an external audio source to Starting Bluetooth® audio transfer The available functions will depend on the ® the AUX-IN multimedia socket ● Activate Bluetooth® visibility on the external Bluetooth Audio profile that the connected ● Lower the base volume on the Infotainment Bluetooth® audio source (e.g., mobile tele- external player supports. system. phone). With media players that support the AVRCP ● Connect the external audio source to the ● Lower the base volume on the Infotainment Bluetooth® profile, playback on the Blue- AUX-IN multimedia socket. system. tooth® audio source can be automatically started or stopped when the unit is switched ● Start playback on the external audio ● In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE to Bluetooth® Audio mode or to a different au- source. function button and select BT audio . dio source. In addition, it is possible to view or ● In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE ● Press Search for new device in order to con- change the track via the Infotainment system. function button and select AUX . nect an external Bluetooth® audio source for the first time ››› page 210. Note ® ● OR: Select a Bluetooth external audio ● Due to the large number of possible Blue- Connecting an external audio source from the list. tooth® audio sources, it is not possible to source via Bluetooth® ● Please refer to the instructions on the guarantee fault-free operation of all de- screen of the Infotainment system and on the scribed functions. ® Bluetooth Audio mode allows you to listen to Bluetooth® audio source regarding the rest of ● Do not connect an external media player ® audio files being played on a Bluetooth au- the procedure. to play music via Bluetooth® and via the dio source (e.g., a mobile telephone) connec- USB port  ››› page 195 at the same time ted via Bluetooth® (audio playback by Blue- You may still need to manually start playback with the Infotainment system, as this could tooth®) over the vehicle speakers. on the Bluetooth® source. cause playback limitations. When playback on the Bluetooth® audio ● If the external player is an Apple™ device, Conditions source is stopped, the Infotainment system it cannot be simultaneously connected by ® ● The Bluetooth® audio source must support remains in Bluetooth® Audio mode. USB and by Bluetooth . the A2DP Bluetooth® profile. ● In the Bluetooth Settings menu the Controlling playback  Bluetooth Audio (A2DP/AVRCP) function must The extent to which the Bluetooth® audio be on. Select Phone > Settings > Blue- source can be controlled via the Infotainment tooth. system depends on the connected Blue- tooth® audio source.

196 Operating modes

Connecting an external audio ● In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE The image files must be stored on a compati- source through WLAN* function button and select WLAN . ble data storage device (e.g., a CD or an SD ● Please refer to the instructions on the card). 3 Not available for model: Media System screen of the Infotainment system and on the Touch/Colour ● Press the Infotainment button  WLAN audio source regarding the rest of the ››› Fig. 173 12 and then press the Images procedure. WLAN allows wireless connection between an function button. external audio source (for example a smart ● phone) and the Infotainment system. Controlling playback Press the SOURCE function button to select the source where the pictures in question are To use this connection, the device being con- The extent to which the WLAN audio source located. nected must have an app compatible with can be controlled via the Infotainment system the UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) communi- depends on the connected WLAN audio Function button: function cation protocol, allowing the app to provide source and the application used. the system with the available media content. SOURCE Viewing and selecting the source. Note SELECTION Opens a list of image files. Conditions ● The Infotainment system does not pro- The image viewed was obtained via ● vide an internet connection, it only estab- Having a compatible (UPnP) app installed GPS localisation and upon pressing lishes a wireless connection between the on the mobile device. this function button, the navigator mobile device and said system.  ● Having the Enable WLAN connection op- menu opens to start a route to this ● Via the WLAN, only the connection be- destination. tion active, which can be found in the wireless tween the device and the Infotainment sys- connection configuration. Rotate the view of the image to the tem can be guaranteed, its operation de-  /  left or the right. ● Pairing the mobile device to the Infotain- pends on the application itself. ment system using a password generated by  Reset the view of the image. the system. The pairing must be done from the mobile device that you wish to connect to To stop the playback of a slideshow. Images the Infotainment system.  The  function button changes to  3 Valid for the model: Media System Plus/Navi . Starting the WLAN audio transfer System To continue the playback of a slide-  show. The  function button ● Lower the base volume on the Infotainment Using the Images menu, image files can be changes to  . » system. viewed (e.g. photos) individually or as a slide- ● Start the UPnP app or the app for the play- show. back of the WLAN audio source.

197 Infotainment System

Function button: function Requirements for viewing images The destination is defined by entering an address or a point of interest, e.g. a petrol sta- To change to the PREVIOUS or Image files Maximum resolution or hotel. Traffic reports, if any, will also be NEXT image. tion taken into account in the route calculation  /  The same function can be per- BMP 4MP (dynamic route guidance ››› page 206). formed by sliding your finger hori- Spoken instructions and visual guidance on zontally across the screen. JPEG 4MP (Progressive Mode) the navigation unit and on the instrument SETTINGS Open the Image settings menu. JPG 64MP panel will direct you to your destination. GIF 4MP Enlarging or reducing the view CAUTION PNG 4MP To enlarge or reduce the view of the image The navigation announcements played displayed: may be inaccurate (e.g. due to out-of-date navigation data). ● Turn the adjustment knob. Navigation1) ● OR: Stretch or reduce the image on the screen using 2 fingers. Instructions for navigation Introduction

Rotating the view/image When the Infotainment system is unable to receive any data from GPS satellites (due to a To rotate an image, in addition to the buttons dense tree canopy, underground car park), provided for this ( / ), you can also press navigation can still continue using the vehicle on the screen (e.g. with your thumb) and, sensors. while continuing to press with your thumb, slide another finger (e.g. your index finger) Fig. 198 Related video Possible limitations in navigation around it like a compass either clockwise (to rotate the image to the right) or anti-clock- In areas that are not or are only partially digi- General information wise (to turn the image to the left). This will ro- tised on the data storage device, the Infotain- tate the image 90° with respect to its current Using all the data available, the Infotainment ment system will still attempt to provide route position. system calculates the optimum route to the guidance. destination.

1) Only available for the model: Navi System 198 Operating modes

Navigation area and updating navigation Using navigation data Navigation main menu data ● Insert the memory card ››› page 194. Roads and streets are subject to constant ● Do not remove the memory card while test- change (e.g. new roads, changes to street ing. Wait for the testing icon to disappear. names and building numbers). Therefore, if the navigation data is not updated, then er- If the inserted memory card contains valid rors or inaccuracies may occur during guid- navigation data, the following message ap- ance. pears: “The source contains a valid navigation database”. It is now possible to SEAT recommends updating navigation data navigate with the memory card data. When on a regular basis. Up to date navigation data the memory card is no longer needed by the can be downloaded from www.seat.com or hardware, it will be prepared for removal acquired at a SEAT dealer. ››› page 194. Fig. 199 Navigation main menu

Note The Navigation main menu allows you to se- Updating and using navigation da- lect a new destination, call up a previously ● The inserted memory card must be pre- used or stored destination and search for ta from an SD card pared before it is ejected ››› page 194. points of interest. ●  The Infotainment system always requires the Press the Infotainment button ››› Fig. 173 12 ; then press Settings/System navigation data that is currently valid for this Opening the main Navigation menu to open the System settings menu. unit in order to allow all functions to be used ● Press the Infotainment system button  in full. Using an old version may lead to errors ● Navigation is not possible without the SD ››› Fig. 173 3 to open the last menu that was during navigation. card. open in navigation. ● Do not remove the memory card while Updating navigation data the navigation data is in use. This could damage the memory card! Function buttons and messages on the The current navigation data can be downloa- main Navigation menu ded in the internet at www.seat.com and stor- ● The navigation memory card may not be ed in a SD card compatible with the unit. used as memory for other files. The info- Function button: function tainment system will not recognise the files Suitable SD Cards can be acquired at SEAT saved. A The split screen is displayed ››› page 204. dealerships. ● SEAT recommends only using original Messages and function buttons on the map B The procedure is described on the internet at SEAT memory cards to use navigation data. display ››› page 205. » www.seat.com. The use of other memory cards could limit its operation. 199 Infotainment System

Function button: function ● In the Navigation main menu, press the not in the postcode area you have selected New destination function button. in a previous window, you will not be able to NEW DESTINATION : To enter a new destination ● Press the Options function button and se- find the street at the street selection stage. ››› page 200. lect the required type of destination (Search, ROUTE : During route guidance ››› page 201. Address, POI on the route or On map). Function button: function ● MY DESTS. : To activate or manage stored destina- Using voice control*, if you say Town, street Country : To select the desired country. tions ››› page 202. and number, without pauses, and then the in- City : To enter the desired city or postcode. struction “Start Route Guidance” a route to POI : Search for points of interest (car parks, fuel sta- the given destination will start. Street : To enter the desired street name. tions and restaurants) within a particular search area ››› page 203. Search House number : To enter the desired house number. VIEW To modify or activate or deactivate the split Search for addresses and Points of Interest Junction : To select the desired intersection. screen and show POI ››› Fig. 199 A ››› page 204. using the keypad to enter them Fig. 200. ››› Last destinations : Open the My destinations SETTINGS Open the Navigation Settings menu ››› page 202. menu ››› Fig. 199. For cities, post codes and points of interest, the full details must be entered. You can also Start : Start route guidance to the selected address. search for points of interest by names or categories. When necessary, enter the name of Using the map New destination (enter destina- the city to refine the search. tion) ● Select the destination on the map or enter ››› Fig. 200 it using GPS coordinates and confirm with OK . Press to open the cursor buttons (, ), A which allow you to move within the text. Function button: function

Address Save : To save the selected point of interest in the destination memory ››› page 202. After entering a country and a town, you can start navigating towards the centre of the se- Edit : To edit a destination or to enter another desti- lected town. nation. When narrowing down the destination ad- Route options : To adjust route options, see Naviga- tion Settings > Route options. dress, please note that every entry restricts Fig. 200 Search screen. the available range of subsequent selections. Start : Starts guided navigation to the selected point For instance, if the street you are looking for is of interest.

200 Operating modes

After starting route guidance Route criteria: Meaning For other adjustments to the navigation recommendations, select Navigation > Set- Orange route: Shortest route to the destination, tings > Navigation announcements even if it results in longer travelling time. The route settings. may have unconventional sections such as secon- dary roads. Note ● Select the desired route by pressing it. ● If you miss a turning during route guidance and are currently unable to turn back, Once the route has been calculated, the sys- keep on driving until the navigation system tem gives the first navigation announcement. offers a new route. Before turning, up to 3 navigation announce- ● The quality of the navigation recommen- ments will be heard. dations given by the Infotainment system Fig. 201 Route calculation. depends on the navigation data available ● Press the adjustment knob ››› Fig. 173 7 to and any reported traffic problems. listen to the last audible navigation instruc- After starting route guidance, the route to the tion. first destination will be calculated. The calculation will be performed in accord- A navigation announcement informs you Route ance with the data selected in the Route when you have reached your “destination”. In the Navigation main menu, press the Route options menu. A navigation announcement informing you function button. After starting route guidance, three alterna- that you have reached the “destination area” tive routes will be suggested depending on is given if the exact destination cannot be The Route function button is only displayed the selected setup ››› Fig. 201. These 3 routes reached because it is located in a non-digi- with route guidance activated. correspond to the selectable route options: tised area. Economical, Fast and Short. During dynamic route guidance, you re- Function button: function ceive information about reported traffic con- Stop route guidance : Aborts current route guidance. Route criteria: Meaning gestion on the route. An additional navigation announcement is given if the route is recalcu- Enter destination : To enter a new destination or a new Blue route: Economical route, the route is calculated stopover ››› page 200. by taking into consideration economic factors. lated due to traffic congestion. During a navigation announcement, you can Congestion ahead : To exclude a section (of 0.2 to 10 Red route: Fastest route to the destination, even if it km in length) from the current route, e.g. to avoid change its volume using the button  is necessary to make a deviation. congestion. To cancel the exclusion, press the Route ››› Fig. 173 6 . function button and then Cancel congestion . »

201 Infotainment System

Function button: function Routes  Destination. In the Route mode, you can define various Route details : View route information for current route. Estimated time of arrival at destina- destinations (final destination and stopovers). ... tion. The starting point of a route is always the current vehicle position determined by the In- ... Calculated distance to destination. My destinations (destination mem- fotainment system. The destination is the ory) end point of a route. Stopover destinations ... Travelling time. are driven to before the destination. The stored destinations can be selected from ... Distance to the next stopover. the My destinations menu. ● In the Navigation main menu, press the My Destinations. function button. Press on the destination to display the function ● Press the My destinations. function button in buttons. ● Press the Routes function button. The the main Navigation menu. routes stored previously will appear.  Delete destination. ● Select the desired function button. Store position , Routes , Destinations , If you have not stored any routes or want to To start guidance direct to the selec- Last destinations or Home address . create a new route, press the New route func- ted destination. Destinations that  come before the selected destination tion button and then follow the instructions as are ignored. Store position for a new destination, before pressing Store . To open the detailed view of the desti- ● By pressing the Store position function but- Pressing on a stored route brings up the fol-  nation in question. ton, the vehicle's current position is stored as lowing function buttons: a Flagged destination in the destination Available function buttons. memory. Function button: function New dest. To add a new destination to the tour. ● Mark the Flagged destination in the Delete : To delete a stored route. destination memory. Destina- To add a new destination from My tions destinations to the tour. Edit : To edit and store a route. ● Press the Store function button. Storing To store the created tour in the tour Start : To start route guidance. The name can be changed in the following memory. input window. Press the  function button to Start To start route guidance. store the destination. Function buttons and indications in the New route or Edit route menu Calculate To update calculated distance and estimated arrival time.a) Function button or message: function or meaning

 Stopover. 202 Operating modes

Stop To stop route guidance to the active stored home address can be edited or over- Points of interest (POI) destination.b) written.

To move a stopover or a destination to If a home address has already been stored,  another position on the list. Press and route guidance will be started to the stored drag to move the destination. home address. a) This function button is only displayed with route If a home address has not yet been stored, an guidance activated and when a destination has been address can be assigned as the home ad- added to the tour. dress. b) This function button is only displayed with route guidance activated. Assigning the home address for the first time:

Last destinations Position : Press to store the vehicle's current position as the home address. Fig. 202 Points of interest on the map. View of destinations for which a route has al- Address : Press to enter the home address manual- ready been started. ly. The points of interest saved in the navigation data memory are divided into different point Editing the home address: My destinations of interest categories. Each point of interest The home address can be edited in the Naviga- category is assigned a symbol for display on ● Press the Options function button and select the desired function button. tion settings > Manage memory menu. the map. If a database of points of interest has been Function button: function imported into the Infotainment system, page 207, Importing Personal POI the Destination memory : View of destinations stored man- ››› ually and from imported vCards ››› page 207, Im- category Personal POI is also shown. porting vCards (electronic business cards). In the Map settings menu, the categories of Favourites : View of destinations stored as favourites. points of interest to display on the map can be configured. Up to 10 categories of points Contacts : View of entries in the phonebook that have of interest can be selected. » a stored address (postal address).

Home address Only one address or position can be stored as the home address at any one time. The

203 Infotainment System

Selecting a point of interest on the map Function button: function Split screen

Function button: function Map display in three dimensions (bird's eye view). There are several points of interest in the area. 1 Press this symbol to open a list of points of in- 3D  Buildings are also displayed in three terest. dimensions. The places of interest and well-known buildings are shown in de- The only point of interest in this zone. Press the tail and in colour. 2 symbol to open the detailed view of the point of interest. a) To display the destination on the map.

Quick POI search a) To display the route on the map. In the Navigation main menu, press the POI Auto / To change between day and night for- Fig. 203 Split screen displayed. function button and the three main catego- Day / Night mat. ries will appear. Alternatively, enter the name The split screen ››› Fig. 203 A may display of the point of interest to be searched using Press to display the split screen Split screen any of the information described below: the new destination keypad, or press ››› page 204. Search nearby on the map table on ››› POI Display points of interest on the map. ● Press on the name of the split screen to se- page 205. lect a display option. a) This function button is only displayed with route guidance activated. Function button: function View Audio : Indicates the selected audio source.

In the Navigation main menu, press the View Compass : Displays a compass with the current trav- function button. elling direction and indicates the current position of the vehicle (street name). Function button: function Manoeuvre : Displays a list of the next manoeuvres, POIs or TMCs on the route and pressing them brings Map display in two dimensions (con- up additional information 2D  ventional). Most frequent routes a): Information on the user's most frequent routes.

204 Operating modes

Function button: function Function button: function Function button: function

Position : current vehicle position in coordinates and Demo mode start (only when demo mode is active) View map scale. Turn the setup button or GPS status (satellite reception). move your fingers together/apart on the  touchscreen to change the scale of the a) This function button is only shown when route guid- map. ance is not active or when predictive route guidance Map display is active. It can mute or repeat the last announce-  ment, or can change the announcement Press the  function button to close the split volume. screen. To change the orientation of the map At any moment during navigation, pressing  (north-facing or direction of travel). This inside the map will make a pop-up menu ap- function is only available in 2D mode. pear with the following functions:  To centre the vehicle position on the map.

Function button: function To centre the destination on the map. This function button is only displayed if either Street name or coordinates : shows the details of the  Display destination on map or Display point selected on the map. route on the map is selected ››› page 204. Only when you press on an icon on the map: Fig. 204 Messages and function buttons on the map display. Briefly zooms in on the map. After a few POI : name of the point of interest (when only one seconds, it automatically returns to the appears on the map). Function buttons and messages on the  last selected scale. map display. Group of POIs : more points of interest (when you Road signs: Depending on the vehicle's equip- press on the map on various POIs grouped to- To activate function buttons  and , press ment, the road signs stored in the navigation data are gether).  function button . displayed. Select Navigation > Settings > Favourite : name of the favourite. Map > Show road signs. Function button: function Home : Home address. To select automatic scaling. If the func- Start route guidance : starts guidance directly.  tion is active, the symbol is displayed in blue. Add stopover destination : only when you have an active route.  Current altitude indicator.

Search nearby : enters in the search menu, but only for the area around the point selected on the map.

205 Infotainment System

Traffic reports and dynamic route If during route guidance a traffic report is re- Predictive navigation guidance to the destination (TRAF- ceived that affects the route being travelled, an alternative route will be searched for if the FIC) Infotainment system calculates that time can be saved.

Traffic reports on map (selection)

Symbol: Meaning

 : Slow traffic

 : Traffic jam Fig. 206 Predictive navigation  : Accident When you activate Predictive navigation, the Fig. 205 Traffic reports system detects and stores in the background  : Slippery road surface (ice or snow) routes that are frequently followed, without The Infotainment system constantly receives them being active destination routes. This traffic reports (TMC/TMCpro) in the back-  : Slippery road surface function has no navigation announcements ground, provided a TMC traffic news station unless the user requires them, getting them can be received at the current location. The  : Danger by pressing the adjustment knob station being listened to does not have to be ››› Fig. 173 7 . the traffic news station.  : Road works ● On the main screen of the Navigation menu, List of available traffic reports  : Strong wind in the pop-up window, press the ● Press the Infotainment button  Frequent routes button. To display frequently : Road closed to traffic ››› Fig. 173 12 and then press the TRAFFIC  followed routes press the Show on map button function button. ››› Fig. 206. During route guidance, traffic congestion that does not affect the route calculated is dis- Dynamic route guidance played in grey. In order for dynamic route guidance to function, Dynamic route must be activated in the route options.

206 Operating modes

Importing vCards (electronic busi- Importing Personal POI Navigation with images ness cards) Importing the Personal POI to a points of Importing vCards to the destination mem- interest destination memory ory ● Insert the data storage device with the stor- ● Insert the data storage device with the stored Personal POI or connect it to the Infotain- ed vCards or connect it to the Infotainment ment system ››› page 191. system ››› page 191. ● Press the Infotainment button  ● Press the SETTINGS function button in the ››› Fig. 173 3 and then select Settings . main Navigation menu. ● In the Settings menu, press the ● In the Navigation settings menu, press Manage memory function button. the Import destinations function button. ● Press Update my POIs and then press Fig. 207 Images main menu. ● Select the data carrier with the vCards Update and Next to import the Personal saved in the list. POIs. Selecting an image and starting route guidance ● Press Import all vCards from this folder . ● Confirm the import notification with the OK function button. Bear in mind the requirements and formats of ● Confirm the import notice with the OK the compatible images. function button. The stored Personal POI are now in the points of interest destination memory ››› page 203 ● Insert the data storage device with the stor- The saved vCards will now be in the destina- and can be used for navigation purposes. ed images or connect it to the Infotainment tion memory ››› page 202 and may be used system. for navigation. The stored Personal POI can be deleted in the Navigation Settings > Manage ● Press the Infotainment button  Note Storage menu. ››› Fig. 173 12 and then select Images . Only one address per vCard can be impor- ● Press the SOURCE ››› Fig. 207 function but- ted. In the event any vCards have multiple ton and select the data storage device where addresses, only the main address will be the images are stored. imported. ● Select the desired image. ● If the image displayed was taken using GPS localisation, the  function button will appear. Press to start guidance to a destination.

207 Infotainment System

Route guidance in Demo mode With the function button View you can ac- sumption devices is obtained. It is shown via a cess the following information: consumption indicator bar in l/h (gal/h)1). If demo mode is activated in the Navigation Settings menu, an additional pop-up win- Instrument panel Driving data dow opens when you start route guidance. Press the Instrument Panel button to choose The onboard computer is equipped with 3 from the various display options and custom- memories that work automatically. In these ● Pressing the Demo mode function button starts a “virtual route guidance” to the desti- ise the information that appears in the Digital memories you can see the distance travelled, nation you have entered. Cockpit ››› page 104: average speed, time passed, average consumption and autonomy of the vehicle. ● If you press the Normal function button, a – Automatic Display: default information “real route guidance” starts. depending on the selected Driving Ecotrainer* Mode. If the corresponding equipment is available, – Classic Display: the entire lengths of the ECOTRAINER will provide information on the revolutions per minute and speed- Vehicle Menu driving style. The information on driving style ometer needles are shown. is only evaluated and displayed when moving Introduction to using the Vehicle – Views 1, 2, 3: customise the information forward. that appears in the digital cockpit. Only menu 2 of these items of information can be Vehicle status displayed at the same time, but the user By pressing button  /  ››› Fig. 172 3 , Press the Vehicle status button to access chooses which to display, and in what ››› Fig. 173 9 of the infotainment system you information on the Vehicle status mes- order, by moving the finger vertically will access its main menu with the following sages and Start-Stop system. The Vehicle over the dials. Depending on the version, options: status messages are displayed, in addition to the Views can be memorised by existing being specified on the corresponding button. ● VIEW the menu or keeping the View button pressed. ● MINIPLAYER, in the top right corner (Radio or Media function) Consumers ● PREVIOUS-NEXT (to change screen) By pressing the Consumers button, informa- ● SETTINGS ›››  page 34 tion on the status of the vehicle's main con-

1) In the case of Gas (CNG) vehicles, the units are in kg/h. 208 Operating modes

Telephone If you detect any operating issues between ● While the vehicle is in motion, always se- your mobile telephone and the Infotainment cure the mobile telephone properly outside system, restart your mobile by switching it off the airbag deployment zone. General information and on again. WARNING WARNING Mobile telephones may interfere with and General, mandatory, legal and country- alter the correct operation of pacemakers specific instructions and laws for the use of if they are carried directly over them. mobile phones inside the vehicle must always be considered. ● Maintain a minimum distance of at least Fig. 208 Related video 20 centimetres between the aerials of the mobile telephone and the pacemaker. WARNING The Telephone functions described below ● Do not carry your switched-on mobile can be used through the Infotainment system Speaking by telephone and using the mo- telephone in your breast pocket directly if there is a mobile telephone connected to it bile telephone management system whilst over the pacemaker. ® driving can distract you from the road and via Bluetooth ››› page 211. ● If you suspect interference, switch off the cause an accident. In order for the mobile telephone to be able mobile telephone immediately. ● Always drive carefully and responsibly. to connect to the Infotainment system the telephone must be equipped with Bluetooth®. ● Select volume settings that allow you to CAUTION easily hear signals from outside the vehicle If there is no mobile telephone connected to at all times (e.g. emergency services sirens High speeds, poor weather or road condi- the Infotainment system, the telephone man- and horns). tions and the quality of reception can all affect the audio quality of a telephone con- agement system will not be available. ● In areas of little or no coverage or, in versation in the vehicle. The instructions shown on the screen for the some cases, in a tunnel, garage or under- telephone menus will depend on the mobile pass, your call may be cut off and you may telephone used. There may be variations. not be able to make even emergency calls. Note ● Restrictions on the use of devices using Only use compatible Bluetooth® devices. For WARNING Bluetooth® technology may apply in some further information on compatible Bluetooth® countries. For further information, contact products, ask your nearest SEAT dealer or If a mobile telephone is not secured or is in- the local authorities. check on the internet. correctly secured in the vehicle, it could move around the passenger compartment ● If you wish to connect a device to the tel- Use the instruction manual of the mobile tele- in the event of a sudden driving manoeuvre ephone management system via Blue- phone and of any accessories. or emergency stop, resulting in injury. tooth® technology, consult the safety »

209 Infotainment System

® warnings in its instruction manual. Only use tooth® connection to the telephone man- no active Bluetooth connection with other compatible Bluetooth® devices. agement system. devices. Bluetooth® connections are free. CAUTION Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue- Places with special regulations In areas where special regulations apply or tooth® SIG, Inc. the use of mobile telephones is prohibited, Switch off the mobile telephone and the mo- both the telephone and the telephone ® ® Bluetooth profiles bile’s Bluetooth function in places with a risk management system must be switched off. of explosion. In the majority of cases, these The radiation produced by the mobile tele- When a mobile phone is connected to the tel- places are signposted, but not always clearly phone when switched on may interfere with ephone management system, a data ex- ® ››› in General information on page 209. sensitive technical and medical equipment, change takes place via one of the Bluetooth They include, for example: possibly resulting in a malfunction or dam- profiles. age to the equipment. ● the vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks ● Hands-Free Profile (HFP): When connecting a mobile telephone to the phone manag- ● The lower decks of boats and ferries. er through the HFP the calls can be managed ® ● In the proximity of vehicles that run on liquid Bluetooth via the Infotainment system. gas (such as propane or butane). ● Audio profile (A2DP): This profile makes it Bluetooth® technology allows a mobile tele- ● places where the air is laden with chemi- easier to transmit audio to the infotainment phone to be connected to your vehicle's tele- cals or particles such as flour, dust or metal system with stereo quality. This function may phone management system. In order to use powder. require connecting additional profiles for the telephone management system with a ● managing and controlling audio playback. all other places where the vehicle engine mobile telephone with Bluetooth® technolo- must be switched off. gy, it is first necessary to pair them. ● Phone book access profile (PBAP): Serves to download phone book contacts ® WARNING Some Bluetooth mobile telephones detect from the mobile telephone to the Infotainment and automatically connect when turning on Switch off the mobile phone in areas with a system. the ignition if a connection has been previ- risk of explosion! The mobile telephone can ● 1) ously established. For this to take place the Message profile (MAP): Serves the automatically connect to the mobile tele- download and synchronise short messages phone network again if it loses the Blue- telephone must be switched on and its Blue- tooth® function activated, and there must be (SMS) of the mobile telephone to the Infotain- ment system.

1) Not available for the Media System Touch/Col- our model. 210 Operating modes

Note Follow instructions in the manual for the mo- main Telephone screen and you can edit this bile telephone. name via the Bluetooth settings menu To prevent them from being heard through the speakers, the button and mobile tele- During the pairing process, it is necessary to The search process can take up to 1 minute. phone alert tones must be disconnected. enter data via the mobile telephone's keypad. On the screen, the system will dynamically Where necessary, disconnect the headset update the names of the Bluetooth® devices from the mobile telephone you wish to con- Pairing a mobile telephone found. nect to the system. ● Make sure the mobile device's Bluetooth® As soon as the search is completed, the function is activated and visible. names of the Bluetooth® devices found are ● Press the infotainment button  /  displayed on-screen. Pairing and connecting a mobile ››› Fig. 172 5 , ››› Fig. 173 8 ® telephone to the Infotainment sys- ● Select the Bluetooth device you want to ● Press the Find telephone function button and connect on the infotainment system. In cer- tem then Results . tain circumstances, it is possible that to finish the connection between the two devices, you In order to manage a mobile telephone via OR: must enter additional data in the mobile tele- the Infotainment system, it is necessary to ● Press the infotainment button  /  phone and Infotainment system. pair both devices once. › Fig. 172 5 , › Fig. 173 8 › › › › ● Use your mobile telephone to enter and For your safety, we recommend you make the ● Press the SETTINGS function button. confirm your PIN code, as indicated in the dis- link when the vehicle is stationary. In some ● Press the Select mobile phone function but- play of the infotainment system. countries it is not possible to perform the pair- ton and then Results . ● ® ing with the vehicle running. If more Bluetooth profile pairing requests are received on the mobile telephone, make OR: sure to reply to them. Conditions ● Press the infotainment button  /  You must guarantee the following setup in the ››› Fig. 172 5 , ››› Fig. 173 8 OR: mobile phone and the Infotainment system: ● Press the SETTINGS function button. ● Compare the PIN code shown on the display of the Infotainment system with that ● The ignition must be switched on. ● Press the Bluetooth function button. shown on the mobile telephone. If they ® ● The Bluetooth function of the mobile tel- ● Press the Find devices function button and match, confirm on both devices. ephone and the Infotainment system must be then Results . active as well as visibility. When the pairing has been finalized correct- ® The name of the Bluetooth function of your ly, the Telephone main menu will appear. The ● The keypad lock on the mobile telephone Infotainment system will be displayed on the phone book, call list and SMS messages stor- must be deactivated. ed in the mobile phone will be loaded once »

211 Infotainment System

the requests have been accepted in the mo- matically re-established as soon as the de- Assign a user profile ® bile phone. The duration of the loading proc- vice is once again within Bluetooth range. The data from the phonebook, the call lists ess depends on the amount of data stored on and the stored speed dial buttons are as- the mobile telephone. After downloading, the WARNING signed to a user profile and remain stored on data will be available on the Infotainment Do not perform the pairing and connection the telephone management system. This in- system. process while driving. This may cause an formation will be available every time the mo- accident! bile telephone is connected to the telephone Pairing and connection of mobile tele- management system. phones Note After the first connection, it will take a few mi- You can pair up to 20 mobile telephones to ● It may be necessary to confirm the phone nutes for the data from the phonebook of the the Infotainment system, but the number of si- book data and SMS transfer request on the linked mobile phone to be available in the In- multaneous connections varies: mobile telephone. fotainment system. The next time that the ● Media System Touch / Colour: a phone ● Check that there are no requests pend- mobile telephone is connected (e.g. on the connected to the hands-free profile and the ing acceptance in your mobile phone. If next journey) the phonebook is updated au- same or a different device connected to the there are, this could block some of the tomatically. Bluetooth® audio profile. functions in the Telephone menu. If any entries in the mobile phonebook have ● Media System Plus / Navi System: two mo- been modified while connected, a manual bile phones simultaneously connected to the update of the phonebook data can be initi- hands-free profile and one of them is also Telephone main menu ated from the User profile settings connected Bluetooth® audio profile. menu.

When the Infotainment system is switched on, Telephone management can store a maxi- it automatically connects to the last connec- mum of 4 user profiles for mobile telephones. ted mobile telephone. If it is not possible to If you wish to link/connect another mobile connect to this mobile telephone, the telephone, the oldest user profile will automati- phone management system will try to auto- cally be replaced. matically connect to the next mobile telephone on the list of paired devices. Telephone management system function buttons The maximum range of the Bluetooth® con- ● Press the infotainment button  /  nection is approx. 10 meters. The active Fig. 172 5 , Fig. 173 8 to open the Tele- Bluetooth® connection disconnects if this dis- Fig. 209 Telephone main menu (view of the 8" ››› ››› phone main menu. tance is exceeded. The connection is auto- screen).

212 Operating modes

Function button: function Display and symbols of the tele- Display: Meaning ››› Fig. 210 phone management system Name of connected mobile tele- Press to mute the microphone during an ac- phone. Press the icon to the left to  tive call and to reactivate it. 1 connect or pair with another mobile telephone. This button keeps the call active. While the call is on hold the listener will not hear the Speed dial buttons, to which tele-  conversation. To reactivate it, press the call 2 phone numbers from the phone- accept button . To reject it, press the reject book may be assigned respectively. button .

To change to another telephone  Press to add a participant to the active call. connected to the hands-free profile. This button will only be visible when Charge status of a mobile telephone con- 3 there are two telephones connected  nected via “Hands-free profile” (HFP) Blue- as hands-free. The active user pro- tooth®. file corresponds to the telephone Fig. 210 Active call. appearing on the screen. Strength of coverage signal received by the  mobile telephone. DIAL NUM- To open the number pad and enter a Display: Meaning ››› Fig. 210 BER telephone number ››› page 213. Name of the mobile network operator (pro- To open the phonebook of the con- A vider) to which the mobile telephone is con- CONTACTS Enter telephone number menu nected mobile telephone. nected.

To open the menu for SMS messag- View of stored telephone number or name. If SMSa) es. the name stored in the phonebook has an assigned photo, it can be displayed: select To open call lists of the connected B CALLS Telephone > Settings > User mobile telephone ››› page 214. profile > Show pictures for contacts*. To open the Telephone set- SETTINGS tings menu.  Press to accept a call. a) Not available for the Media System Touch/Colour Press to end a call. model.  OR: Press to reject an incoming call. Fig. 211 Enter telephone number menu. » Press to mute or to reactivate the ring tone  during an incoming call.

213 Infotainment System

Open the Enter telephone number menu Possible functions Display: Meaning Press the DIAL NUMBER function button from Press the  Voice mail function Dialled numbers : Indicates the numbers dialled the PHONE main menu. button to make the call.  on the mobile telephone and on the Infotain- ment system telephone management system. Possible functions OR: Press the  function button for about 2 seconds to make a Call mailbox  Received calls : Indicates the numbers of the Entering a phone number with call. calls received on the mobile telephone and on the keypad.  the Infotainment system telephone manage- Enter telephone If the number for the mailbox has ment system. number Press the  function button to not yet been stored, enter it and make a call. confirm with OK . Note Enter the first letters of the contact to find using the keypad. Note The availability of the call lists will depend on the mobile phone used. Select a con- The available entries appear in ● Breakdown service and information calls tact from the the phonebook. can incur an additional cost on your tele- list Select the desired contact from phone bill. the phonebook to make the call. ● The Roadside Assistance and Information Multimedia services might not work properly, for exam- To enter a country code, instead of the first two digits (interna- ple, if the vehicle and the operator of the connected mobile telephone are in differ- USB/AUX-INPort Enter the coun- tional access code e.g. “00”) ent countries. If you are not able to use try code you can enter the character “+”. these services contact an authorised SEAT Press the function button 0 for workshop. approx. 2 seconds to add the +.

Breakdown Press the function button to ob- service call  tain help in the event of breakdown. For this the network of Call Menu (call lists) SEAT dealerships is available to you with their Mobility Service. Possible displays in the Calls menu

Information call Press the function button to ob- Display: Meaning  tain information on the SEAT brand and the additional serv-  Missed calls : Displays the numbers of missed ices contracted related to traffic and unanswered calls. Fig. 212 Centre console: USB/AUX-IN input. and travel.

214 Operating modes

Depending on the special characteristics and When you do so, make sure there are no ob- the country, the vehicle may have a jects between the pad and the mobile phone. USB/AUX-IN port. The mobile phone will start charging auto- The USB/AUX-IN port can be found in the matically. For further information about storage compartment area of the centre whether your mobile device uses Qi technol- console ››› Fig. 212. ogy, please check your mobile phone's user manual or visit the SEAT website. The operating description is located in ››› page 191. “Mobile Signal Amplifier” The “Mobile Signal Amplifier” allows you to Fig. 214 Centre console: Connectivity Box Connectivity Box* / Wireless reduce the radiation in your vehicle and enjoy better reception. Charger* The Connectivity Box includes different functions that will help to use your mobile device. For safety reasons, it is recommended that They are the “Wireless Charger” and the you pair the radio and the mobile device us- ® “Mobile Signal Amplifier”. ing Bluetooth and place the mobile phone on the Connectivity Box pad, so as to have The Wireless Charger only features the better reception without having to handle the “Wireless Charger” function. mobile phone. To establish a connection with the vehicle's Fig. 213 Related video “Wireless Charger” external aerial: The “Wireless Charger” allows mobile devices with Qi1) technology to be charged with- ● Place your mobile device in the middle of out a cable. the pad with the screen facing up ››› Fig. 214.

To charge your mobile phone wirelessly: When you do so, make sure there are no objects between the pad and the mobile phone. ● Place your mobile device with Qi technolo- gy1 ) in the middle of the pad with the screen Your mobile phone will automatically be facing up ››› Fig. 214. ready to make use of the external aerial. »

1) Qi technology allows you to charge your mobile phone wirelessly. 215 Infotainment System

WARNING ● When a telephone with Qi technology is connected by USB, the charging will be The mobile phone may heat up due to the performed through the medium specified wireless charging. Think about the temper- by each mobile device manufacturer. ature of your device before you pick it up, and take care when removing it.

Note ● Your mobile device must support the Qi wireless inductive charging interface standard for proper operation. ● If your mobile phone has a cover or a protective casing, this may affect the Connec- tivity Box functions. ● There must be no metallic objects between the pad and the mobile device that might affect the wireless charging or the connection with the external aerial. ● The charging time and the temperature vary in accordance with the device used. ● To avoid malfunction, ensure that the mobile phone is correctly placed on the pad. ● The maximum charging capacity is 5 W. ● Qi technology does not allow you to charge more than one mobile device simultaneously. ● No improvement in the transmission quality can be guaranteed if there is more than one mobile phone on the pad. ● You are advised to keep the engine running to guarantee proper wireless charging of your device.

216 Start and driving

Driving locks with an audible sound. You should al- children or disabled people are left alone ways lock the steering wheel when you leave in the vehicle. They could accidentally your vehicle. This will help prevent vehicle start the engine or work electrical equip- Start and driving theft ››› . ment such as the electric windows, resulting in an accident. Switching the ignition or the glow plug ● Unsupervised use of the key could start Starting and stopping the system on the engine or any electrical system, such engine Turn the ignition key to this position and re- as the electric windows. This could result in lease it 2 . If the key cannot be turned or it is serious injury. Ignition key positions difficult to turn from position 1 to position 2 , move the steering wheel from one side to the CAUTION other; this will release it. The starter motor will only work when the engine is stopped (ignition key position 3 ). Starting The engine is started when the key is in this position 3 . Electrical devices with high pow- Starting petrol engines er consumption are switched off temporarily at the same time. The engine can only be started using a genu- Each time that the vehicle is restarted, the ig- ine SEAT key with its correct code. nition key must be turned to position 1 . The – Move the gearbox lever to the neutral posi- repetitive start prevention lock of the ignition and depress the clutch pedal thor- Fig. 215 Ignition key positions. tion prevents possible damage to the starter oughly and hold it in this position for the motor if the engine is already running. Read the additional information carefully starter to turn the engine on. ›››  page 31 WARNING – Turn the ignition key to the starting position ››› Fig. 215 3 . Ignition switched off, steering lock ● The ignition key must NOT be removed from the lock until the vehicle comes to a – Let go of the ignition key as soon as the en- In this position ››› Fig. 215 1 the ignition and standstill. Otherwise, the steering could be gine starts; the starter motor must not run the engine are off and the steering may be immediately blocked- Risk of accident! on with the engine. locked. ● Always remove the key from the ignition After starting a very hot engine, you may For the Steering lock to operate without the when leaving the vehicle, even if only for a need to slightly press down the accelerator. » ignition key, turn the steering wheel until it short period. This is especially important if

217 Driving

When starting a cold engine, it may be a little Unburnt fuel could enter the catalytic con- oughly and hold it in this position for the noisy for the first few seconds until oil pres- verter and damage it. starter to turn the engine on. sure has built up in the hydraulic valve com- ● Before attempting to push-start or tow a – Turn the ignition key to position ››› Fig. 215 pensators. This is quite normal, and no cause vehicle in order to start it, you should first 2 . The warning lamp  will light for en- for concern. try to start it using the battery of another gine pre-heating. If the engine does not start immediately, vehicle. Please observe and follow the – When the lamp turns off, turn the ignition switch the starter off after 10 seconds and try notes on the ›››  page 59, How to jump key to position 3 to start the engine. Do not again after half a minute. If the engine still start. press the accelerator. does not start, the fuel pump fuse should be checked ››› page 91, Fuses. For the sake of the environment – Release the ignition key as soon as the engine starts. The starter motor should not Do not warm-up the engine by running the WARNING turn at the same time. engine with the vehicle stationary. Start off ● Never start or run the engine in unventila- immediately, driving gently. This helps the When starting a cold engine, it may be a little ted or closed rooms. The exhaust gases engine reach operating temperature faster noisy for the first few seconds until oil pres- contain carbon monoxide, an odourless and reduces emissions. sure has built up in the hydraulic valve com- and colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal pensators. This is quite normal, and no cause accidents. Carbon monoxide can cause Note for concern. loss of consciousness and result in death. Natural gas engines (CNG) always start up ● Never leave the vehicle unattended if the If there are problems starting the engine, see with petrol, as a certain operating temper- engine is running. the ›››  page 59. ature is required for running with gas. Once ● Never use “cold start sprays”, they could the required operating temperature is Glow plug system for diesel engines explode or cause the engine to run at high reached, the engine will automatically revs. Risk of injury. switch to natural gas mode. To avoid unnecessary discharging of the battery, do not use any other major electrical CAUTION equipment while the glow plugs are preheating. ● When the engine is cold, you should Starting diesel engines avoid high engine speeds, driving at full Start the engine as soon as the glow plug throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk The engine can only be started using a genu- warning lamp goes out. of engine damage. ine SEAT key with its correct code.

● The vehicle should not be pushed or tow- – Move the gearbox lever to the neutral posi- ed more than 50 metres to start the engine. tion and depress the clutch pedal thor-

218 Start and driving

Starting a diesel engine after the fuel tank For the sake of the environment Note has run dry Do not warm-up the engine by running the A perfect operation of the vehicle is ensur- If the fuel tank has been completely run dry, it engine with the vehicle stationary. You ed if genuine SEAT keys are used. may take longer than normal (up to one mi- should drive off as soon as you start the en- nute) to start a diesel engine after refuelling. gine. This helps the engine reach operating This is because the fuel system must elimi- temperature faster and reduces emissions. nate air first. Switching off the engine

WARNING Switching off the engine “SAFE” electronic immobiliser1) – Stop the vehicle. Observe the safety warnings ››› in Start- ing petrol engines on page 218. The electronic immobiliser prevents unau- – Turn the ignition key to position thorised persons from driving the vehicle. ››› Fig. 215 1 . CAUTION Inside the key there is a chip that deactivates Engaging the steering wheel lock ● When the engine is cold, you should the electronic immobiliser automatically avoid high engine speeds, driving at full when the key is inserted into the ignition. In vehicles with automatic gearbox, the igni- throttle and over-loading the engine. Risk tion key can only be removed when the se- The electronic immobiliser will be activated of engine damage. lector lever is in position P2). again automatically as soon as you pull the ● The vehicle should not be pushed or tow- key out of the ignition lock. – Remove the ignition key in position ed more than 50 metres to start the engine. ››› Fig. 215 1 ››› . Unburnt fuel could enter the particulate fil- The engine can only be started using a genu- ter and damage it. ine SEAT key with its correct code. – Turn the steering wheel until you hear it engage. ● Before attempting to push-start or tow a If the following message* is shown on the in- vehicle in order to start it, you should first strument panel display: SAFE, the vehicle Possible vehicle theft is prevented with the try to start it using the battery of another cannot be started. steering lock engaged. vehicle. Please observe and follow the notes on the ›››  page 59, How to jump The engine can, however, be started if the After switching the engine off, the radiator fan start. appropriate coded SEAT genuine key is used. may run on for up to 10 minutes. It is also possible that the fan turns itself on once more if the coolant temperature increases due to the »

1) Available depending on the market 2) Depending upon country. 219 Driving

heat accumulated in the engine compart- ignition remains switched on. Make sure The vehicle engine can be started with a ment or due to its prolonged exposure to so- that the ignition is switched off before leav- starter button (Press & Drive). To do so, there lar radiation. ing the vehicle, otherwise the battery could must be a valid key inside the vehicle in the discharge. area of the front or rear seats. WARNING Opening the driver's door when exiting the ● Never switch the engine off until the vehi- vehicle activates the electronic lock on the cle is completely stationary. Starter button* steering column if the ignition is disabled. ● The brake servo works only when the engine is running. With the engine switched Switching the ignition on/off manually off, more strength is needed to brake. As Briefly push the starter button without touch- normal brake operation cannot be per- ing the brake or clutch pedal . formed, risk of accidents and serious injury ››› may exist. For vehicles with both manual and automatic ● The steering lock can be immediately transmission, the starter button text blocked once the key is removed from the START ENGINE STOP flashes like a heartbeat ignition. The vehicle cannot be steered. when the system is preset for switching the Risk of accident. ignition on and off. ● Power-assisted steering does not work Automatic ignition switch-off when the engine is off, and more strength is Fig. 216 In the lower part of the centre con- needed to turn the wheel. sole: start button. If the driver leaves the vehicle, taking the ve- ● If the key is removed from the ignition hicle key with them but leaving the ignition on, lock the steering lock could be engaged the ignition is not switched off automatically. and vehicle steering would not work. The ignition is switched off automatically by pressing the lock button on the remote con- CAUTION trol  or manually by pressing the sensor surface on the door lever ››› Fig. 139 ● When the engine has been running under a heavy load for a long period, heat can accumulate in the engine compartment Emergency starting function and cause engine damage. For this reason, If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle, idle the engine for approximately 2 minutes an emergency start-up will be required. The before switching it off. relevant message will appear in the dash ● If the vehicle is stopped and the Start- Fig. 217 On the right of the steering column: emergency start. Stop system* switches off the engine, the 220 Start and driving panel display. This may happen when, for ex- Automatic deactivation of the ignition on and, in this way, operate electronic equip- ample, the battery of the vehicle key button is vehicles with the Start-Stop system ment (e.g. the windows). very low or flat: The ignition is switched off automatically ● Immediately after pushing the starter but- when the vehicle is stopped and the auto- Note matic engine shutdown is active, if: ton, keep the vehicle key next to the right trim ● Before leaving the vehicle, always dis- of the steering column ››› Fig. 217, as close as ● The driver's seat belt is not fastened, connect the ignition manually and, if ap- possible to the Kessy logo. propriate, take into account the instruc- ● the driver does not step on any pedal, ● The ignition connects and the engine starts tions on the screen of the dash panel. ● the driver door is opened. automatically. ● If the vehicle is stationary for a long time After automatically turning off the ignition, if with the ignition on, the vehicle battery might be discharged and it might not be Emergency disconnection the dipped beam  is on, the side light re- possible to start the engine. If the engine does not switch off after briefly mains on for approx. 30 minutes (if the bat- pressing the starter button, an emergency tery has enough charge). If the driver locks ● In diesel vehicles, there may be a delay in disconnect will be required: the vehicle or manually turns off the light, the the engine starting if it requires preheating. side light goes out. ● If during the STOP phase you press the ● Press the starter button twice within 3 sec- START ENGINE STOP button, the ignition is onds or press it once for more than 1 sec- WARNING switched off and the button flashes. ond ››› . Any accidental movement of the vehicle ● If the indication is displayed on the in- ● The engine turns off automatically. could result in serious injury. strument panel display “Start-Stop system deactivated: Start the engine manually”, ● When switching on the ignition, do not the START ENGINE STOP button will blink. Engine restart feature press the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle the engine could start immediately. after the engine stops, you will only have 5 seconds to restart it. A warning will display on WARNING the dash panel screen. If vehicle keys are used negligently or with- After this interval, it will not be possible to out due care, this may cause accidents and start the engine without a valid key inside the serious injury. vehicle. ● Never leave any key inside the vehicle when exiting. Otherwise, a child or unauthorised person could lock the vehicle, start the engine or connect the ignition

221 Driving

Starting the engine pen that would cause damage, fire or seri- ● When starting with a cold engine, noise 3 Applies to vehicles with start button ous injury. levels may briefly increase. This is quite normal, and no cause for concern. Starting the engine with the start- WARNING ● When the outside temperature is below Step er button ››› page 220. +5°C (+41°F), if the engine is diesel, some Cold start sprays could explode or cause a smoke may appear under the vehicle when Press and hold the brake pedal until step 5 sudden increase in the engine speed. the fuel-operated auxiliary heater is on. is performed. ● Never use sprays to cold start the engine. 1. In vehicles with a manual gearbox: press and hold the clutch down until the engine starts. CAUTION Stopping the engine Put the gearbox lever in neutral or the se- ● The starter motor or the engine may be 3 Applies to vehicles with start button 2. lector lever in position P or N. damaged if you try to start the engine while driving or if you restart it immediately after Switch off the engine with the Briefly press the starter button ››› Fig. 216 switching it off. Step without pressing the accelerator. For the starter button ››› page 220. engine to start there must be a valid key in ● If the engine is cold, avoid high engine 1. Stop the vehicle completely . the vehicle. speeds, pushing the engine too hard and ››› 3. rapid acceleration. After starting the engine, the light of the Press and hold the brake pedal until the 2. START ENGINE STOP button changes to a ● Do not start the engine by pushing the step 4 is performed. fixed light indicating that the engine has vehicle or towing it. Unburnt fuel could en- started. If you are driving an automatic vehicle, ter the catalytic converter and damage it. 3. place the selector lever in position P. If the engine does not start, stop and wait for approx. 1 minute before trying again. If 4. Note 4. Apply the handbrake ››› page 224. necessary, carry out an emergency start ››› page 220. ● Do not wait until the engine warms up Briefly press the start-up button with the vehicle stationary; if you have ››› Fig. 216. The START ENGINE STOP button Disconnect the hand brake when you are 5. good visibility through the windows, start 5. blinks again. If the engine fails to switch about to start driving ››› page 224. off, perform an emergency disconnect driving immediately. This helps the engine ››› page 221. reach operating temperature faster and re- WARNING duces emissions. If the vehicle is equipped with a manual 6. Never leave the vehicle with the engine ● Electrical components with a high power gearbox, put it into 1st or reverse. running, especially if a gear or gear range consumption are switched off temporarily is engaged. The vehicle could then sudden- when the engine starts. ly move or something strange could hap-

222 Start and driving

WARNING “My Beat” Function ton stays on, since, even though the engine is off, the Start-Stop system is active. Never switch off the engine while the vehi- For vehicles with a convenience key there is cle is moving. This could cause loss of con- ● When the engine cannot be stated again the “My Beat” function. This feature provides trol of the vehicle, accidents and serious in- with the Start-Stop system, ››› page 248, and an additional indication of the vehicle ignition jury. needs to be started manually, the system. START ENGINE STOP button flashes to indicate ● The airbags and belt tensioners do not work when the ignition is switched off. When accessing the vehicle, e.g. by opening this fact. ● The brake servo does not work with the the doors with the remote control, the engine off. Therefore, you need to press the START ENGINE STOP button flashes, calling at- break pedal harder to brake the vehicle. tention to the relevant starter system button. Braking and parking ● Power steering does not work when the Upon switching the ignition on/off, the light of engine is not running. You need more the START ENGINE STOP button flashes. With Braking capacity and braking dis- strength to steer when the engine is switch- the engine switched off, after a few seconds, tance ed off. the STOP ENGINE START button stops flashing and goes out. ● If the ignition is switched off, the steering The efficiency of the brakes depends directly column could be locked, making it impossi- With the engine running, the on the brake pad wear. This wear depends to ble to control the vehicle. START ENGINE STOP button light stays on, indi- a great extent on the conditions under which cating that the engine is running. The time the vehicle is operated and the way the vehi- CAUTION that lapses between the moment the user cle is driven. If you often drive in town, drive If the engine is made to work hard for a long starts the engine with the START ENGINE STOP short distances or have a sporty driving style, time, it may overheat after being switched button and the lighting changes from flashing we recommend that you have the thickness off. To prevent damage to the engine be- to fixed will depend on specific engine size of your brake pads checked by technical fore switching it off, leave it idle for approx. characteristics. Upon switching the ignition services more frequently than recommended 2 minutes in neutral. off with the START ENGINE STOP button, it starts in the Maintenance Programme. flashing again. If you drive with wet brakes, for example, af- Note In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, the ter crossing areas of water, on days of heavy After switching off the engine, the cooling “My Beat” function also offers additional in- rainfall or even after washing the car, the ef- fan may continue to operate in the engine formation: fect of the brakes is reduced as the brake compartment for a few more minutes, even discs are wet or even frozen (in winter): in this ● When the engine stops during the Stop with the ignition off. The radiator fan is au- case, press the brake pedal several times un- tomatically switched off. phase, the light of the START ENGINE STOP but- til the brakes are “dry”. »

223 Driving

WARNING can form in the brake system. This reduces WARNING the efficiency of the brakes. Longer braking distances and faults in the ● If the brake warning lamp does not go out brake system increase the risk of acci- ● Non-standard or damaged front spoilers or if it lights up when driving, the brake fluid dents. could restrict the airflow to the brakes and level in the reservoir is too low so there is a cause them to overheat. Before purchasing ● New brake pads must be run in and do not risk of an accident ››› page 321, Brake fluid. accessories please observe the relevant have the correct friction during the first Stop the vehicle and do not drive on. Ob- instructions page 307, Technical modifi- 200 km (124 miles). This reduced braking ››› tain technical assistance. cations. capacity may be compensated for by ● If the brake warning lamp lights up  to- pressing on the brake pedal a little harder, ● If a brake system circuit fails, the braking gether with the ABS lamp  this could be which also applies when the brake pads distance will be increased considerably. due to an ABS fault. This could cause the have to be changed further on. Contact a specialised workshop immedi- rear wheels to lock quickly when you brake. ately and avoid unnecessary journeys. ● If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are This could cause the rear to break away. driving on roads which have been salted, Risk of skidding. Stop the vehicle and seek braking power may be lower than normal. technical assistance. ● On steep slopes, if brakes are excessively Control lamps used, they will overheat. Before driving down a long steep slope, it is advisable to  It lights up red Handbrake reduce speed and change down into a lower gear or range (depending on the type of Brake fluid level too low ››› page 321 or fault in the transmission). Thus, make use of engine brake system. braking and relieve the brakes.  Do not carry on driving! ● Never let the brakes “drag” by applying light pressure. Continuous braking will  It lights up red cause the brakes to overheat and the brak- Parking brake engaged ››› page 224. ing distance will increase. Apply and then The warning lamp turns off when the handbrake is re- release the brakes alternately. leased. ● Never let the vehicle run with the engine switched off. The braking distance is in-  It lights up yellow creased considerably when the brake ser- Fig. 218 Handbrake between the front seats. vo is not active. Front brake pads worn. ● If the brake fluid loses its viscosity and is The handbrake should be applied firmly to subjected to heavy use, vapour bubbles prevent the vehicle from accidentally rolling

224 Start and driving away. Always apply the handbrake when you In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, ● Secure the vehicle as usual by applying the leave your vehicle and when you park. place the gear lever in position P. handbrake firmly and putting it in 1st gear.

Applying the handbrake WARNING – Pull the handbrake lever up firmly Parking ● Take measures to reduce the risk of injury ››› Fig. 218. when you leave your vehicle unattended. The handbrake should always be firmly ap- ● Never park where the hot exhaust system Releasing the handbrake plied when the vehicle is parked. could ignite inflammable materials, such as dry grass, low bushes, spilt fuel etc. – Pull the lever up slightly and press the re- Always note the following points when park- ● lease knob in the direction of the arrow ing the vehicle: Never allow vehicle occupants to remain ››› Fig. 218 and guide the handbrake lever in the vehicle when it is locked. They would down fully ››› . – Use the brake pedal to stop the vehicle. be unable to open the vehicle from the inside, and could become trapped in the ve- – Apply the handbrake. Always pull the handbrake all the way up, so hicle in an emergency. In the event of an there is less risk of driving off with it still en- – Put it in 1st gear. emergency, locked doors will delay assis- gaged . tance to vehicle occupants. ››› – Switch the engine off and remove the key from the ignition. Turn the steering wheel ● Never leave children alone in the vehicle. WARNING They could set the vehicle in motion, for ex- slightly to engage the steering lock. ample, by releasing the handbrake or the ● Never use the handbrake to stop the vehi- – Always take you keys with you when you gearbox lever. cle when it is in motion. The braking dis- leave the vehicle . tance is considerably longer, because ››› ● Depending on weather conditions, it may become extremely hot or cold inside the braking is only applied to the rear wheels. Additional notes on parking the vehicle on Risk of accident! vehicle. This can be fatal. gradients: ● If the handbrake is only partially re- Turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle leased, this will cause the rear brakes to overheat, which can impair the function of rolls against the kerb if it started to roll. the brake system and could lead to an ac- ● If the vehicle is parked facing downhill, turn cident. This also causes premature wear on the front wheels so that they point towards the rear brake pads. the kerb. ● If the vehicle is parked facing uphill, turn CAUTION the front wheels so that they point away from Always apply the handbrake before you the kerb. leave the vehicle. Put it in 1st gear as well. 225 Driving

Braking and stability sys- The control lamps light up together when the ● When the vehicle is stuck, to rock it back- ignition is switched on and should turn off af- wards and forwards. tems ter approximately 2 seconds. This is the time taken for the function check. Press the button to switch the ASR back on Control lamps when you no longer need wheel spin.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)*  It lights up Electronic Stability Control (ESC)* The ESC reduces the risk of skidding by brak- Fault in the ESC or disconnection caused by the sys- This Electronic Stability System reduces the ing the wheels individually. tem. risk of skidding and improves the vehicle's As the ESC operates in conjunction with the ABS, the The system uses the steering wheel angle stability and ability to hold the road. ESC light will also come on if a fault should occur in and road speed to calculate the changes of the ABS. The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) con- direction desired by the driver, and constant- tains the electronic differential lock (EDL) and ly compares them with the actual behaviour  Flashes the traction control system (ASR). The ESC of the vehicle. When irregularities occur, for works together with the ABS. Both control example, if the vehicle begins to skid, the ESC ESC or ASR activated. lamps will light up if the ESC or ABS systems brakes the appropriate wheel automatically. are faulty. It also includes emergency braking The forces acting on the braked wheel bring  It lights up assistance (HBA). the vehicle back to a stable condition. If the Fault in the ASR or disconnection caused by the sys- The ESC system is started automatically vehicle tends to oversteer (the rear end slides tem. when the engine is started. out), the system will act on the front wheel on the outside of the turn. The ESC system is always active and cannot  Flashes be switched off. With the Easy Connect sys- Control lamp ASR working. tem it is only possible to deactivate the ASR or else select Sport mode. There are two control lamps for the electronic stability control. The lamp  provides infor-  It lights up The ASR can be deactivated when wheel spin mation concerning function and  discon- is desirable ››› page 227. ASR manually deactivated. nection status. For example: Or: ESC in Sport mode. If the ESC control lamp  lights up and stays ● When driving with snow chains. on after the engine is started, this may mean that the control system has temporarily  It lights up ››› page 229 ● When driving in deep snow or on loose sur- switched off the ESC. In this case the ESC faces. ABS faulty or does not work. can be reactivated by switching the ignition

226 Start and driving off and then on again. If the control lamp Traction control system (ASR) ● When the vehicle is bogged-down, to free it goes out, this means the system is fully func- by “rocking it”. tional. The traction control system prevents the driven wheels from spinning when the vehicle is The ASR should be switched on again as WARNING accelerating. soon as possible. ● Do not forget that the electronic stability Control lamp control ESC cannot defy the laws of phys- Description and operation of the traction ics. Bear this in mind, particularly on slip- control system during acceleration (ASR) There are three control lamps for the traction  pery and wet roads and when towing a The ASR system intervenes by reducing en- control system: (for vehicles equipped with  trailer. gine power and preventing the driven wheels M-ABS), (for vehicles equipped with ESC)  ● Always adapt your driving style to suit from slipping during acceleration. and . the condition of the roads and the traffic TCS helps the car to start moving, accelerate If the system is deactivated or if it has any situation. The greater safety provided by fault, the warning lamp  or  will remain lit. the ESC should not encourage you to run and climb a gradient in slippery conditions The warning lamp will also light up if a fault any risks. where this may otherwise be difficult or even impossible. should occur in the ABS because the ASR operates in conjunction with the ABS. For further CAUTION The ASR automatically switches on when the information, see ››› page 228. engine is started. If necessary, it could be ● To ensure that the ESC works correctly, switched on or off using the Easy Connect all four wheels must be fitted with the same WARNING system*. tyres. Any differences in the rolling radius ● Remember that not even the ASR can de- of the tyres can cause the system to re- When the ASR is off, the warning lamp lights fy the laws of physics. Bear this in mind, duce engine power when this is not desired. up . The ASR should normally be left on. On- particularly on slippery and wet roads and ● Any modifications made to the vehicle ly in exceptional cases can it be disconnec- when towing a trailer. (for example, to the engine, brake system, ted, i.e. when you want the wheels to slide; ● Always adapt your driving style to suit running gear or to the combination of this done through the Easy Connect system, the condition of the roads and the traffic wheels and tyres) may affect the operation by means of the  /  button and the func- situation. The greater safety provided by of the ABS, EDL, ESC and ASR. tion button SETTINGS> ESC system, for ex- the ASR should not encourage you to run ample: any risks.

● With compact temporary spare wheel. CAUTION ● When using the snow chains. ● To ensure that the ASR works correctly, ● When driving in deep snow or on soft ter- identical tyres should be fitted on all four rain. wheels. Any differences in the rolling radius » 227 Driving

of the tyres can cause the system to re- ESC in “Sport” mode Activate ASR duce engine power when this is not desired. Sport mode can be connected via the Easy The Easy Connect system menu ● Any modifications made to the vehicle Connect ›››  page 34 system menu. The ›››  page 34 is used to switch on the ASR. (for example, to the engine, brake system, ESC and the traction control system (ASR) The traction control system will be enabled. running gear or to the combination of have only a limited ability to stabilise the ve- The control lamp  switches off. For vehicles wheels and tyres) may affect the operation hicle. with a driver information system* the driver of the ABS and ASR. The control lamp  lights up. For vehicles with will be informed that ASR is enabled. a driver information system*, the driver will be shown the electronic stability control ● Activate or deactivate the ASR or ESC func- Connecting/disconnecting ESC (ESC) option: sport. Warning! Limited tion in the Easy Connect system using the   and ASR* stability. / button and the SETTINGS > ESC System function buttons. The ESC is switched on automatically when Disable ESC “Sport” mode the engine is started, and only works when WARNING Through the Easy Connect system menu the engine is running and includes the ABS, ›››  page 34. The warning lamp  will You should switch on the ESC Sport mode EDS and ASR systems. only if the traffic conditions and your driv- switch off. For vehicles with a driver informa- ing ability allow you to do so safely: risk of The ASR and ESC function should only be tion system*, the driver will be shown the skidding! switched off in situations in which traction is electronic stability control (ESC) op- insufficient, among others: tion: on. ● With ESC in Sport mode, the stabilising function will be limited to allow for a sportier drive. The driving wheels could spin and ● When driving in deep snow or on surfaces Disable ASR that are not very firm. the vehicle could skid. The Easy Connect system menu is used to ● To “free” the vehicle if it gets stuck. switch off the ASR ›››  page 34. The trac- Note Then switch the ASR and ESC function back tion control system will be disabled. If the ASR is disconnected or the ESC’s on.  The control lamp lights up. For vehicles with Sport mode is selected, cruise control* will Depending on finishes and versions, it is pos- a driver information system* the driver will be be switched off. sible either to disconnect only the ASR or else informed that ASR is disabled. activate ESC Sport mode.

228 Start and driving

Electronic differential lock (EDS)* Control lamp How the ABS works A malfunction in the EDL is indicated by the If one of the wheels turns too slowly in relation The EDL operates along with the ABS in vehi- ESC control lamp . Take the vehicle to a to the vehicle's speed, and is close to locking, cles equipped with Electronic Stability Con- specialised workshop as soon as possible. the system will reduce the braking pressure to trol (ESC)*. this wheel. The driver is made aware of this EDL helps the vehicle to start moving, accel- WARNING control process by a pulsating of the brake erate and climb a gradient in slippery condi- ● When accelerating on a slippery surface, pedal and audible noise. This is a deliberate tions where this may otherwise be difficult or for example on ice and snow, press the ac- warning to the driver that one or more of the even impossible. celerator carefully. Despite EDL, the driven wheels is tending to lock and the ABS control wheels may start to spin. This could impair function has intervened. In this situation it is It uses the ABS sensors to monitor the speed the vehicle's stability. important to keep the brake pedal fully de- of the driven wheels. ● Always adapt your driving style to suit pressed so the ABS can regulate the brake At speeds of up to approximately 80 km/h road conditions and the traffic situation. Do application. Do not “pump”. (50 mph), it is able to balance out differences not let the extra safety afforded by EDL If you brake hard on a slippery road surface, in the speed of the driven wheels of approxi- tempt you into taking any risks when driv- the best possible control is retained as the mately 100 rpm/min caused by a partially ing, this can cause accidents. wheels do not lock. slippery road surface. It does this by braking However, ABS will not necessarily guarantee the wheel which has lost traction and distrib- CAUTION uting more driving force to the other driven shorter braking distances in all conditions. wheel via the differential. Modifications to the vehicle (e.g. to the en- Braking distance could even be further if you gine, the brake system, running gear or any brake on gravel or on fresh snow on a slip- To prevent the disc brake of the braking components affecting the wheels and pery surface. wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out au- tyres) could affect the efficiency of the EDL tomatically if subjected to excessive loads. ››› page 307. The ABS system is faulty if: The vehicle will continue to function normally without EDL. For this reason, the driver is not ● The control lamp  does not light up when the ignition is switched on. informed that the EDL has been switched off. Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ● The control lamp does not go out again af- The EDL will switch on again automatically ter a few seconds. when the brake has cooled down. The anti-lock brake (ABS) system prevents the wheels from locking during braking and is ● The control lamp lights up when the vehicle an important part of the vehicle's active safe- is moving. ty system. The vehicle can still be braked in the normal way, without the ABS function. Take the »

229 Driving

vehicle to a specialised workshop as soon as ● If the brake system warning lamp  Do not reduce the pressure on the brake ped- possible. should light up together with the ABS warn- al, since the brake assist system switches off automatically as soon as you release the If there is a fault in the ABS, the ESC* and the ing lamp , stop the vehicle immediately brake. tyre pressure control lamp will also light up. and check the brake fluid level in the reservoir ››› page 321, Brake fluid. If the brake fluid level has dropped below the “MIN” Automatic hazard warning lights activa- Brake system fault mark you must not drive on. Risk of acci- tion If the ABS warning lamp  lights up together dent. Obtain technical assistance. The brake lights flash automatically to indi- with the brake warning lamp , there is a ● If the brake fluid level is correct, the fault cate that the vehicle is braking suddenly or in fault in the ABS function and in the brake sys- in the brake system may have been caused an emergency situation. If the emergency tem ››› . by a failure of the ABS system. This could braking continues until the vehicle comes to a cause the rear wheels to lock quickly when standstill, the hazard “warning” lights will WARNING you brake. This could cause the rear to then come on and the brake lights will remain break away. Risk of skidding. Stop the vehi- ● The anti-lock brake system cannot defy on permanently from that moment. The cle and seek technical assistance. the laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads warning lights will automatically switch off are dangerous even with ABS! If you notice when the vehicle begins to move again or that the ABS is working (to counteract when the "warning" light button is pressed. locked wheels under braking), you should Hydraulic Brake Assist* reduce speed immediately to suit the road WARNING and traffic conditions. Do not let the extra The Hydraulic Brake Assist is only included in ● safety features tempt you into taking any vehicles with ESC. The risk of accident is higher if you drive risks when driving. too fast, if you do not keep your distance In an emergency, most drivers brake in time, from the vehicle in front, and when the road ● The effectiveness of ABS is also deter- but not with maximum force. This results in surface is slippery or wet. The increased mined by the tyres fitted ››› page 325. unnecessarily long braking distances. accident risk cannot be reduced by the ● If the running gear or brake system is brake assist system. modified, the effectiveness of the ABS This is when the brake assist system comes ● The brake assist system cannot defy the could be severely limited. into action. When pressing the brake pedal laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads are rapidly, the assistant interprets it as an emer- dangerous even with the brake assist sys- gency. It very quickly builds up the full brake WARNING tem! Therefore, it is essential that you ad- pressure so that the ABS can be activated ● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob- just your speed to suit the road and traffic more quickly and efficiently, thus reducing conditions. Do not let the extra safety fea- serve the warnings ››› page 315, Working in braking distance. the engine compartment. tures tempt you into taking any risks when driving.

230 Start and driving

Electronic torque management skidding during the accident, which could considerably harder to make up for the lack (XDS)* lead to further collisions. of servo assistance. The multi-collision brake works for front, side WARNING When taking a curve, the driveshaft differen- or rear accidents, when the airbag control tial mechanism allows the outer wheel to turn unit records its activation level and the acci- The braking distance can also be affected at a higher speed than the inner wheel. In this dent takes place at a speed of over 10 km/h by external factors. way, the wheel that is turning faster (outer (6 mph). The ESC automatically brakes the ● Never let the vehicle coast with the en- wheel) receives less drive torque than the in- vehicle, as long as the accident has not dam- gine switched off. Failure to follow this inner wheel. This may mean that in certain sit- aged the ESC, the brake hydraulics or the on- struction could result in an accident. The uations the torque delivered to the inner board network braking distance is increased considerably wheel is too high, causing the wheels to spin. when the brake servo is not active. The following actions control automatic brak- On the other hand, the outer wheel is receiv- ● ing during the accident: If the brake servo is not working, for ex- ing a lower drive torque than it could transmit. ample when the vehicle is being towed, you This causes an overall loss of lateral grip on ● When the driver presses the accelerator, will have to press the brake pedal consid- the front axle, resulting in understeer or the automatic braking does not take place. erably harder than normal. “lengthening” of the trajectory. ● When the braking pressure through press- The XDS system can detect and correct this ing the brake pedal is greater than the sys- effect via the sensors and signals of the ESC. tem’s braking pressure the vehicle will brake Hill driving assistant* Via the ESC, the XDS will brake the inside automatically. wheel and counter the excess driving torque ● Multi-collision braking will not be available of that wheel. This means that the driver's de- if ESC is malfunctioning. sired trajectory is much more precise. The XDS system works in combination with the ESC and is always active, even when ASR Brake servo traction control is disconnected or the ESC is Fig. 219 Related video in Sport mode. The brake servo increases the pressure you apply to the brake pedal. It works only when This function is only included in vehicles with the engine is running. ESC. Multi-collision Brake* If the brake servo is not functioning, e.g. due The hill driving assistant helps the driver to to a malfunction, or if the vehicle is being tow- move off and upward on a hill when the vehi- In an accident, the multi-collision brake can ed, you will have to press the brake pedal cle is stationary. » help the driver by braking to avoid the risk of

231 Driving

The system maintains brake pressure for ap- ● When following a line of traffic uphill, if WARNING proximately two seconds after the driver you want to prevent the vehicle from rolling ● When the engine is running, the vehicle takes his foot off the brake pedal to prevent back accidentally when starting off, hold will start to move as soon as a gear is en- the vehicle from lurching backward when it is the brake pedal down for a few seconds gaged and the clutch released. started. During these 2 seconds, the driver before starting off. has enough time to release the clutch pedal ● Never select the reverse gear when the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident. and accelerate without the vehicle moving Note and without having to use the handbrake, making start-up easier, more comfortable The Official Service or a specialist work- Note and safer. shop can tell you if your vehicle is equipped with this system. ● Do not rest your hand on the gear lever These are the basic operation conditions: while driving. The pressure of your hand could cause premature wear on the selec- ● being on a ramp or hill/slope, tor forks in the gearbox. ● driver door closed, Manual gearbox ● When changing gear, you should always ● vehicle completely stationary, depress the clutch fully to avoid unnecessary wear and damage. ● engine running and foot on the brake, Driving with a manual gearbox ● Do not “slip” the clutch to hold the vehi- ● besides having a gear engaged or being in Read the additional information carefully cle on a hill. This causes premature wear neutral for manual gear change and with the ›››  page 40 and damage to the clutch. selector lever at position S, D or R for an au- ● Do not leave your foot on the clutch ped- tomatic gearbox. Certain versions of the model may include a al; although the pressure may seem insig- 6-speed manual gearbox, and its diagram is nificant, it can cause the premature wear of This system is also active when reversing up- shown on the gearbox lever. the clutch plate. Use the foot rest when you hill. The reverse gear can only be engaged when do not need to change gear. WARNING the car is stationary. When the engine is running and before engaging this gear, wait ● If you do not start the vehicle immediate- about 6 seconds with the clutch pressed ly after taking your foot off the brake pedal, down thoroughly in order to protect the gear- the vehicle may start to roll back under certain conditions. Depress the brake ped- box. al or use the hand brake immediately. The reverse lights switch on when the reverse ● If the engine stalls, depress the brake gear is selected and the ignition is on. pedal or use the hand brake immediately.

232 Start and driving

Automatic gearbox/DSG au-  Flashes green R – Reverse gear Reverse gear must be engaged only when The interlock button on the selector lever is not tomatic gearbox* the vehicle is stationary and the engine is pressed. Movement of the vehicle is prevented. Engage the se- idling ››› . Introduction lector lever lock. To move the selector lever to position R, the Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical- interlock button must be pressed in and at the ly controlled manual gearbox. Torque be- same time the brake pedal must be de- tween the engine and the gearbox is trans- Selector lever positions pressed. The reverse lights come on when the mitted via two independent clutches. They selector lever is in the R position with the igni- replace the torque converter found on con- Read the additional information carefully tion on. ventional automatic gearboxes and allow for ›››  page 40 N – Neutral (idling) smooth, uninterrupted acceleration of the ve- The selector lever position engaged is high- hicle. lighted on the display in the instrument clus- With the selector lever in this position, the The tiptronic system allows the driver to ter. With the selector lever in the manual gear is in neutral. change gears manually if desired gearbox positions G, D, E and S, the engaged ››› page 236, Engaging gears with the tip- gear is also indicated on the display. D/S – Permanent drive (forward) position tronic mode*. The selector lever in the D/S position enables P – Parking lock the gears to be controlled in normal mode When the selector lever is in this position, the (D) or Sport (S). To select Sport mode (S), Control lamps driven wheels are locked mechanically. The move the selector lever backwards. Moving parking lock must be engaged only when the the lever again will select normal mode (D). The selected driving mode is shown on the in-  It lights up green vehicle is stationary ››› . strument panel display. The interlock button (the button on the selec- The brake pedal is not engaged. In normal mode (D), the gearbox automati- To select a range of gears, press the brake pedal. tor lever handle) must be pressed in and simultaneously the brake pedal must be de- cally selects the best gear ratio. This depressed before moving the selector lever ei- pends on the engine load, the road speed ther in or out of position P. and the dynamic gear control programme (DCP). »

233 Driving

In certain circumstances (i.e. traffic hold-ups, ning. This is because an automatic gearbox tor and let the engine speed drop to idling short stops, etc.) and to improve comfort, the still transmits power even at idling speed, before selecting gear range D or S again. vehicle can start up in the D2 gear ratio1). and the vehicle tends to “creep”. The ac- ● Should the power supply to the selector Sport mode (S) must be selected for a sporty celerator pedal must on no account be lever be interrupted in position P, the selec- pressed inadvertently when a gear is en- driving style. This setting makes use of the en- tor lever will be locked. If this should hap- gaged with the vehicle stationary. The ve- gine's maximum power output. When accel- pen the manual release can be used hicle could otherwise start moving immedi- erating the gear shifts will be noticeable. ›››  page 40. ately (in some cases even if the parking Press the brake pedal to move the selector brake is engaged) resulting in the risk of an lever from N to D/S when the vehicle is sta- accident. tionary or at speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph) ● While you are selecting a gear and the Selector lever lock ››› . vehicle is stopped with the engine running, do not accelerate. Failure to follow this in- Under certain circumstances (e.g. when driv- struction could result in an accident. ing in mountains) it can be advantageous to switch temporarily to tiptronic mode ● As a driver you should never leave your ››› page 236, in order to manually select vehicle if the engine is running and a gear is engaged. If you have to leave your vehicle gear ratios to suit the driving conditions. while the engine is running, you must apply the handbrake and engage the parking WARNING lock (P). ● Take care not to accidentally press the ● To avoid accidents, apply the handbrake accelerator pedal when the vehicle is stop- and put the selector lever in position P be- ped. The vehicle could otherwise start fore opening the bonnet and working on the Fig. 220 Selector lever lock. moving immediately (in some cases even if vehicle with the engine running. Please al- the parking brake is engaged) resulting in ways observe the important safety warn- The selector lever lock prevents gears from the risk of an accident. ings ››› page 315, Working in the engine being engaged inadvertently, so that the ve- ● Never move the selector lever to R or P compartment. hicle is not set in motion unintentionally. when driving. Failure to follow this instruction could result in an accident. The selector lever lock is released as follows: Note ● With selector lever in any position (ex- – Switch the ignition on. ● cept P) the vehicle must always be held If the selector lever is moved accidental- with the foot brake when the engine is run- ly to N when driving, release the accelera-

1) Valid for the 1.6 MPI 81 kW automatic engine. 234 Start and driving

– Press the brake pedal and, at the same Interlock button – If the vehicle still does not move in the time, hold the lock button in the direction of The interlock button on the selector lever required direction, there is a system the arrow ››› Fig. 220. handle prevents the driver from inadvertently malfunction. Seek specialist assistance and have the system checked. Automatic selector lever lock engaging certain gears. Press the button in to disengage the selector lever lock. With the ignition switched on, the selector lever is locked in the positions P and N. The Safety interlock for ignition key brake pedal must be pressed to release the lever while pressing the release button if the Once the ignition has been turned off, the key selector lever is in the position P. As a remind- may be removed only if the gear selector is in er for the driver, with the lever in positions P or position P. While the key is not in the ignition, N the following message will be shown on the the selector lever is locked in position P. display: Note When stationary, apply footbrake ● If the selector lever lock does not en- while selecting a gear. gage, there is a fault. The transmission is in- Level lock only engages with the vehicle sta- terrupted to prevent the vehicle from acci- tionary and at speeds of up to 5 km/h dentally moving. Follow the procedure be- (3 mph). At speeds of over 5 km/h (3 mph) the low in order for the selector lever lock to lever lock is automatically deactivated in po- engage again: sition N. – With a 6-speed gearbox: press the brake pedal and release it again. The selector lever lock is not engaged if the selector lever is moved quickly through posi- – With a 7-speed gearbox: press the tion N (e.g. when shifting from R to D). This brake pedal. Move the selector lever to makes it possible, for instance, to rock the ve- position P or N and subsequently en- hicle “backwards and forwards” if it is stuck. gage a gear. The selector lever lock engages automatical- ● Despite a gear being engaged, the vehi- ly if the brake pedal is not depressed and the cle does not move forwards or back. Pro- lever is in position N for more than about two ceed to the next mode: seconds. – When the vehicle does not move in the required direction, the system may not have the gear range correctly engaged. Press the brake pedal and engage the gear range again. 235 Driving

Engaging gears with the tiptronic Changing gear manually with the selector – With the selector lever in position D/S, if no mode* lever paddle is operated during a short period of It is possible to change to tiptronic mode, time, the gearbox control system switches both when the vehicle is stopped and while back to automatic mode. To switch to per- driving. manent manual gear change using the gearshift paddles, move the selector lever – To switch to tiptronic mode, move the selec- from position D/S to the right. tor lever from position D/S to the right. As soon as the change is made the selector When accelerating, the gearbox automati- level will be shown in the position M on the cally shifts up into the next gear shortly be- instrument panel display (for example M4 fore the maximum engine speed is reached. means that the fourth gear is engaged). If you select a lower gear, the automatic – Move the selector lever forwards + to se- gearbox will not shift down until there is no risk of over-revving the engine. Fig. 221 Centre console: changing gear with lect a higher gear ››› Fig. 221. tiptronic – Move the selector lever backwards – to When the kick-down feature is used, the select a lower gear. gearbox shifts down to a lower gear, depending on road speed and engine speed. – To exit the Triptonic mode, move the selector lever to the left.

Changing gear manually with the gear- Driving tips shift paddles* The gearbox changes gear ratios automati- The gearshift paddles can be used when the cally as the vehicle moves. selector lever is in the position D/S or M. The engine can only start with the selector – Press the gearshift paddle + to select a lever in position P or N. At low temperatures, higher gear ››› Fig. 222. below -10°C (+14°F), the engine can only Fig. 222 Steering wheel: automatic gearbox levers – Press the gearshift paddle – to select a start with the selector lever in position P. lower gear. The tiptronic gives the driver the option to Starting the vehicle – To exit the Triptonic mode, pull the right- change gears manually. hand lever towards the steering wheel for – Press and hold the brake pedal. approximately 1 second or move the selec- – Press and hold the interlock button (the tor lever to the left. button on the selector lever handle), move 236 Start and driving

the selector lever to the desired position, for Starting off uphill ● To avoid rolling back on gradients always instance D ››› page 233, and release the – Apply the handbrake. hold the vehicle with the footbrake or interlock button. handbrake if you have to stop. – Once you have engaged a gear press the – Wait for the gearbox to engage the gear (a accelerator carefully and disengage the slight movement can be felt). handbrake. CAUTION – Release the brake and press the accelera- ● If you stop the vehicle on a gradient, do Driving downhill: in some situations (on tor ››› . not attempt to stop it from rolling by de- mountain roads or when towing a trailer or pressing the accelerator when a gear has caravan) it can be advantageous to switch Stopping briefly been selected. This could cause overheat- temporarily to the manual gearbox pro- ing and damage the automatic gearbox. – Apply the foot brake to hold the vehicle gramme so that the gear ratios can be selec- Apply the handbrake firmly or press the briefly when stationary (for instance at traf- ted manually to suit the driving conditions brake pedal in order to prevent the vehicle fic lights). Do not press the accelerator. ››› . from rolling back. On level ground it is sufficient to move the se- ● If you allow the car to roll with the selec- Stopping/Parking lector lever to position P. On slopes, first en- tor lever in position N with the engine If the driver door is opened and the selector gage the parking brake and then put the se- switched off, the automatic gearbox will be damaged as it will not be lubricated. lever is not in position P, the vehicle could lection lever into the P position. This avoids move. The driver message will be:  Gear overloading the locking mechanism and it will ● In certain driving situations or traffic con- change: selector lever in the drive be easier to move the selector lever from po- ditions, such as frequently starting, pro- position!. Additionally, a buzzer will sound. sition P. longed “creeping” of the vehicle or traffic jams with continuous stoppages, the gear- – Press and hold the brake pedal ››› . WARNING box could overheat causing damage! If the – Apply the handbrake. warning lamp  lights up, stop the vehicle Observe the safety warnings ››› in Selec- as soon as possible and wait for the gear- – Move the selector lever to position P. tor lever positions on page 234. box to cool ››› page 240. ● Never allow the brake to rub and do not Holding the car on a hill use the brake pedal too often or for long – Always apply the brake pedal firmly to pre- periods. Constant braking causes over- Kick-down feature vent the vehicle “from moving backwards”; heating in the brakes. This could significantly reduce braking power, increase if necessary, apply the handbrake ››› . Do The kick-down feature allows maximum ac- braking distance or even result in the total not try to stop the vehicle “rolling back” by celeration to be reached. failure of the brake system. increasing the engine speed when a gear is When the accelerator pedal is pressed right engaged (pressing the accelerator) ››› . down past the point of resistance at full » 237 Driving

throttle, the gearbox will shift down to a lower warning lamp  will stay switched on or will WARNING gear, depending on road speed and engine flash slowly depending on whether or not the speed. The upshift to the next higher gear is vehicle has a driver information system*. ● Always adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. delayed until the engine reaches maximum On vehicles with the driver information sys- rpm. ● Only use the launch control programme tem, the ESC lamp lights up permanently and when road and traffic conditions permit, the corresponding text message Stability WARNING and make sure your manner of driving and control deactivated (temporary) appears accelerating the vehicle does not incon- Please note that if the road surface is slip- on the instrument panel to indicate the deac- venience or endanger other road users. pery or wet, the kick-down feature could tivation status. ● Make sure that the ESC remains switched cause the driving wheels to spin, which on. Please note that when the ASR and ESC could result in skidding. – When the engine is running, switch off the traction control (ASR)1). are deactivated, the wheels may start to spin, causing the vehicle to lose grip. Risk – Turn the selector lever to the position “S” or of accident! tiptronic, or else select the sport driving Launch control program ● After moving off, the ESC “sport” mode mode from the SEAT Drive Profile* 3 Valid for vehicles: with Launch-Control/6- should be deactivated by briefly pressing ››› page 274. Speed DSG with diesel engines superior to 125 the   button. kW and petrol engines superior to 140 kW. – Press the brake pedal firmly with your left foot and hold it down for at least one sec- Note The Launch control programme enables ond. maximum acceleration. ● After using the Launch control pro- – With your right foot, press the accelerator gramme, the temperature in the gearbox Condition: the engine must have reached op- down to the full throttle or kick-down posi- may have increased considerably. In this erating temperature and the steering wheel tion. The engine speed will stabilise at case, the programme could be disabled for must not be turned. about 3,200 rpm (petrol engine) or about several minutes. The programme can be The engine speed for launch-control is differ- 2,000 rpm (diesel engine). used again after the cooling phase. ent on petrol and diesel engines. To use the ● Accelerating with the Launch control pro- – Take your left foot off the brake pedal. launch-control you must disconnect the anti- gramme places a heavy load on all parts of slip regulation (ASR) through the Easy Con- the vehicle. This can result in increased nect system menu ›››  page 34. The wear and tear.

1) Vehicles without driver information system: the warning lamp flashes slowly/Vehicles with driver information system: the warning lamp stays on. 238 Start and driving

Downhill speed control* be maintained constant in all situations. Al- Applying both the inertia mode (= prolonged ways be prepared to use the brakes! section with less energy) and the switching The downhill speed control function helps the off using inertia (= shorter section without driver when driving down steep gradients. the need for fuel) facilitates improved fuel consumption and emission balance. Downhill speed control is activated when the Inertia mode selector lever is in D/S and the driver applies WARNING the foot brake. The automatic gearbox auto- The inertia mode enables the kinetic energy matically engages a lower gear that is suita- of the vehicle to be harnessed enabling cer- ● If the inertia mode has been switched on, ble for the slope. The downhill speed control tain stretches to be driven without using the take into account, when approaching an function attempts to maintain the speed at accelerator. This enables fuel to be saved. obstacle and releasing the accelerator which the vehicle was travelling when the Use the inertia mode to “let the vehicle roll” pedal, that the vehicle will not decelerate in the usual manner: risk of accident! foot brake was applied (subject to the laws of before, for example, arriving in a town. physics and technical drive limitations). It ● When using inertia mode while travelling may be necessary to adjust the speed again Switching on inertia mode down hills, the vehicle can increase speed: using the foot brake in certain situations. Giv- risk of accident! Condition: selector lever must be in position en that the downhill speed control can only ● If other users drive your vehicle, warn D, gradients below 12 %. change down to 3rd gear, on very steep de- them about inertia mode. scents the tiptronic mode may be required. In – Select, in SEAT Drive Profile*, Eco mode this case, manually reduce the tiptronic to ››› page 274. Note 2nd or 1st gear to use the engine brake and – Take your foot off the accelerator. ● reduce the charge on the brakes. Inertia mode is only available in eco The driver message Inertia will be dis- (SEAT Drive Profile*) driving mode. Downhill speed control is deactivated as played. At speeds higher than 20 km/h (12 ● The driver message Inertia is only dis- soon as the road levels out again or you press mph), the gearbox will automatically disen- played with the current consumption. In in- the accelerator pedal. gage and the vehicle will roll freely, without ertia mode the gear will no longer be dis- On vehicles with cruise control system* the effect of the engine brake. While the vehi- played (for example “E” will appear instead ››› page 250, downhill speed control is acti- cle rolls, the engine runs at idling speed. of “E7”). vated when you set a cruising speed. ● On downhill sections with gradients Stopping inertia mode above 15 %, the inertia mode will automatically be switched off temporarily. WARNING – Press the brake or the accelerator pedal. The downhill speed control cannot defy the To make use of the braking force and switch laws of physics. Therefore, speed cannot off the engine again, simply press the brake pedal briefly. 239 Driving

Emergency program sage switch off, have the fault corrected by a Continue driving at moderate speeds. When specialised workshop without delay. If the the warning lamp switches off, you can con- A backup programme is in place if a fault warning lamp and the driver message do not tinue driving in a normal manner. should occur in the control system. switch off, do not continue driving. Seek spe-  Gearbox: press the brake and en- cialist assistance. If all the positions of the selector lever are gage a gear again. shown over a light background on the instru- Gearbox malfunctions If the fault was caused by a gearbox with a ment panel display, there is a system fault high temperature, this driver message will be and the automatic gearbox will operate in  Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicle displayed when the gearbox has cooled with the backup programme. When the back- and place the lever in the posi- again. up programme is activated, it is possible to tion P. drive the vehicle, however, at low speeds and There is a fault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi- within a selected range of gears. In some ca- cle in a safe place and do not continue driv- ses driving in reverse gear may not be posing. Seek specialist assistance. Gear-change recommenda- sible.  Gearbox: System fault! You may tion CAUTION continue driving. If the gearbox operates with the backup Have the fault corrected by a specialised Choosing the ideal gear programme, take the vehicle to a special- workshop without delay. ised workshop and have the fault repaired  Gearbox: System fault! You can without delay. continue driving with restrictions. Reverse gear disabled Indications on the instrument panel Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop and have the fault repaired without delay. display  Gearbox: System fault! You can Clutch continue driving in D until switching off the engine  Clutch overheating! Please stop! The clutch has overheated and could be Stop the vehicle in a safe place well away Fig. 223 Instrument panel: gear-change indicator (manual gearbox). damaged. Stop the vehicle and wait for the from moving traffic. Seek specialist assis- gearbox to cool with the engine at idling tance. While driving, and depending on vehicle speed and the selector lever in position P.  Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your equipment, the instrument panel display may When the warning lamp and the driver mes- driving accordingly 240 Start and driving show a recommendation with the gear num- ● The responsibility of choosing the correct long as the key remains in the ignition. How- ber that would be advisable to save fuel. gear depending on the situation (e.g. over- ever, more effort than normal will be required to turn the steering wheel. In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, the taking, driving up or down a slope or towing selector lever must be in the tiptronic position a trailer) lies with the driver. Mechanical steering lock ››› page 236. For the sake of the environment In order to make the vehicle more difficult to No recommendation will appear if the opti- steal, you should always lock the steering be- mal gear is already engaged. The current Selecting the correct gear can help to save fore leaving the vehicle. gear will be displayed. fuel. The steering column is locked when the key is Display Meaning Note removed from the ignition lock and the vehicle is stationary.  The optimal gear is selected. The recommended gear indication turns off when the clutch pedal is pressed in vehi- Activating the steering lock    Changing to a higher gear is rec- cles with manual gearbox or when the se- ommended. lector lever is removed from the tiptronic ● Park the vehicle ››› page 223. position in vehicles with an automatic gear-    Changing to a lower gear is rec- ● Remove the ignition key. ommended. box. ● Turn the steering wheel slightly until the steering lock has engaged. Information regarding the “cleanliness” of the particulate filter Steering Deactivating the steering lock The exhaust system manager detects that ● Turn the steering wheel slightly to release the particulate filter is nearly saturated and Information related to vehicle the lock. contributes to self-cleaning by recommend- steering ● Insert the key in the ignition lock. ing the optimal gear. For this reason, it might be necessary to drive for a short time at a ● Hold the steering wheel in this position and Electro-mechanical power steering assists high rpm. switch on the ignition. the driver when steering. WARNING Electro-mechanical power steering adapts Power-assisted steering electronically to the speed of the car, torque The gear change indicator is only an auxili- Power-assisted steering helps the driver in and turning angle. ary function and in no case should be a critical situations. It recommends the rotation substitute for careful driving. If the power steering should fail at any time or direction of the steering wheel to perform a the engine is switched off (for instance when corrective manoeuvre (counter-steering), » being towed), the car can still be steered, as 241 Driving

thereby causing a small turn of the wheel in Control lamp The control lamp should light up for a few the correct direction to avoid skidding ››› . seconds when the ignition is switched on. It  It lights up red should go out once the engine is started. WARNING If the power steering does not work, you The electromechanical steering is damaged. WARNING Do not continue driving. Stop the vehicle safely and will need much more strength to turn the as soon as possible. If the warning lamps and the corresponding wheel. This has a considerable effect on Have the steering checked immediately by a special- messages are ignored when they light up, vehicle safety. ised workshop. the vehicle may stall in traffic. It could case ● The power steering only works when the damage to the vehicle and cause accidents and severe injuries. engine is running.  It lights up yellow ● Never allow the vehicle to move when the ● Never ignore the warning lamps or mes- engine is switched off. The operation of the electromechanical steering is sages. limited. ● Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity ● Never remove the key from the ignition See a specialised workshop immediately and have while the vehicle is moving. The steering the steering checked. and in a safe place. lock could be engaged and vehicle steer- If the yellow warning lamp does not light up again af- ing would not work. ter the engine is restarted and the vehicle has travelled a short distance, you do not need to take it to a specialised workshop. Run-in and economical driv- WARNING Or: The 12-volt battery was disconnected and has ing Power-assisted steering, together with the been connected again. ESC, helps the driver to control vehicle Drive for a short time at 15-20 km/h (9-12 mph). steering in critical situations. However, the Running in a new engine driver is ultimately responsible for steering  It flashes yellow the vehicle at all times. Power-assisted The engine needs to be run-in over the first steering does not remove this responsibili- The steering column is tight. 1500 km (900 miles). ty. Turn the wheel a little to both sides. For the first 1,000 kilometres (600 miles) Or: Not unlocked or blocked steering column. Note Remove the key from the ignition and then switch the – Do not drive at speeds of more than 2/3 the ignition back on. If necessary, check the messages The ignition of the vehicle being towed maximum speed. displayed on the instrument panel display. must be switched on to prevent the steering Do not drive on if the steering column remains – Do not accelerate hard. wheel from locking and also to allow the locked after the ignition has been switched on. Seek use of the turn signals, horn, windscreen specialist assistance. – Avoid high engine revolutions. wipers and washers. – Do not tow a trailer.

242 Start and driving

From 1,000 kilometres (600 miles) to cause an accident. Drive particularly care- ● Use of recycled materials and/or materials 1,500 kilometres (900 miles) fully in the first 500 km (300 miles). originating from renewable sources. – Speeds can be gradually increased to the ● New brake pads must be “run in” and do ● Reduction of volatile components, including maximum road speed or maximum permis- not have the correct friction properties dur- odour, in plastic materials. sible engine speed (rpm). ing the first 200 km (125 miles). However, ● Use of CFC-free coolants. the reduced braking capacity may be com- During its first few hours of running, the inter- pensated by pressing on the brake pedal a Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions nal friction in the engine is greater than later little harder. dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive on, when all the moving parts have bedded 2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury, in. hexavalent chromium. Environmental compatibility For the sake of the environment Manufacturing methods If the engine is run in gently, its life will be Environmental protection is a top priority in ● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the increased and its oil consumption reduced. the design, choice of materials and manufac- protective wax for cavities. ture of your new SEAT. ● Use of plastic film as protection during vehicle transport. Running-in of tyres and brake pads Constructive measures to encourage recycling ● Use of solvent-free adhesives. New tyres should be run in carefully for the ● Joints and connections designed for easy ● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys- first 500 km (300 miles) and new brake pads dismantling. tems. should be run in carefully for the first 200 km ● Modular construction to facilitate disman- ● Recycling and energy recovery from resi- (125 miles). tling. dues (RDF). During the first 200 km (125 miles) you have ● Increased use of single-grade materials. ● Improvement in the quality of waste water. to compensate for the reduced braking effect ● Use of systems for the recovery of residual by applying more pressure to the brake ped- ● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in accordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 and heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels, al. In case of a sharp braking, the braking dis- etc.). tance will be longer with new brake pads ISO 1629. ● than with brake pads which have been run-in. The use of water-soluble paints. Choice of materials WARNING ● Use of recycled materials. ● At first, new tyres do not give maximum ● Use of compatible plastics in the same part grip, and require running-in. This may if its components are not easily separated.

243 Driving

Economical and environmentally- Change gear early to save energy to drive off immediately after starting the en- friendly driving An effective way of saving fuel is to change gine. Avoid running the engine at high speed. up quickly through the gears. Running the en- Fuel consumption, environmental pollution gine at high rpm in the lower gears uses an Periodic maintenance and wear to the engine, brakes and tyres de- unnecessary amount of fuel. Periodic maintenance work guarantees that, pends in large part on your driving style. By before beginning a journey, you will not con- Manual transmission: shift up from first to adopting an economical driving style and an- sume more than the required amount of fuel. second gear as soon as possible. We recom- ticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can A well-serviced engine gives you the benefit mend that, whenever possible, you change to easily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%. of improved fuel efficiency as well as maxi- a higher gear upon reaching 2000 rpm. Fol- Some tips on how to help you reduce pollu- mum reliability and an enhanced resale val- low the “recommended gear” indication that tion while saving money are listed below. ue. appears on the instrument panel ››› page 240. A badly serviced engine can consume up to Active cylinder management (ACT®)* 10% more fuel than necessary. Depending on vehicle equipment, the active Avoid driving at high speed cylinder management (ACT®) may automati- We advise you not to drive at the top speed Avoid short journeys cally deactivate some of the engine cylinders permitted by the vehicle. Fuel consumption, To reduce the consumption and emission of if the driving situation does not require too exhaust emissions and noise levels all in- polluting exhaust gases, the engine and the much power. When it is switched off, no fuel is crease very rapidly at higher speeds. Driving exhaust gas filtration systems should reach injected into these cylinders, hence total fuel at moderate speeds will help to save fuel. the optimum operating temperature. consumption may be reduced. The number of active cylinders can be seen on the instru- With the engine cold, fuel consumption is pro- Avoid idling ment panel display. ››› page 106. portionally higher. The engine does not warm It is worthwhile switching off the engine when up and fuel consumption does not normalise Drive anticipating the traffic situation waiting in a traffic jam, at level crossings or at until having driven approximately four kilome- traffic lights with a long red phase. The fuel A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating. tres (2.5 miles). This is why we recommend saved after only 30 - 40 seconds is greater When you anticipate situations, you have to avoiding short trips whenever possible. than the amount of fuel needed to restart the brake less often and, thus, accelerate less. If it engine. is possible, let the vehicle roll with a gear en- Maintain the correct tyre pressures gaged, for example, if you see a red light The engine takes a long time to warm up Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an ade- ahead. The braking effect achieved in this when it is idling. Mechanical wear and pollu- quate pressure saves fuel. If the tyre pressure way helps to reduce the wear of brakes and tant emissions are also especially high during is just one bar (14.5 psi/100 kPa) too low, fuel tyres; emissions and fuel consumption are re- this initial warm-up phase. It is therefore best consumption can increase by as much as 5%. duced to zero (disconnection due to inertia). 244 Start and driving

Due to the greater rolling resistance, under- Note tem (catalytic converter or particulate fil- inflation also increases tyre wear wear and ter), do not park the vehicle where the ex- ● If your vehicle has Start-Stop, it is not impairs handling. haust can come into contact with flamma- recommended that you switch this function ble materials under the car (e.g. on grass or The tyre pressures should always be checked off. at the forest edge). Fire hazard! when the tyres are cold. ● It is recommended that you close the ● Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle windows when driving at more than Do not use winter tyres all year round as around the area of the exhaust system: Fire 60 km/h (37 mph). they increase fuel consumption by up to 10%. hazard! ● Do not drive with your foot resting on the Avoid unnecessary weight clutch pedal,, as the pressure can make the plate spin, more fuel will be used and it can Given that every kilo of extra weight will in- burn the clutch plate lining, causing a seri- Control lamps crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable to ous fault. always check the luggage compartment to ● Do not hold the car on a hill with the  It lights up make sure that no unnecessary loads are be- clutch, use the foot brake or hand brake, ing transported. using the latter to start. The fuel consump- Fault in the emission control system. (e.g. faulty lambda sensor). tion will be lower and you will prevent the A roof rack is often left in place for the sake of Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe- convenience, even when it is no longer nee- clutch plate from being damaged. cialised workshop to have the engine checked. ded. At a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph) and ● On descents, use the engine brake, 120 km/h (75 mph) your vehicle will use about changing to the gear that is more suitable  Flashes 12% more fuel as a result of the extra wind re- for the slope. Fuel consumption will be sistance caused by the roof rack even when it “zero” and the brakes will not suffer. Combustion fault which could damage the catalytic is not in use. converter. Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest specialised workshop to have the engine checked. Save electricity Engine management and The engine activates the alternator, which  It lights up produces electricity. With the need for elec- emission control system tricity, fuel consumption also increases. Be- Particulate filter blocked ››› page 246. » cause of this, always turn off electrical devi- Introduction ces when you do not need them. Examples of devices that use a lot of electricity are: the WARNING blower at high speeds, the rear window heating or the seat heaters*. ● Because of the high temperatures which can occur in the exhaust purification sys-

245 Driving

 It lights up Catalytic converter For the sake of the environment Even when the emission control system is Fault in the management of the petrol engine. To maintain the useful life of the catalytic working perfectly, there may be a smell of Have the engine checked by a specialised workshop converter as soon as possible. sulphur from the exhaust gas under some ● Use only unleaded petrol with petrol en- conditions. This depends on the sulphur The warning lamp  (Electronic Power Control) gines, as lead damages the catalytic con- content of the fuel used. Quite often the lights up when the ignition is switched on while sys- verter. problem can be solved by changing to an- tem operation is being verified. It should go out once other brand of fuel. the engine is started. ● Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank. ● For engine oil changes, do not replenish  It lights up with too much engine oil ››› page 319, Top- ping up engine oil. Particulate filter Diesel engine glow plug system. The engine glow plug system has been activated. ● Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump The particulate filter eliminates most of the The engine can be started straight away when the leads if necessary ›››  page 59. soot from the exhaust gas system. Under nor- lamp switches off. If you notice misfiring, uneven running or loss mal driving conditions, the filter cleans itself. The particulate filter is cleaned automatically  Flashes of power when the vehicle is moving, reduce speed immediately and have the vehicle in- without need for indication by the warning  Fault in the management of the diesel engine. spected at the nearest specialised workshop. lamp . This may be noticed because the Have the engine checked by a specialised workshop In general, the exhaust warning lamp will light engine idle speed increases and an odour as soon as possible. up when any of the described symptoms oc- may be detected. cur ››› page 245. If this happens, unburnt fuel If automatic filter purification cannot be car- Note can enter the exhaust system and escape in- ried out (because only short trips are taken, While the control lamps are on , ,  to the environment. The catalytic converter for example), soot will accumulate on the fil- or  there might be faults in the engine, can also be damaged by overheating. ter and the particulate filter warning lamp will fuel consumption may go up and the en-  switch on. gine might lose power. CAUTION Facilitate the automatic filter cleaning proc- Never run the fuel tank completely dry be- ess by driving in the following manner: cause the irregularity of the fuel supply may cause ignition problems. This allows ● Drive for approximately 15 minutes at a unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust system, minimum speed of 60 km/h (37 mph) in 4th or which could cause overheating and dam- 5th gear (automatic gearbox: S gear range). age the catalytic converter.

246 Start and driving

● Maintain the engine speed at approximate- about necessary maintenance and repair Note ly 2,000 rpm. possibilities. ● Check the depth of the water before en- The rise in temperature causes the soot on tering the flooded zone. the filter to burn. On completion of the clean- Driving on flooded roads ● Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse, ing the warning lamp will switch off. If the or stop the engine in any situation. warning lamp does not switch off, go immedi- To prevent damage to the vehicle when driv- ● Note that vehicles travelling in the oppo- ately to a specialised workshop to rectify the ing through water, for example, along a floo- site direction may splash water that could problem. ded road, please observe the following: exceed the maximum permitted water height for your vehicle. ● The water should never come above the ● Avoid driving through salt water (corro- Driving tips lower edge of the bodywork. sion). ● Drive at pedestrian speed. Driving abroad WARNING To drive abroad, the following must be taken After driving through water, mud, sludge, into consideration: etc., the braking effect can be delayed slightly due to moisture build-up on the ● For vehicles fitted with a catalytic converter discs and brake pads. Applying the brakes ensure that unleaded petrol is available for carefully several times will remove the the journey. See chapter ››› page 310, Fuel. moisture and restore the full braking effect. Automobile organisations will have information about service station networks selling un- CAUTION leaded fuel. ● Driving through flooded areas may se- ● In some countries, it is possible that your verely damage vehicle components such car model is not sold, and therefore some as the engine, transmission, running gear or spare parts are not available or the technical electrical system. services may only be able to carry out limited ● Whenever driving through water, the repairs. Start-Stop system* must be switched off SEAT importers and distributors will gladly ››› page 248. provide information about the technical preparation that your vehicle requires and also

247 Driving

Driver assistance systems Description and operation Vehicles with a manual gearbox ● Before stopping the vehicle or when it is stopped, put it into neutral and release the Start-Stop system* clutch pedal. The engine will switch off. The warning lamp  will appear on the instru- Control lamps ment panel display. The engine may stop before the vehicle comes to a halt in the decel-  It lights up Fig. 224 Related video eration phase (at 7 km/h). ● When the clutch pedal is pressed the en- The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic en- The Start-Stop system helps save fuel and gine shutdown is active. gine will start up again. The warning lamp will reduce CO2 emissions. switch off. . It lights up In Start-Stop mode, the engine will automatically switch off when the vehicle stops or is Vehicles with an automatic gearbox The Start-Stop system is not available. stopping; for example when stopping at traf- ● Use the foot brake to bring the vehicle to a fic lights. The ignition remains switched on stop and keep the brake pedal pressed down Instructions for the driver on the instru- during the stopping phase. The engine auto- with your foot. The engine will switch off. The ment panel display matically switches back on when required. In warning lamp  will appear in the display.    Start-Stop system deactivated. this scenario, the light of the The engine may stop before the vehicle 1) Start the engine manually button stays lit . comes to a halt in the deceleration phase (at 7 km/h or 2 km/h, depending on the vehicle’s As soon as the ignition is switched on, the This driver message is displayed when cer- gearbox). tain conditions are not met during the stop- Start-Stop function is automatically activa- ● When you take your foot off the brake ped- ping phase and the Start-Stop system can- ted. al the engine will start up again. The warning not restart the engine. The engine must be Further information about the Start-Stop sys- lamp will switch off. started manually. tem can be found on the Easy Connect system: by pressing the button  /  in the Ve- Start-Stop system: Fault! Function Basic requirements for the Start-Stop hicle status menu. not available mode There is a fault in the Start-Stop system. Take ● The driver door must be closed. the vehicle to a workshop to have the fault repaired.

1) Only in vehicles with Keyless Access. 248 Driver assistance systems

● The driver must have their seat belt fas- ● After engaging reverse gear. If the selector lever is placed in position R dur- tened. ● In case of a very steep gradient. ing the stopping phase, the engine will start ● The bonnet must be closed. up again. The indication . is shown on the instrument ● The engine must have reached a minimum Change from position D to P to prevent the panel display, and in addition, the driver infor- service temperature. engine from accidentally starting when mation system* shows, . changing and passing by position R. ● The reverse gear must not be engaged. ● The engine starts by itself The vehicle must not be on a very steep Additional information about vehicles with slope. During a stopping phase the normal Start- Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Stop mode can be interrupted in the following The system can interrupt the Start-Stop In vehicles with ACC function, the engine will situations: The engine restarts by itself with- mode frequently for different reasons. start up again in certain operating conditions out involvement from the driver. if the radar sensor detects that the vehicle The engine does not switch off ● The interior temperature differs from the ahead drives off again. Before the stopping phase, the system verifies value selected on the air conditioner. WARNING whether certain conditions are met. The en- ● Defrost function button activated gine does not switch off, in the following sit- ›››  page 41. ● Never switch the engine off until the vehi- uations for example: cle is stationary. The brake servo and pow- ● The brake has been pressed several times er steering functions will not be completely ● The engine has not yet reached the mini- consecutively. covered under warranty. More force may mum required temperature for the Start-Stop ● The battery is too low. also be needed to turn the steering wheel mode. ● High power consumption. or to brake. As you cannot steer and brake in the normal manner, there is a greater risk ● The interior temperature selected for the air of accidents and serious injury. conditioner has not yet been reached. Additional information related to the auto- ● Never remove the key from the ignition if ● The interior temperature is very high/low. matic gearbox the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, the ● Defrost function button activated The engine stops when the selector lever is in steering could lock making it impossible to ›››  page 41. the positions P, D, N and S, in addition to when steer the vehicle. in Triptonic mode. With the selector lever in ● The parking aid* is switched on. ● To avoid injury, make sure that the Start- position P, the engine will also remain switch- ● The battery is very low. Stop system is switched off when working ed off when you take your foot off the brake in the engine compartment ››› page 250. » ● The steering wheel is overly turned or is be- pedal. In order to start the engine up again ing turned. the accelerator must be pressed, or another ● If there is a danger of misting. gear engaged or the brake released. 249 Driving

CAUTION Manually switching on/off the Cruise control system The Start-Stop system must always be Start-Stop system (CCS)* switched off when driving through flooded areas ››› page 250. Control lamp

Note  It lights up green ● In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, you can control whether the engine should The Cruise Control System (GRA) is switched on and switch off or not by reducing or increasing active. the brake force applied. While the vehicle OR: The Adaptive Cruise Control system (CCS) is remains stopped, the engine will not stop if switched on and active. the brake pedal is slightly pressed, in traffic jams with frequent stopping and starting OR: the speed limiter is switched on and active. for example. As soon as strong pressure is Fig. 225 Centre console: Start-Stop system applied to the brake pedal, the engine will button. Several warning and control lamps light up stop. for a few seconds when the ignition is switch- If you do not wish to use the system, you can ● In vehicles with manual gearbox, during ed on, signalling that the function is being switch it off manually. the stopping phases the brake pedal must verified. They will switch off after a few seconds. remain depressed to prevent the vehicle ● To manually switch on/off the Start-Stop from moving. system, press the  button ››› Fig. 225. WARNING ● If the engine “stalls” in vehicles with manual gearbox, it can be directly started The symbol on the  button remains lit up Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warn- up again by immediately pressing the yellow when the system is switched off, and ing symbols on page 118. clutch pedal. the following message is displayed on the ● In vehicles with an automatic gearbox, if dash panel: the selector lever is placed in position D, N Start-Stop system deactivated or S after engaging reverse gear, the vehicle must be driven at a speed faster than 10 Note km/h (6 mph) for the system to return to conditions in which the engine can be stop- The system is automatically switched on ped. each time the engine is deliberately stopped during a stopping phase. The engine will start automatically.

250 Driver assistance systems

Cruise control operation A CCS temporarily switched off. The set ● If the brake pedal is pressed. speed is displayed in small or darkened ● If the airbag is triggered. figures. ● If the gear lever of the DSG® dual clutch B System error. Contact a specialised gearbox is removed from the D/S position. workshop. C CCS switched on. The speed memory is WARNING empty. Use of the cruise control could cause acci- D The CCS is switched on. The set speed is dents and severe injuries if it is not possible displayed in large figures. to drive at a constant speed maintaining the safety distance. Changing gear in CCS mode ● Do not use the cruise control in heavy The CCS decelerates as soon as the clutch traffic, if the distance from the vehicle in front is insufficient, on steep roads, with pedal is pressed, intervening again automati- several bends or in slippery circumstances cally after a gear is engaged. (snow, ice, rain or loose gravel), or on floo- Fig. 226 Instrument panel display: CCS status ded roads. Travelling down hills with the CCS indications. ● Never use the CCS when driving off-road When travelling down hills the CCS cannot or on unpaved roads. Read the additional information carefully maintain a constant speed. Slow the vehicle ● Always adapt your speed and the dis- ›››  page 38 down using the brake pedal and reduce tance to the vehicles ahead in line with visi- The cruise control system (CCS) is able to gears if required. bility, weather conditions, the condition of maintain the set speed from 20 km/h (15 the road and the traffic situation. Automatic off mph). ● To avoid unexpected operation of the The CSS only reduces vehicle speed by The cruise control system (CCS) is switched cruise control system, turn it off every time ceasing to accelerate, not by actively braking off automatically or temporarily: you finish using it. ● It is dangerous to use a set speed which is the vehicle ››› . ● If the system detects a fault that could af- too high for the prevailing road, traffic or fect the working order of the CCS. Displayed on the CCS screen weather conditions. ● If you press and maintain the accelerator ● When travelling down hills, the CCS can- Status Fig. 226: pedal for a certain time, driving faster than not maintain a constant speed. The vehicle the stored speed. tends to accelerate under its own weight. ● If the dynamic driving control systems inter- Select a lower gear or use the foot brake to vene (e.g. ASR or ESC). slow the vehicle. 251 Driving

Speed limiter Display indications WARNING After use, always switch off the speed limit- Control lamp er to prevent the speed being regulated against your wishes.  It lights up green ● The speed limiter does not relieve the driver of their responsibility to drive at the The speed limiter is switched on and active. appropriate speed. Do not drive at high speed if not necessary.  Flashes green ● Using the speed limiter under adverse weather conditions is dangerous and can The speed set by the speed limiter has been excee- cause serious accidents, e.g. aquaplaning, ded. snow, ice, leaves, etc. Only use the speed Fig. 227 On the instrument panel display: indi- limiter when the status of the road and the  It lights up cations of the speed limiter status. weather conditions allow it. ● The adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the speed limit- The speed limiter helps avoid exceeding a When driving downhill, the speed limiter cannot limit the vehicle speed. Its speed er is active. speed individually programmed upwards of will increase due to its own weight. In this approximately 30 km/h (19 mph) driving in Some warning and control lamps will light up case, select a lower gear or use the foot forwards gears ››› briefly when the ignition is switched on to brake to slow the vehicle. check certain functions. They will switch off Display messages on the speed limiter after a few seconds. ››› Fig. 227: Note A The speed limiter is active. The last speed WARNING ● Different versions of the instrument panel set is displayed in large figures. are available and therefore the versions Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warn- B The speed limiter is not active. The last and instructions on the display may vary. ing symbols on page 118. speed set is displayed in small or dark- ● If when switching the ignition off, the ened figures. cruise control system (CCS), the adaptive cruise control (ACC) or the speed limiter C The speed limiter is switched off. The total were switched on, then the cruise control mileage is displayed. system or the adaptive cruise control will automatically switch themselves on when the ignition is back on. However, no speed will be stored. The last set speed of the speed limiter will be stored.

252 Driver assistance systems

Operate the speed limiter

Fig. 228 On the left of the steering column: Fig. 229 On the left of the steering column: control and buttons to operate the speed limit- third lever for operating the speed limiter. er.

Position of the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 228 Function Effect or the third lever ››› Fig. 229

Move controller 1 to position  and press button 2 of the turn signal The system switches on. The last set speed of the speed Switching on the speed limiter lever or move the third lever forward and press button 2 . limiter is stored. It does not take effect yet.

Switching between the speed limiter and cruise control (CCS) or the adap- It switches between the speed limiter and the CCS or the Press button 2 on the turn signal lever or button 2 on the third lever tive cruise control (ACC) (with the adaptive cruise control (ACC). speed limiter switched on)

Press the button 3 on the turn signal lever or button  1 on the third The current speed is stored as the maximum speed and Activating the speed limiter lever. the limiter is switched on.

Temporarily switching off the speed Place control 1 of the turn signal lever in position  or move the The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will be limiter limitation third lever into position . stored.

Temporarily switch off the speed limiter Press down on the accelerator beyond the point of resistance (e.g. to The limiter is switched off temporarily. The speed will be limitation pressing down the accelera- overtake). Surpassing the set speed switches the speed limiter off tem- stored. The limiter is reactivated automatically after re- tor (kick-down) porarily. turning to less than the set speed. »

253 Driving

Position of the turn signal lever ››› Fig. 228 Function Effect or the third lever ››› Fig. 229

The speed is limited to the set speed as soon as the Press button 3 on the turn signal lever or move the third lever into po- Switching the speed limiter on again speed you are driving at is lower than the speed set as sition . maximum.

Briefly press button 3 on the turn signal lever in the  area or move the third lever into position  to increase the speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph) and set it.

Press  on the third lever to increase the speed in increments of Increasing the set speed of the limiter The speed is limited to the set value 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Hold down the button 3 on the turn signal lever in the  area or hold down  to increase continuously in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Briefly press button 3 on the turn signal lever in the  area or press  1 on the third lever to reduce the speed in small increments of 1 km/h (1 mph) and set it.

Press  on the third lever to reduce the speed in increments of Reducing the set speed of the limiter The speed is limited to the set value 10 km/h (5 mph) and set it.

Hold down the button 3 on the turn signal lever in the  area or hold down  to continuously decrease the speed in increments of 10 km/h (5 mph), then set it.

Move control 1 of the turn signal lever into position  or the third lev- Switching off the speed limiter The system switches off. er into position .

The values shown in the table in brackets, in the warning and control lamps  Switching off temporarily mph, are displayed only in instrument panels ››› page 252 flash and an acoustic warning If you wish to temporarily switch off the speed with indications in miles. may sound. In this case, use the foot brake to limiter, e.g. to overtake, move control slow the vehicle or, if necessary, select a low- ››› Fig. 228 1 of the turn signal lever into po- Going down slopes with the speed limiter er gear. sition  or the third lever into pressure If the set speed of the speed limiter is excee- point  or press button 2 on any lever. ded while driving downhill, soon afterwards

254 Driver assistance systems

After overtaking, the speed limiter can be only completely switched off when the pending on how critical the situation is. Initial- switched on with the previously set speed by driver stops pressing the accelerator at ly it warns the driver, and if the driver’s reac- pressing button 3 on the turn signal lever in some point or consciously switches off the tion does not occur or is insufficient, it acti- the area  or by moving the third lever into system. vates an independent emergency braking. pressure point . The function is oriented at avoiding the following situations: Switch the speed limiter off temporarily by pressing down the accelerator (kick- Emergency braking assis- ● Collisions with parked vehicles or vehicles down) tance system (Front Assist)* in the same lane travelling in the same direc- If the accelerator is pressed right down (kick- tion. down) and the set speed is exceeded be- Topic introduction ● Hitting pedestrians who cross in front of the cause driver wishes to do so, the limiter is vehicle's path or who are walking in the same temporarily disabled. lane and direction.

To confirm it being switched off an acoustic It may fail to activate in other danger situa- signal sound once. While the limiter is off, the tions. warning and control lamp  flashes. The Front Assist function is active within a When the accelerator is no longer pressed range of speeds between 4 km/h (2.5 mph) down and the speed is reduced below the set and 250 km/h (156 mph). Depending on value, the limiter switches on again. The con- speed, traffic conditions and driver behaviour, trol lamp  will light up and remain lit. some of the sub-functions described below are omitted in order to optimise the system’s Automatic off general behaviour. Fig. 230 On the instrument panel display: ad- The speed limiter is automatically switched vance warning indications. The Front Assist is a driving assistance off: function that can never replace the driv- The objective of the emergency braking as- ● er’s attention. If the system detects a fault that could neg- sistance system is to prevent head-on colli- atively affect the working order of the limiter. sions against objects that may be in the vehi- Safety distance warning ● If the airbag is triggered. cle’s path or minimise the consequences of such impacts. If the system detects a situation of danger CAUTION because the vehicle is too close to the vehicle Within the limitations imposed by the environ- ahead, it will warn the driver by means of an » For automatic switching off due to system mental conditions and by the system itself, failures, for security reasons, the limiter is the function acts in staggered fashion, de- 255 Driving

indication on the instrument panel display Driver emergency braking assistance sys- ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to . tem the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit The timing of the warning varies depending Faced with an imminent collision, the system visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- on driver behaviour and the traffic situation. may detect that the driver is not braking hard tions. enough to avoid the collision. In this case, it ● The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci- Advance warning will automatically increase the braking effect. dents and serious injuries. If the system detects a possible collision with Due to certain driving circumstances and the ● In complex driving situations, occasional- ly the Front Assist may issue warnings and the vehicle in front, it may alert the driver by limitations of its operation, there are some intervene in braking unnecessarily, for ex- means of an audible warning and an indica- cases in which the system cannot prevent a ample at traffic islands. tion on the instrument panel display collision, although it can significantly mini- ››› Fig. 230. mise the consequences by reducing the ● If the operation of the Front Assist is im- speed and the force of the impact. paired, for example, by dirt or because the The warning moment varies depending on radar sensor has lost its settings, the sys- the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At WARNING tem may issue unnecessary warnings and the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a intervene inopportunely in the braking. Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warn- possible emergency braking ››› . ● The Front Assist does not react to animals ing symbols on page 118. or vehicles crossing your path or ap- Critical warning proaching head-on down the same lane. If the driver fails to react to the pre-warning WARNING ● The Front Assist does not react to pedes- (advance warning), the system may actively The Front Assist system cannot change the trians walking head-on in the same lane. intervene in the brakes and generate a brief laws of physics or replace the driver in ● The driver must always be ready to take jolt to warn the driver of the imminent danger terms of keeping control of the vehicle and over the control of the vehicle. of a collision. reacting to a possible emergency situation. Note Automatic braking WARNING ● When the Front Assist is connected, the If the driver also fails to react to the critical Following a Front Assist emergency warn- indications on the instrument panel screen warning, the system may initiate independent ing, pay immediate attention to the situa- may be concealed by warnings from other emergency braking by progressively increas- tion and try to avoid the collision by brak- functions, such as an incoming call. ing the braking effect in accordance with how ing or by dodging the obstacle, as applica- ● When the Front Assist causes a braking, critical the situation is. ble. the brake pedal is “harder”. ● If the Front Assist does not work as de- ● Automatic interventions by the Front As- scribed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedly sist on the brakes may be interrupted by intervenes unnecessarily), switch it off. 256 Driver assistance systems

pressing the clutch, accelerator or moving fluences such as rain or mist. In this case, the ● The sensor may become damaged or the wheel. Front Assist does not work. The instrument lose its settings when knocked, for exam- panel displays the following message: Front ● The Front Assist may brake the vehicle ple, during a parking manoeuvre. This may Assist: No sensor vision! If necessary until it stops completely. However, the compromise the system's efficacy or dis- brake system does not halt the vehicle per- clean the radar sensor ››› . connect it. manently. Use the foot brake! When the radar sensor begins to operate ● Repairs to the radar sensor require spe- ● If the Front Assist does not work as de- properly again, the Front Assist will automati- cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT scribed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes cally be available again. The message will recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for several times unnecessarily), switch it off. disappear from the instrument panel display. this purpose. Have the system checked by a specialised ● A registration plate or plate holder on the Front Assist operation may be affected by a workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a front that is larger than the space for the SEAT dealership. strong radar reverse reflection. This may oc- registration plate, or a registration plate cur, for example, in a closed car park or due that is curved or warped can cause the ra- to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails dar to malfunction. on the road or sheets used in road works). Radar sensor ● Clean away the snow with a brush and The area in front of and around the radar the ice preferably with a solvent-free de- sensor should not be covered with adhesives, icer spray. additional or similar headlights, as this may negatively affect Front Assist operation. If the front of the vehicle is not properly repaired or structural modifications are made to it, for example if the suspension is lowered, Front Assist operation may be affected. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for this purpose.

Fig. 231 On the front bumper: radar sensor. CAUTION If you have the sensation that the radar A radar sensor is installed on the front bump- sensor is damaged or has lost its settings, er to determine the traffic situation disconnect the Front Assist. This will avoid ››› Fig. 231 1 . possible dangerous situations caused by a The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired system malfunction. If this occurs have it by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in- adjusted. 257 Driving

Operating the Emergency braking When Front Assist is switched off, the instru- appear on the instrument panel display assistance system (Front Assist) ment panel will inform that it has been . In this case, increase the safe distance. switched off with the following indicator  The distance warning can be switched on ››› Fig. 232. and off in the Easy Connect system using the  /  and the SETTINGS > Driver as- Activating or deactivating the pre-warning sistance function buttons ›››  page 34. (advance warning) The system will store the setting for the next The pre-warning function (advance warning) time the ignition is switched on. can be switched on or off in the Easy Con- nect system with the  /  button and the SEAT recommends keeping the distance SETTINGS and Driver assistance func- warning switched on at all times. tion buttons ›››  page 34. The system will store the setting for the next Fig. 232 On the screen of the instrument panel time the ignition is switched on. Switching the Front Assist off tem- Front Assist switched off message. SEAT recommends keeping the pre-warning porarily in the following situations The Front Assist is active whenever the igni- function switched on at all times. In the following situations the Front Assist tion is switched on. Depending on the infotainment system instal- should be deactivated due to the system's When the Front Assist is switched off, so too led in the vehicle, the advance warning func- limitations: are the advance warning function (pre warn- tion may be adjusted as follows: ● ing) and the distance warning. When the vehicle is to be towed. ● Advance ● If the vehicle is on a test bed. SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist al- ● Medium ways switched on. Exceptions ››› page 258, ● When the radar sensor is damaged. Switching the Front Assist off temporarily ● Delayed ● If the radar sensor takes a heavy knock, for in the following situations. ● Deactivated example in a rear collision. ● If it intervenes several times unnecessarily. Switching the Front Assist on and off SEAT recommends driving with the function in “Medium” mode. ● If the radar sensor is covered temporarily With the ignition on, Front Assist can be ena- with some kind of accessory, such as an ad- bled or disabled in the Easy Connect system Switching distance warning on and off ditional headlight or the like. with the  /  button and the SETTINGS > ● When the vehicle is to be loaded on a lorry, Driver assistance function buttons If the safe distance with regard to the vehicle ferry or train. ›››  page 34. in front is exceeded, the relevant warning will

258 Driver assistance systems

System limitations ● In case of snow or heavy rain. ● In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor- The Front Assist has certain physical limita- bikes. tions inherent to the system. Thus, in certain ● Misaligned vehicles. circumstances, some of the system's reactions may be inopportune from the driver's ● Vehicles crossing the other's path. standpoint. So pay attention in order to inter- ● Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc- vene if necessary. tion. ● Special loads and accessories of other ve- The following conditions may cause the hicles that jut out over the sides, backwards Front Assist not to react or to do so too or over the top. Fig. 234 Detection area. late: ● In the first few instants of driving after The adaptive cruise control (ACC) is an ex- switching on the ignition, due to the system’s tension of the normal cruise control sys- initial auto-calibration. Adaptive Cruise Control tem (CCS) ››› . ● On taking tight bends or complex paths. ACC* The ACC function allows the driver to pro- ● Pressing the accelerator all the way down. gram a cruise speed of between 30 and 210 Introduction km/h (18 and 130 mph) and to select the dis- ● If the Front Assist is switched off or dam- tance required with regard to the vehicle in aged. front. ● If the ASR has been disconnected or the The ACC will adapt the vehicle's cruise ESC activated in Sport mode manually speed at all times, maintaining a safe dis- ››› page 228. tance with the vehicle in front based on its ● If the ESC is controlling. speed. ● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec- Fig. 233 Related video When driving behind another vehicle, the trically connected trailer are damaged. ACC function reduces speed until it is the ● If the radar sensor is dirty or covered. same as that of the vehicle ahead and main- ● If there are metal objects, e.g. rails on the tains the set distance between the vehicles. If road or sheets used in road works. the vehicle ahead accelerates, the adaptive cruise control also accelerates, going no ● If the vehicle is reversing. higher than the target speed programmed. » ● If the vehicle over-accelerates.

259 Driving

If the vehicle is equipped with automatic slippery circumstances such as snow, ice, CAUTION gearbox, the ACC can brake the vehicle until rain or loose gravel, or on flooded roads. it stops completely if a vehicle in front of it If you have the sensation that the radar ● Never use the ACC when driving off-road sensor is damaged, disconnect the ACC. stops. or on unpaved roads. The ACC has been This will avoid possible damage. If this oc- The distance programmed should be in- designed for use on paved roads only. curs have it adjusted. creased when the road surface is wet. ● The ACC does not react on approaching ● Repairs to the radar sensor require spe- a fixed obstacle, such as the tail of a traffic cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT Driver intervention prompt jam, a damaged vehicle or a vehicle stop- recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for ped at the traffic lights. During driving, the ACC is subject to certain this purpose. limitations inherent in the system. In other ● The ACC only reacts to people if a pe- words, in certain circumstances the driver will destrian monitoring system is available. In Note have to adjust speed him or herself, as well as addition, the system does not react to ani- ● If the ACC system does not work as de- the distance from other vehicles. mals or vehicles crossing your path or approaching head-on down the same lane. scribed in this chapter, do not use it until it has been checked by a specialised work- In this case, the instrument panel screen will ● If the ACC does not reduce speed suffi- shop. SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT warn you to intervene by applying the brake ciently, brake the vehicle immediately by dealership for this purpose. and a warning tone will be heard applying the pedal. ››› page 260. ● Maximum speed with the ACC activated ● If you are driving using the spare wheel, is limited to 210 km/h (130 mph). the ACC function could automatically WARNING switch off during your journey. Switch off ● When the ACC is switched on, strange The intelligent technology in the ACC can- the system when starting off. noises may be heard during automatic braking cause by the braking system. not overcome the system's inherent limita- ● If the vehicle continues to move involun- tions or change the laws of physics. If used tarily after a driver intervention prompt, negligently or involuntarily, it may cause brake the vehicle by applying the pedal. serious accidents and injuries. The system ● If the dash panel displays a driver inter- Symbols on the instrument panel is not a replacement for driver awareness. vention prompt, adjust the distance your- display and control lamps ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to self. the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit ● The driver should be ready to accelerate visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- The speed reduction by the ACC or brake by him/herself at all times. tions.  to maintain the distance from the vehicle in front is not sufficient. ● Do not use the ACC when visibility is bad, on steep roads, with several bends or in Brake! apply the foot brake! Driver intervention prompt.

260 Driver assistance systems

2 Distance from the vehicle ahead. ACC is  The ACC is not currently availa- WARNING ble.a) not active and is not regulating your dis- Observe the safety warnings ››› in Warn- tance. With the vehicle stationary, switch off the engine and ing symbols on page 118. 3 Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is active start it up again. Check the radar sensor visually ››› Fig. 236 (for dirt, ice or knocks). If it is still unavail- and is regulating your speed. able, refer to a specialised workshop to have the sys- 4 Distance level 2 set by the driver. tem inspected. Indications on the display 5 ACC is active and is regulating your dis- a) The symbol on the instrument panels with colour tance based on speed. display is in colour. Note The ACC is active.  When the ACC is connected, the indica- No vehicle is detected in front. The programmed tions on the instrument panel screen may speed remains constant. be concealed by warnings from other functions, such as an incoming call.  If the symbol is white: the ACC is active. Radar sensor A vehicle in front has been detected. The ACC adjusts speed and distance from the vehicle in front.

 If the symbol is grey: ACC is inactive (Standby)

The system is switched on, but is not adjusting.

 The lamp lights up green.

The ACC is active. Fig. 235 On the instrument panel display: (A) Some control and warning lamps will light up ACC inactive (Standby). (B) ACC active. Fig. 236 On the front bumper: radar sensor. » briefly when the ignition is switched on to check certain functions. They will switch off Instructions on the display ››› Fig. 235: after a few seconds. 1 Vehicle ahead detected. ACC is not active and is not regulating your speed. 261 Driving

A radar sensor is installed on the front bump- CAUTION Operating the Adaptive Cruise er to determine the traffic situation If you have the sensation that the radar Control ACC ››› Fig. 236 1 . sensor is damaged or has lost its settings, The radar sensor's visibility may be impaired disconnect the ACC. This will avoid possi- by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in- ble damage. If this occurs have it adjusted. fluences such as rain or mist. In this case the ● The sensor may become damaged or adaptive cruise control (ACC) does not work. lose its settings when knocked, for exam- The instrument panel displays the following ple, during a parking manoeuvre. This may message: ACC: No sensor vision! If nec- compromise the system's efficacy or dis- essary clean the radar sensor ››› . connect it. When the radar sensor begins to operate ● Repairs to the radar sensor require spe- properly again, the ACC will automatically cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT be available again. The message on the in- recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for strument panel screen will switch off and the this purpose. Fig. 237 On the left of the steering column: third lever for operating the Adaptive Cruise ACC will be reactivated again. ● Clean away the snow with a brush and the ice preferably with a solvent-free de- Control. ACC operation may be affected by a strong icer spray. radar reverse reflection. This may occur, for example, in a closed car park or due to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails on the road or sheets used in road works). The area in front of and around the radar sensor should not be covered with adhesives, additional or similar headlights, as this may negatively affect ACC operation. If the front of the vehicle is not properly repaired or structural modifications are made Fig. 238 On the left of the steering column: to it, for example, if the suspension is lowered, third lever for operating the Adaptive Cruise ACC operation may be affected. In this sce- Control. nario, SEAT recommends visiting a SEAT dealership. When the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is connected, the green control lamp  will

262 Driver assistance systems light up on the instrument panel, and the pro- The set speed can be changed when the ve- ACC on the instrument panel display will grammed speed and ACC status will be dis- hicle is stopped or during driving, as you like. switch to Active mode ››› Fig. 235. played ››› Fig. 235. Any modification to the programmed speed will be shown on the bottom left part of the When the ACC function is active, the vehicle What ACC settings are possible? instrument panel display ››› Fig. 235. travels at a set speed and distance from the vehicle ahead. Both speed and distance can ● Setting your speed ››› page 263. Setting your distance level be changed at any time. ● Setting your distance ››› page 263. To increase/reduce the distance level, press ● Connecting and activating the ACC Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC the rocker switch towards the left/right ››› page 263. ››› Fig. 238 A . To disconnect the ACC move the lever to the ● Disconnecting and deactivating the ACC 0 position ››› Fig. 237 (engaged). An ACC The instrument panel display shows the mod- ››› page 263. deactivated message appears and the ification of the distance level. There are 5 dis- function is totally deactivated. ● Adjusting the default distance level at the tance levels to choose from. SEAT recom- start of your journey ››› page 263. mends level 3. The set distance can be If you do not wish to disconnect the ACC, just ● Adjusting the driving profile ››› page 264. changed when the vehicle is stopped or dur- to switch it temporarily to inactive mode (Standby), move the third lever to position 3 ● Conditions in which the ACC does not re- ing driving, as you like ››› . ››› Fig. 237 or press the brake pedal. act ››› page 264. Connecting and activating the ACC It will also switch to inactive mode (Standby) Setting speed To connect and activate the ACC, the posi- if the vehicle is stopped and the driver door is opened. To set your speed, move the third lever location of the gearbox selector lever, the vehicle ted in position 1 upwards or downwards until speed and the position of the third level of the Adjusting the default distance level at the the desired speed is shown on the instrument ACC must all be taken into account. start of your journey panel display. The speed adjustment is made ● With a manual transmission, the gearbox at 10 km/h (6 mph) intervals. In wet road conditions, you should always set selector lever must be in any gear except a larger distance with regard to the vehicle in Once you are driving, if you wish to set the first, and the speed must be higher than ap- front than when driving in dry conditions. current speed as the vehicle’s cruise speed proximately 30 km/h. With an automatic and activate the ACC, press the  transmission, the gearbox selector lever must The following distances can be preselected: ››› Fig. 238 button. If you wish to increase or be in position D or S. ● Very short reduce speed by intervals of 1 km/h (0.6 ● To activate the ACC, with the third lever in ● Short mph), move the lever to position 2 position 1 press the  button or move the ››› Fig. 237 or press the  button, respective- third lever of the ACC to position 2 ● Media » ly. ››› Fig. 237. At this point, the image of the 263 Driving

● Long ● If there is no gear engaged. Select the D/S or M position on the selector ● Very long ● If the ESC is controlling. lever. ● If the driver is not wearing his/her seat belt.  ACC: parking brake applied In the Easy Connect system you can adjust the distance level that will be applied when ● If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec- The ACC is deactivated if the parking brake is the ACC is connected using the  /  but- trically connected trailer are damaged. applied. The ACC is available once again af- ton and the SETTINGS > Driver assis- ● If the vehicle is reversing. ter the parking brake is released. tance ›››  page 34. ● Driving faster than 210 km/h (130 mph).  ACC: currently not available. Intervention of stability control Changing the driving profile Driver messages The message for the driver is displayed when In vehicles with SEAT Drive Profile, the driving  ACC not available the electronic stability control (ESC) inter- profile selected can have an influence on the venes. In this case, the ACC is automatically ACC’s acceleration and braking behaviour The system can no longer continue to guar- switched off. ››› page 274. antee safe vehicle detection and will be deactivated. The sensor has lost its setting or is  ACC: Take action! In vehicles without SEAT Drive Profile, the be- damaged. Take the vehicle to a specialised haviour of the ACC can also be affected by The message for the driver is displayed if, workshop and have the fault repaired. selecting any of the following drive profiles in when the vehicle starts up on a hill with a mild the Easy Connect system:  ACC and Front Assist: currently slope, the vehicle rolls back even although not available. No sensor vision the ACC is activated. Apply the brake to stop ● Normal the vehicle from moving/colliding with anoth- This message will be displayed to the driver if ● Sport er vehicle. the radar sensor's vision is impaired due, for ● Eco example, to leaves, snow, heavy fog or dirt.  ACC: speed limit Clean the sensor ››› Fig. 236. ● Convenience The message for the driver is displayed if, in  ACC: currently not available. vehicles with manual gearbox, the current In this case, you should access the ACC set- Gradient too steep speed is too low for the ACC mode. tings using the  /  button and the SET- TINGS > Driver assistance > ACC The maximum road slope has been excee- The speed to be stored must be at least ›››  page 34. ded, hence safe ACC operation cannot be 30 km/h (18 mph). The speed limiter switches guaranteed. The ACC cannot be switched off if the speed falls below 20 km/h (12 mph). The following conditions may lead the on.  ACC: available as of the 2nd ACC not to react:  ACC: only available in D, S or gear ● If the accelerator is pressed. M

264 Driver assistance systems

The ACC is operational as of the 2nd gear vention by the speed control or adaptive Function for preventing overtaking (manual gearbox). cruise control. in an inside lane  ACC: engine speed ● Always be ready to use the brakes! The message for the driver is displayed if, ● Observe country-specific provisions gov- when the ACC accelerates or brakes, the erning obligatory minimum distances be- driver does not shift up or down a gear in tween vehicles. time, which means exceeding or not reaching ● It is dangerous to activate control and re- the permissible engine speed. The ACC sume the programmed speed if the road, switches itself off. A buzzer warning is heard. traffic or weather conditions do not permit this. Risk of accident!  ACC: clutch applied Vehicles with manual transmission: pressing Note the clutch pedal for longer abandons control ● The programmed speed is erased once mode. Fig. 239 On the instrument panel display: the ignition or the ACC are switched off. ACC active, vehicle detected in an outer lane. Door open ● When the traction control system (ASR) is The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has a Vehicles with automatic transmission: the deactivated during acceleration or else the function that helps avoid overtaking while ACC cannot be activated with the vehicle ESC is activated in Sport* Mode (  page 34), the ACC switches off au- driving in inside lanes at certain speeds. stationary and the door open. ››› tomatically. If another vehicle is detected travelling at a WARNING ● In vehicles with the Start-Stop system, slower speed in an outer lane, it is displayed the engine switches off automatically dur- on the multifunction display ››› Fig. 239. There is a danger of rear collision when the ing the ACC stopping phase and restarts minimum distance to the vehicle in front is automatically to begin driving. To avoid overtaking while driving in an inside exceeded and the speed difference be- lane the system will gently brake, and in ac- tween both vehicles is so great that a cordance with the speed will prevent the car speed reduction by the ACC will not suf- from overtaking. The driver can override this fice. In this case the brake pedal should be function at any time by pressing the acceler- applied immediately. ator pedal. At low speeds the function is inac- ● The ACC may not be able to detect all tive, for greater comfort in a traffic jam or in situations properly. city traffic. ● “Stepping” on the accelerator may cause the ACC not to intervene in braking. Driver braking will have priority over inter- 265 Driving

Deactivating the Adaptive Cruise Note Control ACC temporarily in certain If you do not switch off the ACC in the situations aforementioned situations, you may com- mit a legal offence. In the following situations the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) should be deactivated due to the system's limitations ››› : Special driving situations ● When changing lanes, on tight bends and roundabouts, in acceleration and deceleration lanes on motorways or in sections with road works to prevent involuntary acceleration to reach the programmed speed. ● When going through a tunnel, as operation could be affected. Fig. 241 (C) Vehicle changing lanes. (D) One ● On roads with several lanes, when other ve- vehicle turning and another stationary. hicles are driving more slowly in the overtaking lane. In this case, slower vehicles will be The adaptive cruise control (ACC) has cer- overtaken on the right. tain physical limitations inherent in the sys- ● In case of heavy rain, snow or spray, as the tem. For example, certain reactions of the vehicle in front might not be detected proper- ACC, in certain circumstances, may be unex- ly or, in certain circumstances, might not be pected or come late from the driver's point of detected at all. view. So pay attention in order to intervene if Fig. 240 (A) Vehicle on a bend. (B) Motorcy- necessary. WARNING clist ahead out of range of the radar sensor. For example, the following traffic situations If the ACC does not switch off in the situa- call for the utmost attention: tions described, serious accidents and injuries may occur. Starting driving after a stopping phase ● Always switch off the ACC in critical sit- (only vehicles with automatic gearbox) uations. After a stopping phase, the ACC may begin driving automatically when the vehicle in front drives off ››› . 266 Driver assistance systems

When the ACC halts the vehicle (e.g. traffic Driving through a bend when overtaking them. In these cases, you jam), the instrument panel display shows the On entering or exiting bends, the radar sensor should brake as necessary. ACC ready to start message. If the vehi- may stop detecting the vehicle in front or re- cle ahead drives off again, the ACC will also acting to a vehicle in the adjacent lane Other vehicles changing lanes do so automatically. ››› Fig. 240 A In these situations the vehicle Vehicles changing lanes a short distance If the vehicle ahead does not drive off again, may brake unnecessarily or fail to react to away from your own can only be detected the vehicle can be kept indefinitely in the ACC the vehicle in front. In this case, the driver has when they are within range of the sensors. ready to start status by operating the to intervene by accelerating or interrupting Consequently, the ACC will take longer to re- third lever repeatedly towards position 2 the braking process by applying the brake or act ››› Fig. 241 C. In these cases, you should ››› Fig. 237 or by pressing the brake pedal. If pushing the third lever backwards brake as necessary. the Press the brake message is shown on ››› page 262. the instrument panel, press the brake. If you Stationary vehicles Driving in tunnels do not, an acoustic warning will be heard and The ACC does not detect stationary objects the ACC will switch to inactive mode (Stand- When driving through tunnels the radar sen- while driving, such as traffic tails or damaged by). At this point, the vehicle may begin to sor may be limited. Switch off the ACC in tun- vehicles. move towards the stopped vehicle ahead nels. ››› . If a vehicle detected by the ACC turns or moves over and there is a stationary vehicle Narrow or misaligned vehicles Overtaking in front of it, the ACC will not react to it The radar sensor can only detect narrow or ››› Fig. 241 D. In these cases, you should When the turn signal lights up before the ve- misaligned vehicles when they are within brake as necessary. hicle begins an overtaking manoeuvre, the range ››› Fig. 240 B. This applies particularly ACC accelerates the vehicle automatically to narrow vehicles such as motorbikes. In Vehicles driving in the opposite direction and thus reduces the distance from the vehi- these cases, you should brake as necessary. and vehicles crossing your path cle in front. The ACC does not react to vehicles ap- Vehicles with special loads and accesso- When the vehicle enters the overtaking lane, proaching from the opposite direction or ve- ries if the ACC does not detect another vehicle in hicles crossing your path. front, it accelerates until it reaches the pro- Special loads and accessories of other vehi- grammed speed and maintains it. cles that jut out over the sides, backwards or Metal objects over the top may be out of the ACC's range. System acceleration can be interrupted at Metal objects, e.g. rails on the road or sheets any time by pressing the brake or moving the Switch off the ACC when driving behind vehi- used in road works, can confuse the radar third lever backwards ››› page 262. cles with special loads and accessories or sensor and cause the ACC to react wrongly. »

267 Driving

Factors that may affect how the radar instrument panel display. If the message ACC sensor operates not available remains on for quite a long If laser sensor operation is impaired, due to time it means that there is a fault. Contact a heavy rain, spray, snow or mud, the ACC is specialised workshop. SEAT recommends vis- deactivated temporarily. The relevant text iting a SEAT dealership. message will appear in the dash panel display. If necessary, clean the radar sensor WARNING ››› Fig. 236. If you do not heed the Press the brake message, the vehicle may initiate an invol- When the radar sensor begins to operate untary movement and could crash into the properly again, the ACC will automatically vehicle ahead. In any event, before driving be available again. The message on the in- off, check that the road is clear. The radar strument panel screen will switch off and the sensor may not detect obstacles on the ACC will be reactivated again. road. This could cause an accident and se- ACC operation may be affected by a strong rious injuries. If necessary, apply the brake. radar reverse reflection, for example in a closed car park.

Trailer mode When driving with trailer the ACC controls less dynamically.

Overheated brakes If the brakes overheat, for example after abrupt braking or in long and steep slopes, the ACC may be deactivated temporarily. The relevant text message will appear in the dash panel display. In this case, adaptive cruise control cannot be activated. Adaptive Cruise Control can be reactivated once brake temperature has cooled sufficiently. The message will disappear from the

268 Driver assistance systems

Blind spot detector (BSD) ● Keep your hands on the wheel at all times ● In order to ensure that the radar sensors to be ready to intervene in the steering at work properly, keep the rear bumper free of with parking assistance any time. snow and ice and do not cover it. (RCTA)* ● Pay attention to the control lamps that ● The rear bumper should only be painted may come on in the external rear view mir- with paint authorised by SEAT. The blind Introduction rors and on the instrument panel, and fol- spot detector's functions may be limited or low any instructions they may give. work incorrectly if other paints are used. The blind spot detector (BSD) helps to detect ● The blind spot assistant could react to the traffic situation behind the vehicle. any special constructions that might be Note present on the sides of the vehicle: e.g. high The integrated parking assistant (RCTA) helps or irregular dividers. This may cause erro- If the blind spot detector with parking as- the driver when backing out of a parallel neous warnings. sistant does not work as described in this parking spot and in manoeuvring. chapter, do not use it and contact a speci- ● Never use the blind spot detector with alised workshop. The blind spot detector has been developed rear cross traffic alert on unpaved roads. for driving on paved roads. The blind spot detector with rear cross traffic alert has been designed for use on WARNING paved roads. Control lamps ● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur- The smart technology incorporated into roundings. Control lamp in external rear view mirrors: the blind spot detector (BSD) with parking assistance (RCTA) included cannot over- ● Never use the blind spot detector or the  It lights up come the limits imposed by the laws of parking assistant if the radar sensors are physics; it only works within the limits of the dirty. It lights up once briefly: the blind spot detector is activated and ready to operate. system. Accidents and severe injury may ● The external rear view mirror control occur if the blind spot detection system or lamps may have limited functionality due It lights up: blind spot detector has detected a vehi- the rear cross traffic alert are used negli- to solar radiation. cle in the blind spot. gently or involuntarily. The system is not a replacement for driver awareness. CAUTION  Flashes ● Adapt your speed and safe distance to the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit ● The radar sensors on the rear bumper The blind spot detector has detected a vehicle in the visibility, weather, road and traffic condi- may be damaged or shifted in the event of blind spot and the turn signal has been turned on in tions. a collision, for example, when entering or the direction of the detected vehicle ››› . exiting a parking space. This may result in the system disconnecting itself, or at least Some warning and control lamps will light up possibly having its functionality diminished. briefly when the ignition is switched on to » 269 Driving

check certain functions. They will switch off Blind spot detector (BSD) after a few seconds. If there are no indications from the control lamp in the external rear view mirror, this means that the blind spot detector has not detected any other vehicles in the area ››› . If the dipped beam is on, then the control lamps in the external rear view mirrors will be dimmed (night mode). Fig. 243 Rear view of the vehicle: radar sensor WARNING areas. If the warning lamps and the corresponding messages are ignored when they light up, The blind spot detector uses radar sensors to the vehicle may stall in traffic and cause monitor the areas behind the vehicle accidents and severe injuries. ››› Fig. 243. The system does this by measur- ● Never ignore the warning lamps or mes- ing the vehicle's distance from other vehicles sages. and its speed differential. The blind spot detector will not work at speeds of less than ap- ● Carry out the necessary operations. prox. 15 km/h (9 mph). The system uses optical signals in the external rear view mirrors to CAUTION notify the driver. Failure to heed the control lamps and cor- Fig. 242 On external rear-view mirrors: blind responding text messages when they light spot detector display. Indication in the external rear view mirrors up may result in damage to the vehicle. The control lamp (expanded view) provides an indication in the corresponding external mirror ››› Fig. 242 regarding the traffic situation behind the vehicle, if it is deemed to be critical. The control lamp of the left-hand external mirror indicates the traffic situation to the left of the vehicle, and the control lamp of the right-hand external mirror indicates the traffic situation to the right of the vehicle.

270 Driver assistance systems

In the case of retrofitted tinted windows or the outside ››› Fig. 243. The sensors monitor there are any), and can also detect station- windows with tinted film, the indications of the both the blind spot and traffic behind the ve- ary objects such as dividers, and thus give an external mirrors may not be seen clearly or hicle ››› Fig. 244, ››› Fig. 245. The range to incorrect indication. correctly. the sides of the vehicle is a bit larger than the width of a lane. Keep the external mirrors clean and free of snow and ice, and do not cover them with ad- The lane width is not detected individually, hesives or other similar materials. but is rather pre-configured in the system. Thus if you are driving in wide lanes or in be- Radar sensors tween two lanes, the indications may be incorrect. Furthermore, the system can detect The radar sensors are located on the left and vehicles driving in the lane next to you (if right of the bumper and are not visible from

271 Driving

Driving situations

Fig. 244 Schematic diagram:  Passing situation with traffic behind the vehicle.  Indication from the blind spot detector in the left-hand external mirror.

Fig. 245 Schematic diagram:  Situation of passing and then moving into the right-hand lane.  Indication from the blind spot detector in the right-hand external mirror.

In the following situations, an indication will erably higher speed, no indication will be dis- Physical limitations inherent to the system be displayed in the external mirror ››› Fig. 244 played. In some situations the blind spot detector  (arrow) or ››› Fig. 245  (arrow): The faster the vehicle approaches, the soon- may not interpret the traffic situation correct- ● When being overtaken by another vehicle er an indication will be displayed in the exter- ly. E.g. in the following situations:  ››› Fig. 244 . nal mirror, because the blind spot detector ● on tight bends; ● takes into account the speed differential with When passing another vehicle ››› Fig. 245 ● in the case of lanes with different widths;  with a speed differential of approx. 10 km/h other vehicles. Thus even though the distance ● (6 mph). If the vehicle is passing at a consid- from the other vehicle is identical, the indica- at the top of slopes; tion will appear sooner in some cases and ● in adverse weather conditions; later in others. 272 Driver assistance systems

● in the case of special constructions to the If the system detects that someone else on You can interrupt the automatic braking by side of the vehicle, e.g., high or irregular divid- the road is approaching the rear of the vehi- stepping hard on the accelerator pedal or ers. cle ››› Fig. 246, an acoustic alarm is heard. the brake pedal in order to regain control of the vehicle. In addition to the acoustic alarm, if the vehicle is equipped with the park assist system, WARNING Parking assistant (RCTA) the driver is also informed by means of a visual signal on the radio screen. This signal is The smart technology incorporated into displayed in the form of a red strip at the the rear cross traffic alert cannot over- back of the image of the vehicle on the radio come the limits imposed by the laws of screen. This strip displays the side of the vehi- physics; it only works within the limits of the cle towards which traffic is approaching.1) system. The parking assistant function should not tempt you into taking any risks. The system is not a replacement for driver Automatic braking to reduce damages awareness. If the rear cross traffic alert detects that ● The system should never be used in limi- someone else on the road is approaching the ted visibility conditions or complicated rear of the vehicle and the driver does not traffic, e.g., in high-traffic areas or when step on the brake, the system will engage the crossing multiple lanes. brakes automatically. ● Be sure to always be aware of the vehi- Fig. 246 Diagram of the parking assistant: de- The parking system helps the driver by auto- cle's surroundings, since the system often tected area around the vehicle that is driving matically engaging the brakes to reduce any fails to detect things such as bicycles or off. damage. The automatic intervention on the pedestrians. brakes takes place when driving in reverse at ● The rear cross traffic alert itself will not The parking assistant uses the radar sensors approx. 1-12 km/h (1-7 mph. After detecting brake the vehicle to a complete stop. on the rear bumper ››› Fig. 243 to monitor the that the vehicle is stationary, the system traffic crossing behind the vehicle as it backs keeps it that way for around 2 seconds. out of a parallel parking space or as it is being manoeuvred, for example in very low visi- After automatically braking to reduce dam- bility conditions. age, the system will not be able to automatically brake again for approximately 10 seconds.

1) It is only displayed if the vehicle is equipped with a parking system. 273 Driving

Using the blind spot detector (BSD) Automatic deactivation of the blind spot SEAT Drive Profile* with parking assistant (RCTA) detector (BSD) The radar sensors of the blind spot detector Introduction Activating and deactivating the blind spot with rear cross traffic alert will be automati- detector (BSD) with parking assistant cally deactivated when, among other rea- SEAT Drive Profile enables the driver to (RCTA) sons, one of the sensors is detected to be choose between four profiles or modes, Nor- The blind spot detector with parking assistant permanently covered. This may be the case mal, Sport, Eco and Individual, that modi- can be switched on and off by accessing the if, for example, there is a layer of snow or ice fy the behaviour of various vehicle functions, Assistance systems menu on the dash in front of one of the sensors. providing different driving experiences. panel display using the steering wheel con- The relevant text message will appear in the The Individual profile can be configured trols. If the vehicle is equipped with a multi- dash panel display. according to personal preferences. The other function camera, it can also be accessed by profiles are fixed. means of the driver assistance systems key Trailer mode located on the main beam headlight lever. The Blind spot detector and the rear cross Open the Assistants menu. traffic alert will be automatically deactivated Description and it will be impossible to activate them if ●  Blind spot the tow hitch is electrically connected to a Depending on the equipment fitted in the ve- ●  Exit Assist trailer or other similar object. hicle, SEAT Drive Profile can operate on the following functions: If the verification box on the control panel is As soon as the driver starts to drive with a checked , the functionality will be automat- trailer connected electrically to the vehicle, a Engine ically activated at ignition. message will appear on the instrument panel display indicating that the blind spot detector Depending on the profile selected, the engine When the blind spot detector is ready to op- and the rear cross traffic alert are deactiva- responds more spontaneously or more in har- erate, the indications in the external mirrors ted. Once the trailer has been unhitched from mony with the movements of the accelerator. will turn on briefly as confirmation. the vehicle, if you want to use the blind spot Additionally, when Eco mode is selected, the When the vehicle is restarted, the last adjust- detector and the rear cross traffic alert, you Start-stop function is automatically activa- ment in the system will remain active. will have to reactivate them in the corre- ted. sponding menu. If the blind spot detector was automatically In vehicles with automatic transmission, the deactivated, it will only be possible to restart If the towing hitch is not factory equipped, gear change points are modified to position the system after turning the vehicle off and then the blind spot detector and the rear them in lower or higher engine speed ranges. restarting it. cross traffic alert will have to be deactivated manually when driving with a trailer. 274 Driver assistance systems

Additionally, the Eco mode activates the Iner- Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Driving Characteristics tia function, enabling consumption to be fur- The acceleration and braking gradient of the profile ther reduced. adaptive cruise control varies according to Offers a balanced driving experi- the active driving profile page 259. Normal In manual gearbox vehicles, Eco mode cau- ››› ence, suitable for everyday use. ses the gear shift recommendations that appear on the instrument panel to vary, facilitat- Provides a complete dynamic per- ing more efficient driving. Sport formance in the vehicle, enabling Setting driving mode the user a more sporty driving style.

“Dual Ride” suspension Places the vehicle in a particularly low state of consumption, facilitat- The “Dual Ride” suspension features a com- Eco ing a fuel-saving driving style that is fortable suspension in the Eco and Normal respectful to the environment. profiles, suitable for daily use. Contrasting with this it features a sporty suspension in the Enables some configurations to be modified by pressing the Profile Sport profile, suitable for a sporty driving Individual settings button. The functions style. In the Individual profile the suspen- that can be adjusted depend on sion can be switched between Normal or the equipment fitted in the vehicle. Sport, depending on personal preference. In the event of a fault in the “Dual Ride” sus- WARNING Fig. 247 Next to the gearbox lever: MODE but- pension, the following message is displayed ton. When operating SEAT Drive Profile, pay at- on the instrument panel screen Fault: tention to all traffic: doing otherwise could shock absorber regulation. You can select from Normal, Sport, Eco and cause an accident. Individual. Address You can select the required mode either by Note Power steering becomes more robust in repeatedly pressing the button MODE ● When the vehicle is switched off it will Sport mode to enable a sportier driving style. ››› Fig. 247, or on the touch screen, in the store the driving profile that was selected menu that opens when the above button is when the ignition key was removed. Never- Air conditioning pressed. theless, when the engine is restarted, the In vehicles with Climatronic, this can operate engine and the gear will start by default in An icon on the Easy Connect system display in eco mode, especially restricting fuel con- the Normal setting. For engine and gear to informs about the active mode. sumption. revert to the desired position, select the The MODE button light remains lit up yellow corresponding drive profile again or press » when the active mode is different to Normal. 275 Driving

the Easy Connect system button repeated- Park Assist* compromise safety. The system is not a re- ly. placement for driver awareness. ● Your speed and driving style must always Introduction ● Any accidental movement of the vehicle be adjusted to visibility, weather, and traf- could result in serious injury. fic conditions. The Park Assist system is an additional func- ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all ● The Eco profile is not recommended when tion of ParkPilot ››› page 284 and helps the times to suit visibility, weather, road and towing a vehicle. driver to: traffic conditions. ● Certain surfaces of objects and gar- ● find a suitable parking space, ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen- Kick-down ● select a parking mode, sors' signals. The system cannot detect, at ● park driving in reverse in suitable perpen- least correctly, these objects or people The kick-down feature allows maximum ac- dicular and parallel spaces, wearing such clothes. celeration to be reached. ● park driving forwards in suitable perpendic- ● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affected by external sound sources. In certain ular spaces, If the eco* ››› page 275 mode has been se- circumstances this may prevent them from lected in SEAT Drive Profile*, and the accel- ● exit a parking space driving forwards from a detecting people or objects. erator is pressed beyond a hard point, the en- parallel space. ● The ultrasound sensors have blind spots gine power is automatically controlled to give in which obstacles and people are not reg- your vehicle maximum acceleration. In vehicles with a Park Assist system and factory radio the front, rear and side areas are istered. WARNING represented, and the position of obstacles is ● Monitor the area around the vehicle at all shown relative to the vehicle. times, since the ultrasound sensors do not Please note that if the road surface is slip- detect small children, animals or certain pery or wet, the kick-down feature could The Park Assist system is subject to certain objects in all situations. cause the driving wheels to spin, which limitations inherent to the system and its use could result in skidding. requires special attention by the driver ››› . WARNING WARNING Quick turns of the steering wheel when parking or exiting a parking space with The technology used in the park assist sys- Park Assist can cause serious injury. tem involves a series of limitations inherent in the actual system and in the use of ultra- ● Do not hold the steering wheel during sonic sensors. The use of Park Assist should manoeuvres to park or exit a parking space never tempt you to take any risk that may

276 Driver assistance systems until the system requests it. Doing so disa- – loss of sensor visibility. Description of the Park Assist sys- bles the system during the manoeuvre, re- – cancellation of the parking manoeuvre tem sulting in the parking being cancelled. or defective parking. ● If one of the ultrasonic sensors is dam- CAUTION aged, the area corresponding to that group ● In certain circumstances, the ultrasonic of sensors (front or rear) is deactivated and sensors do not detect objects such as trail- cannot be activated until the fault is cor- er tongues, bars, fences, posts or thin trees, rected. However, you can still use the sen- or an open (or opening) rear lid, which sors of the other bumper as per usual. If could damage the vehicle. there is a fault in the system, consult a specialist workshop. SEAT recommends visiting ● Retrofitting of certain accessories to the a SEAT dealership for this. vehicle, such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with the operation of the Park Assist system and cause damage. Note Fig. 248 In the centre console: button to switch on the Park Assist system. ● The Park Assist system uses as a refer- ● In order to guarantee good system oper- ence parked vehicles, curbs and other ob- ation, keep the ultrasound sensors of the The components of the Park Assist system jects. Make sure that the tyres and wheels bumper clean, free of snow or ice, and do are the ultrasonic sensors located in the front are not damaged while parking. If necessa- not cover them with adhesives or other ob-  ry, opportunely interrupt the parking ma- jects. and rear bumpers, the button ››› Fig. 248 to switch the system on and off and the mes- noeuvre to avoid damaging the vehicle. ● Certain sources of noise, such as rough sages on the instrument panel display. ● The ultrasound sensors on the bumper asphalt or paving stones and the noise of may be damaged or shifted in the event of other vehicles can induce the Park Assist a collision, for example, when entering or system or ParkPilot to give erroneous warn- Prematurely stopping or automatically in- exiting a parking space. ings. terrupting the manoeuvres for parking or exiting a parking space ● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- ● In order to become familiar with the sys- ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, do tem and its functions, SEAT recommends Park Assist interrupts the manoeuvres for not apply it directly unless very briefly and that you practice operating the Park Assist parking or exiting a parking space in any of always from a distance of more than 10 cm. system in an area where there is not too the following cases: ● A registration plate or plate holder on the much traffic or in a car park. ● Press the  button. front with larger than the space for the registration plate, or a registration plate that is ● The speed exceeds approximately 7 km/h curved or warped can cause: (4 mph). – false detections, ● The driver takes hold of the steering wheel. » 277 Driving

● The parking manoeuvre does not end within While entering or exiting a parking space, a Trailer mode 6 minutes from the activation of automatic brief signal sounds to prompt the driver to The Park Assist system cannot be switched steering. change between forward and reverse gears on if the factory-fitted towing bracket ● There is a fault in the system (the system is (depending on the case). In successive ma- ››› page 295 is electrically connected to a temporarily unavailable). noeuvres, the assistant tells the driver to trailer. change gears, at the latest, when the contin- ● ASR is switched off. uous audible signal is given (object present at After changing a wheel ● ASR or ESC intervene with regulation. a distance of ≤30 cm) by Park Pilot. If, after changing a wheel, the vehicle stops ● The driver door is opened. When the Park Assist system turns the steer- entering and exiting parking spaces correct- ing wheel with the vehicle stationary, the in- To restart the manoeuvre it is necessary that ly, the circumference of the new wheel may strument panel also displays the symbol . none of these things occur and that the  be different and the system may need to Keep the brake pedal depressed while the button is pressed again. adapt to it. The adaptation is automatic and symbol remains on the dash panel display to takes place during driving. Making turns slow- turn the wheels with the vehicle stopped. This Special characteristics ly and in both directions (20 km/h [12 mph]) way, the system will require fewer manoeu- for a few minutes may contribute to this The Park Assist system is subject to certain vres to complete the parking action. adaptation process ››› in Introduction on limitations inherent to the system. For exam- page 276. ple, it is therefore not possible to enter or exit a parking space on sharp bends.

278 Driver assistance systems

Selecting a parking mode

Fig. 249 Overview of reduced displays for parking modes:  Parallel parking in reverse.  Per- pendicular parking in reverse.  Perpendicular parking forwards.

mode is shown on the instrument panel dis- Action play ››› Fig. 250. The reduced display of other possible parking modes is also shown Turn on the corresponding turn signal towards ››› Fig. 249. If the mode selected by the sys- the side of the road where you are parking. The instrument panel displays the side corre- tem does not correspond to the desired 3. sponding to the road. By default, if the turn mode, you can select another mode by signal is not on, it parks on the right in the di- pressing the  button ››› Fig. 248. rection of traffic.

Action If necessary, press the  button again to change to the next parking mode. The necessary conditions to park with Park 1. 4. Once you have switched to all possible park- Fig. 250 On the instrument panel display: dis- Assist have to be met ››› page 281. play of the assisted parking system with de- ing modes, if the  button is pressed again, creased visibility. Press the  button. the system switches off.

A control lamp on the  button lights up when Press the  button again to switch the system Selecting a parking mode with Park Assist 5. the system is switched on. Additionally, the back on. with prior step in front of the space 2. selected parking mode is shown on the instru- Follow the instructions displayed on the in- ment panel display and the reduced display After activating the Park Assist system and af- strument panel while paying attention to traf- shows another parking mode it can be 6. ter detecting a parking space, the display on fic and drive the vehicle past the parking changed to. the instrument panel proposes a parking space. » mode. The Park Assist system selects the parking mode automatically. The selected 279 Driving

Special case of perpendicular parking Action Action space to park forwards without driving past first Drive forward towards the parking space while Press the  button once. 2. paying attention to traffic and stop the vehi- Action cle. A control lamp on the  button lights up when 3. the system is switched on. Additionally, the The necessary conditions to park with Park selected parking mode is shown on the instru- 1. Assist have to be met ››› page 281. ment panel display without reduced display. Release the steering wheel ››› in Introduc- 4. tion on page 276.

280 Driver assistance systems

Park with Park Assist

Fig. 251 On the instrument panel display: perpendicular parking.  Finding a parking space.  Parking position.  Manoeuvring.

Fig. 252 On the instrument panel display: parallel parking.  Finding a parking space.  Park- ing position.  Manoeuvring.

Key to Fig. 251 and Fig. 252: Progress bars Necessary conditions to park with Park As- 1 Message to move forwards The progress bar sist 2 Your vehicle ››› Fig. 251 7 and ››› Fig. 252 7 on the For parallel parking For perpendicular screen of the instrument panel displays the 3 Parked vehicle spaces parking spaces relative distance to be covered. The greater 4 Parking space detected the distance, the fuller the progress bar. The traction control system (ASR) must be turned on page 228. 5 Message to park When driving forward, the content of the pro- ››› » gress bar decreases upwards, and when re- 6 Message to press the brake pedal versing, it decreases downwards. 7 Progress bar

281 Driving

For parallel parking For perpendicular Do the following: Do the following: spaces parking spaces Release the steering wheel ››› in Introduc- Go forward until the ParkPilot continuous sig- 4. Do not exceed approxi- Do not exceed approxi- tion on page 276. nal is heard. mately 40 km/h mately 20 km/h OR: go forward until the instrument panel dis- (25 mph) when driving (12 mph) when driving Please note the following message: Auto- 9. play shows the message to reverse. past the parking space. past the parking space. matic steering enabled. Pay attention to your surroundings. The Park Assist system steers the vehicle for- Keep a distance between 0.5 and 2.0 metres when ward and back until it centres it in the space driving past the parking space. While you keep watch around you, carefully start accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h ››› Fig. 251  or ››› Fig. 252 . Length of the space: Width of the space: 5. (4 mph). For best results, wait at the end of each ma- length of the vehicle + width of the vehicle + noeuvre until the Park Assist system has finish- 0.8 metres 0.8 metres During the parking manoeuvre, the system only takes charge of the steering. You, as the ed turning the steering wheel. Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h (4 mph) when driver, have to accelerate, engage the 10. The parking manoeuvre ends when a corre- parking. clutch if necessary, change gears and brake. sponding message is displayed on the instrument panel and, in some cases, an acoustic Parking Reverse until the ParkPilot continuous signal is signal sounds. heard. Do the following: OR: reverse until the instrument panel displays Note The necessary conditions have to be met to the message to go forwards ››› Fig. 251  If the manoeuvre is terminated prematurely or Fig. 252 . 1. park with Park Assist ››› page 281 and the 6. ››› during parking, the result may not be the parking mode must be selected page 279. ››› OR: reverse until the instrument panel displays best. Look at the display on the instrument panel to the message Park Assist finished. see if the space has been detected as “appro- The progress bar 7 indicates the distance to priate” and if the correct position for parking cover ››› page 281. has been reached ››› Fig. 251  or ››› Fig. 252 2. . Press down the brake pedal until the Park As- sist system has finished turning the steering The space is considered “appropriate” if the wheel. display on the instrument panel shows the 7. message to park 5 . OR: until the  symbol on the instrument panel display switches off. Stop the vehicle and, after a brief pause, en- 3. gage the reverse gear. 8. Select first gear.

282 Driver assistance systems

Exiting a parking space with Park ● Do not exceed approximately 7 km/h For parallel parking spaces Assist (only for parallel spaces) (4 mph) when exiting the parking space. Release the steering wheel ››› in Introduc- Exiting a parking space tion on page 276. Do the following: Please note the following message: Auto- matic steering enabled. Pay at- For parallel parking spaces tention to your surroundings. While you keep watch around you, carefully The necessary conditions to exit a parking 6. start accelerating up to no more than 7 km/h 1. space with Park Assist have to be met (4 mph). ››› page 283. When exiting the parking space, the system 2. Switch on the engine page 217. ››› only takes charge of the steering. You, as the Press the  button ››› Fig. 248. driver, have to accelerate, engage the Fig. 253 On the instrument panel display: clutch if necessary, change gears and 3. driving off from perpendicular parking. A control lamp on the  button lights up when brake. the system is switched on. Reverse until the ParkPilot continuous signal is Key to the Fig. 253: Turn on the corresponding turn signal towards heard. 4. the road you will enter when exiting the park- 1 Parked vehicle OR: go backwards until the instrument panel ing space. 7. 2 Your vehicle in reverse gear display shows the message to go forward. Engage reverse gear or turn the selector lever 3 Progress bar to indicate the distance left 5. The progress bar ››› Fig. 253 3 indicates the to position R. to cover distance to cover ››› page 281.

4 Message giving the proposed manoeuvre Press down the brake pedal until the Park As- to exit the parking space sist system has finished turning the steering wheel. 8. Necessary conditions to exit a parking OR: press down the brake pedal until the  space with Park Assist symbol on the instrument panel display ● Only for parallel parking spaces switches off. » ● The traction control system (ASR) must be turned on ››› page 228. ● Length of the space: length of the vehicle + 0.5 metres

283 Driving

For parallel parking spaces tomatically. After automatically activating ● Always be ready to use the brakes your- the brakes, the manoeuvres to enter or exit a self! Go forward until the ParkPilot continuous sig- parking space may continue. nal is heard. ● The automatic braking intervention will The brakes are only automatically activated end after approximately 1.5 seconds. After- OR: go forward until the instrument panel dis- 9. once for each attempt to enter or exit a park- wards, brake the vehicle yourself. play shows the message to reverse. ing space. If the speed of approximately The Park Assist system steers the vehicle for- 7 km/h (4 mph) is exceeded again, the corre- ward and back until it can exit the space. sponding operation is halted. Parking aid parking and ma- The vehicle can exit the space when a corresponding message is displayed on the instru- Automatic braking to reduce damages noeuvring (ParkPilot) ment panel and, in some cases, an acoustic Depending on certain conditions, the Park 10. signal sounds. Assist system can automatically brake the Introduction Take charge of the steering with the turning vehicle when faced with an obstacle, briefly angle set by the Park Assist system. actioning and holding down the brake ped- Assorted assistance systems – which vary al ››› . Following this the driver must press depending on the equipment fitted in the car Paying attention to the traffic, exit the parking 11. the brake pedal. – will help you when parking or manoeuvring: space. Automatic braking intervention to reduce – Parking System Plus. It assists the driver damage leads to the parking manoeuvre fin- by visually and audibly warning them about Automatic braking intervention by ishing. obstacles detected in front and behind the vehicle ››› page 286. Park Assist WARNING – Rear parking aid. It is an audible and visual Park Assist helps the driver by automatically The automatic braking intervention by Park assistant that warns about obstacles loca- braking in certain situations. Assist should never tempt you to take any ted behind the vehicle ››› page 290. risk that may compromise safety. The sys- The driver is always responsible for braking in tem is not a replacement for driver aware- WARNING time ››› . ness. ● Always pay attention, also when looking ● The Park Assist system is subject to cer- straight ahead, to traffic and the vehicle Automatic braking intervention to avoid tain limitations inherent to the system. In surroundings. The assistance systems are exceeding the speed limit certain situations, the automatic braking not a replacement for driver awareness. intervention may only work in a limited way To avoid exceeding the allowed speed of ap- When inserting or removing the vehicle or not work at all. prox. 7 km/h (4 mph) when entering or leaving from a parking space, or when performing a parking space, the brakes may activate au-

284 Driver assistance systems similar manoeuvres the driver always as- ● Ultrasound sensor signals may be affec- – with rough or cobbled floors or ground sumes the responsibility. ted by external sound sources. In certain with long grass; ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all circumstances this may prevent them from – with external ultrasound sources, such times to suit visibility, weather, road and detecting people or objects. as cleaning vehicles or other vehicles traffic conditions. ● Please note that low obstacles detected equipped with ultrasound systems; ● The ultrasound sensors have blind spots by the system may no longer be registered – in downpours, intense snow, hail or in which obstacles and people are not reg- by the sensors as the car moves closer, so dense exhaust gases, the system will not give any further warn- istered. Pay special attention to children – if the number plate is not perfectly se- and animals. ing. In certain circumstances, objects such as high kerbs that could damage the bot- cured to the bumper surface, ● Always keep visual control of the sur- tom of the vehicle are not detected either. – or in locations such as the brow of a roundings: use the mirrors for additional hill. help. ● If the first warning from the Parking Aid is ignored, the vehicle could suffer considera- ● In order to guarantee good system oper- ble damage. ation, keep the ultrasound sensors clean, CAUTION ● The knocks or damage on the radiator free of snow or ice, and do not cover them Parking Aid functions may be negatively af- grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle un- with adhesives or other objects. fected by different factors that may lead to derbody can adjust the orientation of the ● If you use high-pressure or vapour equip- damage to the vehicle or its immediate sur- sensors. This can affect the parking aid ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, ap- rounds: function. In this case, have the function ply it directly only very briefly and always ● Under certain circumstances, the system checked by a specialised workshop. from a distance of more than 10 cm. does not detect or display certain objects: ● A registration plate or plate holder on the ● Retrofitting of accessories to the vehicle, – Objects such as chains, trailer draw front with larger than the space for the reg- such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with bars, fences, posts and thin trees. istration plate, or a registration plate that is the operation of the Parking Aid. curved or warped can cause: ● – Objects that are located above the Fitting certain accessories to the front of sensors, such as protrusions in a wall. – false detections, the vehicle, such as a plate holder with advertising, may interfere with the operation – loss of sensor visibility. – Objects with certain surfaces or struc- of the Park Assist. tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow- ● In order to familiarise yourself with the der snow. Note system, it is advised that you practice park- ● Certain surfaces of objects and gar- ● In certain situations, the system can give ing in an area or car park that is free from ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen- a warning even though there is no obstacle traffic. There must be good weather and sors' signals. The system cannot detect in the detected area, e.g: light conditions. » these objects or people wearing such clothes correctly.

285 Driving

● The volume and tone of the warnings can them about obstacles detected in front of In order to view the entire periphery of the ve- be modified, in addition to the indications and behind the vehicle. hicle, the vehicle must be moved a few metres forwards or backwards. Thus, the missing ››› page 291. There are ultrasound sensors integrated in areas are screened and obstacles at the ● In vehicles without an infotainment sys- the front and rear bumpers. When they de- sides of the vehicle are displayed tem, these parameters can be modified in a tect an obstacle, you are alerted by audible ››› Fig. 254 C . SEAT Official Service or in a specialised warnings and visually on the Easy Connect workshop. system. Special features of ParkPilot with Area ● Please observe information on towing a In case of risk of rear or front collision, an au- View trailer ››› page 292. dible warning will be emitted. You can tell In the following situations the screened area ● The display on the Easy Connect screen whether the risk is in front of or behind the ve- on the side of the vehicle is automatically hid- shows a slight time delay. hicle by choosing different sound frequencies den: on Easy Connect. Make particularly sure that the sensors are ● When a vehicle door is opened. Parking System Plus* not covered by adhesives, residues and the ● When the ASR is switched off. like, as this could affect the system's opera- ● When there is ASR or ESC regulation. tion. Cleaning instructions ››› page 337. Description ● If the vehicle remains stationary for more The approximate measurement range of the than approximately 3 minutes. sensors is:

A 1.20 m B 1.60 m C 0.90 m

As you approach the obstacle, the time interval between the audible warnings will be reduced. When you reach around 0.30 m the warning will be constant: do not continue to Fig. 254 Represented area. move forward (or backward)! If you maintain separation from the obstacle, During parking, Parking System Plus assists the volume of the warning begins to reduce the driver by visually and audibly warning after four seconds (does not affect the tone of the constant warning). 286 Driver assistance systems

Parking Aid operation 15 km/h (9 mph) ››› page 287. The obstacle is Automatic activation detected from a distance of approx. 95 cm if the automatic connection is activated in the infotainment system. A reduced display is shown. ● OR: if the vehicle moves backwards.

Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid ● Move the selector lever to position P. ● OR: accelerate to approx. 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster. Fig. 255 Centre console: parking aid button Fig. 256 Miniature indication of automatic ac- (depending on the version). Temporary suppression of sound in Park- tivation. ing Aid Manual connection of Parking Aid ● Press the  function button. When the Plus Parking Aid connects automatically, a miniature of the vehicle and the ● Press the  button once. Change from reduced view to full view segments will appear on the left of the display ››› Fig. 256. Manual disconnection of Parking Aid ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector ● Press the  button again. lever to position R. Automatic activation occurs when slowly approaching an obstacle located in front of the ● OR: press the car icon in reduced view. vehicle. It only operates every time the speed Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis- is reduced below approximately 15 km/h (9 play (the audible sounds remain active) If necessary, switch to the rear-assist im- mph) for the first time. ● Press a button on the main menu of the fac- age (Rear View Camera “RVC”) If the parking aid is switched off using the  tory-assembled infotainment system. ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector button, the following actions must be carried ● OR press the BACK function button. lever to position R. out in order for it to automatically switch on: ● OR press the RVC function button. Automatic connection of Parking Aid ● Switch off the ignition and switch it on A short confirmation signal will be heard and ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector again. the button symbol will light up yellow when lever to position R. ● OR: accelerate above 15 km/h (9 mph) be- the system is switched on. ● OR: If the vehicle approaches an obstacle fore reducing speed below this number again. » that is in its forwards path at a speed below 287 Driving

● OR: place the selector lever in position P Segments of the visual indication Red segments: obstacles that are less than and then move it from this position. 30 cm away from the vehicle are dis- ● OR: switch on and off the automatic activa- played in red. tion in the Easy Connect system menu. Moreover, with the Media System Plus, Navi The automatic activation with parking aid System or Navi System Plus systems, a yellow miniature indication can be switched on and trail indicates the vehicle's expected trajecto- off from the Easy Connect system menu ry based on the steering angle. ›››  page 34: Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehicle’s direction of travel, the corresponding ● Switch the ignition on. audible warning will sound. ● Select: Infotainment button  SETTINGS > Parking and manoeuvring function but- As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the Fig. 257 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con- ton. segments are displayed closer to the vehicle. nect system screen. When the penultimate segment is displayed, ● Select the Automatic activation option. this means that the vehicle has reached the The distance of separation from the obstacle When the function button check box is activa- collision zone. In the collision zone, the obsta-  can be estimated using the segments around ted , the function is on. cles are represented in red, including those the vehicle. If the system has been activated automati- out of the path. Do not continue to move for- cally, an audible sound warning will only be The optical indication of the segments works ward (or backward) ››› in Introduction on given when obstacles in front are at a dis- as follows: page 284, ››› in Introduction on page 285 ! tance of less than 50 cm. White segments: they are displayed when the obstacle 30 cm away from the vehi- CAUTION cle or further if it is not within the vehi- Adjusting the display and audible The automatic connection of the Parking cle's trajectory or the direction of travel Aid only works when you are driving slowly. is in the opposite direction to its location, warnings If driving style is not adapted to the circum- and also when the electronic parking stances, an accident and serious injury or brake is activated. The settings for the display and audible damage may be caused. warnings are controlled via the Easy Con- Yellow segments: obstacles located in the nect*. vehicle's trajectory and which are more than 30 cm away from the vehicle are Automatic activation displayed in yellow.  on – activates the Automatic activation option ››› page 287. 288 Driver assistance systems

 off – deactivates the Automatic acti- parking aid is engaged in reverse, no audible In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket vation option ››› page 287. signal of the existence of a fault will be is- device from the factory, when the trailer is sued. connected electrically, the Parking Aid rear Front volume* sensors will not be activated when reverse If there is a fault in the parking aid system a gear is engaged, when the selector lever is Volume in the front and rear area. message will appear on the instrument panel turned to position R or when the button  is indicating the error. pressed. Front sound settings/sharpness* If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol  is The distance to possible obstacles at the rear Frequency (tone) of the sound in the front displayed on the Easy Connect display in of the vehicle and at its sides will not be dis- area. front of/behind the vehicle. If a rear sensor is played on the screen and will not be indica- faulty, only the obstacles in area A are dis- ted by means of audible sound signals. Rear volume* played ››› Fig. 254. If a front sensor is faulty, Volume in the rear area. only the obstacles in area B are displayed. The Easy Connect system screen will only display objects detected at the front, and the Have the fault corrected by a specialised vehicle's trajectory will be hidden. Rear sound settings/sharpness* workshop without delay. Frequency (tone) of the sound in the rear area. Braking while manoeuvring func- Driving with a trailer Adjust volume tion* With the parking aid switched on, the active 3 Only valid with Parking System Plus audio/video source volume will be reduced to The emergency braking function is used to the intensity of the selected setting. minimise damage in the event of a collision. Depending on the equipment, if the Parking Error messages Aid is active, the braking while manoeuvring function activates emergency braking when it When the Parking Aid is activated or when it is detects an obstacle in the vehicle’s path that switched on, if a message reporting a Parking could cause a collision, driving forwards or in aid error is displayed on the instrument panel, reverse. Fig. 258 Parking assist display on the screen there is a fault in the system. The function will not brake if the Parking Aid is with trailer attached. If the fault does not disappear before discon- activated automatically. For the system to necting the ignition, the next time that the operate, manoeuvring speed must be between 2.5 and 10 km/h (between 1.5 and 6 » 289 Driving

mph) for the front area and between 1.5 and Rear parking aid* Change from reduced view to full view 10 km/h (between 1 and 6 mph) for the rear. ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector Following an intervention, the braking while Description lever to position R. manoeuvring function will be inactive in the ● OR: press the car icon in reduced view. same direction of travel for 5 metres. Once The rear parking aid is an audible and visual the gear is changed, or the selector lever’s assistant that warns of obstacles located be- As you approach the obstacle, the time inter- position is changed, the function will be ac- hind the vehicle. val between the audible warnings will be re- tive again. The Parking Aid’s limitations apply. duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the There are sensors integrated in the rear warning will be constant: Do not continue to The braking while manoeuvring function is bumper. When they detect an obstacle, you move forward (or backward) ››› in Intro- controlled in the Easy Connect system with are alerted by audible warnings and visually duction on page 284, ››› in Introduction the  button and the SETTINGS > Park on the Easy Connect system. on page 285 ! and manoeuvre function buttons. Make particularly sure that the sensors are If you maintain separation from the obstacle, ●  on – permits the use of the braking while not covered by adhesives, residues, dirt and the volume of the warning begins to reduce manoeuvring function. the like, as this could affect the system's op- after four seconds (does not affect the tone eration. Cleaning instructions ››› page 337. ●  off – does not permit the use of the of the constant warning). braking while manoeuvring function. The approximate measurement range of the rear sensors is: Temporary suppression of emergency Parking Aid operation braking Side area: 0.60 m Central area: 1.60 m ● When the function is deactivated with the Parking Aid connection Braking while manoeuvring button that appears ● Engage reverse (for manual gears) or set on the Parking System screen of the Easy Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid the selector lever to R (for automatic gears). Connect system. ● Move the selector lever to position P. ● Whenever any of the car doors, rear lid or ● OR: accelerate to approx. 15 km/h (9 mph) Parking Aid disconnection bonnet are opened. or faster. ● Place the selector level in position P, N or D (for automatic gearboxes) or disengage re- Temporary suppression of sound in Park- verse (for manual gearboxes). ing Aid Set the lever to the N or D position to maintain ● Press the  function button. the system active for approximately 8 seconds before switching off. During that time, Parking assist will switch off if: 290 Driver assistance systems

● The selector lever is moved to position P. Segments of the visual indication Red segments: obstacles that are less than ● OR: the vehicle accelerates to approx. 30 cm away from the vehicle are dis- 15 km/h (9 mph) or faster. played in red. Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi- Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis- cle’s direction of travel, the corresponding play (the audible sounds remain active) audible warning will sound. ● Press a button on the main menu of the fac- As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the tory-assembled infotainment system. segments are displayed closer to the vehicle. ● OR press the BACK function button. When the penultimate segment is displayed, this means that the vehicle has reached the Temporary suppression of sound in Park- collision zone. In the collision zone, the obsta- ing Aid Fig. 259 Parking Aid display on the Easy Con- cles are represented in red (including those ● Press the  function button. nect system screen. out of the path). Do not continue to reverse ››› in Introduction on page 284, ››› in Switch from reduced to full-screen view if The distance to the obstacles can be estima- Introduction on page 285! the rear assist is fitted (Rear View Camera ted with the help of the segments at the rear “RVC”) of the vehicle. ● Press the car icon in the reduced view. The optical indication of the segments works Adjusting the display and audible as follows: warnings If necessary, switch to the rear-assist im- White segments: they are displayed when age (Rear View Camera “RVC”) The settings for the display and audible the obstacle 30 cm away from the vehi- warnings are controlled via the Easy Con- ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector cle or further if the direction of travel is in nect*. lever to position R. the opposite direction to its location, and ● OR: press the RVC function button. also when the electronic parking brake is Rear volume* activated. Volume in the rear area. Yellow segments: obstacles located in the vehicle's trajectory and which are more Rear sound settings/sharpness* than 30 cm away from the vehicle are displayed in yellow. Frequency (tone) of the sound in the rear area. »

291 Driving

Adjust volume Rear Assist “Rear View Cam- displayed on screen and could damage the With the parking aid switched on, the active era”* vehicle. audio/video source volume will be reduced to ● The rear assist has blind spots where it is the intensity of the selected setting. not possible to represent people or objects Operating and safety warnings (small children, animals and certain objects cannot be detected in its field of vi- Error messages sion). Monitor the vehicle's surrounding area at all times. When the Parking Aid is activated or when it is ● Keep the camera lens clean, free of ice switched on, if a message reporting a Parking and snow, and do not cover it. aid error is displayed on the instrument panel, ● The system is not a replacement for driv- there is a fault in the system. Fig. 260 Related video er awareness. Supervise the parking operation at all times, as well as the vehicle's If the fault disappears before disconnecting surrounding area. Adapt your speed and the ignition, the next time that the parking aid WARNING driving style at all times to suit visibility, is engaged in reverse, no audible signal of the ● The Rear Assist does not make it possible weather, road and traffic conditions. existence of a fault will be issued. to precisely calculate the distance from ● Do not be distracted from the traffic by obstacles (people, vehicles, etc.) and nor If there is a fault in a sensor, the  symbol is looking at the screen. can it overcome the system's own limits, displayed on the Easy Connect display. hence using it may cause serious accidents ● The images on the rear assist screen are Have the fault corrected by a specialised and injuries if used negligently or without only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spa- workshop without delay. due care. The driver should be aware of tial depth, protruding parts or holes in the his/her surroundings at all times to ensure road, for example, are more difficult to de- safe driving. tect or may not be seen at all. Towing bracket ● The camera lens expands and distorts ● Vehicle load modifies the representation the field of vision and displays the objects of the orientation lines displayed. The width represented by the lines diminishes In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket on the screen in a different, vague manner. with vehicle load. Pay special attention to device from the factory, when the trailer is The perception of distances is also distorted by this effect. the vehicle's surroundings when the inside connected electrically, the Parking Aid will of the vehicle of the luggage compartment ● Due to the screen resolution or insuffi- not be activated when reverse gear is engag- is carrying a heavy load. ed (manual gears) nor when the selector lev- cient light conditions, some items may be ● In the following situations, the objects or er is turned to position R (automatic gears). displayed in an unsatisfactory manner or not at all. Take special care with thin posts, other vehicles shown in the navigation sys- fences, railings or trees that might not be tem display appear to be further away or

292 Driver assistance systems closer than they really are: Pay special at- Instructions for use ● If necessary, switch on the Infotainment tention: system. – On moving from a horizontal plane to a ● Engage reverse gear or turn the selector slope. lever to position R. – On moving from a slope to a horizontal ● Press the  function button displayed on plane. the right of the image. – If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the ● Make the desired adjustments on the menu rear. by pressing the –/+ function buttons or by – When the vehicle approaches objects moving the corresponding scroll button. that are not on the ground surface or are jutting out from it. These objects Necessary conditions for parking and ma- may also be outside the camera's an- noeuvring with the rear assist Fig. 261 On the rear lid handle: location of the gle of vision when reversing. rear assist camera. The system should not be used in the following cases: Note A camera on the rear bumper aids the driver ● If the image displayed is not very reliable or ● It is important to take great care and pay during reverse parking or manoeuvring is distorted, for example low visibility or dirty special attention if you are not yet familiar ››› Fig. 261. The camera image is viewed to- lens. with the system. gether with orientation lines projected by the system on the Infotainment system screen. ● ● Rear assist will not be available if the ve- If the area behind the vehicle is not dis- The bottom of the screen displays part of the hicle's rear lid is open. played very clearly or is incomplete. bumper, which can be used by the driver as a ● If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear. reference point. ● If the position and installation angle of the Rear assist settings camera have been changed, e.g. after a rear- end collision. Have the system checked by a Rear assist offers the user the possibility to specialised workshop. change the image's brightness, contrast and colour settings. Familiarising yourself with the system To change these settings: To familiarise yourself with the system, the orientation lines and their function, SEAT rec- ● Park the vehicle in a safe place. ommends practising parking and manoeu- ● Apply the parking brake. vring with the rear assist in a place without » ● Switch the ignition on. 293 Driving

too much traffic or in a car park when there Parking and manoeuvring with the ● The camera will stop transmitting images are good weather and visibility conditions. rear assist above the speed of 15 km/h (9 mph) with reverse engaged. Cleaning the camera lens In combination with the Parking System Plus Keep the camera lens clean and clear of ››› page 286, the camera image will cease to snow and ice: be transmitted immediately when reverse gear is disengaged or when the selector lever ● Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol- is moved from the R position, and the optical based glass cleaning product and clean the information provided by the Parking Aid sys- lens with a dry cloth. tem will be displayed. ● Remove snow using a small brush. Also in combination with the system, the rear ● Use de-icing spray to remove any ice. assist image can also be concealed:

CAUTION Fig. 262 Display on the Infotainment system ● By pressing one of the Infotainment system screen: guidance lines. ● Never use abrasive cleaning products to buttons on the display. clean the camera lens. Switching the system on and off ● OR: By pressing the miniature vehicle that ● Do not use hot or warm water to remove appears on the left of the screen (which ● The rear assist will switch on when the igni- ice or snow from the camera lens. Doing so switches to the full-screen mode of the Park- tion is on or the engine running, on engaging could damage the camera. ing System Plus's optical system). reverse gear (manual gearbox) or on changing the selector lever to the R position (auto- If you wish to display the rear assist image matic gearbox). again: ● The system switches off 8 seconds after ● Disengage reverse, or change the selector disengaging reverse gear (manual gearbox) lever's position, engage reverse again or or removing the selector lever from the R po- move the selector lever to position R. sition (automatic gearbox). The system will also disconnect immediately after the ignition ● OR: Press the RVC function button1) is switched off.

1) WARNING: the RVC (Rear View Camera) function button will only be activated and available when the reverse gear is engaged or the selector lever is set to position R. 294 Towing bracket device

Meaning of the orientation lines Towing bracket device CAUTION ››› Fig. 262 Handle the detachable ball joint with care 1 Side lines: extension of the vehicle (the Towing bracket device* in order to avoid damaging the bumper approximate width of the vehicle plus the paintwork. rear view mirrors) on the road surface. Introduction 2 End of the side lines: the area marked in Note green ends approximately 2 m behind the The towing bracket device fitted to your vehi- Towing the vehicle with the detachable ball vehicle on the road surface. cle, be it factory-fitted or a genuine SEAT ac- joint ››› page 89. 3 Mid line: indicates a distance of approxi- cessory, meets all the national technical and mately 1 m behind the vehicle on the road legal requirements for towing. surface. Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin connector 4 Horizontal red line: indicates a safe dis- for the electrical connection between the tance of approximately 40 cm at the rear trailer and the vehicle. If the trailer is equip- of the vehicle on the road surface. ped with a 7-pin connector you can use the corresponding adaptor, which is available as Parking manoeuvre a genuine SEAT accessory. ● Place the vehicle in front of the parking The maximum authorised towing load is 55 space and engage reverse gear (manual kg. gearbox) or move the selector to the R position (automatic gearbox). WARNING ● Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheel ● Before each journey, make sure that the so that the side orientation lines lead towards detachable ball joint is properly fitted and the parking space. secured in its housing. ● Guide the vehicle into the parking space so ● If the detachable ball joint is not properly that the side orientation lines run parallel to it. fitted and secured, do not use it. ● Do not use the towing bracket device for towing if it is damaged or has missing parts. ● Do not modify or adapt the towing device connection. ● Never unhook the detachable ball joint when the trailer is hitched. 295 Driving

Description Key to ››› Fig. 263 Placing in standby position 1 13-pin connector 2 Safety lug 3 Hook housing 4 Hook housing cap 5 Ball protective cover 6 Detachable ball 7 Locking lever 8 Lock cover 9 Release bolt Fig. 264 Step 1. 10 Lock

11 Locking balls

12 Key

Note Contact an Authorised Service Partner if you lose your key. Fig. 263 Towing bracket device support / detachable ball joint / key.

Depending on the country or version, the towing bracket device's detachable ball joint Fig. 265 Step 2. is located: Before assembling it, place the detachable ● underneath the floor panel of the luggage ball in the standby position with the following compartment. two steps.

The ball joint is fitted and removed by hand. The towing device bracket is supplied with a key.

296 Towing bracket device

Step 1. Standby position Thus adjusted, the detachable ball is ready for installation. ● Turn the key in the direction of arrow 1 until the part of the key with the holes reaches CAUTION the top position ››› Fig. 264 (arrow). The key cannot be removed or turned in the Step 2. standby position. ● Grip the detachable ball below the protective cover. ● Press the release bolt B in the direction of Assembling the detachable ball - arrow 2 , and at the same time press lever C Step 1 in the direction of arrow 3 as far as it will go ››› Fig. 265.

The lever will remain blocked in this position.

Fig. 266 Reserve position: position of the lever and the release bolt. Fig. 267 Fitting the detachable ball / Release bolt in the deployed position. Standby position adjusted properly ● Key A ››› Fig. 266 is in the released posi- Fitting the detachable ball tion (the part of the key with the holes is fac- ● Remove the hook housing cap 4 ing upwards). ››› Fig. 263 downwards. ● Lever B ››› Fig. 266 is in the bottom posi- ● Set the detachable ball to its standby position. tion ››› page 296. ● The release bolt C ››› Fig. 266 can be ● Grip the detachable ball from below moved. ››› Fig. 267 and insert it into the hook housing »

297 Driving

following the direction of arrow 1 until it en- Assembling the detachable ball - ● Remove the key in the direction of arrow 2 . gages audibly . ››› Step 2 ● Place cover B in the lock in the direction of arrow 3 Fig. 269 . Lever A turns automatically in the direction ››› ››› of arrow 2 upwards, and the release bolt B ● Check that the detachable ball is securely moves outwards (the red and green part will attached ››› page 299, Checking proper at- be visible) ››› . tachment.

If lever A does not turn automatically or the CAUTION release bolt B does not come out, the detachable ball should be removed by turning ● After removing the key, always place the the lever as far as possible downwards from cover over the lever's lock. If the lock be- the housing cavity, and the detachable ball's comes soiled it will be impossible to insert the key. support surfaces and the cavity should then be cleaned. ● Keep the towing bracket device's housing Fig. 268 Locking the lock. cavity clean at all times. Dirtiness can pre- WARNING vent the detachable ball from being properly secured! ● When attaching the detachable ball, ● If the detachable ball is removed, always keep your hands well away from the reach place the cap on the hook's housing. of the lever's rotation to avoid getting your fingers caught. ● Never try to pull the lever upwards by force to turn the key. The detachable ball would not be secured properly!

Fig. 269 Placing the cover over the lock.

Do not omit this first step ››› page 297, As- sembling the detachable ball - Step 1!

● Turn key A in the direction of arrow 1 until the part of the key with the holes reaches the bottom position ››› Fig. 268.

298 Towing bracket device

Checking proper attachment ● The towing bracket device should only be ● Remove cover A from the lock in the direc- used if the detachable ball has been prop- tion of arrow 1 ››› Fig. 271. erly locked! ● Insert key B into the lock in the direction of arrow 2 ››› Fig. 272. ● Turn the key in the direction of arrow 3 un- Removing the detachable ball - til the part of the key with the holes is facing Step 1 upwards.

WARNING Never remove the detachable ball joint when the trailer is hitched.

Fig. 270 Detachable ball properly attached. Note Whenever you go to use the detachable ball, Before you remove the detachable ball, make sure that it is properly attached first. you are advised to place the protective cover on the ball coupling. Detachable ball properly attached. ● The detachable ball will not fall out of the Fig. 271 Removing the lock cover. housing cavity after a major “knock or jerk”. ● Lever A ››› Fig. 270 is fully raised. ● The release bolt B ››› Fig. 270 is sticking fully out (the red and green part is visible). ● The key has been removed. ● Cover C ››› Fig. 270 is placed over the lock.

WARNING ● When removing the detachable ball, keep your hands well away from the reach Fig. 272 Releasing the lock. of the lever's rotation to avoid getting your fingers caught. 299 Driving

Removing the detachable ball - ● Fit the cap 4 ››› Fig. 263 onto its housing. Operation and care Step 2 WARNING Put the cover on the housing cavity so that Never leave the detachable ball loose in dirt cannot get in. the luggage compartment. It could cause Before hooking up a trailer, always check the damage in the luggage compartment in the ball coupling and apply suitable grease if case of abrupt braking, and even jeopard- necessary. ise passenger safety! Use the protective cover when putting the detachable ball away to keep the luggage CAUTION compartment clean. ● If you hold the lever and do not press down on it as far as you can, after you re- Remove any dirt from the housing cavity sur- move the detachable ball, the latter will faces and use a suitable cleaning product. Fig. 273 Releasing the detachable ball. continue upwards and will not lock into the standby position. The detachable ball CAUTION Do not omit this first step ››› page 299, Re- should be placed in this position before the The top part of the hook housing is moving the detachable ball - Step 1! next assembly. greased. Make sure that the grease has not ● Keep the detachable ball in the standby been removed. Releasing the detachable ball position, with the key inserted into the box ● Grip the detachable ball from below. while you place it facing downwards with the side opposite to the one where the key ● Press the release bolt A in the direction of is inserted. The key could get damaged! Trailer towing arrow 1 as far as it will go, and at the same ● When operating the lever, do not apply time press lever B in the direction of arrow too much pressure (for example, do not 2 as far as it will go. What do you need to bear in mind stand on it)! when towing a trailer? In this position, the detachable ball is loose and will fall/drop freely downwards. If this Note Your vehicle may be used to tow a trailer does not occur when you release it, press it when fitted with the correct equipment. Remove any dirt from the detachable ball with the other hand from above. before you put it away with the vehicle If you wish to retrofit a towing bracket, con- The detachable ball locks into the standby tools. sult ››› page 305. position at the same time and is therefore ready to be reinserted into the hook housing ››› . 300 Towing bracket device

Connectors only. The correct towing bracket figures for Trailer rear lights Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin connector your specific model, which may be lower The trailer's rear lights should comply with for the electrical connection between the than these figures, are given in the vehicle the statutory safety regulations ››› page 301. trailer and the vehicle. documentation or on ››› page 346, Techni- cal specifications. WARNING If the trailer has a 7-pin plug you will need to use an adapter cable. It is available at any Distributing the load Never transport people in a trailer. This Technical Service. could result in fatal accidents. Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy objects are as near to the axle as possible. Trailer weight/drawbar load Note Loads carried in the trailer must be secured Never exceed the authorised trailer weight. If to prevent them moving. ● Towing a trailer places additional de- you do not load the trailer up to the maximum mands on the vehicle. We recommend ad- permitted trailer weight, you can then climb Tyre pressure ditional services between the normal in- correspondingly steeper slopes. spection intervals if the vehicle is used fre- The maximum permissible tyre pressure val- quently for towing a trailer. The maximum trailer weights listed are only ues are shown on the sticker on the rear part ● Find out whether special regulations ap- applicable for altitudes up to 1000 m above of the left front door frame. Set the tyre pres- ply to towing a trailer in your country. sea level. With increasing altitude the engine sure of the trailer tyres in accordance with the power and therefore the vehicle climbing trailer manufacturer's recommendations. ability are impaired because of the reduced air density. The maximum trailer weight has to Exterior mirrors Hitching and connecting the trailer be reduced accordingly. The weight of the Check whether you can see enough of the vehicle and trailer combination must be re- road behind the trailer with the standard rear duced by 10% for every further 1000 m (or vision mirrors. If this is not the case, you part thereof). The gross combination weight should have additional exterior mirrors fitted. is the actual weight of the laden vehicle plus Both exterior mirrors should be mounted on the actual weight of the laden trailer. When hinged extension brackets. Adjust the mirrors possible, operate the trailer with the maxi- to give sufficient vision to the rear. mum permitted drawbar load on the ball joint of the towing bracket, but do not exceed Tow rope the specified limit. Always use a cable between the vehicle and The figures for trailer weights and drawbar Fig. 274 Diagram: assignment of the pins of the trailer ››› page 301. loads that are given on the data plate of the the trailer's electrical socket. » towing bracket are for certification purposes 301 Driving

Key of the Schematic diagram ››› Fig. 274: only powered when the engine is running. The ● Never connect the trailer's electric sys- charge wire (pin 10) charges, for example, a tem directly to the electrical connections Pin Meaning caravan battery. of the tail lights or any other power sources. Only use the connections intended for 1 Left turn signal Pin 9 and 10 should not be connected to providing electric current to the trailer. each other to avoid discharging or damaging 2 Rear fog light the vehicle's battery. 3 Earth, pins 1, 2, 4 to 8 The earth wires, pin 3, pin 11 and pin 13, should Ball coupling of towing bracket de- 4 Right turn signal never be connected to each other to avoid overloading the electrical system. vice* 5 Rear light, right If the trailer has a 7-contact connector, you The ball coupling is provided with instructions 6 Brake lights will need to use an adapter cable. In this case on fitting and removing the ball coupling of 7 Rear light, left the function corresponding to pin 10 will not the towing bracket. be available. 8 Reverse lights WARNING Trailer maximum electricity consumption 9 Permanent live The towing bracket ball coupling must be stored securely in the luggage compart- 10 Cable without positive charge Brake lights (total) 84 Watts ment to prevent them being flung through 11 Earth, pin 10 Turn signal, on each side 42 Watts the vehicle and causing injury.

12 Unassigned Side lights (total) 100 Watts Note 13 Earth, pin 9 Rear lights (total) 42 Watts ● By law, the ball coupling must be re- Rear fog light 42 Watts moved if a trailer is not being towed if it ob- Electrical socket for trailer scures the number plate. Never exceed the values indicated! The vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power socket for the electrical connection between Note the trailer and the vehicle. If the system detects that a trailer has been connected elec- ● If the rear lights of the trailer are not cor- trically, the electrical equipment on the trailer rectly connected, the vehicle electronics will receive voltage through this connection. may be damaged. ● If the trailer absorbs excessive electric Pin 9 has a permanent live. This powers, for current, the vehicle electronics may be example, the trailer's interior lighting. Pin 10 is damaged. 302 Towing bracket device

Driving with a trailer Safety lug Note The safety lug B ››› Fig. 275 is used to hook ● If there is any fault in the trailer's lighting, up the trailer's retainer cable. check the fuses in the instrument panel On hooking it up to the safety lug, the retainer fuse box ›››  page 50. cable should have slack in all the trailer po- ● The contact between the retainer cable sitions with respect to the vehicle (sharp and the safety lug may give rise to me- bends, reverse gear, etc.). chanical wear in the lug's surface protection. This wear will not prevent the safety Headlights lug from operating properly or cause any fault and is excluded from the warranty. The front part of the vehicle may be raised ● When connecting and disconnecting the when the trailer is connected and the light trailer, the towing vehicle's handbrake may dazzle the rest of the traffic. Fig. 275 Turn the 13-pin connector. should be applied. Adapt the height of the headlights using the Before driving headlight range adjuster ››› page 1431). ● Grip the 13-pin connector at area A and Anti-theft alarm remove it in the direction of the arrow WARNING Fig. 275. ››› ● Never use the safety lug to tow! When the vehicle is locked, the alarm is trig- ● 5 Remove the protective cover ››› Fig. 263 ● Adjust your speed to suit the road and gered when the electrical connection be- upwards. traffic conditions. tween vehicle and trailer is interrupted. ● All work on the electrical system must be Always turn off the anti-theft alarm system After driving carried out only by specialised workshops. before connecting or disconnecting a trailer ● Grip the 13-pin connector at area A and ● Never connect the trailer's electric sys- ››› page 133. insert it in the opposite direction to the arrow tem to the electrical connections of the ››› Fig. 275. rear lights or any other power sources. Conditions for the integration of a trailer in ● Fit the protective cover 5 ››› Fig. 263 on ● After hooking up the trailer and connect- the anti-theft alarm system. the ball coupling. ing the socket, check that all the trailer's ● The vehicle is factory-equipped with an an- rear lights are working properly. ti-theft alarm system and a towing bracket device. »

1) This does not apply for vehicles with Full LED xenon headlights. 303 Driving

● The trailer is connected electrically to the You should always reduce speed immediately Requirements for the stabilisation of the towing vehicle by the trailer connector. if the trailer shows the slightest sign of snak- towing vehicle and trailer ● The electrical system of the vehicle and the ing. Never try to stop the “snaking” by in- ● The vehicle is factory-equipped with a tow- trailer are prepared for operation. creasing speed. ing bracket or has been retro-fitted with a ● The vehicle is locked with the ignition key Always brake in due course. If the trailer has compatible towing bracket. and the anti-theft alarm system is activated. an overrun brake, apply the brakes gently at ● The ESC and ASR are active. The control first and then, firmly. This will prevent the jerk- lamp  or  is not lit up on the instrument CAUTION ing that can be caused by locking of trailer cluster. wheels. Select a low gear in due course be- For technical reasons, trailers fitted with ● The trailer is electrically connected to the fore going down a steep downhill. This ena- rear LED lights are not integrated in the an- towing vehicle through the trailer power sock- bles you to use the engine braking to slow ti-theft alarm system. et. down the vehicle. ● The vehicle is travelling at over 60 km/h Reheating (approx. 37 mph). Driving tips ● At very high temperatures and during pro- The maximum vertical load technically per- longed slopes, driving in a low gear and high missible is being utilised on the coupling de- Driving with a trailer always requires extra vice. care. engine speed, always monitor the coolant temperature gauge ››› page 114. ● The trailer has a rigid draw bar. Weight distribution ● If the trailer has brakes, it must be equipped with a mechanical overrun brake. The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen vehicle is very unfavourable. Stabilisation of the towing vehicle WARNING However, if this cannot be avoided, drive extra and trailer slowly to allow for the unbalanced weight The enhanced security provided by the distribution. The stabilisation of the towing vehicle and electric stability control of the towing vehi- trailer together is an additional function of the cle and trailer should not lead you to take Speed electronic stability control (ESC). any risks that could compromise your safety. The stability of the vehicle and trailer is re- If the system detects that the trailer is sway- ● Adapt your speed and driving style at all duced with increasing speed. For this reason, ing, it intervenes automatically with the driver times to suit visibility, weather, road and it is advisable not to drive at the maximum steering recommendation to reduce the traffic conditions. permissible speed in an unfavourable road, swaying of the trailer. ● weather or wind conditions. This applies es- Accelerate with caution when the road is slippery. pecially when driving downhill.

304 Towing bracket device

● When adjusting any settings, stop accel- Retrofitting a towing bracket* The attachment points for the towing bracket erating. A are on the lower part of the vehicle. The distance between the centre of the ball WARNING coupling and the ground should never be lower than the indicated value, even with a The electric stability control for the towing fully loaded vehicle and including the maxi- vehicle and trailer may not correctly de- mum drawbar load. tect all driving conditions. ● When the ESC is switched off, the stabili- Elevation values for securing the towing brack- sation of the towing vehicle and trailer is al- et: so switched off. B 65 mm (minimum) ● The stability system does not always de- 350 mm to 420 mm (fully laden vehi- tect light and unstable trailers, so it may C not stabilise these correctly. cle)

● When driving on slippery surfaces with D 1,033 mm poor grip, the trailer can even interfere with the stability system. E 322 mm

● Trailers with a high centre of gravity can F 338 mm tip even without having previously swayed. ● If a trailer is not attached, but the trailer Fitting a towing bracket power socket is connected (e.g. installation ● Driving with a trailer involves an extra effort of a bicycle rack with lights), repeated automatic braking may occur in extreme driv- for the vehicle. Therefore, before fitting a towing conditions. ing bracket, please contact a Technical Serv- ice to check whether your cooling system needs modification. Fig. 276 Attachment points for towing bracket. ● The legal requirements in your country must be observed (e.g. the fitting of a sepa- If a towing bracket is to be fitted after the ve- rate control lamp). hicle is purchased, this must be completed ● Certain vehicle components, e.g. the rear according to the instructions of the towing bumper, must be removed and reinstalled. bracket manufacturer. The towing bracket securing bolts must be »

305 Driving

tightened using a torque wrench, and a pow- sions. Please consult your Technical Serv- er socket must be connected to the vehicle ice. electrical system. This requires specialised knowledge and tools. ● Figures in the illustration show the elevation value and the attachment points which must be considered if you are retrofitting a towing bracket.

WARNING The towing brackets should be fitted at a specialised workshop. ● If the towing bracket is incorrectly installed, there is a serious danger of accident. ● For your own safety, please observe the tow bracket manufacturer's instructions.

CAUTION ● If the power socket is incorrectly installed, this could cause damage to the vehicle electrical system.

Note ● SEAT recommends that the towing hooks be fitted at a specialised workshop. Con- sult your SEAT dealer in case additional modifications to your vehicle are necessary. ● Due to the specific design of the exhaust, the fitting of a conventional towing hook is not recommended for some sportier ver-

306 Accessories and modifications to the vehicle

sure that parts are correctly and professio- Technical modifications Practical tips nally installed. Modifications must always be carried out ac- Despite a continuous observation of the mar- cording to our specifications. Unauthorised Accessories and modifi- ket, SEAT is not able to assess the reliability, modifications to the electronic components safety and suitability of parts that SEAT has or software in the vehicle may cause mal- cations to the vehicle not approved. For this reason, SEAT cannot functions. Due to the way the electronic com- assume responsibility for any non-genuine ponents are linked together in networks, other parts used, even if these parts have been ap- Accessories and modifica- indirect systems may be affected by the proved by an official testing agency or are faults. This can seriously impair safety, lead tions to the vehicle covered by an official approval certificate. to excessive wear of components, and also Accessories, replacement of parts Any retro-fitted equipment which has a di- invalidate your vehicle registration docu- rect impact on the driver's control of the vehi- ments. and modifications cle, such as a cruise control system or elec- SEAT Technical Services cannot be held lia- tronically-controlled suspension, must be ap- ble for any damage caused by modifications Your vehicle is designed to offer a high stand- proved by SEAT for use in your vehicle and and/or work incorrectly performed. For this ard of active and passive safety. bear the e mark (the European Union's au- reason, we recommend having all work per- Before purchasing accessories and parts, thorisation symbol). formed by a SEAT Technical Service using and before making technical changes to your If any additional electrical devices are fit- SEAT® Original Spare Parts. vehicle, we recommend that you consult your ted which do not serve to control the vehicle Technical Service. itself, such as refrigerator boxes, laptops or WARNING SEAT dealerships will be happy to provide ventilator fans, they must bear the CE mark Any type of work or modification performed (European Union manufacturer conformity you with the latest information about the use, incorrectly on your vehicle can lead to mal- legal requirements and recommendations declaration). functions and can cause accidents. from the manufacturer regarding accessories and spare parts. WARNING We recommend you use only SEAT Ap- Accessories, for example telephone hold- Radio transmitters and office ® ers or cup holders, should never be fitted proved Accessories and SEAT Approved equipment Spare Parts®. This way, SEAT can guarantee on the covers, or within the working range, that the product in question is suitable, relia- of the airbags. Otherwise, there is a danger of injury if the airbag is triggered in an acci- Radio transmitters (fixed installation) ble and safe. SEAT Technical Services have dent. the necessary experience and facilities to en- Any retrofit installations of radio transmitters in the vehicle require prior approval. SEAT »

307 Practical tips

generally authorises in-vehicle installations Business equipment Checking and refilling lev- of approved types of radio transmitters provi- Retrofit installation of business or private ded that: equipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi- els ● The aerial is installed correctly. ded the equipment cannot interfere with the driver's immediate control of the vehicle and ● Refuelling The aerial is installed on the exterior of the that any such equipment carries the  mark. vehicle (and shielded cables are used to- Any retrofit equipment that could influence gether with non-reflective aerial trimming). the driver's control of the vehicle must have a Refuelling ● The effective transmitting power does not type approval for your vehicle and must carry Read the additional information carefully exceed 10 Watts at the aerial base. the e mark. ›››  page 46 A SEAT Official Service and specialised work- WARNING If the automatic filler nozzle is operated cor- shop will be able to inform you about options rectly, it will switch itself off as soon as the for installing and operating radio transmitters Mobile telephones or radio equipment tank is “full”. Never attempt to fill beyond this with a higher transmitting power. which is operated inside the vehicle without a properly installed external aerial can point, as this will fill the expansion chamber. create excessive magnetic fields that Fuel may leak out if ambient conditions are Mobile radio transmitters could cause a health hazard. warm. Commercial mobile telephones or radio The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is giv- equipment might interfere with the electron- Note ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions. en on a sticker on the inside of the fuel tank This may be due to: ● The posterior fitting of electric and elec- flap. tronic equipment in this vehicle affects its ● No external aerial. licence and could lead to the withdrawal of Vehicles with natural gas engines and hy- the vehicle registration document under ● External aerial incorrectly installed. brids certain circumstances. ● Transmitting power more than 10 W. Every 6 months it is necessary to run on pet- ● Please use the mobile telephone/radio rol until the control lamp switches off  and You must, therefore, do not operate portable operating instructions. then the tank must be refilled. This is neces- mobile telephones or radio equipment inside sary to ensure that the system works proper- the vehicle without a properly installed exter- ly, as well as the fuel quality required for driv- nal aerial ››› . ing with petrol. Please note also that the maximum range of the equipment can only be achieved with an external aerial.

308 Checking and refilling levels

WARNING CAUTION Refuelling with natural gas ● Fuel is highly flammable and can cause ● Fuel spills should be removed from the serious burns and other injuries. paintwork immediately. – Never smoke or come into contact with ● Never run the tank completely dry. Irreg- sparks when filling the fuel tank of the ular fuel supply can cause misfiring. As a vehicle or a spare fuel canister with result, unburnt fuel could enter the catalyt- fuel. This is an explosion hazard. ic converter and cause damage. – Follow legal requirements for the use of ● When filling the fuel tank after having run spare fuel canisters. it completely dry on a vehicle with a diesel – For safety reasons we do not recom- engine the ignition must be switched on for mend carrying a spare fuel canister in at least 30 seconds before starting the en- the vehicle. The canister could be dam- gine. Subsequently, when you start the en- Fig. 277 Open tank lid: gas filler mouth 1 , fill- aged in an accident and leak. gine it may take longer than normal to start firing (up to one minute). This is due to the er mouth retainer 2 ● If, in exceptional circumstances, you fact that the fuel system has to purge itself have to carry a spare fuel canister, please of air before starting. Before refuelling, the engine and the ignition, observe the following: mobile telephone and heating must be – Never fill the spare fuel canister inside switched off separately ››› . For the sake of the environment the vehicle or on it. An electrostatic Read the instructions on how to use the natu- charge could build up during filling, Do not try to put in more fuel after the auto- ral gas pump carefully. causing the fuel fumes to ignite. This matic filler nozzle has switched off, this could cause an explosion. Always may cause the fuel to overflow if it be- The vehicle is not prepared for refuelling with place the canister on the ground to fill comes warm. liquefied natural gas (LNG) ››› . Before refu- it. elling with natural gas, make sure you add – Insert the fuel nozzle into the mouth of Note the appropriate type of fuel ››› page 312. the canister as far as possible. There is no emergency mechanism for the Opening the fuel tank cap – If the spare fuel canister is made of manual release of the fuel tank flap. If nec- metal, the filling nozzle must be in con- essary, request assistance from special- The natural gas filler mouth is behind the fuel tact with the canister during filling. This ised personnel. tank cap, next to the petrol filler mouth. helps prevent an electrostatic charge building up. ● Unlock the vehicle with the key or with the – Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the central locking button  situated on the driv- luggage compartment. Fuel vapours er door ››› page 129. » are explosive. Danger of death. 309 Practical tips

● Press on the rear area of the flap and open of the natural gas can cause accidents se- Fuel it. rious burns and other injuries. ● Before refuelling with natural gas, en- Identification of the fuel1) Refuelling gage the filling mouth correctly. If you can Special feature: If the ambient temperature smell gas, stop refuelling immediately. is very high, the natural gas pump protection against overheating disconnects this auto- WARNING matically. The vehicle is not prepared to use liquefied ● Remove the plug from the gas filler mouth natural gas (LNG), and this fuel must not be ››› Fig. 277 1 . added under any circumstances. Liquefied natural gas can cause the natural gas tank ● Connect the pump filling nozzle to the gas to explode, resulting in serious injury. filler mouth. ● The fuel tank will be full when the pump Note compressor automatically cuts the supply. Fig. 278 Identification of fuels according to ● The filling nozzles of natural gas pumps ● If you wish to finish refuelling in advance, European Union (EU) Directive 2014/94/ can differ in the way they are operated. If press the button on the pump to stop the flow. you do not know, ask a qualified employee Fuels are identified with different symbols. at the petrol station to do the refuelling. Depending on the fuel, the different symbols Closing the fuel tank cap ● Noises heard when refuelling are normal are on the pump and the tank lid of your vehi- ● Check that the mouth retainer 2 of the gas and do not indicate the presence of a fault cle. The identification serves to prevent con- filler is not trapped with the filler. If necessary, in the system. fusion when choosing the fuel. place it in the filler mouth again. ● The vehicle natural gas system is pre- 1 ● Insert the plug in the filler mouth. pared both for refuelling with a small com- Petrol with ethanol (“E” stands for Etha- nol). The number indicates the percent- ● Close the tank flap. Make sure you hear it pressor (slow refuel) and a large compressor (fast refuel) in natural gas service sta- age of ethanol in the petrol. “E5” means, click into place. tions. for example, an ethanol ratio of 5% max. WARNING 2 Diesel with biodiesel (“B” stands for Bio- diesel). The number indicates the per- Natural gas is a highly explosive, easily centage of biodiesel in the diesel. “B7” flammable substance. Incorrect handling

1) Depending on country 310 Checking and refilling levels

means, for example, a proportion of bio- octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight power fuel system would be damaged. Exception: diesel of max. 7%. loss). vehicles with Totalflex engine ››› page 312, 3 Natural gas: “CNG” means Compressed Ethanol fuel. Natural Gas. Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes at ● A single refuelling with leaded fuel or least other metal additives entails a permanent You should use super 95 octane petrol (91 deterioration of the effectiveness of the Type of petrol AKI) at least. catalytic converter. ● Only use fuel additives that have been 3 Applies to vehicles: with petrol engine If super is not available, if necessary, use nor- approved by SEAT. The products that con- mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only tain substances to increase the octane rat- The correct grade of petrol is listed inside the use moderate engine speeds and a light ing or decrease knocking may contain met- fuel tank flap. throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi- al additives that damage the engine and The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con- ble. catalytic converter. This type of products verter and must only be run on unleaded must not be used. Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol or petrol. The petrol must comply with the ● Do not use fuels shown in the pump as super 95 octane petrol at least standard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuels containing metals. LRP (lead replacement with a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled We recommend refuelling with super plus 98 petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of (E10)1). The types of petrol are differentiated octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super metal additives. Risk of engine damage! by using the octane numbers (RON) or via 95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight power ● High engine speed and full throttle can the anti-knock index (AKI). loss). damage the engine when using petrol with an octane rating lower than the correct The following pieces of text show the infor- If super is not available, if necessary, use nor- grade for the engine. mation included in the corresponding stickers mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only on the tank lid (examples): use moderate engine speeds and a light throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi- Note Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol or ble. ● Fuel with an octane rating higher than the normal 91 octane petrol at least one required by the engine can be used. CAUTION We recommend refuelling with super 95 oc- ● In countries in which there is no sulphur- tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available: normal 91 ● Fuels high percentage of ethanol, e.g. free fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul- E30 - E100 button must not be used. The phur content fuel.

1) Follow the regulations of the country you are driving in. 311 Practical tips

Ethanol fuel The diesel can thicken at very low tempera- Gas CNG ), or with a mixture of biomethane tures, thus affecting the start or operation of if it complies with Regulation EN 16723-2. 3 Applies to vehicles: with Totalflex engine the engine. To ensure that you can continue Do not use fuels such as liquefied natural gas to use your vehicle as usual, the diesel sold in You can recognise vehicles with Totalflex en- (Liquefied Natural Gas), liquified petroleum 1) gas stations is provided -depending on the gines by label on the fuel tank lid with with gas (LPG = Liquefied Petroleum G) or hy- station- with fluidity when cold. Ask the em- the marking “Petrol/ethanol”. thane (hydrogen mixed with methane) ››› . ployee of the petrol station whether their die- Vehicles with Totalflex engine can run with sel is suitable for use in winter and if it is suited Therefore, vehicles with a natural gas engine unleaded petrol (95 octane / 91 AKI) accord- for current and future temperatures. must only be refuelled using compressed ing to ANP No. 57 and with fuels with any high natural gas (CNG). percentage of ethanol. The vehicle is refuel- CAUTION led in the same way as petrol refuelling. ● Never use of FAME (biodiesel), petrol, Natural gas quality and consumption Also consider that ››› page 311, Type of pet- heating oil, other fuels or thinning agents Natural gas is divided into the groups H and L rol as they can cause severely damage the depending on its quality. fuel system and the engine. Gas type H has a superior heating power and Note ● If the wrong fuel has been filled, do not inferior nitrogen and carbon dioxide content start the engine under any circumstances. SEAT recommends filling the tank exclu- than type L. The higher the heating power of Risk of damaging the fuel system and the sively with petrol every 10,000 km to de- the natural gas, the lower the consumption crease impurities that using E100 ethanol engine! Obtain technical assistance. will be. fuel might have left in the engine. However, the heating power and the propor- Natural gas tion of nitrogen and carbon dioxide can fluc- Diesel tuate within the quality groups. Therefore, ve- 3 Applies to vehicles: with a natural gas engine hicle consumption can also vary when using 3 Applies to vehicles: with diesel engine a single type of gas only. Natural gas can be compressed or in liquid Please note the information on the inside of form, addition to others. The engine management automatically the fuel tank flap. adapts to the natural gas used according to Use of compressed natural gas (CNG) its quality. Therefore, different quality gases We recommend you use Diesel according to can be mixed in the tank, without the need for standard EN 590. Vehicles with a natural gas engine must only be working with CNG (Compressed Natural comprehensive draining before applying a different quality gas.

1) This motor is only available in some markets. 312 Checking and refilling levels

Updated information relating to natural gas ice life. For further information about the serv- WARNING quality is displayed on the instrument panel ice life of gas tanks, go to a SEAT dealer serv- ››› page 108. ice or a specialised workshop If the vehicle underbody touches the ground or in the event of a rear collision, there could be damage to the natural gas Natural gas and safety WARNING tanks. Failure to act when you can smell gas in the If you can smell gas or suspect that there is a ● Check whether there is a smell of gas. leak ››› : vehicle or when refuelling can cause serious injuries. ● If you notice a smell of gas, take the vehi- ● cle to a specialised workshop immediately Stop the vehicle immediately. ● Carry out the necessary operations. and have the natural gas system checked. ● Switch the ignition off. ● Leave the danger zone. ● Open the doors to appropriately ventilate ● If necessary, warn the emergency serv- Note the vehicle. ices. Have the natural gas system checked regu- ● Extinguish cigarettes immediately. larly by a specialised workshop, according ● Move away from the vehicle or switch off WARNING to the Maintenance Programme. objects that may cause sparks or a fire. The vehicle is not suitable for liquefied nat- ● If you continue to smell gas, do not contin- ural gas (LNG) or liquefied petrol gas (LPG), ue driving! so LNG or LPG should not be used under ® any circumstances. Liquid gas can cause AdBlue ● Seek specialist assistance. Have the fault an explosion of the natural gas tanks and repaired. cause severe injuries! Information on AdBlue® Regular checks of the natural gas system WARNING The natural gas tanks may be damaged or corroded by external factors. The walls of the Damaged, corroded or rusted tanks can re- gas tanks are weakened by deformations, sult in serious injury or even death. damage or corrosion. As a result, the tanks ● Have the natural gas deposits checked at could burst and result in serious injuries or least every 4 years (visual check). even death. For this reason, the vehicle owner ● Natural gas tanks have a limited service Fig. 279 Related video must have a specialised workshop check (vis- life. Have the natural gas tanks replaced ® ual check) the gas system every 4 years at when required. You can obtain further infor- The consumption of AdBlue depends on least. The vehicle owner must have a speci- mation about this at SEAT dealers or speci- your personal driving style, the temperature alised workshop replace the natural gas alised workshops. of the system and on the outdoor tempera- tanks before they reach the end of their serv- ture when the vehicle is used. » 313 Practical tips

AdBlue® freezes at temperatures of -11°C Refilling AdBlue® Fill with a refill bottle (+13°F). The system has heating elements Only use AdBlue® that complies with ISO that guarantee its operation even at low tem- 22241-1. Only use original containers. peratures. ● Open the tank cover Fig. 280. The AdBlue® tank level capacity is approxi- ››› mately 10.4 litres. ● Unscrew the tank cap by turning it in an anti-clockwise direction. The AdBlue® tank should never be empty. When the distance to empty drops below ● Please observe the manufacturer's instruc- 2400 km, a warning to refill the AdBlue® tank tions, indicated on the refill bottle. will appear on the dash panel display ● Check the expiry date. ››› page 314. If this information is ignored, lat- ● Remove the cap of the refill bottle. er on it will not be possible to re-start the en- Fig. 280 AdBlue tank cap. ● Insert the neck of the bottle in the tank filler gine. If this warning does not appear, it is not neck vertically and screw the bottle on by necessary to refill the AdBlue® tank. Operations prior to refilling hand, by turning it in a clockwise direction. AdBlue® is a registered brand of the German Park the vehicle on a flat surface. If the vehi- ● Press the refill bottle in the direction of the Association of the Automotive Industry (VDA) cle is not parked on a flat surface, but, for ex- filler neck and hold it in this position. and is also known as AUS32 or DEF (Diesel ample, on a slope or on the side of a curb, the ● Wait until the contents of the refill bottle Exhaust Fluid). level indicator may not detect the load prop- have been poured into the AdBlue® tank. Do erly. CAUTION not compress or break the bottle! If a warning message about AdBlue® levels ® ● Turn the bottle in a counter-clockwise di- Filling the AdBlue tank excessively can appears on the dash panel display, fill at cause damage to the tank. rection and gently pull it upwards ››› . least the minimum amount required (ap- ● The AdBlue® tank is full when no more liquid prox. 5 litres) Only after adding this amount comes out of the bottle. will the system detect that AdBlue® has been added and you will be able to start the en- ● Screw on the tank cap in a clockwise direc- gine again. The maximum amount that can tion until it is tightly closed. be refilled is 11 litres. ● Close the fuel tank flap. Switch the ignition off. If the ignition is not switched off during refilling, the warning to re- Operations before driving fill may continue to appear on the instrument ● After refilling the tank, only switch on the ig- panel display. nition.

314 Checking and refilling levels

● Leave the ignition on for at least 30 sec- CAUTION Working in the engine com- onds for the system to detect the fluid load. ● When refilling, the nozzle grip should be partment ● Make sure you wait for at least 30 seconds aligned downward. Otherwise the nozzle before starting the engine! will not connect automatically. Safety notes for work in the engine ● Do not try to add any more additive after Refilling the dispenser with AdBlue the nozzle has stopped for the first time. compartment Valid for vehicles with selective catalytic re- The AdBlue tank could overflow and AdBlue Read the additional information carefully duction. could spill out. ›››  page 17 ● Only use AdBlue® that complies with ISO ● Open the tank cap. 22241-1. Only use original containers. Before starting any work on the engine or in ● Turn the SCR tank cap anti-clockwise ● Never mix AdBlue® with water, fuel or ad- the engine compartment: ››› Fig. 280. ditives. Any type of damage caused by 1. Switch off the engine and remove the key ● Add AdBlue until the nozzle stops for the such a mixture will not be covered by the from the ignition. first time. warranty. 2. Apply the handbrake. ● Close the SCR tube by turning it clockwise ● Never pour AdBlue® into the fuel tank. until you hear a click. This could result in engine damage. 3. Move the gear lever to neutral or the se- ● Do not carry the refill bottle inside the lector lever to position P, depending on the WARNING vehicle. If there is a leak (due to tempera- case. ture changes or damage to the bottle), the AdBlue® should only be stored in the origi- 4. Wait for the engine to cool down. AdBlue® may damage the vehicle. nal container, which should be tightly 5. Keep children away from the vehicle. closed and kept in a safe place. ● Never keep AdBlue® in empty food con- For the sake of the environment 6. Raise the bonnet ›››  page 17. tainers, bottles or other similar containers. Dispose of the refill bottle in an environ- You should not do any work in the engine Other people may confuse it for other ment-friendly manner. products. compartment unless you know exactly how to carry out the jobs and have the correct ● Keep AdBlue® out of the reach of chil- Note tools! Have the work carried out by a special- dren. You can buy refill bottles that are adequate ised workshop if you are uncertain. ® for AdBlue use at SEAT dealerships. All service fluids and consumables, e.g. coolant, engine oil, spark plugs and batteries, are under constant development. SEAT provides a constant flow of information to Technical »

315 Practical tips

Services concerning modifications. For this where the jump leads are attached – Never touch the electrical wiring of the reason, we recommend you have service flu- ›››  page 59. The battery could explode. ignition system. ids and consumables replaced by a Techni- ● Never touch the radiator fan. It is temper- – Ensure that jewellery, loose clothing cal Service. Please observe the relevant in- ature controlled and could start automati- and long hair do not get trapped in ro- structions ››› page 307. The engine compart- cally, even when the engine has been tating engine parts. Danger of death. ment of the vehicle is a hazardous area ››› . switched off and the key removed from the Before starting any work remove jewel- ignition! lery, tie back and cover hair, and wear WARNING ● Never cover the engine with additional in- tight-fitting clothes. All work on the engine or in the engine com- sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of – Never accelerate with a gear engaged partment, e.g. checking and refilling fluids, fire! without taking the necessary precau- involves the danger of injury and burns, ac- ● Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant tions. The vehicle could move, even if cidents and even fire. expansion tank when the engine is hot. If the handbrake is applied. Danger of ● Never open the bonnet if you see steam, the coolant is hot, the cooling system will death. smoke or coolant escaping from the engine be pressurised! ● If work has to be carried out on the fuel compartment. Otherwise, there is a risk of ● Protect face, hands and arms by cover- system or on electrical components, you sustaining burns. Wait until no more steam ing the cap with a large, thick cloth to pro- must observe the following safety notes in or coolant is emitted, then allow the engine tect against escaping coolant and steam. addition to the above warnings: to cool before carefully opening the bon- – Always disconnect the battery from the net. ● Always make sure you have not left any objects, such as cleaning cloths or tools, in on-board network. The vehicle must be ● Switch off the engine and remove the key the engine compartment. unlocked when this is done, otherwise from the ignition. the alarm will be triggered. ● If you have to work underneath the vehi- ● Apply the handbrake and move the gear cle, you must use suitable stands addition- – Do not smoke. lever to neutral or selector lever to position ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk of – Never work near naked flames. P. accident!. A hydraulic jack is insufficient for – Always have a fire extinguisher on ● Keep children away from the vehicle. securing the vehicle and there is a risk of hand. ● Never touch hot engine parts. There is a injury. risk of burns. ● If any work has to be performed when the WARNING ● Never spill liquids on a hot engine or on a engine is started or with the engine running, hot exhaust gas system. This is a fire haz- there is an additional, potentially fatal, If the bonnet is not correctly closed, it ard. safety risk from the rotating parts, such as could suddenly open while driving leaving the drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., the driver without visibility. This could re- ● Avoid causing short-circuits in the elec- and from the high-voltage ignition system. sult in a serious accident. trical system, particularly at the points You should also observe the following:

316 Checking and refilling levels

● After closing the bonnet, always check ● Only open and close the bonnet when For the sake of the environment that it is properly secured by the locking there is nobody within its range. Service fluids leaks are harmful to the envi- mechanism in the lock carrier piece. The ronment. For this reason you should make bonnet must be flush with the surrounding CAUTION regular checks on the ground underneath body panels. your vehicle. If you find spots of oil or other When topping up service fluids, make sure ● While driving, if you notice that the bon- fluids, have your vehicle inspected in a not to mistake them. Using the wrong fluids net is not correctly closed then stop imme- specialised workshop. diately and close it correctly. could cause serious malfunctions and engine damage!

Checking levels

Fig. 281 Diagram for the location of the various elements.

From time to time, the levels of the different 1 Coolant expansion tank 5 Vehicle battery fluids in the vehicle must be checked. Never 2 Engine oil level dipstick 6 Windscreen washer reservoir fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious 3 Engine oil filler cap damage to the engine may be caused. The checking and refilling of service fluids are 4 Brake fluid reservoir carried out on the components mentioned »

317 Practical tips

above. These operations are described in If the engine oil level is too low Note ››› page 315. You can get information about the correct en- Before a long trip, we recommend finding gine oil for your vehicle at your specialised an engine oil that conforms to the corre- Overview shop. If you have to change your engine oil, sponding VW specifications and recom- You will find further explanations, instructions use that oil. mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the and restrictions on the technical specifica- correct engine oil will always be available If the recommended engine oil is not availa- tions as of page 346. for a top-up if needed. ››› ble, in the event of an emergency you can add oil once up to a maximum of 0.5 L of the Note next oil until the next oil change: The layout of parts may vary depending on Warning lamp the engine. ● Valid for vehicles with petrol engines: standard VW 504 00, VW 502 00,  It lights up red VW 508 00, ACEA C or API SN.  Do not continue driving! Engine oil Vehicles with diesel particulate filter* Engine oil pressure too low. Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash If this warning lamp  starts to flash, and is accom- General notes formation, may be used in diesel engines panied by three audible warnings, switch off the en- equipped with particulate filter. Using other gine and check the oil level. If necessary, add more The engine comes with a special, multi-grade types of oil will cause a higher soot concen- oil ››› page 319. oil that can be used all year round. tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There- If the warning lamp  flashes although the oil level Because the use of high-quality oil is essen- fore: is correct, stop driving. Do not even run the engine at idle speed! Obtain technical assistance. tial for the correct operation of the engine ● Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils. and its long useful life, when topping up or changing oil, use only those oils that comply ● Only in exceptional circumstances, if the  It lights up yellow with VW standards. engine oil level is too low ››› page 319 and you cannot obtain the oil specified for your Check the engine oil level as soon as possible. Top up the oil at the next opportunity ››› page 319. We recommend that the oil change indicated vehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil in the Maintenance Programme, be per- (once) conforming to the specifications formed by a technical service or specialised VW 506 00, VW 506 01, VW 505 00,  It flashes yellow workshop. VW 505 01 or ACEA B3/ACEA B4 (up to 0.5 l) Fault in the oil level sensor. ›››  page 47. Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop to have the system inspected. Until then it is advisable to check the oil level every time you refuel.

318 Checking and refilling levels

Checking engine oil level consumption is likely to be higher for the first WARNING 5,000 km. For this reason the engine oil level must be checked at regular intervals, prefera- Oil is highly inflammable! Ensure that no oil comes into contact with hot engine compo- bly when filling the tank and before a journey. nents when topping up. WARNING CAUTION Any work carried out in the engine compartment or on the engine must be carried If the oil level is above area ››› Fig. 282 A , out cautiously. do not start the engine. This could result in ● When working in the engine compart- damage to the engine and catalytic con- ment, always observe the safety warnings verter. Contact a specialised workshop. ››› page 315. Fig. 282 Engine oil dipstick. For the sake of the environment CAUTION The oil level must never be above zone Read the additional information carefully ››› Fig. 282 A . Otherwise oil can be drawn ›››  page 46 If the oil level is above area ››› Fig. 282 A , do not start the engine. This could result in in through the crankcase breather and leak damage to the engine and catalytic con- into the atmosphere via the exhaust sys- Checking oil level verter. Contact a Technical Service. tem. – Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

– Briefly run the engine at idle speed until the operating temperature is reached and then Topping up engine oil Changing engine oil stop. Read the additional information carefully Read the additional information carefully – Wait for about two minutes. ›››  page 46 ›››  page 46 – Pull out the dipstick. Wipe the dipstick with Before opening the bonnet, read and observe The engine oil must be changed at the inter- a clean cloth and insert it again, pushing it the warnings in Safety notes for work vals given in the service schedule. in as far as it will go. ››› in the engine compartment on page 315. We recommend that you have the engine oil – Then pull it out again and check the oil lev- changed by a Technical Service. el. Top up with engine oil if necessary. The position of the filler neck is shown in the corresponding engine compartment image The oil change intervals are shown in the Depending on how you drive and the condi- ››› page 317. Maintenance Programme. » tions in which the vehicle is used, oil con- Engine oil specification  page 47. sumption can be up to 0.5 l/1000 km. Oil ››› 319 Practical tips

WARNING quired, we recommend that you have the – Cover the coolant expansion tank cap with engine oil and filter changed by a Techni- a cloth and carefully unscrew it to the left Only change the engine oil yourself if you cal Service. ››› . have the specialist knowledge required! ● Never pour oil down drains or into the – ● Before opening the bonnet, read and ob- Top up the coolant only if there is still cool- ground. serve the warnings ››› page 315, Safety ant in the expansion tank, otherwise you notes for work in the engine compartment. ● Use a suitable container when draining could damage the engine. If there is no the used oil. It must be large enough to hold coolant in the expansion tank, do not con- ● Wait for the engine to cool down. Hot oil all the engine oil. tinue driving. You should obtain professional may cause burn injuries. assistance ››› . ● Wear eye protection to avoid injuries, such as acid burns, caused by splashes of – If there is still some coolant in the expansion oil. Cooling system tank, top up to the upper mark. ● When removing the oil drain plug with – Top up with coolant until the level becomes your fingers, keep your arm horizontal to Topping up coolant stable. help prevent oil from running down your arm. – Screw the cap back on correctly. Read the additional information carefully ● Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into ›››  page 47 Any loss of coolant fluid normally indicates a contact with engine oil. leak in the cooling system. Take the vehicle Top up coolant when the level is below the ● Engine oil is poisonous! Used engine oil straight to a specialised workshop to have MIN (minimum) mark. must be stored in a safe place out of the the cooling system examined. If there are no reach of children. leaks in the engine cooling system, a loss of Checking coolant level coolant can only occur if the coolant boils CAUTION – Park the vehicle in a horizontal position. and is forced out of the system as a result of overheating. No additives should be used with engine oil. – Switch the ignition off. This could result in engine damage. Any – Read off the coolant level on coolant ex- WARNING damage caused by the use of such addi- pansion tank. When the engine is cold, the tives would not be covered by the factory ● If your vehicle is immobilised for techni- coolant level should be between the marks. warranty. cal reasons, move it to a safe distance from When the engine is hot, it may be slightly traffic. Switch off the engine, switch on the above the upper mark. blinkers and place the emergency trian- For the sake of the environment gles. ● Topping up coolant Because of disposal problems and the ● Never open the bonnet if you see steam, special tools and specialist knowledge re- – Wait for the engine to cool down. smoke or coolant escaping from the engine

320 Checking and refilling levels compartment, there is a risk of burns. Wait est expected ambient temperature in the For the sake of the environment until you can no longer see or hear escap- zone in which the vehicle is to be used. Coolants and additives can contaminate ing steam or coolant. ● When the outside temperature is very the environment. If any fluids are spilled, ● The engine compartment is a dangerous low, the coolant could freeze and the vehi- they should be collected and correctly dis- area. Before carrying out any work in the cle would be immobilised. In this case, the posed of, with respect to the environment. engine compartment, switch off the engine heating would not work either and inade- and allow it to cool down. Always note the quately dressed passengers could die of corresponding warnings ››› page 315. cold. Brake fluid WARNING CAUTION ● The cooling system is under pressure. Do Do not top up the expansion tank with cool- Checking the brake fluid level not unscrew the cap on the coolant expan- ant fluid if it is empty! Air could enter the sion tank when the engine is hot: risk of cooling system. In this case, stop driving. Read the additional information carefully burns! Seek specialist assistance. Otherwise, ›››  page 48 there is a risk of engine damage. ● The antifreeze and coolant fluid can be a The position of the brake fluid reservoir is health hazard. Therefore, the antifreeze shown in the corresponding engine compart- should be stored in the original container in CAUTION ment image ››› page 317. The brake fluid res- a safe place out of reach of children. Fail- ervoir has a black and yellow cap. ure to comply could result in poisoning. The original additives should never be mixed with coolants which are not ap- The brake fluid level drops slightly when the ● If working inside the engine compart- proved by SEAT. Otherwise, you run the risk vehicle is being used as the brake pads are ment, remember that, even when the igni- of causing severe damage to the engine automatically adjusted as they wear. tion is switched off, the radiator fan may and the engine cooling system. start up automatically, and therefore there ● However, if the level goes down noticeably in is a risk of injury. If the fluid in the expansion tank is not purple but is, for example, brown, this indi- a short time, or drops below the “MIN” mark, cates that the G13 additive has been mixed there may be a leak in the brake system. A WARNING with an inadequate coolant. The coolant display on the instrument panel will warn you If there is not enough anti-freeze in the must be changed as soon as possible if this if the brake fluid level is too low ››› page 118. coolant system, the engine may fail lead- is the case! This could result in serious ing to serious damage. faults and engine damage. WARNING ● Please make sure that the percentage of Before opening the bonnet to check the additive is correct with respect to the low- brake fluid level, read and observe the warnings ››› page 315.

321 Practical tips

Changing the brake fluid ness. Never use a brake fluid if the container ment and qualified personnel for collecting does not state that it complies with VW 501 and disposing of this waste material. The Maintenance Programme indicates 14, DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 standards, or USA brake fluid change intervals. standards FMVSS 116 DOT 4. We recommend that you have the brake fluid WARNING changed by a Technical Service. Windscreen washer reservoir Brake fluid is poisonous. Old brake fluid im- Before opening the bonnet, please read and pairs the braking effect. Checking and topping up the wind- follow the warnings ››› in Safety notes for ● Before opening the bonnet to check the work in the engine compartment on screen washer reservoir water brake fluid level, read and observe the page 315 in section “Safety notes for working warnings ››› page 315. Read the additional information carefully in the engine compartment”. ● Brake fluid should be stored in the closed ›››  page 48 In the course of time, brake fluid becomes hy- original container in a safe place out of The windscreen washer is supplied with liq- groscopic and absorbs water from the ambi- reach of children. There is a toxic risk. uid from the windscreen washer reservoir in ent air. If the water content in the brake fluid is ● Perform the brake fluid change accord- the engine compartment. It has a capacity of too high, the brake system could corrode. ing to the Maintenance Programme. Heavy approximately 3 litres. This also considerably reduces the boiling use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock point of the brake fluid. Heavy use of the if the brake fluid is left in the brake system The tank is in the engine compartment. brakes may then cause a vapour lock which for too long. This would seriously affect the Plain water is not enough to clean the wind- could impair the braking effect. effectiveness of the brakes and the safety screen and headlights. We recommend that of the vehicle. This may cause an accident. Be sure to always use the correct brake fluid. you always add a product to the windscreen Only use brake fluid that expressly meets the washer fluid. Approved windscreen cleaning VW 501 14 standard. CAUTION products exist on the market with high deter- gent and anti-freeze properties, these may You can buy VW 501 14 standard brake fluid in Brake fluid damages the vehicle paintwork. be added all-year-round. Please follow the a SEAT dealership or a SEAT Official Service. Wipe off any brake fluid from the paintwork dilution instructions on the packaging. If none is available, use only high-quality immediately. brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925 CLASS 4 WARNING standards, or USA Standards FMVSS 116 DOT For the sake of the environment Any work carried out in the engine com- 4. The brake pads and brake fluid must be partment or on the engine must be carried collected and disposed of according the Using any other kind of brake fluid or one that out cautiously. is not of a high quality may affect operation applicable regulations. The SEAT Technical of the brake system and reduce its effective- Service network has the necessary equip-

322 Checking and refilling levels

● When working in the engine compart- WARNING and all electrical devices. The negative ca- ment, always observe the safety warnings ble on the battery must be disconnected. Always be aware of the danger of injury page 315. When a light bulb is changed, you need on- ››› and chemical burns as well as the risk of ly switch off the light. accident or fire when working on the bat- CAUTION tery and the electrical system: ● Deactivate the anti-theft alarm by unlocking the vehicle before you disconnect ● ● Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes, Never put radiator anti-freeze or other the battery! The alarm will otherwise be skin and clothing from acid and particles additives into the windscreen washer fluid. triggered. containing lead. ● Always use approved windscreen cleans- ● When disconnecting the battery from the ● Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear ing products diluted as per instructions. If vehicle on-board network, disconnect first protective gloves and eye protection. Do you use other washer fluids or soap solu- the negative cable and then the positive not tilt the batteries. This could spill acid tions, the tiny holes in the fan-shaped noz- cable. zles could become blocked. through the vents. ● Switch off all electrical devices before ● Rinse battery acid from eyes immediately reconnecting the battery. Reconnect first for several minutes with clear water. Then the positive cable and then the negative seek medical care immediately. Neutralise cable. Never reverse the polarity of the Vehicle battery any acid splashes on the skin or clothing connections. This could cause an electrical with a soapy solution, and rinse off with fire. Symbols and warnings on handling plenty of water. If acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a doctor immediately. ● Never charge a frozen battery, or one the battery which has thawed. This could result in ex- ● Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking plosions and chemical burns. Always re- are prohibited. When handling cables and Read the additional information carefully place a battery which has frozen. A flat electrical equipment, avoid causing sparks ›››  page 49 battery can also freeze at temperatures and electrostatic charge. Never short the close to 0°C (+32°F). battery terminals. High-energy sparks can Wear eye protection  cause injury. ● Ensure that the vent hose is always connected to the battery.  Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear pro- ● A highly explosive mixture of gases is re- tective gloves and eye protection! leased when the battery is under charge. ● Never use a defective battery. This could The batteries should be charged in a well- cause an explosion. Replace a damaged Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking are  ventilated room only. battery immediately. prohibited! ● Keep children away from acid and bat-  A highly explosive mixture of gases is released teries. CAUTION when the battery is under charge. ● Before working on the electrical system, ● Never disconnect the battery if the igni-  Keep children away from acid and batteries! you must switch off the engine, the ignition tion is switched on or if the engine is » 323 Practical tips

running. This could damage the electrical Checking the battery electrolyte ● Transparent/light yellow: the battery must system or electronic components. level be replaced. Contact a specialised workshop. ● Do not expose the battery to direct sunlight over a long period of time, as the in- The electrolyte level should be checked reg- tense ultraviolet radiation can damage the ularly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot coun- battery housing. tries and in older batteries. Charging or changing the battery ● If the vehicle is left standing in cold con- – Open the bonnet and open the battery The battery is maintenance-free and is ditions for a long period, protect the bat- cover at the front in Safety notes for ››› checked during the inspection service. All tery from “freezing”. If it freezes it will be work in the engine compartment on work on the vehicle battery requires specialist damaged. page 316 in Symbols and warnings ››› knowledge. on handling the battery on page 323. For vehicles with the battery under the spare If you often drive short distances or if the ve- Warning lamp wheel, open the rear lid and lift the floor hicle is not driven for long periods, the battery covering. The battery is located next to the should be checked by a specialised work-  It lights up spare wheel. shop between the scheduled services. – Check the colour display in the "magic eye" If the battery has discharged and you have Alternator fault. on the top of the battery. problems starting the vehicle, the battery might be damaged. If this happens, we rec- The control lamp lights up when the ignition is – If there are air bubbles in the window, tap ommend you have the vehicle battery switched on. It should go out when the engine the window gently until they disperse. has started running. checked by a Technical Service where it will The position of the battery is shown in the be re-charged or replaced. If the control lamp  lights up while driving, corresponding engine compartment diagram the alternator is no longer charging the bat- ››› page 317. Charging the battery tery. You should immediately drive to the The vehicle battery should be charged by a nearest specialised workshop. The “magic eye” indicator, located on the top of the battery changes colour, depending on specialised workshop only, as batteries using You should avoid using electrical equipment the charge state and electrolyte level of the special technology have been installed and that is not absolutely necessary because this battery. they must be charged in a controlled environ- will drain the battery. ment. There are two different colours:

● Black: correct charge status.

324 Wheels

Replacing a vehicle battery Wheels New tyres The battery has been developed to suit the New tyres do not give maximum grip straight conditions of its location and has special away and should therefore be “run in” by safety features. Wheels and tyres driving carefully and at moderate speeds for about the first 500 km (300 miles). This will Genuine SEAT batteries meet the mainte- General notes also increase the useful life of the tyres. nance, performance and safety specifications of your vehicle. – When driving with new tyres, be especially The tread depth of new tyres may vary, ac- careful during the first 500 km (300 miles). cording to the type and make of tyre and the WARNING tread pattern. – If you have to drive over a kerb or similar ● We recommend you use only mainte- obstacle, drive very slowly and as near as nance-free or cycle free leak-proof batter- Low profile tyres possible at a right angle to the obstacle. ies which comply with standards T 825 06 Low profile tyres, compared to other rim and and VW 7 50 73. This standard applies as of – Check from time to time if the tyres are tyre combinations, offer a broader tread and 2001 August or later. damaged (punctures, cuts, cracks or a greater rim diameter along with a lower ● Before starting any work on the batteries, dents). Remove any foreign objects em- height of the tyre sidewall. This results in a you must read and observe the warnings bedded in the treads. more agile driving behaviour. However, on ››› in Symbols and warnings on handling – Damaged wheels and tyres must be re- roads that are in poor condition, this might af- the battery on page 323. placed immediately. fect comfort and cause more noise.

– Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres. Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick- For the sake of the environment ly than standard tyres, for instance due to Batteries contain toxic substances such as – Replace any missing valve caps as soon as strong knocks, potholes, manhole covers and sulphuric acid and lead. They must be dis- possible. kerbs. Therefore, maintaining the correct tyre posed of appropriately and must not be – Mark the wheels before taking them off so pressure is particularly important disposed of with ordinary household waste. that they rotate in the same direction when ››› page 326. put back. To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drive – When removed, the wheels or tyres should with special care when driving on roads in be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark poor condition. place. Visually inspect your tyres every 3,000 km regarding damage, e.g. flattening/cracks on the tyre sidewall or deformations/cracks on the rims. »

325 Practical tips

If the rims and tyres have received a heavy WARNING The maximum tyre pressure values are shown impact or have been damaged, have them on a sticker stuck to the back of the left front checked and, if required, replaced at a speci- ● New tyres do not have maximum grip dur- door frame ››› Fig. 283. ing the first 500 km. Drive particularly alised workshop. carefully to avoid possible accidents. 1. Read the required tyre inflation pressure Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick- ● Never drive with damaged tyres. This from the sticker. The values refer to Sum- ly than standard tyres. may cause an accident. mer tyres. ● If you notice unusual vibrations or if the 2. The tyre pressures should only be checked Concealed damage vehicle pulls to one side when driving, stop when the tyres are cold. The slightly raised Damage to tyres and rims is often not readily the vehicle immediately and check the pressures of warm tyres must not be re- visible. If you notice unusual vibration or the tyres for damage. duced. car pulling to one side, this may indicate 3. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load you are that one of the tyres is damaged. Reduce carrying. speed immediately if there is any reason to Tyre pressure monitoring system suspect that damage may have occurred. In- Tyre pressure spect the tyres for damage. If no external The correct tyre pressure is especially impor- damage is visible, drive slowly and carefully tant at high speeds. The pressure should to the nearest specialised workshop and therefore be checked at least once a month have the car inspected. and before starting a journey. Tyres with directional tread pattern Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di- be adjusted to medium load to improve driv- rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al- ing comfort (“comfort” tyre pressure). When ways note the direction of rotation indicated driving with comfort tyre pressure fuel con- when mounting the wheel. This guarantees sumption may increase slightly. optimum grip and helps to avoid aquaplaning, excessive noise and wear. WARNING A tyre can easily burst if the pressure is too Retrofitting accessories low, causing an accident! If you wish to change or fit wheels, rims or ● At continuously high speeds, a tyre with wheel trims, we recommend that you consult insufficient pressure flexes more. In this with a SEAT Official Service centre for advice way it becomes too hot, and this can cause Fig. 283 Location of the tyre pressure sticker. tread separation and tyre blow-out. Always regarding current techniques. observe the recommended tyre pressures. 326 Wheels

● If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, reason, the tyre pressure should be checked the tyres will wear prematurely and the ve- at least once per month ››› page 326. hicle will not handle well. Risk of accident! Driving style For the sake of the environment Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear. Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel consumption. Changing wheels around If the front tyres are worn considerably more than the rear ones it is advisable to change Service life of tyres Fig. 285 Diagram for changing wheels. them around as shown ››› Fig. 285. The useful life of all the tyres will then be about the The useful life of tyres is dependent on tyre same time. pressure, driving style and fitting.

Wheel balance Wear indicators The wheels on new vehicles are balanced. The original tyres on your vehicle have However, various factors encountered in nor- 1.6 mm high “tread wear indicators” mal driving can cause them to become un- ››› Fig. 284, running across the tread. De- balanced, which results in steering vibration. pending on the make, there will be 6 to 8 of them evenly spaced around the tyre. Mark- Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced, ings on the tyre sidewall (for instance the let- as they otherwise cause excessive wear on Fig. 284 Tyre tread wear indicators. ters “TWI” or other symbols) indicate the po- steering, suspension and tyres. A wheel must sitions of the tread wear indicators. The mini- also be rebalanced when a new tyre is fitted. mum tread depth required by law is 1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the Incorrect wheel alignment tread wear indicators). Worn tyres must be Incorrect running gear alignment causes ex- replaced. Different figures may apply in excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the port countries ››› . vehicle. If tyres show excessive wear, you should have the wheel alignment checked by Tyre pressure a Technical Service. » Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature wear and could cause tyre blow-out. For this 327 Practical tips

WARNING The tyres and wheel rims are an essential “DOT ... 1116...” means, for example, that the part of the vehicle's design. Those approved tyre was produced in the 11th week of 2016. There is a serious danger of accidents if a by SEAT are specially matched to the char- tyre bursts during driving! We recommend that work on tyres and acteristics of the vehicle and make a major wheels be carried out by a Technical Service. ● The tyres must be replaced at the latest contribution to good road-holding and safe They are familiar with the procedure and when the tread wear indicators are worn handling ››› . ››› page 327. Failure to follow this instruc- have the necessary special tools and spare tion could result in an accident. Worn tyres Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and parts as well as the proper facilities for dis- do not grip well at high speeds on wet not individually (i.e. both front tyres or both posing of the old tyres. roads. There is also a greater risk of “aqua- rear tyres together). A knowledge of tyre des- Any technical service has full information on planing”. ignations makes it easier to choose the cor- the technical requirements when installing or rect tyres. Radial tyres have the tyre designa- ● At continuously high speeds, a tyre with changing tyres, wheels or wheel trims. insufficient pressure flexes more. This cau- tions marked on the sidewall, for example: ses it to overheat. This can cause tread 195/55 R16 91V WARNING separation and tyre blow-out. Risk of accident. Always observe the recommended This contains the following information: ● We recommend that you use only wheels tyre pressures. and tyres which have been approved by 195 Tyre width in mm SEAT for your model. Failure to do so could ● If tyres show excessive wear, you should impair vehicle handling. Risk of accident. have the running gear checked by a Tech- 55 Height/width ratio in % nical Service. R Tyre construction: Radial ● Avoid running the vehicle on tyres that are more than 6 years old. If you have no ● Keep chemicals such as oil, fuel and 16 Rim diameter in inches alternative, you should drive slowly and brake fluid away from tyres. 91 Load rating code with extra care at all times. ● Damaged wheels and tyres must be re- ● Never use old tyres or those with an un- placed immediately! V Speed rating known “history of use”. The tyres could also have the following infor- ● If wheel trims are retrofitted, you must For the sake of the environment mation: ensure that the flow of air to the brakes is not restricted. This could cause the brake Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con- ● A direction of rotation symbol sumption. system to overheat. ● “Reinforced” denotes heavy-duty tyres. ● All four wheels must be fitted with radial The manufacturing date is also indicated on tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and the same tread pattern. New tyres and wheels the tyre sidewall (possibly only on the outer side of the wheel). New tyres and wheels have to be run in.

328 Wheels

For the sake of the environment ensures that wheels are fitted securely and Tyre monitoring indicator* that the brake system functions correctly. Old tyres must be disposed of according to the laws in the country concerned. In certain circumstances, you should not use wheel bolts from a different vehicle, even if it is the same model page 307. Note ››› ● A SEAT Service Centre should be consul- WARNING ted to find out whether wheels or tyres of If the wheel bolts are not tightened cor- different sizes to those originally fitted by rectly, the wheel could become loose while SEAT can be fitted, and to find out about driving. Risk of accident. the combinations allowed between the front axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2). ● The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easily. Never apply grease or oil to them. ● For technical reasons, it is not generally Fig. 286 Centre console: tyre monitoring sys- possible to use the wheels from other vehi- ● Use only wheel bolts which belong to the tem button. cles. This can also apply to wheels of the wheel. same model. The use of wheels or tyres ● If the prescribed torque of the wheel Control lamp which have not been approved by SEAT for bolts is too low, they could loosen whilst use with your model may invalidate the ve- the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If  It lights up hicle's type approval for use on public the tightening torque is too high, the wheel The tyre pressure of a wheel is much lower than the roads. bolts and threads can be damaged. value set by the driver ››› . ● If the spare tyre is not the same as the Or: Fault in the tyre pressure gauge. tyres that are mounted on the vehicle (e.g. CAUTION winter tyres) you should only use the spare tyre for a short period of time and drive with The prescribed tightening torque for wheel The tyre pressure loss indicator compares the extra care. Refit the normal road wheel as bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm. revolutions and thus the wheel diameter of soon as possible. each wheel using the ESC. If the wheel diameter of a wheel changes, the control indicator of the tyres informs of this fact . The wheel Wheel bolts diameter changes when: ● Tyre pressure is insufficient. The design of wheel bolts is matched to the ● The tyre structure is damaged. rims. If different wheel rims are fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and cor- ● The vehicle is unbalanced because of a rectly shaped bolt heads must be used. This load. » 329 Practical tips

● The wheels of one axle are under more ● The driver is responsible for maintaining Spare wheel (temporary pressure (for example, driving with a trailer or correct tyre pressures. For this reason, tyre on steep slopes). pressure must be regularly checked. spare wheel)* ● The vehicle is fitted with snow chains. ● Under certain circumstances (e.g. when ● The temporary spare wheel is fitted. driving in a sporty manner, in winter condi- Location and use of the temporary tions or on a dirt track) the tyre control spare wheel ● The wheel on one axle is changed. lamp may light up belatedly or may function incorrectly. Tyre pressure adjustment After modifying tyre pressure or changing any Note wheels, the new tyre pressure must be stored in the Easy Connect system with the  /  If the battery is disconnected, the yellow warning lamp  lights up after turning the button and the SETTINGS function button ignition on. This should turn off after a brief  page 34. ››› journey. In vehicles without a radio, press and hold down the   ››› Fig. 286 button, with the ignition on, until an acoustic signal is heard. If the wheels are under excessive load (for example, driving with a trailer or heavy load), Fig. 287 In the boot: remove the subwoofer. the tyre pressure must be increased to the recommended value for a full load (see the The temporary spare wheel is stored under sticker on the back of the left front door the floor panel in the luggage compartment frame). If the tyre monitor system button is and is attached by a thumbnut. pressed down, the new tyre pressures are confirmed. How to use the temporary spare wheel If you ever have a punctured tyre or loss of WARNING pressure, the temporary spare wheel is only ● When the tyre pressure control lamp intended for temporary use until you reach a lights up, reduce speed immediately and workshop. Change it for a duty wheel as soon avoid any sudden turning or braking ma- as possible. noeuvre. Stop when possible, and check the tyre pressure and status. Please note the following restrictions when using the temporary spare wheel. This 330 Wheels temporary spare wheel has been specially ● When replacing the spare wheel, place the ● Do not drive at over 80 km/h (50 mph) designed for your vehicle, thus, it cannot be subwoofer speaker in the direction indicated when the temporary spare wheel is fitted changed with the temporary spare wheel by the arrow and with the word “FRONT” fac- on the vehicle: risk of accident! from another vehicle. ing forward. ● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking No other type of tyre (normal summer or win- ● Reconnect the speaker cable and firmly ro- and fast cornering: risk of accident! ter tyre) may be fitted on the compact tem- tate the securing wheel clockwise so that the ● Never use more than one temporary porary spare wheel rim. subwoofer system and wheel are firmly in spare wheel at the same time, risk of acci- place. dent. Snow chains ● No other type of tyre (normal summer or Removing the 16” temporary spare wheel For technical reasons, snow chains must not winter tyre) may be fitted on the compact (without subwoofer) be used on the temporary spare wheel. temporary spare wheel rim. ● Remove the luggage compartment varia- If you have a puncture on one of the front ble floor to access the wheel and the tools wheels when using snow chains, fit the tem- ››› page 158. porary spare wheel in place of one of the rear ● Winter service wheels. Fit the snow chains on the rear wheel Loosen the strap that secures the box by pressing on the buckle. that you have removed and replace the Winter tyres punctured front wheel with this wheel. ● Remove the toolbox. ● Turn the securing wheel anti-clockwise and In winter conditions winter tyres will consider- Getting the spare wheel out of vehicles remove it. ably improve the vehicle's handling. The de- with the Beats Audio® sound system (6 ● Press the thread and turn it 90° clockwise sign of summer tyres (width, rubber com- speakers with 1 subwoofer)* or anti-clockwise and remove it. pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice Disassemble the subwoofer's floor panel and snow. ● Pull on the front part of the spare wheel to (carpet) as follows: remove it. Winter tyres must be inflated to a pressure ● Pull the carpet upwards to remove it. of 0.2 bar (2.9 psi/20 kPa) higher than the WARNING pressures specified for summer tyres (see the ● Disconnect the cable for the subwoofer sticker on the back of the left front door speaker ››› Fig. 287 1 . ● After fitting the temporary spare wheel, check the tyre pressures as soon as possi- frame). ● Turn the securing wheel anti-clockwise 2 . ble. Failure to do so may cause an acci- Winter tyres must be fitted on all four wheels. ● Remove the subwoofer speaker and the dent. The tyre pressure is listed on the back spare wheel. of the left front door frame. Information on permitted winter tyre sizes can be found in the vehicle's registration documentation. Use only radial winter tyres. All » 331 Practical tips

tyre sizes listed in the vehicle documentation For the sake of the environment also apply to winter tyres. Fit your summer tyres again as soon as Winter tyres lose their effectiveness when the possible. They are quieter, do not wear so tread is worn down to a depth of 4 mm. quickly and reduce fuel consumption. The speed rating code ››› page 328, New tyres and wheels determines the following speed limits for winter tyres: ›››

Q max. 160 km/h (99 mph) S max. 180 km/h (112 mph) T max. 190 km/h (118 mph) H max. 210 km/h (130 mph)

In some countries, vehicles which can exceed the speed rating of the fitted tyre must have an appropriate sticker in the driver's field of view. These stickers are available from your technical service. The legal requirements of each country must be followed. Do not have winter tyres fitted for unnecessarily long periods. Vehicles with summer tyres handle better when the roads are free of snow and ice. If you have a flat tyre, please refer to the notes on the spare wheel ››› page 328, New tyres and wheels.

WARNING The maximum speed for the winter tyres must not be exceeded. Otherwise, this could lead to damage and risk of accident.

332 Service

Maintenance Service works ● Make sure that any repairs are carried In the Digital Maintenance Plan, your SEAT out by a SEAT authorised service or speci- authorised service or specialised workshop alised workshop. Service documents the following information: CAUTION ● When each one of the services was carried Service intervals out. SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage to the vehicle due to insufficient work or of ● Whether a specific repair has been sugges- lack of availability of spare parts. Servicing and Digital Maintenance ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the near Plan future. Note ● If you have expressed a special request for Log of services performed (“Digital Main- the maintenance. Your Service Advisor will Regular services on the vehicle not only tenance Plan”) write the work order. maintain its value, but also its correct operation and road safety. For this reason, con- The SEAT dealership or a specialised work- ● The components or fluids that were shop records Service receipts in a central duct the services in accordance with SEAT changed. guidelines. system. Thanks to this comprehensive docu- ● The date of the next service. mentation of the service history, it is possible to reproduce the services performed any The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid until time. SEAT recommends requesting a Service the next inspection. This information is docu- Fixed Service or Flexible Service receipt after every service carried out con- mented in all checks performed. taining all the services carried out on the sys- Services are classified as oil change service tem. The type and the volume of the service may and inspection. The service interval display vary from one vehicle to another. A special- on the instrument panel display serves as a Whenever there is a new service the receipt is ised workshop will be able to provide specific reminder of the next service. replaced with a current one. information on the jobs for your vehicle. Depending on the features, the engine and The Digital Maintenance Plan is not avail- the conditions of use of the car, either the able in some markets. In this case, your WARNING Fixed service or the Flexible service will be SEAT dealer will inform you about the cur- If the services are insufficient or not per- applied for an oil change service.. rent documentation of the work. formed and if the service intervals are not observed, the vehicle may be immobilised How to know which type of service needs in traffic cause an accident and severe in- to his vehicle juries. ● Check the tables below: »

333 Maintenance

Oil change servicea) you have to carry out this service, take into If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under ad- account the individual conditions of use and verse conditions of use, some of the work Type of personal driving style. A major component of must be carried out before the next service PR No. Service interval service the flexible service the use of LongLife oil in- period or even between service intervals. stead of conventional engine oil. Every 5000 km or after Conditions of use adverse include: QI1 1 yearb) Bear in mind the information about the specifications of the engine oil according to the ● The use of fuel with a high sulphur content. Every 7500 km or after QI2 VW standard page 46. ● Frequent short trips. 1 yearb) ›››  Fixed If you do not want to the flexible service ● Letting the engine idle for a long period of Every 10000 km or after QI3 time, as in the case of taxis. 1 yearb) you can select the fixed service However, a fixed service may affect service costs ● Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust. Every 15000 km or after QI4 The Service Advisor will gladly advise you. 1 yearb) ● Frequent driving with a trailer (depending on equipment). According to the service in- Service intervals display QI6 Flexible ● terval display Using the vehicle mostly in situations with a At SEAT, the dates of the services are indica- lot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city). a) ted by the service interval display on the in- The data are based on normal conditions of use. ● Using the vehicle mostly in winter. strument panel page 115 or in the Vehi- b) Whatever happens first. ››› cle settings menu of the infotainment sys- This applies especially for the following tem  page 34. The service interval dis- Inspection Servicea) ››› parts (depending on equipment): play gives information for service dates that According to the service interval display involve an engine oil change or an inspection. ● Dust and pollen filter When the time for the corresponding service a) ● Air Care allergen filter The data are based on normal conditions of use. comes, additional work required, such as the ● Air filter Bear in mind the information about the speci- change of brake fluid and the spark plugs, fications of the engine oil according to the can be carried out. ● Toothed chain VW standard ›››  page 46. ● Particulate filter ● Engine oil Particular characteristics of the Flexible Information on the conditions of Service use The Service Advisor of your specialised Regarding the Flexible Service, the oil workshop will gladly inform you about the change service only has to be performed The service intervals and groups are usually need of performing service work between when the vehicle needs it. To calculate when based on normal conditions of use.

334 Service normal service intervals, always considering Due to technical reasons (continuous devel- These parts are, approved parts, and are the the conditions of use of your vehicle. opment of components) the sets of services same as the factory parts, which are also ap- may vary. Your SEAT authorised service or proved spare parts. WARNING specialised workshop is always receiving up- If the services are insufficient or not per- dates in time. formed and if the service intervals are not Original accessories observed, the vehicle may be immobilised in traffic and cause accidents and severe We recommend you only use SEAT Original injuries. Additional service offers Accessories and SEAT approved accessories ● Have the services conducted at author- for your vehicle. The reliability, safety and ised SEAT services or specialised work- Approved spare parts suitability of these accessories have been in- shops. spected specifically for this type of vehicle. Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con- SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety and ceived for their vehicles and approved by suitability of parts from other manufacturers. CAUTION SEAT, with a special emphasis on safety. SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage These parts correspond exactly to the manu- to the vehicle due to insufficient work or of facturer's requirements in terms of design, SEAT Service Mobility (SEAT lack of availability of spare parts. accuracy of the measurements and materials. The original SEAT Spare Parts have been Service Mobility) conceived exclusively for your vehicle. For this Since the moment you purchase your SEAT Sets of services reason, we always recommend the use of Original SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot be vehicle you will be able to enjoy the benefits and coverage of the SEAT Mobility Service. Sets of services include all the maintenance held liable for the safety and suitability of works needed to ensure the safety and the parts from other manufacturers. For the first two years after the purchase, smooth running of the vehicle (depending on your new SEAT vehicle is automatically cov- the conditions of use and the features of ered by the SEAT Mobility Service without ad- the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, or Approved spare parts ditional costs. operating fluids). Maintenance services are If you wish to enjoy this service after this peri- Approved spare parts, following the manu- divided into inspection and review services. od, you can extend SEAT Mobility as long as facturer's requirements, are an additional Consult the details of the jobs required for you carry out the recommended Inspection service to you, offering the possibility of re- your vehicle at: and Maintenance Services at a SEAT Author- placing complete sets, such as: light engine, ised Service. » ● Your SEAT authorised service gearboxes, heads, control units, electrical ● Your specialised workshop components, etc. 335 Maintenance

If your SEAT vehicle is immobilised due to a Vehicle maintenance Washing the vehicle fault or an accident, our assistance services will help you keep moving. The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g. remains of insects, bird excrements, tree resin Take into account that the SEAT Mobility Maintenance and cleaning or anti frost salt adhered to your vehicle, the Service differs depending on the country in more damage it can cause to the surface. which the vehicle was purchased. For further Basic considerations High temperatures, for instance strong sun- information ask your SEAT dealership or the light, further intensify the damage. SEAT website in your country. Regular and careful care helps to maintain the value of your vehicle. In addition, it may Before washing the car, soften the dirt using become a prerequisite to demand the war- plenty of water. ranty in the event of corrosion damage and Warranty deficiencies in the paint coat of the body- To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, bird work. droppings or tree resin, use a lot of water and a microfibre cloth. Fault-free operation warranty Specialised workshops have the necessary care products. Please follow the instructions Have the underside of the vehicle washed af- SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfect for application on the packaging. ter the end of the anti frost salts in winter. condition of new vehicles. Check the purchase agreement or complementary addi- WARNING High pressure cleaners tional documentation provided by your Tech- ● When washing the vehicle with a high-pres- nical Service to see the conditions and the Cleaning products and other materials used for car care can be damaging to your sure cleaner, always follow the operating in- terms of the warranty. Consult further infor- health if misused. structions for the equipment. This applies mation in this regard in your SEAT Official particularly to the operating pressure and the Service. ● Always keep care products in a safe place, out of the reach of children. Danger distance between the spraying water. Do not of poisoning! aim the jet directly to the side window gaskets, doors, covers or the panoramic sunroof*; the same applies to tyres, rubber ho- For the sake of the environment ses, soundproofing material, sensors* or ● When purchasing car care products, camera lenses*. Keep a distance of at least chose products that are compatible with 40 cm. the environment. Do not remove snow and ice with a high- ● The waste from car-care products should pressure cleaner. not be disposed of with ordinary household waste.

336 Vehicle maintenance

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. To view mirrors must always be folded/de- in a direct stream or one that has a rotating avoid damaging the surface of the paint, do ployed electrically! jet for forcing off dirt. not apply too much pressure. ● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. The water temperature must not exceed Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it with Risk of damaging the paint job! 60°C. a neutral cleaning product and a soft microfi- ● Do not use sponges, abrasive household bre cloth. sponges or similar to clean insect remains. Automatic car wash tunnels Risk of damaging the surface! Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of water Spray the vehicle before starting the car and then leave it to dry. Remove traces of ● Vehicle parts with matte paint: wash. water with a leather cloth. – Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of Make sure that the windows and the panor- damaging the surface! WARNING amic sunroof* are closed and the windscreen – Never select washing programs that in- wipers are deactivated. Bear in mind the in- ● Only wash the vehicle with the ignition clude the use of wax. This could dam- structions of the car wash tunnel operator, switched off or according to the specifica- age the appearance of matte paint. especially if your vehicle has detachable tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Risk – Do not put stickers or magnets on parts parts. of accident! with matte paint, as removing them ● When cleaning the underbody or the in- may damage the paint. Use of car washes without brushes if possible. side of the wheel arches, protect yourself from sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk of For the sake of the environment Washing by hand cut! The car should only be washed in special Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a ● After cleaning the brakes could act more wash bays. These places are prepared to soft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean- slowly due to moisture or, in winter, the ice prevent oily water from getting into the ing products that do not contain solvents. on the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci- public drains. dent! In this case the brakes should be Washing vehicles with a matte paint by dried by pressing the brake pedal several hand times. Cleaning and maintenance instruc- To prevent damage to the vehicle when washing it, first remove the thicker dust and CAUTION tions dirt. To remove traces of insects, grease and ● Before washing the vehicle in an auto- The cleaning and maintenance of individual fingerprints, it is best to use a special cleaner matic car wash, please make sure to re- components of the vehicle can be checked in for matte paint. tract the exterior mirrors to prevent them the following tables. The contents should be from being damaged. Electric exterior rear- understood merely as a recommendation. Go to your specialised workshop if you have » 337 Maintenance

special questions or parts that are not listed. Wheels Problem Solution Take he general considerations into account Problem Solution Have your specialised work- ››› in Take special care with... on Corrosion page 341. Anti frost salt Water shop take care of this

Brake abrasion Acid-free special cleaning The water does dust product not create drop- Maintain with hard wax (at Exterior cleaning lets on the clean least 2 times a year) paint End exhausts Windscreen wipers Treat with suitable wax and ap- Problem Solution Problem Solution No shine de- ply paint preservative after- Anti frost salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod- spite sober main- wards if the wax used does not Dirt Soft cloth with wipers uct is required tenance/paint contain preservative ingredi- ents

Headlights / Tail lights Covers / Trims Tanks, e.g. insect Immediately soften with water remains, bird Problem Solution and remove with a microfibre Problem Solution droppings, tree cloth sap, road salt Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if a a) solution steel cleaning product is re- Fat-based dirt, Delete immediately with a neu- quired e.g. cosmetic a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in tral soap solutiona) and a soft products or 1 litre of water a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in cloth sunscreen 1 litre of water Sensors / Camera lenses a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in Paint Problem Solution 1 litre of water Problem Solution Sensors: soft cloth with clean- Carbon fibre parts ing product which does not Check the paint's colour code Problem Solution contain solvents Flaws in the paint in an authorised service and re- Dirt Camera lenses - soft cloth with store with a touch-up pencil Dirt Clean the same way as pain- cleaning product with no alco- ted parts ››› page 336 hol content Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with water

Hand brush/Anti frost spray Apply rust remover and then Snow/ice with no solvents Environmental rust apply hard wax. Go you your tank specialised workshop if you have any queries

338 Vehicle maintenance

Decoration slides Displays/instrument panel Problem Solution Problem Solution Problem Solution Grease-based Apply a neutral soap solutiona). Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystal dirt, e.g. oil, make- Absorb the dissolved grease solutiona) display cleaner up, etc. and paint particles drying with an absorbent cloth, in case you a) must treat it with water after- Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in Control panels 1 litre of water wards Problem Solution Special dirt, e.g. Special stain remove: dry with Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth with pens, nail polish, an absorbent cloth, if applica- Interior cleaning neutral soap solutiona) dispersion paint, ble, apply neutral soap solution shoe cream etc. afterwardsa) Windows a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water Problem Solution 1 litre of water Seat belts Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner and Natural leather Problem Solution then dry with a cloth Problem Solution a) Covers / Trims Dirt Neutral soap solution , allowed to dry before retracting Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soap solutiona) Problem Solution a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in Water-based dirt, Recent stains: absorbent cloth a) 1 litre of water Dirt Neutral soap solution e.g. coffee, tea, Dry stains: leather cleaner blood etc. a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather 1 litre of water Problem Solution Grease-based Recent stains: absorbent cloth dirt, e.g. oil, make- and leather cleaner Plastic parts Dirt particles ad- Vacuum cleaner up, etc. Dry stains: grease dissolving Problem Solution hered to the sur- spray face Special dirt, e.g. Stain remover suitable for Dirt Damp cloth Water-based dirt, Absorbent cloth and neutral pens, nail polish, leather » Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if pos- e.g. coffee, tea, soap solutiona) dispersion paint, sible solvent-free plastic clean- blood etc. shoe cream etc. er a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in 1 litre of water 339 Maintenance

Problem Solution Camera lenses ● The ambient rust deposits must not be re- ● Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice moved through friction. Risk of damaging the Care Apply preservative cream regu- or snow from the camera lenses. Risk of paint job! larly to protect from sunlight. cracking the lens! ● Use a colour preservative if re- Remove cosmetic products and sunlight quired ● To clean the camera lens, never use abra- immediately. Risk of damaging the paint job! sive cleaning products or products with alco- a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in hol. Risk of scratches and cracks! Displays/instrument panel 1 litre of water ● The screens, the instrument panel and the Carbon fibre parts Windows trim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk of ● Remove snow and ice from windows and scratches! Problem Solution exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To ● Make sure that the instrument panel is Dirt Clean like plastic parts avoid scratches, the scraper should only be switched off and cooled down before clean- pushed in one direction and not moved to ing. and fro. ● Make sure that no liquid leaks between the Take special care with... ● Never remove snow or ice from windows instrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam- and rearview mirrors with warm or hot water. age! Risk of cracks on the windows! Headlights/tail lights Control panels ● Do not clean the headlights/tail lights with ● To prevent damage to the heating of the ● Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con- a dry cloth or sponge. rear window, do not put stickers over the heating elements. trol panels. Risk of damage! ● Do not use cleaning products that contain alcohol. Risk of cracks! Covers/trims Seat belts ● Do not use cleaning products or chrome ● Do not remove the seat belts to clean them. Wheels based cleaning agents. ● Seat belts and their components must nev- ● Do not use for paint wax or other abrasive er be cleaned with chemical products, nor products. Paint should they be allowed to come into contact ● If the protective coating on the paint of the ● The vehicle must be free from dirt and dust with corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob- rim has been damaged due to stone impacts, before applying wax or care products. Risk of jects. Risk of damaging the fabric! scratches, etc., the damage should be re- scratches! ● If you find any damage to the belt webbing, paired immediately. ● Do not apply wax or care products if the belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle, vehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk of ask your specialised workshop to replace the damaging the paint job! belt in question.

340 Vehicle maintenance

Fabrics/artificial leather/Alcantara leath- longed period in the bright sun, it is best to er cover the leather. ● Do not treat artificial leather/Alcantara leather with leather cleaning products, sol- WARNING vents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers Do not use water-repellent coatings on the or similar products. windscreen. In bad visibility conditions ● If the stain is very hard to remove, take the such as humid weather, darkness or when vehicle to a specialised workshop to have it the sun is in its lowest point, visibility may removed there. This will prevent damage. be impacted. Risk of accident! Such coatings can also cause the windscreen wiper ● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard blades to make noise. sponges, etc. to clean. ● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the Note seats. ● Remains of insects can be removed much ● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv- more easily with previously treated paint. ets or belts can damage the surface. ● Regular car care treatments can prevent ● Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damage deposits of ambient rust. the seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcro fasteners are closed.

Natural leather Remove the vehicle from traffic ● Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, If you want to leave your vehicle stationary spot removers or similar products on leather. for a long period of time, contact a qualified ● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv- workshop. They will gladly inform you about ets or belts can damage the surface. the necessary measures, such as anti-corro- ● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard sion protection, Service and storage. sponges, etc. to clean. Also take into account instructions regarding ● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the the vehicle's battery ››› page 323. seats. ● Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight for long periods, otherwise it may tend to lose some of its colour. If the car is left for a pro-

341 Information for the user

the systems were inactive or active and if ceptions to this, depending on legal or con- Information for the user such action had an impact on the vehicle’s tractual provisions. dynamic behaviour, changing its path in the Due to legal requirements in safety-related aforementioned situations, accelerating or Information for the user products, SEAT may use the EDR data for decelerating the vehicle. field research and in order to improve vehicle Event Data Recorder Depending on vehicle equipment, this in- system quality. Any data used for the purpo- cludes data from systems such as: ses of research will be treated anonymously (in other words, no reference will be made to Description and operation ● Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) the vehicle, their owner or the lessee/hirer). ● Emergency braking assistance system Your vehicle has an event data recorder (Front Assist). (EDR). ● Park Pilot system The EDR’s function is to record data in the Other important information event of a mild or serious accident. These da- The EDR data are only recorded in specific ta are used to support the analysis of how dif- accident situations. No data are recorded in Recycling of electrical or electron- ferent vehicle systems behaved. normal driving conditions. ic devices The EDR records, over a reduced time range No audio or video data inside or around the All electrical or electronic devices (EED) that (normally 10 seconds or less), dynamic driv- vehicle are recorded. Under no circumstan- are not permanently fitted in the vehicle must ing data and data from the restraint systems, ces are personal data such as name, age, or be marked with the following symbol: such as: gender recorded. Nevertheless, third parties (such as criminal proceedings authorities)  ● How different vehicle systems worked. may relate the contents of the EDR data to ● Whether the driver and the occupants were other data sources and create a personal This symbol indicates that EED must not be wearing their seat belts. reference in the context of an accident inves- discarded as home waste but through selec- tigation. ● How hard the acceleration or brake pedal tive waste collection. was pressed. In order to read the EDR data it is necessary ● Vehicle speed. to access (if legally permitted to do so) the vehicle's ODB (“On-Board-Diagnose”) inter- These data will provide a better understand- face while the vehicle is switched on. ing of the circumstances of the accident. SEAT will not have access to EDR data unless Data from the driving assist systems are also the owner (or, in “Leasing” cases, the lessee recorded. This includes data such as whether or hirer) gives their consent. There may be ex-

342 Information for the user

Information about the EU Di- Features of the Name of the device Features of the Name of the device vehicle according to the dec- vehicle according to the dec- rective 2014/53/EU laration of compli- laration of compliance ance Simplified EU compliance declara- Radio frequency re- Sender STH SEAT - Infotainment system MIB2 Entry tion mote control (auxili- 50000914 ary heater) MIB Standard 2 Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi- Telestart ces. The manufacturers of these devices de- MIB2 Main-Unit Auxiliary heating 50000864 / D208L VW clare that they comply with Directive A580 / A270 2014/53/EU when legally required. Telestart Wireless charging WCH-183 The full text of the EU compliance declaration Bluetooth MIB2 Entry is available online at the following address: WCH-185 MIB Standard 2 5G0.980.611 www.seat.com/generalinfo  MIB2 Main-Unit Connection to the ex- UMTS/GSM-MMC A580 / A270 ternal antenna of the car UMTS/GSM-MMC-AG2 Table of correspondences Wireless hotspot MIB2 Main-Unit Instrument panel eNSF A580 / A270 The table of correspondences will help you to Immobilizer integrated in associate the name of the device in the dec- Keyless Access Sys- MQB-B B dashboard module laration of compliance with the features of tem instrument cluster the vehicle and the terminology used in the Radar sensors for as- ARS4-B Antenna FM/AM Antenna Base on-board documentation. sistance systems MRRevo14F Antennas MQB27 Small/Big family Features of the Name of the device BSD3.0 vehicle according to the dec- Antennas KSA Small Fam III laration of compli- Central control unit 5WK50254 ance 5Q0.035.507 Roof Antenna 5WK50474 Radiofrequency re- FS09, FS12A, FS12P, FS1477, GNSS Antenna VAG mote control (vehicle) FS94 720166002 8S7.035.503.B » 343 Information for the user

Features of the Name of the device Addresses of the manufacturers Radioelectrical Addresses of the vehicle according to the dec- equipment fitted manufacturers laration of compli- According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, all in the vehicle ance relevant components must include the address of the manufacturer. Digades gmbH Antenna amplifiers 6F0.035.225 Äußere Weberstraße 20 The address of the manufacturers of compo- 6F9.035.225 Radio frequency re- 02763 Zittau, GERMANY 3V5.035.577.A nents that, due to their size or nature, cannot mote control (auxiliary 7N0.035.552.J include a sticker are listed below, as long as it Webasto Thermo & heater) Comfort SE 7N0.035.552.K is legally required: 7N0.035.552.Q Friedrichshafener Str. 9 5F4.035.225 82205 Gilching, GERMANY 5F4.035.225.A Radioelectrical Addresses of the ADC Automotive Distance 5F4.035.225.B equipment fitted manufacturers Control Systems GmbH 5F9.035.225 in the vehicle Peter-Dornier-Straße 10 5F9.035.225.A 88131 Lindau, GERMANY 5F9.035.225.B Hella KGaA Hueck & Co. Radar sensors for as- 575.035.225 Radiofrequency remote Rixbecker Straße 75 sistance systems Robert Bosch GmbH 575.035.225.A control key 59552 Lippstadt, Postfach 16 61 575.035.225.B GERMANY 71226 Leonberg, GERMANY

Frequency bands, station power

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)

433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle) All SEAT models 868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW

434.42 MHz 32 µW

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 0.24 mW, / –6.3 dBm e.r.p. Ateca Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary heater) 868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 3.1 mW, / 4.8 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

344 Information for the user

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra Auxiliary heating 868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Ateca

2402-2480 MHz 6 dBm Bluethooth All SEAT models 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm

Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm Leon and Ateca

GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

GSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm Connection to the external antenna of the car Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Alhambra WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm

WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm

Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 µW Ibiza, Toledo, Arona, Leon and Ateca

28.2 dBm Toledo, Leon and Alhambra 76 GHz-77 GHz Radar sensors for assistance systems 35.0 dBm Ibiza, Arona and Ateca

24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Arona, Ateca and Alhambra

Wireless charging 110-120 kHz 10 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon and Ateca

Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m All SEAT models a) The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.

345 Technical data

Abbreviations used in the technical speci- ››› Fig. 288. Additionally, the chassis number Technical data fications section is located in the engine compartment, on the right-hand side. The number is engraved on Technical specifications kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement. the top side rail, and is partially covered. Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly PS used to denote engine power. VIN in the Easy Connect Important information rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed. ● Select:  /  button > function button SETTINGS > Service > Chassis number. Important Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque. Cetane number, indication of the die- Identification plate CZ The information in the vehicle documentation sel combustion power. always takes precedence over the informa- The identification plate is located on the rear Research octane number, indication of pillar of the right-hand front door. Vehicles for tion in this Instruction Manual. RON the knock resistance of petrol. certain export countries do not have an iden- All technical specifications provided in this tification plate. documentation are valid for the standard model in Spain. Vehicle identification data Identifying letters The figures may be different depending The identifying letters of the engine can be whether additional equipment is fitted, for dif- viewed on the instrument panel when the en- ferent models, for special vehicles and for gine is switched off and the ignition is on. other countries. ● Hold down the button  on the dash panel for more than 15 seconds.

Information on fuel consumption Fig. 288 Chassis number. Fuel consumption Chassis number Approved consumption values are derived The VIN is located in the Easy Connect and from measurements performed or supervised under the windscreen, on the driver side by certified EU laboratories, according to the 346 Technical specifications legislation in force at the time (for more infor- WARNING Drawbar loads mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu- The maximum permitted drawbar load on the ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: © Eu- ● Please note that the centre of gravity may shift when transporting heavy objects; ball coupling of the towing bracket must not ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and this may affect vehicle handling and lead exceed 55 kg. apply to the specified vehicle characteristics. to an accident. Always adjust your speed In the interest of road safety, we recommend and driving style to suit road conditions The values relating to fuel consumption and that you always tow approaching the maxi- and requirements. CO2 emissions can be found in the documen- mum drawbar load. The response of the trail- tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi- ● Never exceed the gross axle weight rat- er on the road will be poor, if the drawbar cle at the time of purchase. ing or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the load is too small. permissible axle load or the permissible to- Fuel consumption and CO emissions de- 2 tal weight is exceeded, the driving charac- If the maximum permissible drawbar load pend on the equipment/features of each indi- teristics of the vehicle may change, leading cannot be met (e.g. with small, empty and vidual vehicle, as well as on the driving style, to accidents, injuries and damage to the light-weight single axle trailers or tandem road conditions, traffic conditions, environ- vehicle. axle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1 mental conditions, load or number of passen- metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer gers. weight is legally required for the drawbar load. Note Trailer mode In practice, and considering all the factors WARNING mentioned here, consumption values can Trailer weights ● For safety reasons, you should not drive differ from those calculated in the current at speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph) when European regulations. The trailer weights and drawbar loads ap- towing a trailer. This also applies in coun- proved are selected in intensive trials accord- tries where higher speeds are permitted. ing to precisely defined criteria. The ap- ● Never exceed the maximum trailer Weights proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in weights or the drawbar load. If the permis- the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50 sible axle load or the permissible total Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a mph) (in certain circumstances up to weight is exceeded, the driving character- fuel tank filled to 90% capacity and without 100 km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be dif- istics of the vehicle may change, leading to optional extras. The figure quoted includes 75 ferent in other countries. All data in the official accidents, injuries and damage to the vehi- kg to allow for the weight of the driver. vehicle documentation takes precedence cle. over these data at all times ››› . Special versions, optional equipment fittings or retro-fitting accessories will increase the weight of the vehicle ››› .

347 Technical data

Wheels Note We recommend that you ask your Techni- Tyre pressure and wheel bolts cal Service for information about appropriate wheel, tyre and snow chain size. Tyre pressure The sticker with the tyre pressure values can be found on the back of the left front door frame. The tyre pressure values given there are for cold tyres. Do not reduce the slightly raised pressures of warm tyres ››› . The pressure for winter tyres is 0.2 bar higher than that of summer tyres (2.9 psi / 20 kPa).

Wheel bolts After the wheels have been changed, the tightening torque of the wheel bolts should be checked as soon as possible with a torque wrench ››› . The tightening torque for steel and alloy wheels is 120 Nm.

WARNING ● Check the tyre pressure at least once per month. Checking the tyre pressure is very important. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, there is an increased danger of accidents - particularly at high speeds. ● If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts is too low, they could loosen while the vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the tightening torque is too high, the wheel bolts and threads can be damaged.

348 Technical specifications

Engine data

Petrol engines

1.0 TSI Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 70 (95)/5,000-5,500 85 (115)/5,000-5,500

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 175/2,000-3,500 200/2,000-3,500

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 3/999 3/999

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual manual DSG

Top speed (km/h) 173 (IV) 182 (V) 182 (VI)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.4 6.6 6.7

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.4 9.8 10.0

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,615-1,700a) 1,625-1,710a) 1,655-1,740a)

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,180 1,189 1,212

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 850 860 890

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 815-900b) 815-900b) 815-900b)

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 590 590 600

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,100 1,200 1,200

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,000 1,100 1,100 a) Varies depending on the features. b) Varies depending on the rear spring.

349 Technical data

Petrol engines

1.5 TSI Evo Start-Stop 1.6 MPI

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 110 (150)/5,000-6,000 81 (110)/5,800

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1,500-3,500 155/3,800-4,000

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,498 4/1,598

Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual manual automatic

Top speed (km/h) 205 (V) 181 (IV) 181 (IV)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 5.8 7.1 7.3

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 8.3 11.1 11.5

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,665-1,750a) 1,595-1,680a) 1,635-1,720a)

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,222 1,156 1,194

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 900 830 870

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 815-900b) 815-900b) 815-900b)

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 610 570 590

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,200 1,200 1,200

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,200 1,100 1,100

a) Varies depending on the features. b) Varies depending on the rear spring.

350 Technical specifications

Natural gas/petrol engines

1.0 TGI Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 66 (90)/4,500-5,800

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 160/1,900-3,500

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 3/999

CNG Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ

Gearbox manual

Top speed (km/h) 169 (4)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 8.6

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 13.2

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,700

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,301

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) a)

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) a)

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 650

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) a)

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) a) a) Data not available as this edition goes to print.

351 Technical data

Diesel engines

1.6 TDI CR Start-Stop

Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 70 (95)/2,750-4,600 85 (115)/3,250-4,000

Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1,500-2,600 250/1,500-3,200

No. of cylinders/displacement (cm3) 4/1,598 4/1,598

Fuel Diesel according to standard EN 590, min. 51 CN

Gearbox manual DSG manual

Top speed (km/h) 172 (5) 174 (6) 185 (5)

Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.9 8.4 7.1

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.9 12.8 10.3

Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,715-1,800a) 1,745-1,830a) 1,725-1,810a)

Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,297 1,320 1,303

Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 950 980 960

Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 815-900b) 815-900b) 815-900b)

Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 640 660 650

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,200 1,200 1,200

Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,200 1,100 1,200

a) Varies depending on the features. b) Varies depending on the rear spring.

352 Technical specifications

Vehicle data

Dimensions

Fig. 289 Dimensions and angles. »

353 Technical data

››› Fig. 289 ARONA

A Front projection (mm) 803

B Rear projection (mm) 769

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,566

D Length (mm) 4,138

E Fronta) track (mm) 1,503

F Backa) track (mm) 1,486

G Width (mm) 1,780

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,552b)

I Ground clearance between the axles (mm) 190

J Front projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 20.1°

K Rear projection angle limited by the bumper maximum 29.5°

Turning radius (m) 11.0

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim. b) Dimension to the roof bars.

354 Index

Adjusting the front seats Android Auto™ ...... 183, 185 Index adjusting the lumbar support ...... 148 Anti-freeze ...... 47 Adjusting the head restraints Anti-lock brake system ...... 226, 228, 229 A front head restraints ...... 148 Anti-locking system ABS ...... 229 rear head restraints ...... 68 control lamp ...... 229 control lamp ...... 229 Adjusting the seat ...... 148 Anti-puncture ...... 52, 85 ACC ...... 259 Adjustment Anti-puncture kit ...... 52, 85 radar sensor ...... 261 front head restraints ...... 148 check after 10 minutes ...... 86 Accessories ...... 307 Airbag covers ...... 21 Anti-puncture set ...... 85 Active cylinder management (ACT) Airbags ...... 74 Anti-theft alarm ...... 133 status indication ...... 106 Airbag system ...... 21, 74 trailer ...... 303 Adaptive Cruise Control ...... 250, 259 activation ...... 76 vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow control and warning lamps ...... 260 control lamp ...... 79 protection ...... 135 deactivating temporarily ...... 266 deactivation of front airbag ...... 78 Anti-theft alarm system ...... 133 function for preventing overtaking in an in- description ...... 75 switching off ...... 134 side lane ...... 265 front airbags ...... 21, 76 Anti-theft security system ...... 15 instructions on the screen ...... 261 functioning ...... 76 Anti-tow protection ...... 135 malfunction ...... 260 head-protection airbags ...... 23, 77 App operating ...... 262 side airbags ...... 22, 77 SEAT Media Control ...... 187 radar sensor ...... 261 Air conditioning ...... 41 Apple CarPlay™ ...... 183, 185 special driving situations ...... 266 Climatronic ...... 168 Aquaplaning ...... 328 AdBlue controls ...... 166 Ashtray ...... 154 information ...... 313 general notes ...... 161 Aspects to note before setting off ...... 63 maximum filling capacity ...... 313 manual air conditioning ...... 44 ASR ...... 227 refilling ...... 314 Air outlets ...... 163 control lamp ...... 227 specification ...... 314 Air recirculation Assistance systems tank capacity ...... 313 air conditioning ...... 163 ACC ...... 259 Adjust Alarm system ...... 133 adaptive cruise control ...... 259 Vehicle menu ...... 34 switching off ...... 134 blind spot detector (BSD) with parking as- Adjusting Alcantara leather: cleaning ...... 339 sistance (RCTA) ...... 269 front head restraints ...... 67 Alternator Cruise control system ...... 250 lights ...... 143 warning lamp ...... 324 emergency braking assistance (Front As- rear head restraints ...... 68, 149 Ambient lighting ...... 144 sist) ...... 255 seats ...... 64 Anchoring fatigue detection ...... 110 the front tow line...... 89 Park Assist ...... 276 355 Index

parking assistant (RCTA) ...... 269 Blind spot detector (BSD) ...... 269 C parking system Plus ...... 286 control lamps ...... 269 Capacities ...... 46 rear parking aid ...... 290 driving situations ...... 272 AdBlue tank ...... 313 speed limiter ...... 252 indication in the external rear view mirror . . 270 natural gas tank ...... 309 Assisted starting ...... 59 malfunction ...... 269 Catalytic converter ...... 246 Audible warning signal operating ...... 270 malfunction ...... 246 control and warning lamps ...... 118 towing ...... 274 CCS ...... 38 unfastened safety belt ...... 69 Bluetooth® Central locking Automatic car wash tunnel ...... 337 connect audio source ...... 196 anti-theft alarm ...... 133 Automatic dipped beam control ...... 139 Bonnet ...... 315, 317 automatic speed-dependent locking ...... 129 Automatic gearbox ...... 233 close ...... 18 central locking button ...... 129 downhill speed control ...... 239 closure ...... 18 electric windows ...... 138 driving tips ...... 236 opening ...... 17 emergency locking ...... 16 emergency program ...... 240 Brake assistance system ...... 226 key by remote control ...... 125 kick-down feature ...... 237 Brake fluid ...... 48, 321 Keyless Access ...... 130 launch control program ...... 238 changing ...... 322 selective unlocking system ...... 128 manual release of the selector lever ...... 40 Brake pads ...... 223, 243 self-locking system to prevent involuntary selector lever lock ...... 234 Brakes unlocking ...... 129 selector lever positions ...... 233 brake fluid ...... 321 unlocking system ...... 129 steering wheel with gear shift paddles . . . . 236 new Brake pads ...... 223 Central locking system ...... 127 tiptronic ...... 233, 236 Brake servo ...... 223, 231 safe security system ...... 127 Automatic transmission Brake system ...... 321 Central wheel trim ...... 53 control lamp ...... 233 warning lamp ...... 224 Centre console ...... 13 AUX-IN ...... 214 Braking Cetane number (diesel fuel) ...... 312 external audio source ...... 195 brake assistance system ...... 226 Changing a wheel ...... 53 Average consumption ...... 104 Braking distance ...... 223 subsequent work ...... 57 BSD wheel bolts ...... 54 B see Blind spot detector (BSD) ...... 269 Changing bulbs Battery ...... 126 Bulbs additional brake light ...... 98 Before setting off ...... 63 changing bulbs ...... 93 dipped beam ...... 95 Belt tensioners Buzzer ...... 141 DRL (daytime running light) ...... 95 control lamp ...... 79 fog light ...... 96 Belt tightening ...... 73 general notes ...... 93 Biodiesel ...... 312 interior light and reading light ...... 98

356 Index

luggage compartment light ...... 98 sensors/camera lenses ...... 338 Control and warning lamps ...... 118 main beam headlight ...... 94 special care ...... 340 ABS anti-blocking system ...... 226 number plate light ...... 97 the radio screen ...... 339 adaptive cruise control ...... 260 rear bulb in the side panel ...... 96 trims/covers ...... 338, 339 airbags ...... 78 rear light in the rear lid ...... 97 washing the vehicle ...... 336 airbag system ...... 79 turn signal light ...... 95 wheels ...... 338 alternator ...... 324 Changing the blades ...... 87 windows ...... 339 applying the brake ...... 260 Charging the battery ...... 59 windscreen wipers ...... 338 ASR ...... 226 Checking levels Climatronic ...... 42 audible warning signal ...... 118 engine compartment ...... 317 adjusting the temperature ...... 169 blind spot detector (BSD) ...... 269 Child-proof locking automatic mode ...... 169 brake systems ...... 224 electric windows ...... 136 controls ...... 168 cruise control system (CCS) ...... 250 Child seat ...... 23, 82 fan regulation ...... 169 depress the brake ...... 255 Child seats general notes ...... 161 diesel preheating system ...... 245 categorisation into groups ...... 82 windscreen defrost ...... 169 EDL ...... 229 ISOFIX system ...... 27 Clocks EDS ...... 226 safety instructions ...... 24, 81 analogue ...... 111 emission control ...... 245 securing with seat belt ...... 25 digital ...... 111 engine management ...... 245 Top Tether system ...... 27, 30 set time ...... 111 engine oil ...... 318 Cigarette lighter ...... 155 Close ...... 125 ESC ...... 226 Cleaning bonnet ...... 18 gear change ...... 240 Alcantara leather ...... 339 Closing ...... 125 handbrake ...... 224 carbon fibre ...... 338, 340 windows ...... 136 instrument panel ...... 37 control panels ...... 339 Windows ...... 136 lights ...... 139 decorative sheets ...... 339 Clutch (warning lamp) ...... 240 parking assistant (RCTA) ...... 269 exhaust tail pipes ...... 338 Coming Home ...... 141 particulate filter ...... 245 exterior ...... 338 Coming Home Function ...... 141 seat belt ...... 69 fabrics ...... 339 Communication between the Infotainment speed limiter ...... 252 headlights / tail lights ...... 338 system and mobile devices ...... 179 Start-Stop ...... 248 high pressure cleaners ...... 336 Connectivity ...... 179 steering column lock ...... 242 Interior ...... 339 Full Link ...... 179 transmission ...... 233 leather ...... 339 SEAT Media Control ...... 187 tyres ...... 329 paint ...... 338 WLAN point of access ...... 188 plastic parts ...... 339 Connectivity Box ...... 215 seat belts ...... 339 Contact key ...... 217 357 Index

Control lamps Deactivation of front airbag ...... 78 Door release lever ...... 101 engine coolant ...... 114 Detachable ball Doors Fuel reserve ...... 113 assembling ...... 297, 298 childproof locks ...... 133 refuel ...... 113 checking attachment ...... 299 opening and closing ...... 15 Controls and displays placing in standby position ...... 296 Downhill speed control ...... 239 general instrument panel ...... 101 removing ...... 299, 300 Downhill speed control function ...... 239 Controls for the windows ...... 18, 136 standby position ...... 297 Driver Controls on the steering wheel ...... 119 Diesel see Correct sitting position ...... 64, 65, 66 Coolant particulate filter ...... 246 Driver-side general instrument panel checking level ...... 320 refuelling ...... 312 left-hand drive ...... 9 Coolant temperature Diesel fuel right-hand drive ...... 10 safety recommendations ...... 320 particulate filter ...... 246 Driving Cooling system Digital instrument driving abroad ...... 142, 247 checking coolant ...... 320 panel (SEAT Digital Cockpit) ...... 104 driving through water ...... 247 topping up coolant ...... 320 Digital SEAT Cockpit economic ...... 244 Correct position ...... 64 navigation map ...... 105 safe ...... 63 Correct sitting position Dimensions ...... 353 with a trailer ...... 300, 303, 304 driver ...... 64 Direction of rotation with trailer ...... 295 front passenger ...... 65 tyres ...... 57 Driving abroad rear seat passengers ...... 66 Display ...... 103 headlights ...... 142 Cruise control ...... 38 Display indications petrol ...... 247 control and warning lamps ...... 250 compass indications ...... 107 Driving mode ...... 275 operation ...... 251 driving recommendation ...... 106 Driving on flooded roads ...... 247 Cruise control system ...... 250 instrument panel ...... 106 Driving profile ...... 275 Current ...... 154 speed limiter ...... 252 DSG ...... 233 Cylinder deactivation status of active cylinder management Duplicate keys ...... 125 see Active cylinder management (ACT) . . . 106 (ACT) ...... 106 Dust and pollen filter ...... 161 time ...... 111 Dynamic lights range control ...... 143 D Disposal Dangers in not using the seat belt ...... 71 belt tensioners ...... 74 E Dashboard ...... 102 Distance control E10 Dash panel ...... 37 see Adaptive Cruise Control ...... 259 see Ethanol (fuel) ...... 312 Data label ...... 346 Door cylinder ...... 15 Easy Connect ...... 34 Data transfer ...... 179 Door handle ...... 15 EDL Deactivating the front passenger front airbag . 22 Door lock ...... 15 see Electronic differential lock ...... 229 358 Index

EDS ...... 229 switching off temporarily ...... 258 specifications ...... 47 Electrical power socket ...... 154 system limitations ...... 259 temperature display ...... 114 Electrical socket Emergency operation warning lamp ...... 114 trailer ...... 302 front passenger door ...... 16 Engine data ...... 349, 350 Electric windows ...... 18, 136 selector lever ...... 40 Engine management ...... 245 convenience opening and closing ...... 138 Emergency warning triangle ...... 84 control lamp ...... 245 Electrolyte ...... 324 Emission control system Engine oil ...... 46, 318 Electronic differential lock ...... 226, 228, 229 control lamp ...... 245 changing ...... 318, 319 control lamp ...... 229 Emissions data ...... 346 checking engine oil level ...... 319 Electronic immobiliser ...... 15, 219 Engine consumption ...... 319 Electronic stability control (ESC) ...... 226 assisted starting ...... 59 diesel ...... 318 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...... 228 noises ...... 222 dipstick ...... 319 Electronic torque management (XDS) ...... 231 running in ...... 242 inspection service ...... 318 Emergencies ...... 84 Engine and ignition maintenance intervals ...... 318 automatic gearbox emergency program . 240 automatic ignition switch-off ...... 220 oil properties ...... 46 bulbs ...... 51 My Beat ...... 223 specifications ...... 47, 318 changing a wheel ...... 53 preheating the engine ...... 222 topping up ...... 319 changing the battery ...... 324 starting the engine ...... 222 Engine oil pressure emergency towing of the vehicle ...... 58 starting the engine with Press & Drive . . . . . 222 control lamp ...... 318 emergency warning triangle ...... 84 stopping the engine ...... 222 Enlarging fire extinguisher ...... 84 Engine breakdown the luggage compartment ...... 151 first-aid kit ...... 84 Control lamp ...... 245 Environment fuses ...... 50 Engine compartment ...... 315, 317 environmental compatibility ...... 243 hazard warning lights ...... 143 battery ...... 323 environmentally-friendly driving ...... 244 jump leads ...... 59 brake fluid ...... 321 Environmental tip puncture ...... 52 coolant ...... 320 refuelling ...... 308 replacing a blown fuse ...... 50 engine oil ...... 318, 319 Equipment ...... 307 Spare wheel ...... 330 opening ...... 17 ESC ...... 226 vehicle tools ...... 84 safety notes ...... 315 Electronic stability control ...... 226 Emergency braking assistance system windscreen washer liquid ...... 322 Multi-collision Brake ...... 231 indications on the display ...... 255 Engine coolant ...... 47 Sport Mode ...... 228 malfunction ...... 257 checking level ...... 320 Ethanol (fuel) ...... 312 operating ...... 258 control lamp ...... 114 Event Data Recorder ...... 342 radar sensor ...... 257 G12 plus-plus ...... 47 G13 ...... 47 359 Index

Exhaust filtering system Frequency band Fuses ...... 50, 91 catalytic converter ...... 246 AM ...... 190 fuse box ...... 91 particulate filter ...... 246 change ...... 190 identifying blown fuses ...... 51 Exhaust purification system for vehicles with DAB ...... 190 identifying by colours ...... 50 diesel engines ...... 313 FM ...... 190 preparation before replacing ...... 50 Exiting a parking space with Park Assist . . . . . 283 Front airbags ...... 21 replacing ...... 50 Exterior lighting safety instructions ...... 76 changing bulbs ...... 93 Front Assist G Exterior mirrors ...... 146 indications on the display ...... 255 Gear-change indicator ...... 240 adjustment ...... 20 Front drink holder ...... 154 Gearbox DSG control ...... 147 Front passenger front airbag see Automatic gearbox ...... 233 folding in electrically ...... 147 control lamp ...... 79 Gearbox lever ...... 40 folding in manually ...... 146 deactivation ...... 22 Gear change ...... 40 heated ...... 147 Front seats automatic ...... 40 Exterior view ...... 7, 8 manual adjustment ...... 19 changing gears (manual gearbox) ...... 232 External aerial ...... 307 Fuel ...... 46, 310 kick-down ...... 276 consumption ...... 346 manual ...... 40 F diesel ...... 312 manual gearbox ...... 232 Fabrics: cleaning ...... 339 ethanol ...... 312 Gear engaged ...... 40 Fastening rings ...... 157 fuel gauge ...... 113 Gear recommendation ...... 240 Fatigue detection ...... 110 identification ...... 310 Gear shift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . . 236 Fault in electronic differential lock (EDL) natural gas ...... 312 General control lamp ...... 229 petrol ...... 311 instrument panel ...... 104 Faulty bulbs saving ...... 244 General instrument panel changing the bulbs ...... 93 Fuel consumption ...... 244 control and warning lamps ...... 37 Filling the fuel tank ...... 308 Why does fuel consumption increase? . . . . 246 controls and displays ...... 101 Fire extinguisher ...... 84 Fuel gauge ...... 113 turn signal and main beam lever ...... 140 First-aid kit ...... 84 control lamp ...... 113 General overview of the engine compart- Floor mats ...... 68 Fuel tank cap ment ...... 317 Fluid level control ...... 46 opening and closing ...... 46 Glove compartment ...... 153 Fog Full Link ...... 179 Glow plug system ...... 218 lights with cornering light function ...... 142 pairing ...... 183 Fog light bulb ...... 96 setup ...... 183 Fog lights with cornering light function ...... 142 Function buttons ...... 175

360 Index

H How to jump start ...... 59 Infotainment knobs ...... 174 description ...... 59 Infotainment system ...... 34 Handbrake ...... 224 Hydraulic Brake Assist CD player ...... 194 lamp ...... 224 automatic hazard warning lights activa- function buttons ...... 175 Hazard warning lights ...... 32, 143 tion ...... 230 general instructions for use ...... 174 HBA ...... 230 general panel of the device ...... 172 Head-on collisions and their laws of physics . . 71 I input mask ...... 177 Head-protection airbags Identification of the fuel ...... 310 memory card ...... 194 description ...... 23 Identification plate ...... 346 on-screen keypad ...... 177 safety instructions ...... 23 Identifying letters on engine ...... 346 text input ...... 177 Headlights Identifying letters on the engine update navigation data ...... 199 driving abroad ...... 142 show ...... 108 Infotainment System ...... 170 fog lights ...... 140 Ignition ...... 31, 217 AUX-IN ...... 195 Head restraints ...... 19 Ignition lock ...... 31, 217 Bluetooth® audio ...... 196 adjustment ...... 148 see Starter button ...... 220 changing the volume ...... 175 front head restraints ...... 67 Incorrect position ...... 66 general panel ...... 173 rear head restraints ...... 68 Indications on the display ...... 107 Images main menu ...... 197 Headrests ...... 19 ACT ...... 244 infotainment knobs ...... 174 adjustment ...... 148 adaptive cruise control ...... 261 initial configuration ...... 178 front ...... 67 ECO ...... 107 Internet access ...... 189 rear ...... 68 Emergency braking assistance system Media mode ...... 191 Heated rear window ...... 43, 45 (Front Assist) ...... 255 memory buttons ...... 191 switch ...... 145 identifying letters of the engine ...... 107 mute ...... 175 Heating ...... 165 odometer ...... 106 navigation ...... 198 defrosting the windscreen ...... 165 SEAT Drive Profile ...... 274 proximity sensors ...... 178 demisting the windscreen and side win- selector lever positions ...... 233 Radio mode ...... 190 dows ...... 165 service intervals ...... 115 rotary knobs ...... 174 Heating and fresh air ...... 44, 164 warning and information messages ...... 110 safety instructions ...... 170 Heating and fresh air system Indications on the screen scroll knob ...... 176 controls ...... 164 doors, bonnet and rear lid open ...... 106 scroll (display) ...... 176 Heating or cooling the interior ...... 166 Outside temperature ...... 106 search in lists ...... 176 Heating system ...... 165 positions of the selector lever ...... 106 sharing a WLAN connection ...... 188 Hill driving assistant ...... 231 speed warning ...... 107 standby ...... 174 Horn ...... 101 Inertia mode ...... 239 station logos ...... 191 Information profiles ...... 104 switch on and off ...... 174 361 Index

Telephone mode ...... 209 Jump leads ...... 59 Lighting of the instrument panel ...... 144 touchscreen ...... 175 Lights ...... 31, 139 USB ...... 195 K additional brake light ...... 98 Vehicle menu ...... 208 Key-operated switch ...... 78 AUTO ...... 139 verification boxes ...... 175 Key by remote control changing bulbs ...... 93 Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) ...... 189 unlocking and locking ...... 125 coming home ...... 141 WLAN ...... 188 Keyless-Entry control and warning lamps ...... 139 WLAN audio ...... 197 see Keyless Access ...... 130 cornering light ...... 142 Inspection ...... 318, 333 Keyless-Exit daytime running lights ...... 140 Inspection service ...... 318 see Keyless Access ...... 130 fog lights ...... 140 Instrument panel ...... 103, 104 Keyless Access interior light and front reading lights ...... 98 control and warning lamps ...... 118 Keyless-Entry ...... 130 interior lights ...... 144 display ...... 103, 104 Keyless-Exit ...... 130 leaving home ...... 141 display indications ...... 106 Press & Drive ...... 220 lighting of instruments ...... 144 instructions shown on the screen ...... 107 special characteristics ...... 132 lighting of the controls ...... 144 instruments ...... 103, 104 starting the engine ...... 222 lights range control ...... 143 service interval indication ...... 115 unlocking and locking the vehicle ...... 130 light switch ...... 139 structure of the menus ...... 107 Keyless Access locking and ignition system luggage compartment light ...... 98 use with the multifunction steering wheel . . 118 see Keyless Access ...... 130 main beam lever ...... 140 use with the windscreen wiper lever ...... 117 Keys main beams ...... 32 Instrument panel display ...... 104, 106 replacing the battery ...... 126 motorway light ...... 142 Instruments ...... 104 spare key ...... 125 number plate light ...... 97 Interference from a mobile telephone ...... 174 synchronise ...... 127 parking lights ...... 140 Interior bulbs ...... 98 unlocking and locking ...... 15, 125 reading lights ...... 144 Interior lights ...... 33 vehicle key ...... 125 turn signal lever ...... 140 Interior mirror ...... 146 Kick-down Lights range control ...... 143 anti-dazzle ...... 146 automatic gearbox ...... 237 Light switch ...... 31 Interior view ...... 14 manual gearbox ...... 276 Load compartment in the luggage compart- ISOFIX ...... 27, 29 ment ISOFIX system ...... 27 L see Loading the luggage compartment . . . 155 Loading the luggage compartment ...... 155 ISOFIX System ...... 29 Launch control (automatic gearbox) ...... 238 Loading the vehicle Leaving Home ...... 141 fastening rings ...... 157 J Leaving Home Function ...... 141 luggage compartment ...... 16 Jack ...... 53 Lifting the vehicle ...... 55 mounting points ...... 55 roof carrier system ...... 160 362 Index

Locking and unlocking Media main menu ...... 199 in the door cylinder ...... 15 changing the Media source ...... 193 messages and symbols ...... 199 with Keyless Access ...... 130 copyright ...... 192 my destinations ...... 202 with the central lock button ...... 129 main menu ...... 192 navigation announcements ...... 201 Locking the front passenger door manually . . . 16 messages and symbols ...... 193 Navigation with images ...... 207 Luggage ...... 155 playback sources ...... 194 points of interest (POI) ...... 203 Luggage compartment ...... 16, 155 playing modes ...... 192 predictive navigation ...... 206 luggage compartment light ...... 144 Memory card ...... 194 route ...... 201 luggage compartment variable floor ...... 158 MirrorLink ...... 184 select the destination on the map ...... 200 manual release mechanism ...... 17 Mobile ...... 307 split screen ...... 204 stowing the shelf ...... 156 Mobile signal amplifier ...... 215 traffic reports (TRAFFIC) ...... 206 see also Loading the luggage compart- Mobile telephones ...... 307 Navigation announcements ...... 201 ment ...... 155 Motor Noises Luggage compartment floor ...... 158 Start-Stop system ...... 248 adaptive cruise control ...... 260 Luggage compartment shelf Multi-collision Brake ...... 231 refuelling natural gas ...... 310 stowing ...... 156 Multi-function steering wheel tyres ...... 57, 326 Luggage compartment variable floor ...... 158 without voice control ...... 123 Number of seats ...... 69 with voice control ...... 120 M Multifunction indicator ...... 108 O Main beam lever ...... 140 Multifunction steering wheel ...... 119 Octane rating (petrol) ...... 311 Maintenance Multimedia ...... 214 Odometer ...... 104 see Service ...... 333 My Beat ...... 223 total ...... 103, 104 Maintenance intervals ...... 318 trip recorder ...... 103, 104 Malfunction N Oil change ...... 319 adaptive cruise control ...... 260 Natural gas ...... 312 Oil properties ...... 46 catalytic converter ...... 246 fuel gauge ...... 114 One-touch opening and closing clutch ...... 240 fuel tank cap ...... 309 electric windows ...... 138 emergency braking assistance system LNG ...... 310 Opening ...... 125 (Front Assist) ...... 257 refuelling ...... 309, 312 bonnet ...... 17 gearbox ...... 240 smell ...... 313 fuel tank flap ...... 309 particulate filter ...... 246 special features ...... 310 the fuel tank flap ...... 308 Manual air conditioning ...... 166 Navigation ...... 198 windows ...... 136 Manual gearbox ...... 232 change view ...... 204 Opening and closing ...... 125 entering the destination ...... 200 bonnet ...... 17 importing vCards ...... 207 by remote control ...... 125 363 Index

fuel cap ...... 46 driving with a trailer ...... 289 Preheating system fuel tank flap ...... 309 malfunction ...... 289, 292 control lamp ...... 245 in the door cylinder ...... 15 rear parking aid ...... 290 Preheating the engine ...... 222 in the lock cylinder ...... 15 sensors and camera: cleaning ...... 338 Press & Drive rear lid ...... 16, 136 towing bracket ...... 292 starter button ...... 220 windows ...... 136 visual indication ...... 288, 291 starting the engine ...... 222 with the central lock button ...... 129 Parking aid system Products for vehicle maintenance ...... 336 Operating malfunction see Parking aid ...... 284, 286, 290 Puncture Park Assist ...... 276 Parking assistance action ...... 52 Original SEAT Spare Parts ...... 335 parking system plus ...... 286 Outside temperature see Park Assist ...... 276 R display ...... 106 surroundings warning ...... 286 Radar sensor ...... 257, 261 Overview Parking assistant (RCTA) ...... 269, 273 Radio of the structure of the menus ...... 107 control lamp ...... 269 changing frequencies ...... 190 Parking distance warning system information and symbols ...... 190 P see Parking aid ...... 284, 286, 290 main menu ...... 190 Park Assist ...... 276 Parking (automatic gearbox) ...... 236 memorise station logos ...... 191 automatic braking intervention ...... 284 ParkPilot memory buttons ...... 191 automatic interruption ...... 277 see Parking aid ...... 284, 286, 290 Radio DISPLAY: clean ...... 339 conditions for exiting a parking space . . . . . 283 Particulate filter Radio transmitters ...... 307 exiting a parking space (only for parallel malfunction ...... 246 Raising the vehicle ...... 55 spaces) ...... 283 Parts ...... 307 RCTA ...... 273 operating malfunction ...... 276 Passenger see Parking assistant (RCTA) ...... 269 parallel parking ...... 281 see Correct sitting position ...... 64, 65, 66 Rear Assist ...... 292 parking conditions ...... 281 Passenger-side instrument panel instructions for use ...... 293 perpendicular parking ...... 281 left-hand drive ...... 11 parking ...... 294 see Park Assist ...... 276 right-hand drive ...... 12 screen ...... 293 stopping prematurely ...... 277 Pedals ...... 68 special characteristics ...... 293 Parking ...... 225, 237 Petrol ...... 311 Rear Assist system ...... 292 with Park Assist ...... 281 Pollution filter ...... 161 Rear bulbs in the side panel Parking aid Positioning seat belts disassemble the rear light ...... 96 adjusting the display and audible warn- during pregnancy ...... 73 Rear fog light ings ...... 288, 291 seat belts ...... 73 control lamp ...... 139 automatic activation ...... 287 Power-assisted steering ...... 241 Rear lid ...... 16, 17, 136 braking while manoeuvring ...... 289 Power steering ...... 241 364 Index

Rear lights in the rear lid Roof carrier ...... 159 Saving fuel disassemble the bulb holder ...... 97 Roof carrier system ...... 159 inertia mode ...... 239 Rear parking aid ...... 290 Roof load ...... 160 Seat Rear seat technical data ...... 160 heating ...... 150 folding down the backrest ...... 151 Roof luggage rack removable covers ...... 151 Rear seat passengers attach the cross bars ...... 159 Seat belt position see Correct sitting position ...... 64, 65, 66 Roof rack ...... 159 for pregnant women ...... 19 Rear View Camera ...... 292 Rotary knobs ...... 174 seat belts ...... 19 Rear view mirror ...... 146 Running in Seat belts ...... 69 Rear window wiper blades brake pads ...... 243 adjustment ...... 19, 72 changing ...... 62 engine ...... 242 control lamp ...... 69 cleaning ...... 62 new tyres ...... 325 protective function ...... 70 Refuel tyres ...... 243 purpose ...... 69, 74 control lamp ...... 113 safety instructions ...... 70 fuel gauge ...... 113 S unfastened ...... 71 Refuelling ...... 308 Safe ...... 128 Seat belt tensioners ...... 20, 73 gas gauge ...... 114 SAFE ...... 219 SEAT Digital Cockpit ...... 104 natural gas ...... 309 Safe driving ...... 63 information profiles ...... 104 opening the fuel tank flap ...... 308 Safe Security system ...... 128 SEAT Drive Profile ...... 274 petrol additives ...... 311 Safety Seat heating ...... 150 Remote control ...... 125 child safety ...... 80 SEAT Media Control ...... 187 Removing and attaching head restraints . . . . 149 child seats ...... 80 data transmission and control functions . . . 187 Repair work ...... 307 deactivating the front passenger airbag . . . . 22 SEAT Service Mobility ...... 335 Replacement safe driving ...... 63 Selective catalytic reduction parts ...... 307 Safety equipment ...... 63 see Exhaust purification system (diesel) . . . 313 Replacement keys ...... 125 Safety instructions Selective opening ...... 128 Replacement parts ...... 307 belt tensioners ...... 74 Selector lever lock ...... 234 Replacing the battery front airbags ...... 76 Selector lever (automatic gearbox) of the vehicle key ...... 126 head-protection airbags ...... 23 malfunction ...... 234 Reverse gear (automatic gearbox) ...... 233 side airbags ...... 77 manual release mechanism ...... 40 Revolution counter ...... 103, 104, 112 use of seat belts ...... 70 positions ...... 233 Rims using child seats ...... 24, 81 Service changing a wheel ...... 53 Safety recommendations conditions of use ...... 334 Roll-back function coolant temperature ...... 320 digital maintenance plan ...... 333 windows ...... 137 fixed service ...... 333 365 Index

flexible service ...... 333 Speed warning ...... 109 Switch-off delay (Infotainment system) ...... 174 oil change service ...... 333 Sport Mode ...... 228 Switching off the engine ...... 219 service ...... 333 Stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trailer .304 Switching off the lights ...... 139 Service proof ...... 333 Start-Stop ...... 248 Switching on the lights ...... 139 services ...... 333 Start-Stop system Switching the ignition on and off ...... 31, 217 servicing ...... 333 operation ...... 248 sets of services ...... 335 switching off and on ...... 250 T Service interval indicator ...... 108 switch the engine off and on ...... 248 Technical data Service intervals ...... 115 Start-Stop System roof load ...... 160 Service intervals display ...... 334 driver instructions ...... 248 Technical modifications ...... 307 Service Menu lamps ...... 248 Technical specifications ...... 346 identifying letters on the engine ...... 108 the engine does not switch off ...... 248 Telephone restart oil service ...... 108 the engine starts by itself ...... 248 Bluetooth® profiles ...... 210 restart Trip ...... 108 Starter button ...... 220 call lists ...... 214 service interval indicator ...... 108 Starting the engine ...... 217, 218 display and symbols ...... 213 time ...... 108 after the fuel tank has run dry ...... 219 enter telephone number ...... 213 Service warning: check ...... 116 diesel ...... 218 general information ...... 209 Set petrol ...... 217 main menu ...... 212 time ...... 111 Starting the vehicle ...... 31 pairing a mobile phone ...... 211 Side airbags Steering ...... 65, 241 places with special regulations ...... 210 description ...... 22 control lamp ...... 242 Temperature display safety instructions ...... 77 power-assisted steering ...... 241 of the engine coolant ...... 114 Signal lever ...... 32 steering column lock ...... 241 Temporary spare wheel ...... 330 Smell of gas ...... 313 Steering wheel Tightening torque Snow chains ...... 57 adjustment ...... 20 wheel bolts ...... 56 Spanner symbol ...... 115 gear shift paddles (automatic gearbox) . . . 236 Tightening torque of wheel bolts ...... 348 Spare wheel ...... 330 Steering wheel height adjustment ...... 65 Time Special characteristics Storage compartments ...... 153 adjust ...... 108 tow-starting ...... 88 of front door panel ...... 153 set ...... 111 Special features on the front passenger side ...... 153 Tiptronic (automatic gearbox) ...... 233, 236 Lowering the volume ...... 174 right front seat ...... 153 Top Tether ...... 27, 30 Speed limiter ...... 252 storage pocket in the seat ...... 153 Top Tether system ...... 27, 30 control lamp ...... 252 Sun visors ...... 145 Tow-starting ...... 59, 87 display indications ...... 252 Switch Tow-starting the engine ...... 88 operate ...... 253 hazard warning lights ...... 143 366 Index

Towing Transporting items U blind spot detector (BSD) ...... 274 fastening rings ...... 157 Unfastening your seat belt ...... 72 special characteristics ...... 274 roof carrier ...... 159 Unfasten the seat belt ...... 19 Towing a trailer ...... 300 roof carrier system ...... 159 Unlocking and locking Towing bracket Transporting objects by remote control ...... 125 retrofitting ...... 305 roof carrier system ...... 160 with Keyless Access ...... 130 Towing bracket device ...... 295 Travel data ...... 108 with the central lock button ...... 129 ball coupling ...... 302 Travel data indicator ...... 108 Unlocking manually description ...... 296 Trip odometer ...... 108 rear lid ...... 17 operation and care ...... 300 Turn signal lever ...... 140 USB ...... 214 Towing the vehicle ...... 58, 87 Turn signals connecting an external data storage de- Towline anchorages ...... 58 control lamp ...... 141 vice ...... 195 rear ...... 89 Tyre Mobility Set ...... 52 USB/AUX-IN Port ...... 214 Tow rope ...... 301 components ...... 86 Traction control ...... 226 inflating a tyre ...... 86 Traction control system ...... 227, 228 sealing a tyre ...... 86 V control lamp ...... 227 Tyre Mobility System Vanity mirror ...... 145 Trailer ...... 295 see Anti-puncture kit ...... 85 Vehicle connecting ...... 301, 303 Tyre pressure ...... 327, 348 data label ...... 346 driving with a trailer ...... 303 Tyre profile ...... 327 identification data ...... 346 electrical socket ...... 302 Tyre repair ...... 85 identification number ...... 346 hitching ...... 301 Tyre repair kit raising ...... 55 mode ...... 347 see Anti-puncture kit ...... 85 unlocking and locking with Keyless Access . 130 parking aid ...... 289, 292 Tyres ...... 325 vehicle identification number ...... 346 rear lights ...... 301 accessories ...... 326 Vehicle battery ...... 49, 323 safety lug ...... 303 changing ...... 53 assisted starting ...... 59 stabilisation of the towing vehicle and trail- new tyres ...... 328 changing ...... 324 er ...... 304 pressure ...... 326, 327, 329 charging ...... 324 tow rope ...... 301 service life ...... 327 connecting and disconnecting ...... 323 Trailer turn signals wear indicators ...... 327 disconnect and connect ...... 116 control lamp ...... 141 with directional tread ...... 57 electrolyte level ...... 324 Trailer weight ...... 347 with directional tread pattern ...... 326 winter conditions ...... 323 Transporting children ...... 80 Tyre tread depth ...... 327 Vehicle care Tyre wear ...... 327 windscreen wipers service position ...... 61 Vehicle data ...... 353 367 Index

Vehicle documentation compartment ...... 153 new wheels ...... 328 X Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow sys- removing and fitting ...... 56 XDS ...... 231 tem ...... 135 snow chains ...... 57 activation ...... 135 Wheel trim Vehicle maintenance ...... 336 removing ...... 54 Vehicle paint Windows maintenance ...... 338 electric ...... 18, 136 Vehicle seats ...... 69 Window wiper ...... 145 vehicle tools ...... 53 Window wiper blade ...... 33 Vehicle tools Windscreen and rear window wiper blades . . . 87 housing ...... 84 Windscreen defrosting ...... 165 Ventilation ...... 165 Windscreen washer ...... 48, 145 Ventilation slits ...... 156 Windscreen washer water checking ...... 322 W filling amounts ...... 322 Warning lamps topping up ...... 322 engine coolant ...... 114 Windscreen wiper blades Warning symbols ...... 118 service position ...... 61 see also Control and warning lamps ...... 118 Windscreen wipers ...... 33, 145 Warning triangle ...... 143 cleaning ...... 338 Warranty ...... 336 lifting the wiper blade ...... 61 Washing the vehicle replacing the wiper blade ...... 61 external vehicle maintenance ...... 336 service position ...... 61 high pressure cleaners ...... 336 Winter conditions sensors ...... 276 battery ...... 323 Weights ...... 347 diesel ...... 312 What negatively affects driving safety? ...... 63 snow chains ...... 57 Wheel balance ...... 327 tyres ...... 331 Wheel bolts ...... 54, 348 Winter tyres anti-theft ...... 54 sizes ...... 331 caps ...... 54 Wireless Charger ...... 215 tightening torque ...... 56, 329 Wireless charging ...... 215 Wheels ...... 325, 348 WLAN ...... 188 central wheel trim ...... 53 connecting an external audio source ...... 197 changing ...... 53 368 Vehicle identification data Confirmation of receipt of documentation and vehicle keys Model: The following items were delivered YES NO with the vehicle: Vehicle Registration: On-board documentation Vehicle identification number: First key

Date of vehicle registration Second key or vehicle delivery: Correct working order of all keys was checked SEAT Official Service: Location:

This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose. Telephone: ❀ © SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.18 6F9012720BD

Owner’s manual

Arona Inglés (11.18) SEAT Arona

6F9012720BD (11.18)

Inglés SEAT